Design & Built Environment Volume II - bau.edu.lb Files/Architecture... · RIBA Procedures for Validation and Validation Criteria for UK and International Courses and Examinations

Beirut Arab University Handbook Faculty of Architecture Academic Year 2017/2018 Design & Built Environment

1

Volume II

Table of Contents

I. Architecture ............................................................................................................................................... 3

Architecture: An Overview ................................................................................................................................. 3

The Role of Architecture ..................................................................................................................................... 3

Aim and Objectives ............................................................................................................................................. 3

Career Opportunities for Architects ................................................................................................................... 3

Admission Requirements: ................................................................................................................................... 4

Degrees Offered ................................................................................................................................................. 4

Graduation Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 4

Program Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO’s) ................................................................................................... 4

Program Planning Sheet ..................................................................................................................................... 8

Course Coding and Prerequisites ...................................................................................................................... 26

Architecture Academic Program Sheet ............................................................................................................ 28

II. Interior Design Program ........................................................................................................................... 29

Mission.............................................................................................................................................................. 29

Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................... 29

Career Opportunities for Interior Design .......................................................................................................... 29

Admission Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 29

Degrees Offered ............................................................................................................................................... 29

Graduation Requirements ................................................................................................................................ 30

Program Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO’s) ................................................................................................. 30

Program Planning Sheet ................................................................................................................................... 31


Interior Design Program Academic Program Sheet .......................................................................................... 43

III. Graphic Design Program ........................................................................................................................... 44

Mission.............................................................................................................................................................. 44

Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................... 44

Career Opportunities for Interior Design .......................................................................................................... 44


Degrees Offered ............................................................................................................................................... 44





Graphic Design Program Academic Program Sheet .......................................................................................... 57

IV. Fashion Design Program ........................................................................................................................... 58

Mission.............................................................................................................................................................. 58


2

Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................... 58

Career Opportunities for Fashion Designers .................................................................................................... 58


Degrees Offered ............................................................................................................................................... 58





Fashion Design Program Academic Program Sheet .......................................................................................... 72

V. Course File Summary ................................................................................................................................ 73

Architecture ...................................................................................................................................................... 74

Interior Design Program Course Summary ..................................................................................................... 302

Graphic Design Program Course Summary ..................................................................................................... 376

Fashion Design Program Course Summary ..................................................................................................... 421


3

I. Architecture

Architecture: An Overview

The Faculty of Architecture – Design & Built Environment is committed is to foster a challenging learning environment and to continually compete as well as lead advances in architectural education, in order to prepare innovative, critical and industrious graduates able to improve, through their future careers, the quality of the built environment.

The Role of Architecture

Consistent with the University strategy, the Faculty of Architecture – Design & Built Environment is committed to delivering a professional architectural education necessary for those seeking to enter the architectural practice. The Faculty's academic mission is to further develop the discipline and practice of architecture through a seamless program of undergraduate and postgraduate studies respecting individualism and diversity, and fostering for creativity and rationalism in design and construction process. The Faculty seeks to educate diligent architects who practice their career in a responsive manner towards the society, culture and environment at the local, regional and international level.

Aim and Objectives

The Faculty of Architecture – Design and Built Environment at Beirut Arab University (BAU) has an international position and identity, sited in a distinguished Campus located in Debbieh – Mount Lebanon. The Faculty is one of the largest and oldest schools of Architecture in Lebanon. Our aim is to assert our position as one of the regional leading schools of Architecture. The school attracts a high number of applicants from regional countries and has an increasing number of overseas students. Courses are offered by the faculty and the applied teaching methodology sets BAU faculty of Architecture – Design and Built Environment apart from other universities in the area. Firstly, the Faculty incorporates engineering courses which are not offered in any architecture program in Lebanon. It is believed that architecture should be taught along with relevant subjects in the Engineering field since both disciplines are strongly interrelated when it comes to practice. Hence, the students’ exposure to such engineering subjects serves as a good background to their own practice of architectural design. The second feature is the student centred learning approach in the teaching process. Students are required to study assigned topics and they are given the chance to teach and lecture their classmates, which helps in enhancing students’ independence. They are capable of reading new material that has not been taught to them by the professor, take notes and lecture their classmates, which help in enhancing students’ communication and critical thinking skills.

Career Opportunities for Architects

Given the evolving nature of the profession, and the rapidly changing conditions in which architects currently practice, the traditional expertise, capacities and authority are increasingly being challenged. A new complexity is operating and altering both the traditional institutional structure and their delivery systems. Modern professional practice seems to require additional training and emphasis on specific domains, in order to effectively and responsibly address the profession’s development and evolving needs. Faculty graduates are prepared for careers as practicing architects either in the private sector or in public agencies. Graduates are well trained to carry out multiple architectural tasks from architectural programming to project execution, from encountering users and environmental constraints to the development of a coordinated set of construction documents. They are also qualified to pursue further studies at the postgraduate level in prestigious universities overseas. The Bachelor of Architectural Engineering at BAU is approved by the Ministry of Education and Higher Education in Lebanon, and accredited by the Royal Institute of British Architects. This enables the Faculty graduates to work toward professional registration as architects, and to become members of the Orders of Engineers and Architects in Lebanon upon graduation. Most of the Bachelor degree graduates pursue careers in architectural practice where work require expertise in several fields including: Residential design, Public buildings, Building and environmental technology, Interior design and fabrication, urban design, Historic restoration and adaptation, Project management, and Real estate development.


4

Graduates may practice in diverse settings, including: Private architecture consultancy and / or contracting office, Small and medium-sized architectural firms, Corporations with branches around the world, Government and public institutions, Companies with large real estate holdings

Admission Requirements:

To be accepted for an undergraduate degree, applicants must:

Hold the official Lebanese Secondary School Certificate in a branch relevant to the chosen undergraduate field of specialization, or an official equivalent;

Successfully pass an entrance exam to measure the level of proficiency in English Language (or provide evidence of English Language abilities such as TOEFL, ILETS.

All applicants are required to attend a written exam an Interview / Oral Exam and submit a portfolio.

Degrees Offered

The faculty offers a Bachelor of Architectural Engineering Degree (BArch. Eng.) where the standard duration of study is 10 semesters, and a Master in Architectural Engineering Degree (MArch. Eng.) where the standard duration of study is 2 semesters.

Graduation Requirements

The Bachelor in Architecture degree (BArch.) requirements consist of a total of 170 credit hours taken as follows: 1. The completion of 170 credit hours within a minimum period of 5 years (10 Semesters) and not

exceeding 10 years.

2. Within the 170 credit hours, students must fulfill:

o 136 credit hours for Mandatory Courses.

o 22 credit hours for Elective Courses:

4 credit hours for 200’s Level Courses




o 12 credit hours for University Courses:

5 credit hours for University Mandatory Courses (Arabic Language – 2Crs., English Language –

2Crs., and Human Rights – 1Cr.).

7 credit hours for University Elective Courses (selected from a list of courses offered by the

various faculties of the university).

3. Student must also fulfill the university requirements by earning the ICDL certificate within the first four

semesters of his/her study (applied on first and second year students).

4. The final CGPA grade must be at least 2.00 in order to attain the relevant academic degree. Otherwise,

students must repeat one or more courses to get their CGPA up to at least 2.00.

The Master in Architecture degree (MArch.) requirements consist of a total of 28 credit hours taken as follows: 1. Mandatory Courses: 24 Cr. 2. Faculty Elective Courses: 4 Cr. (600’s Level Courses)

Program Intended Learning Outcomes (ILO’s)

For the past twelve months, the architectural program has been reviewed and developed in response to the guidance given through RIBA reports and exchanged communication. The Faculty has actively reviewed the entire range of modules, their contents, delivery methods and intended learning outcomes. This effort has been carried out with a view to ensure full compliance with the RIBA General Attributes (GAs) and General Criteria (GCs) both for Part 1 and for Part 2. The following is a concise overview of the outcome. The contents are presented and categorized under four sections as follows: A- Knowledge and Understanding, B- Cognitive (Intellectual or Thinking) Skills, C- Practical (Professional or


5

Subject) Skills, and D- Transferable (Graduate and Employability) Skills; as commonly adopted by a wide range of academic institutions internationally. The final section of this report consists of an overall mapping of ILOs across modules and the six sequential levels of the academic programme. This process has been guided and informed by the following references and resources:

1. QAA Quality Code for Higher Education Part A- Setting and Maintaining Academic Standards.

2. QAA Quality Code for Higher Education Part B- Assuring and Enhancing Academic Quality.

3. Prescription of qualifications: ARB Criteria at Parts 1, 2 and 3.

4. RIBA Procedures for Validation and Validation Criteria for UK and International Courses and Examinations

in Architecture (Second Revision 2 May 2014).

5. BAU Guidelines for Effective Student Assessment.

6. BAU General Guidelines for Quality Assurance

7. National Qualifications Framework of Lebanese Ministry of Education and Higher Education

A. Knowledge and Understanding Design

ILO’S

CODE ILO’S DESCRIPTION

CONTRIBUTION TO RIBA

CRITERIA

A1 Recognize the theories of urban planning and design. GC4.1

A2 Identify the needs and objectives of building users, principles of sustainability related to architectural design and environmental impact, and the relation between buildings and their context.

GC5.1 GC5.2 GC5.3

A3

Define the requirements to assess examples relevant to functional, formal, and technological approaches of design proposals; recall the need to consider and prepare diversified building briefs, to outline requirements and the appropriateness of the intervention related to site and context; recognize the methods of investigation for the preparation of briefs and the contribution of architects and co-professionals required.

GC7.1 GC7.2 GC7.3

A4 Review the role of the architect in the construction industry and the professional qualities needed for decision making in circumstances that are complex and unpredictable.

GC1.2 GC6.2

Technology

ILO’S



CRITERIA

A5

Demonstrate ability of investigation and appraisal in the selection of alternative structural, constructional and material systems relevant to architectural design; define strategies for building construction and showing ability to integrate knowledge of structural principles and construction techniques; recognise characteristics and physical properties of building materials, components, systems, and their environmental impact.

GC8.1 GC8.2 GC8.3

A6 Recall environmental principles related to visual, thermal and acoustic in design, in addition to systems related to sustainable design.

GC9.1 GC9.2

Cultural Context

ILO’S



CRITERIA

A7 Recognise cultural, social and intellectual histories, theories and technologies that inspire architectural design, and associate the

GC2.1 GC2.2


6

influence of history and theory to the social, spatial, and technological aspects of architecture.

A8 Identify how the theories, applications and technologies of the arts affect architectural design, and recognize the fine arts creative application relevance and impact in architecture.

GC3.1 GC3.2

A9 Review the influence of the design on the past and contemporary built city environments.

GC4.2

Professional Studies

ILO’S



CRITERIA

A10 Recognize the current planning policy and development regulations including social, environmental and economic aspects, and their relevance to the design development.

GC4.3

A11

Recognise the principles of professionalism, duties and responsibilities of architects towards clients, building users, constructors, co-professionals and the wider society; appraise the role of the architect within the design team and construction industry, recognising the importance of current methods and trends in the construction of the built environment; identify the potential impact of building projects on existing and proposed communities.

GC6.1 GC6.2 GC6.3

A12

Identify the fundamental responsibilities of the architect in relation to regulations and procedures for approval of architectural designs; contractual and organisational procedures based on professional inter-relationships involved in the procurement and delivering architectural projects.

GC11.1 GC11.2

A13 Extend awareness of the basic management theories and business principles related to running practice and projects, recognising current and emerging trends in the construction industry.

GC11.3

B. Cognitive (Intellectual or Thinking) Skills

ILO’S



CRITERIA

B1 Evaluate evidence, arguments and assumptions in order to make and present sound judgments within a structured discourse relating to architectural culture, theory and design.

GC1.3 GC2.3 GC3.2

B2 Analyse problems, and use innovation, logical and lateral thinking in their solution. Be flexible and adaptable in the approach to and development of an issue, problem or opportunity.

GC7.2 GC7.3 GC8.1

GC10.1

C. Practical (Professional or Subject) Skills Design

ILO’S



CRITERIA

C1 Generate design proposals using logic based on knowledge, academic architectural principles, and contemporary professional practice.

GC1.1

C2

Prepare and present building design projects of diverse scale, complexity, and type in a variety of contexts, using a range of media, and in response to a brief; develop a conceptual and critical approach to architectural design that integrating proper aesthetic aspects and the technical requirements, and functional needs.

GC1.1 GC1.3

C3 Demonstrate a reflective and critical approach in the application of appropriate theoretical concepts to studio design projects.

GC2.3


7

C4 Device creative application of the fine arts in the conceptualisation and representation of the studio design projects.

GC3.3

Technology

ILO’S



CRITERIA

C5

Explore and employ constructional and structural systems, environmental strategies and regulatory requirements that apply to the design and construction of a comprehensive design project; examine the use of alternative materials, processes and techniques that apply to architectural design and building construction.

GC1.2 GC1.3

C6 Develop strategies for building services, showing ability to apply them in the design project integration.

GC9.3

Communication Skills

ILO’S



CRITERIA

C7 Apply the principles of architectural representation to two and three-dimensional illustration and to computer and physical models.

GC1.1 GC3.3

Professional Skills

ILO’S



CRITERIA

C8

Examine critically the financial factors implied in a series of building types, constructional systems, and specification choices, and their effect on architectural design; apply cost control mechanisms related to project development.

GC10.1 GC10.2

C9 Prepare designs that will comply with users' requirements and regulations, abiding by standards and health and safety requirements.

GC10.3

D. Transferable (Graduate and Employability) Skills

ILO’S



CRITERIA

D1 Work autonomously in a self-directed manner, managing and appraising working practices for the development of a reflective practitioner and an independent learner.

D2 Work in teams and manage teamwork.

D3 Apply a variety of communication methods to present design proposals using clear and effective approaches.

D4 Identify needs for individual learning and understand duties and requirements for further professional education.


8

Program Planning Sheet

Bachelor of Architecture (170 Credit Hours)

Semester One Cr

ARCH 271* Architectural Design Fundamentals: Visual Studies 6

ARCH 273* Building Construction I 2

ARCH 275 History of Architecture I 2

ARCH 277 CAD Drawing 2

ARCH 279 Architectural Sketching 2

Elective (General)1 2


Total 18

Semester Two Cr

ARCH 272* Architectural Design Fundamentals: Physical Studies 5

ARCH 274* Building Construction II 3

ARCH 276 Theory of Architecture I 2

ARCH 278 Computer Graphics 2

ARCH 280 Academic Writing 2



Total 18

Semester Three Cr

ARCH 291* Architectural Design I 5

ARCH 293* Building Construction III 3

ARCH 295 History of Architecture II 2

ARCH 297 Theory of Colors 2

CVEE 231 Theory of Structures for Architects 2


Elective2 2

Total 18

Semester Four Cr

ARCH 292* Architectural Design II 5

ARCH 294* Building Construction IV 3

ARCH 296 Theory of Architecture II 2

ARCH 298 Indoor Environmental Controls 2

CVEE 232 Concrete and Steel Structures 2


Elective2 2

Total 18


9

Semester Five Cr

ARCH 331* Architectural Design III 5

ARCH 333* Execution Design I 3

ARCH 335 History of Architecture III 2

ARCH 338 City and Town Planning 2

MECH 431 HVAC and Sanitation For Architects 2

Elective 3 2

Elective3 2

Total 18

Semester Six Cr

ARCH 332* Architectural Design IV 5

ARCH 334* Execution Design II 3

ARCH 336 Theory of Architecture III 2

ARCH 337 Interior Design 2

ARCH 339 Environmental Design 2

Elective3 2

Elective4 2

Total 18

Semester Seven Cr

ARCH 431* Architectural Design V 5

ARCH 433* Execution Design III 3

ARCH 435 Urban Design 2

ARCH 437 Project Management 2

CVEE 331 Soil Mechanics & Foundations, and Material Properties & Testing 2

Elective4 2

Total 16

Semester Eight Cr

ARCH 432* Architectural Design VI 5

ARCH 434* Execution Design IV 3

ARCH 436 Research and Programming 2

ARCH 438 Specifications and Quantities 2

CVEE 332 Surveying for Architects 2

Elective4 2

Total 16

TOTAL RIBA Part 1 – (Semester 1 to 8) 140


10

Semester Nine Cr

ARCH 537 Architectural Design VII 5

ARCH 539 Graduation Project Programming 3

ARCH 534 Graduation Dissertation 2

ARCH 535 Building Regulations and Professional Practice 2

ARCH 541 Architecture Internship 0

Elective5 2

Elective5 2

Total 16

Semester Ten Cr

ARCH 540 Graduation Project 8

ARCH 533 Architectural Criticism 2

ARCH 536 Design and Building Economics 2

Elective5 2

Total 14

TOTAL BArch. Eng. – (Semester 1 to 10) 170

1 A total of 12 credits is required as General University Requirements; 5 credits are selected from the University Mandatory Courses list including ARAB 001 (2Cr.), ENGL

001 (2Cr.), BLAW 001 (1Cr.) and another 7 credits are selected from the University Elective Courses list. 2 Selected from the list of Faculty Elective Courses offered at the “200 Level”. 3 Selected from the list of Faculty Elective Courses offered at the “300 Level”.

4 Selected from the list of Faculty Elective Courses offered at the at the “400 Level”. 5 Selected from the list of Faculty Elective Courses offered at the “500 Level”.

* These core modules are separated and independently graded courses. Students failing the first module (Fall Sem.) are not allowed to register in the second one (Spring Sem.).


11

Level One

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g H

ou

rs

Exam

D

ura

tio

n

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Se Hr T W O

ARCH271

Architectural Design Fundamentals: Visual Studies *

- 6 2 8 - 6 70 30 - 100

ARCH273 Building Construction I * - 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH275 History of Architecture I - 2 2 - - 2 70 40 - 100

ARCH277 CAD Drawing - 2 1 - 2 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH279 Architectural Sketching - 2 - 4 - 2 70 30 - 100

University General Elective - 2 - - - 2 60 40 - 100


TOTAL CREDIT HOURS 18

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g

Ho

urs

Exam

D

ura

tio

n

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Se Hr T W O

ARCH272

Architectural Design Fundamentals: Physical Studies *

ARCH271 5 - 10 - 6 70 30 - 100

ARCH274 Building Construction II * ARCH273 3 1 4 - 4 70 30 - 100

ARCH276 Theory of Architecture I - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH278 Computer Graphics ARCH277 2 1 - 2 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH280 Academic Writing - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100




L: LECTURE St: STUDIO

Se: SECTION T: TUTORIAL WORK W: WRITTEN EXAM

O: ORAL EXAM

* These core modules are separated and independently graded courses. Students failing the first module (Fall Sem.) are not allowed to register in the second one (Spring Sem)

Semester One

Semester Two


12

Level Two

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g H

ou

rs

Exam

Du

rati

on

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Se Hr T W O

ARCH291 Architectural Design I * ARCH272 5 - 10 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH293 Building Construction III * ARCH274 3 1 - 4 - 60 - 40 100

ARCH295 History of Architecture II - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH297 Theory of Colors - 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

CVEE231 Theory of Structures for Architects

- 2 1 - 2 2 70 30 - 100


200 Level Faculty Elective - 2 - - - 2 60/70 40/30 - 100


Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g

Ho

urs

Exam

D

ura

tio

n

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Se Hr T W O

ARCH292 Architectural Design II * ARCH291 5 - 10 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH294 Building Construction IV * ARCH293 3 1 4 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH296 Theory of Architecture II - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH298 Indoor Environmental Controls - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

CVEE232 Concrete and Steel Structures - 2 1 - 2 2 70 30 - 100






O: ORAL EXAM

* These core modules are separated and independently graded courses. Students failing the first module (Fall Sem.) are not allowed to register in the second one (Spring Sem)

Semester Three

Semester Four


13

Level Three

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g

Ho

urs

Exam

D

ura

tio

n

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Se Hr T W O

ARCH331 Architectural Design III * ARCH292 5 - 10 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH333 Execution Design I * ARCH294 3 1 4 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH335 History of Architecture III - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH338 City and Town Planning - 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

MECH431 HVAC and Sanitation for Architects

- 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100




Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g

Ho

urs

Exam

D

ura

tio

n

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Se Hr T W O

ARCH332 Architectural Design IV * ARCH331 5 - 10 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH334 Execution Design II * ARCH333 3 1 4 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH336 Theory of Architecture III - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH337 Interior Design - 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH339 Environmental Design - 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100






O: ORAL EXAM

* These core modules are separated and independently graded courses. Students failing the first module (Fall Sem.) are not allowed to register in the second one (Spring Sem.)

Semester Five

Semester Six


14

Level Four

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g H

ou

rs

Exam

Du

rati

on

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Se Hr T W O

ARCH431 Architectural Design V * ARCH332 5 - 10 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH433 Execution Design III * ARCH334 3 1 4 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH435 Urban Design - 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH437 Project Management - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

CVEE331 Soil Mechanics & Foundations, and Material Properties & Testing

- 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100



Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g H

ou

rs

Exam

D

ura

tio

n

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Se Hr T W O

ARCH432 Architectural Design VI * ARCH431 5 - 10 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH434 Execution Design IV * ARCH433 3 1 4 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH436 Research and Programming - 2 1 2 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH438 Specifications and Quantities - 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

CVEE332 Surveying for Architects - 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100





O: ORAL EXAM

* These core modules are separated and independently graded courses. Students failing the first module (Fall Sem.) are not allowed to register in the second one (Spring Sem.)

Semester Seven

Semester Eight


15

Level Five

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g H

ou

rs

Exam

D

ura

tio

n

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Se Hr T W O

ARCH537 Architectural Design VII ARCH432 5 - 10 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH539 Graduation Project Programming

ARCH432 3 1 4 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH534 Graduation Dissertation - 2 1 2 - 2 60 - 40 100

ARCH535 Building Regulations and Professional Practice

- 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH541 Architecture Internship - 0 - - - - - - - -




Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g H

ou

rs

Exam

Du

rati

on

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Se Hr T W O

ARCH540 Graduation Project ARCH537 ARCH539 ARCH434

8 - 16 - - 60 - 40 100

ARCH533 Architectural Criticism - 2 2 - - - 60 40 - 100

ARCH536 Design and Building Economics

- 2 - - - 2 60 40 - 100





Semester Nine

Semester Ten


16

Courses Description

ARCH271. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS: VISUAL STUDIES (6 CR.: 2LEC, 8STU)

Introductory course including fundamentals of architectural drafting techniques, two dimensional representation, and orthographic projections. Studies of artistic expression and inventive composition. Principles and rules of visual composition. Vocabulary of visual composition, relationships and aesthetics. Experimentation, diverse tools and materials used to visually interpret artwork and design concepts. Practical considerations and applications.

ARCH273. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION I (2 CR.: 1LEC, 2STU)

Introduction to the elements and components of construction, and the basic building construction materials including bricks, masonry, lime, cement, mortar and concrete. Study of structural systems and their major elements: structural frame, exterior and interior bearing walls, nonbearing walls and partitions, and floor and roof assemblies. General fundamentals site preparation, foundation types and selection.

ARCH275. HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE I (2 CR.: 2LEC) Core module of history of art and architecture in various civilizations, including Pre-historic, Ancient Egyptian, Mesopotamian (Assyrian and Babylonian), Greek and Roman. Different approaches to the presentation of history: visual images, cultural material, and text-based communication.

ARCH277. CAD DRAWING (2 CR.: 1LEC, 2LAB) Basic computer aided drafting skills using the latest release of CAD software including: file management, Cartesian coordinate system, drawing set-ups, drawing aids, layer usage, drawing 2D geometric shapes, editing objects, array, text applications, dimensions and dimension variables, paper space and viewports, templates, external references, and printing/plotting. 3D AutoCAD features and commands including: wireframe construction, surface modeling, solid modeling, extrusions, Boolean operations, 3D editing, and 3D views.

ARCH279. ARCHITECTURAL SKETCHING (2 CR.: 0LEC, 4STU) Developing graphic language by which an architect explains buildings and other objects using a range of fundamental drawing skills and media. Exercises in freehand representational drawing using charcoal, graphite, and conte crayon with emphasis on line, proportion, values, and composition. Portfolio of drawings based on observation of the physical world, in particular the built world. Studies progress from geometric to non-geometric forms.

ARCH272. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS: PHYSICAL STUDIES (5 CR.: 0LEC, 10STU)

Series of Exercises leading to the development of manual drawing and delineation skills. Study of human activity, dimensions of human figure and ergonometric as means of designing usable space. Representation of building elements in plans, elevations and sections. Projection techniques for shade shadow construction. 3 Dimensional drawings of building interior and exterior. Applications leading to the understanding of model types, materials and techniques of preparation. Managing different types of models and levels of detailing. Prerequisite: ARCH271.

ARCH274. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION II (3 CR.: 1LEC, 4STU) Further developing knowledge about the fundamentals and preliminary principles of reinforced concrete and steel construction. Review of typical building elements and special treatments within buildings including: structural joints, damp proofing, thermal insulation and fire protection. Prerequisite: ARCH273.

ARCH276. THEORY OF ARCHITECTURE I (2 CR.: 2LEC) Introduction to basic design theories and strategies related to the development of spatial concepts in architectural design, including composition, color, form, relationship of elements, and development of 2-D and 3-D design projects. More emphasis on concept generation and evaluation.

ARCH278. COMPUTER GRAPHICS (2 CR.: 1LEC, 2LAB) Photoshop application for architectural rendering and the creation, modification and manipulation of images. SketchUp modeling for the conceptual phases of design. 3D rendering and animation using AUTODESK 3D Studio software. Emphasis on 3D geometry, texture mapping, lighting, camera placement, shading, photo-realistic rendering,

animation techniques, and walk through animations.

Semester One

Semester Two


17

Prerequisite: ARCH277

ARCH280. ACADEMIC WRITING (2 CR.: 2LEC) Methods and tools needed to prepare academic and professional documents are reviewed. Basic knowledge about various steps, stages, and process of production of complete research papers and technical reports, the principles of writing, standards, requisites, considerations, phases, and subject-related requirements. The final assessment in this course is to be carried out internally (e.g. oral discussion and/or within exam).

ARCH291. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN I (5 CR.: 0LEC, 10STU) Fundamentals of Architectural Design Process. Design projects requiring theoretically informed and practically viable architectural design solutions. Designs in response to specific aims including modular design, architectural space grouping, articulation of spaces and functional relationships. Prerequisite: ARCH272.

ARCH293. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION III (3 CR.: 1LEC, 4STU) Review of various systems of floor, wall, roof, openings, and stairs including the study of structural properties, and construction techniques and materials. Indoor finishing materials and development of finishing schedule. Exercise based class simulating the understanding of construction including analysis and applications of standards, relationships, and material review and selection. Development of construction drawings and detailing. Prerequisite: ARCH274.

ARCH295. HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE II (2 CR.: 2LEC) Study and review of Early Christian architecture, Byzantine architecture, Medieval architecture, Romanesque and Gothic architecture, and Renaissance architecture in Europe through the 15th and 16th Centuries.

ARCH297. THEORY OF COLORS (2 CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Color theories including a variety of concepts, as well as many practical uses of color within architecture. Color Aspects: psychology of visual perception, human response to visual imagery and communication using color. Designer's Methods to develop and best utilize color within environments. Informed application of practical color theory principles to student projects selecting colors wisely and deliberately.

CVEE231. THEORY OF STRUCTURES FOR ARCHITECTS (2 CR.: 1LEC, 2TUT) Theory and concepts of structures to emphasize an intuitive comprehension of the fundamental principles of structural behavior including loading, shear and bending moments. Calculation of internal forces in simple structures such as cantilevers, simple beams, and overhanging beams. Calculation of internal forces in truss members.

ARCH292. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN II (5 CR.: 0LEC, 10STU) Design projects leading to the development of Design Process starting from the site analysis. Detailed knowledge of different aspects of design presented and evaluated both graphically and orally. Portfolio of designs in response to specific aims comprising the study of outer and inner spaces relationship, building and site relationship, and landscaping. Contextual design reflecting environmental, social and cultural imperatives. Prerequisite: ARCH291.

ARCH294. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION IV (3 CR.: 1LEC, 4STU) Materials and techniques for internal and external finishes including internal partitions, wooden openings, façade systems (curtain walls, double skin façade, etc.). Types and details of skylights. Landscape detailing and street furniture. Analysis and applications of standards, material review and selection. Development of construction drawings and detailing. Prerequisite: ARCH293.

ARCH296. THEORY OF ARCHITECTURE II (2 CR.: 2LEC) This course explores the form, space and scale: form defining space, qualities of architectural space, articulation and organization of form and space, circulation elements and building approaches. It investigates the intentions in architecture: design process, architectural concept and unity. It also reviews the principles of aesthetics: vocabulary of architectural compositions, visual and aesthetic relationships. The course includes analysis of design principles and their applications in various architectural examples.

ARCH298. INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS (2 CR.: 2LEC)

Semester Three

Semester Four


18

Principles of lighting (daylight and artificial) in buildings, Reducing noise and enhancing sound for communication. Regulating heat transfer for occupant thermal comfort. Description of passive means for environmental control, including presentation of scientific explanations and design guidelines for utilizing these means. Design guidelines for use in the preliminary schematic design phase.

CVEE232. CONCRETE AND STEEL STRUCTURES (2 CR.: 1LEC, 2TUT) Combined Course addressing two technical fields: Review of concrete and steel structure systems. Reinforced concrete fundamentals reviewing basics of reinforced concrete behavior and introducing methods of design used in current engineering practice. Basic mechanics of structural concrete introduced in examining bending, shear, and axial forces. Topic areas including beams, slabs systems, columns, foundations, retaining walls, and an introduction to pre-stressed concrete. Based on a statics and strength of materials, Review of tension, compression and bending steel members designed into truss or column and beam structural systems.

ARCH331. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN III (5 CR.: 0LEC, 10STU) Design projects leading to the development of architectural concepts. Developmental processes of design are presented and critically evaluated, both graphically and orally. Constructivist design studio emphasizing on structural systems. Portfolio of designs in response to specific aims comprising formal structural and universal space concept. Prerequisite: ARCH292.

ARCH 333. EXECUTION DESIGN I (3CR.: 1LEC, 4STU) Principles of preparing a complete portfolio of architectural tender drawings. Application on a building or project initially designed by the student in ARCH232. Principles of producing integrated portfolio of tender drawings. Analysis and applications of standards, material review and selection. Prerequisite: ARCH294.

ARCH 335. HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE III (2CR.: 2LEC) Overview of Islamic architecture. Roots and early beginnings. Trends and development of Islamic architecture: features and values. Umayyad and Abbasid architecture. Early and classic architecture in North Africa and the Middle East. Evolution of Islamic architecture: Fattimid, Ayyubid, Bahari Mamluk, Circassian Mamluk, and Ottoman architecture.

ARCH 338. CITY AND TOWN PLANNING (2CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Town Planning theories, practices and ideas. Definitions, objectives and levels of Planning. Origins and evolution of historical and contemporary ideas underlining planning practice in its various forms. Relevant topics: land use, housing, human settlements and urban environments. Current challenges and concerns of urban development or planning, aspects of the planning profession.

MECH 431. HVAC AND SANITATION FOR ARCHITECTS (2 CR.: 2LEC) Course addressing two technical fields: HVAC: Introduction to air conditioning and mechanical installations in buildings and indoor spaces. Various heating and cooling systems. Ventilation and air conditioning of various building types. Installations and control of systems. Sanitation: Sanitary engineering issues. Building site selection. Dampness: sources and methods of insulation. Water supply treatment and distribution. Sanitary fixtures, installation and connections. Treatment of soiled water. Rainwater drainage and storm sewers. Biological purification of sewerage. Solid waste and refuse disposal.

ARCH 332. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN IV (5CR.: 0LEC, 10STU) Design studio emphasizing on the urban context as a generator of architecture. Developmental processes of design are presented and critically evaluated, both graphically and orally. Portfolio of designs in response to specific aims comprising advanced study of urban context, development of master plan including design of public spaces and landscaping. Creation of architectural character and identity in the design of spaces and buildings’ complex. Prerequisite: ARCH331.

ARCH 334. EXECUTION DESIGN II (3CR.: 1LEC, 4STU) Preparations of an integrated portfolio of architectural working drawings related to the project assigned to the student in ARCH333. Execution drawings various architectural details (internal and external) interpreting building

Semester Five

Semester Six


19

components relationships. Information relevant to the construction materials, color schemes, execution methods and processes. Prerequisite: ARCH333.

ARCH 336. THEORY OF ARCHITECTURE III (2CR.: 2LEC) The formative aspects of architecture from the Renaissance to the to the present day. Emphasis on new trends and associated activities in the field of architecture. Detailed studies of various periods within broad spectrum. Issues of spatial organization, construction, architectural theory, and architectural grammar. Physical, social and economic context of building. Role of the architect in society.

ARCH 337. INTERIOR DESIGN (2CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Interior design theories covering diverse issues and topics as relevant to indoor environments, components of interior design, considerations, characteristics, and relationship with architectural design, methods and processes, contemporary trends and approaches to interior design, values, interpretation and formulation of concepts.

ARCH339. ENVIRONNEMENTAL DESIGN (2 CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Fundamental theories about environmental sustainability, definitions, concerns and processes. Introduction to building assessment systems including LEED, Green Globes, Green Point Rated, etc. Green building Applications on green building design process and sustainable features such as: water conservation systems; recycling, re-use, waste management, green material selection; and indoor environmental control strategies.

ARCH 431. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN V (5 CR.: 0LEC, 10STU) Projects leading to the development of a Holistic Design Process. Detailed knowledge of a specialist aspect of design presented and critically evaluated, both graphically and orally. Portfolio of designs aiming to develop environmental conscious buildings, study and analyze environmental, social, and economic aspects of sustainability in architecture. Prerequisite: ARCH332.

ARCH 433. EXECUTION DESIGN III (3CR.: 1LEC, 4STU) Development and preparation of complete sets of tender drawings for a building initially designed in ARCH332. Preparation of electro-mechanical working drawings (sanitary, lighting, power supply, and HVAC). Advanced study, analysis and interpretation of composite processes, techniques and treatments. Prerequisite: ARCH334.

ARCH 435. URBAN DESIGN (2CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Contemporary theories of urban design. Urban environments: Keywords and definitions. Modes of critique related to the design of urban public realm. Urban environments: Scope, complexities, and responses to economic, cultural, political, social, aesthetic and natural forces. Urban design issues, methodologies and current practices. Analytical and design skills. Generating and testing alternative approaches of urban design, development of specific sites and role of urban design within particular spatial, social, economic and political contexts. Case studies and assignments in urban design methodologies, synthesis of theoretical knowledge, and communication of urban design ideas.

ARCH437. PROJECT MANAGEMENT (2CR.: 2LEC) Introduction to management principles of architectural projects. Survey of the techniques and procedures of construction management as it relates to architectural design professional practice. Overview of the organization of the building team, the collaborative design process, cost control, project scheduling, purchasing, accounting, and field supervision. Introduction to the concepts of Value Engineering, partnering, and Total Quality Management.

CVEE331. SOIL MECHANICS & FOUNDATIONS, AND MATERIAL PROPERTIES & TESTING (2 CR.: 1LEC, 2TUT) Combined Course addressing two technical fields: Introduction to soil mechanics: Soil formation and soil structure; Soil composition; Grain size analysis; Plasticity of soils; Effective stress concept; shear strength, stress distribution; Bearing capacity of shallow foundation; Theory of consolidation; Settlement; Soil exploration. Foundations: shallow, deep foundations, and pile caps. Introduction to Testing and properties of materials: strength characteristics of building materials and material assemblies; stress and strain; rigidity and deformation; temperature effects; torsion effects; combined loading of elements and systems.

Semester Seven

Semester Eight


20

ARCH 432. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN VI (5CR.: 0LEC, 10STU) A single project demonstrating the student’s readiness and capacity to engage responsibly and creatively in the profession of architecture. Conceptualization and implementation of comprehensive architectural design is drawn upon previous coursework in order to thoroughly develop a project from a detailed program. Portfolio of designs aiming to integrate and synthesize structural and construction assemblies with social, economic and environmental principles of sustainability. Prerequisite: ARCH332.

ARCH 434. EXECUTION DESIGN IV (3CR.: 1LEC, 4STU) Composite drawings illustrating particular execution details of sustainable features considered in a project designed in ARCH431. Preparation of Specification and quantities report for the execution of a part of the project completed in ARCH433. Prerequisite: ARCH433.

ARCH 436. RESEARCH AND PROGRAMMING (2CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Overview of architectural programming and pre-design stages. Review of principals, theories, methods, techniques, and tools of architectural programming. Preparation of a complete document (not less than 10,000 words in length) aiming to develop a comprehensive architectural program for a project, including assessment of client and user needs, a critical review of appropriate examples, an analysis of site conditions, a review of the relevant laws and standards and assessment of their implication on the project, and a definition of site selection and design assessment criteria.

ARCH 438. SPECIFICATIONS AND QUANTITIES (2CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Introduction to quantity surveying. Methods of measurement and calculations. Preparation of comparative tables of prices and bids and their evaluation. Specification writings. General conditions of contract between architect, client and contractor. Specifications for materials and various constructional works and execution procedures. Preparation of contract document for various trades and works for bids.

CVEE332. SURVEYING FOR ARCHITECTS (2 CR.: 1LEC, 2LAB) Technology Discussion of the major topics in surveying engineering technology including field instrumentation, boundary surveying, topographic surveying. Measurement of distances, directions and angles, using the tape, level, compass, transit and theodolit. Computation of areas and traverses, lines and grades. Also, an introduction to construction surveys, and an introduction to GPS measurement.

ARCH537. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN VII (5 CR.: 0LEC, 10STU) Portfolio of designs aiming to study the physical, social, economic, and environmental aspects of urban design, land uses, housing, circulation, densities, and local identity seen from a global perspective.Advanced design problems are approached by applying knowledge and skills acquired from previous design studios. Students are expected to demonstrate technical competencies, knowledge, critical thinking and creative synthesis skills relative to a precise theoretical and practical hypothesis or proposition, communicate intentions and results clearly. Prerequisite: ARCH432.

ARCH539. GRADUATION PROJECT PROGRAMMING (3CR.: 1LEC, 4STU) A research studio-seminar course aiming to develop student independence in defining an Architecture Senior Project. Student must simultaneously address and integrate all aspects of the design/research proposal in a comprehensively developed dissertation. This written document should incorporate research, program development, site definition and analysis of contextual constraints that discusses all design decisions to be considered in the design stage. Prerequisite: ARCH432.

ARCH534. GRADUATION DISSERTATION (2CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) This module provides the student with an opportunity to investigate a specific topic within the realm of architecture (history and theory, technology, environment, architectural design, etc). The student will undertake sustained and in-depth research and present a coherently argued, fully referenced and appropriately illustrated piece of academic writing not less than 10,000 words in length. The module will develop research methods relevant to writing a dissertation, and student's intellectual curiosity and critical thinking relating to the dissertation topic.

ARCH 535. BUILDING REGULATIONS AND PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE (2CR.: 2LEC) Introduction to building legislation and codes. Theoretical and analytical investigation of methods available to architects. Legal, ethical and professional obligations. Clients and other parties affected by both the practice and business of architecture. Overview of construction industry. Office practice including accounting and financial reporting, employment, procurement of buildings, tendering, building contract administration. Control of cost, time

Semester Nine


21

and quality, quality assurance. Programs and regulatory constraints, building legislations, building law and ordinances, urban planning legislation and housing laws, syndicate regulations, servitude and labor union laws.

ARCH 541. ARCHITECTURE INTERNSHIP (0CR.: 0LEC) A supervised 8 weeks summer training period at an approved Architecture firm (consulting, contracting, etc.) intended to provide students with hands-on experience at the work place. This training may involve office work, field trip, site supervision, or an architectural design workshop that is jointly organized by the Faculty and other local or international institutions / universities. In either option, evaluation is based on: daily performance, supervisors input, student’s report, and a short presentation; students are required to submit comprehensive summer training reports together with the necessary proof of documents.

ARCH 540. GRADUATION PROJECT (8 CR.: 0LEC, 16STU) This Final Design studio is an opportunity for students to develop an individual senior project addressing various factors in the design process. Syntheses should demonstrate understanding and resolution of different issues analyzed in the design of the building, from the understanding of context, to structural and environmental systems, down to the details of construction. Project outcomes are developed with consideration given to social, cultural, ethical, environmental, accessibility, safety, and reliability factors. Detailed representation of complete project aims to interpret comprehensive understanding of architectural design as a holistic approach. Prerequisite: ARCH434, ARCH537, ARCH539.

ARCH533. ARCHITECTURAL CRITICISM (2 CR.: 2LEC) Lectures and group seminars addressing the evaluation of architectural works, ideologies and approaches. Critical review and assessment of design, interpretation, and responses by different actors. Criteria and methods of analysis and criticism. Appraisal of the delivery process and architectural product.

ARCH536. DESIGN AND BUILDING ECONOMICS (2CR.: 2LEC) Overview of factors influencing design and building costs, and approaches to managing costs from initial project definition through construction and use. Techniques for project budgeting, cost estimating, and life cycle cost analysis. Feasibility, cost and value, economic analysis, real estate market. Cost and benefit ratio analysis, and control of cost and depreciation, cost estimating, including determination of materials, labor, equipment, overhead, profit, and other construction costs.

Semester Ten


22

Faculty Elective Courses

Level Code Course Title Prerequ

isite Credits

Teaching Hours

Exam Dur.

Grading Total Grade

L St Se Hr T W O

20

0 L

eve

l

ARCH261 Introduction to Painting

- 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH262 History of Arts - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH263 Architectural Photography

- 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH264 Perspective and Rendering

- 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

30

0 L

eve

l

ARCH361 Architecture and Environment

- 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH362 Social Studies in Architecture

- 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH363 Theory of Housing - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH364 Virtual Reality ARCH 138

2 1 - 2 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH365 Graphic Design ARCH 138

2 1 - 2 2 70 30 - 100

40

0 L

eve

l

ARCH461 Landscape Architecture

- 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH462 Vernacular Architecture

- 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH463 Intelligent Buildings - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH464 Geographic Information System

- 2 1 - 2 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH465 Building Information Modeling

- 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH466 Environmental Psychology

- 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

50

0 L

eve

l

ARCH561 History of Islamic Arts - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH562 Conservation of Historic Buildings

- 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH563 Regionalism in Architecture

- 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH564 Site Planning - 2 1 2 - 2 70 30 - 100

ARCH565 Urban Morphology - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH566 Environmental Impact Assessment

- 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100

ARCH567 Topics in Architecture - 2 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100


23

Courses Description

o 200 LEVEL ELECTIVE COURSES

ARCH261. INTRODUCTION TO PAINTING (2CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Study of painting language through color, form, materials, and techniques. Aspects of traditional and modern pictorial composition including proportion, space, and color theory through the representation of a variety of subjects.

ARCH262. HISTORY OF ARTS (2CR.: 2LEC) Tracing the evolution of arts through historical periods. Review of different movements and schools. Contexts, values, and cultural influences. Principal features, designs and characteristics. Analysis and comparative studies.

ARCH263. ARCHITECTURAL PHOTOGRAPHY (2CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Basic elements and processes of architectural photography to include camera controls, exposure technique, photo processing, and fundamental principles of photographing architecture. In-depth photo essays relating to architecture, the urban movement, or landscape design following the introduced principles.

ARCH264. PERSPECTIVE AND RENDERING (2CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Theoretical principles of perspective: one vanishing point, two vanishing points, three vanishing points, interior perspective. Rendering techniques, architectural delineation, principles of shade and shadow. Exercises on architectural applications, drawing perspective views using conventional and computer methods.


ARCH361. ARCHITECTURE AND ENVIRONMENT (2CR.: 2LEC) Basic theories and interpretations of environmental studies in relation to the built environment. Review of environmental concerns and their scope. Environmental problems, pollution, threats and impacts of human actions. Design of the built environment engaged with the natural environment. Influence of natural elements on the making of architecture. Relationship of architecture to site and landscape.

ARCH362. SOCIAL STUDIES IN ARCHITECTURE (2CR.: 2LEC) Introduction to the field of sociology, definitions and scope of social studies. Social and cultural characteristics in different societies. Understanding of issues and factors that motivate and influence architectural design and theory, and how architecture is shaped by and shapes cultural concerns and social organization.

ARCH363. THEORY OF HOUSING (2CR.: 2LEC) Introduction to contemporary theories and concerns in the field of housing. Roots of housing problem. Housing typologies and classification. Housing sector. Mechanisms and forces shaping the housing market. Factors affecting supply and demand. Economics of housing projects. Feasibility studies. Housing policies and role of government. Residential areas and suburbia. Problems, considerations, and alternative approaches applied in the field.

ARCH364. VIRTUAL REALITY (2CR.: 1LEC, 2LAB) The dual realm of design, computer modeling and visualization. Critical appreciation of digital media, interpreting real and imaginary 'worlds' from literature in the form of multimedia digital models. Emphasis on experimentation, imagination and technical competence through digital media. Prerequisite: ARCH138.

ARCH365. GRAPHIC DESIGN (2CR.: 1LEC, 2LAB) Nature and scope of graphic design. Conceptual development. Innovation, technique and presentation. Skills in the areas of representation: logos, packaging, branding and identity, web design and motion graphics. New techniques and methods of artistic expression: issues and directions. Integration of message and content. Innovation, creativity and high standard graphic design. Prerequisite: ARCH138.


24


ARCH461. LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE (2CR.: 2LEC) Various theories of architectural landscape, principal landscape design concepts and processes, scope, components and elements, environmental knowledge, contexts and landscape preferences. Design considerations, skills, and scales. Alternative approaches and professional practices. Critique of recent local and international cases of landscape design.

ARCH462. VERNACULAR ARCHITECTURE (2CR.: 2LEC) Scope and key definitions. Surveying vernacular architecture. Culture and place influences. Local trends, traditions, and practices. Elements and components. Lessons and values. Connections, continuity and future prospects.

ARCH463. INTELLIGENT BUILDINGS (2CR.: 2LEC) Environmental concerns underlying responsive design. Definitions and components of intelligent buildings. Principles of interactive design. Management of indoor environments. The building envelope, automated technologies and smart materials. Integrated building management systems. Efficient use of energy, utilization of renewable energy systems, sustainable management of resources. Analytical techniques and computing tools for studying and assessing building energy and environmental performance.

ARCH464. GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM (2CR.: 1LEC, 2LAB) Information management and decision-making support tools used in urban studies. Definition of GIS. Overview of the range of GIS applications (data acquisition, secondary data generation, analysis and management of data, factor combination and GIS-based modeling. Use of GIS in decision-making. Integration of GIS with other technologies used in the field of urban studies.

ARCH465. BUILDING INFORMATION MODELLING (2CR.: 1LEC, 2LAB) Fundamentals of Building Information Modeling (BIM) as a construction documentation system. Introduces concepts and features of BIM. Includes software structure and features, modeling and editing techniques, and sheet creation and organization. Focuses on applying BIM software to develop a set of construction documents. Simulates project development and documentation.

ARCH466. ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY (2CR.: 2LEC) The aim of this course is to help students to create more effective and appropriate environments that address human needs. The Course investigates the interrelationships among the physical environment, natural environment, individual differences, and human behavior and experience. Student are taught to explore the distinctive features of environmental psychology in relation to other forms of psychology, the origin of environmental psychology and how an understanding of human behavior influences and informs responsible design decision making. Emphasis is on the effect of design decisions on human behavior in interior and exterior spaces.


ARCH561. HISTORY OF ISLAMIC ARTS (2CR.: 2LEC) Overview of the cultural history of Islamic societies as expressed by their art and architecture from the 7th century to the present. Changes in artistic styles, architectural advances and expression of the written word compared across time and geography to understand how Islam influenced and was influenced by society throughout history.

ARCH562. CONSERVATION OF HISTORIC BUILDINGS (2CR.: 2LEC) Introduction to historic conservation. Cultural considerations. Values and ethics of conservation. Procedures, surveys and documentation. Degrees of intervention. Causes of decay: natural and man-made. Structural behavior in elements of historic buildings. Techniques and practices. Examples and approaches.

ARCH563. REGIONALISM IN ARCHITECTURE (2CR.: 2LEC) The course investigates various and evolving definitions of regionalism and theoretical approaches to the problem of designing architecture that reflects its time, place, culture and environment. Thus, the shape of buildings and environments are studied in relation to climate, landscape, availability of resources and cultural backgrounds. It explores the concept of regionalism in architecture; local architectural models around the world; the power of invented regionalism; the persistence of regional revivals; and the impact of regional architecture in historic preservation.


25

ARCH564. SITE PLANNING (2CR.: 1LEC, 2STU) Theory, practice and impacts of site planning: zoning, growth management, methods and techniques of land use control. Site identity and character. Systematic surveys and site analysis. Physical, cultural and economic contexts. Critique of recent cases of site planning. Developing land use plans and guidelines, land use ordinances and legal frameworks.

ARCH565. URBAN MORPHOLOGY (2CR.: 2LEC) Nature of urban morphology. Systematic study of morphology: Elements, components and relationships. Morphology in relation to urban contexts. Variables and parameters. Morphology and local identity. Approaches to deal with particular morphologies within urban contexts.

ARCH566. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT (2CR.: 2LEC) Environmental Impact Assessment for projects (EIA). Strategic Environmental Assessment for policies, plans and programs (SEA). Identifying significant environmental impacts. Environmental management through assessment, prevention, restoration and mitigation of environmental impacts. Preparation of environmental impact statements. Description of decision-making process and tools. Environmental sampling and monitoring programs. Analysis and evaluation of proposed solutions, technical feasibility, examination of case studies.

ARCH567. TOPICS IN ARCHITECTURE (2CR.: 2LEC) A focused investigation of selected issues in architecture, architectural design or urbanism. Specific course will vary and will be defined by individual instructors.


26

Course Coding and Prerequisites

Mandatory Courses

Course Prerequisite Courses

ARCH271 Architectural Design Fundamentals: Visual Studies -

ARCH272 Architectural Design Fundamentals: Physical Studies ARCH271

ARCH273 Building Construction I -

ARCH274 Building Construction II ARCH273

ARCH275 History of Architecture I -

ARCH276 Theory of Architecture I -

ARCH277 CAD Drawing -

ARCH278 Computer Graphics ARCH277

ARCH279 Architectural Sketching -

ARCH280 Academic Writing -

ARCH291 Architectural Design I ARCH272

ARCH292 Architectural Design II ARCH291

ARCH293 Building Construction III ARCH274

ARCH294 Building Construction IV ARCH293

ARCH295 History of Architecture II -

ARCH296 Theory of Architecture II ARCH276

ARCH297 Theory of Colours -

ARCH298 Indoor Environmental Controls -

ARCH331 Architectural Design III ARCH292

ARCH332 Architectural Design IV ARCH331

ARCH333 Execution Design I ARCH294

ARCH334 Execution Design II ARCH333

ARCH335 History of Architecture III -

ARCH336 Theory of Architecture III -

ARCH337 Interior Design -

ARCH338 City and Town Planning -

ARCH339 Environmental Design -

ARCH431 Architectural Design V ARCH332

ARCH432 Architectural Design VI ARCH431

ARCH433 Execution Design III ARCH334

ARCH434 Execution Design IV ARCH433

ARCH435 Urban Design -

ARCH436 Research and Programming -

ARCH437 Project Management -

ARCH438 Specifications and Quantities -

ARCH533 Architectural Criticism -

ARCH534 Graduation Dissertation -

ARCH535 Building Regulations and Professional Practice -

ARCH536 Design and Building Economics -

ARCH537 Architectural Design VII ARCH432

ARCH539 Graduation Project Programming ARCH432

ARCH540 Graduation Project ARCH537 / ARCH539 /

ARCH434

ARCH541 Architecture Internship -

CVEE 231 Theory of Structures for Architects -

CVEE232 Concrete and Steel Structures -

CVEE331 Soil Mechanics & Foundations, and Material Properties & Testing -

CVEE232 Surveying for Architects -

MECH431 HVAC and Sanitation for Architects -

Change of Prerequisites between 20011 Curriculum and 2014 Curriculum


27

Elective Courses:


ARCH261 Introduction to Painting -

ARCH262 History of Arts -

ARCH263 Architectural Photography -

ARCH264 Perspective and Rendering -

ARCH361 Architecture and Environment -

ARCH362 Social Studies in Architecture -

ARCH363 Theory of Housing -

ARCH364 Virtual Reality ARCH278

ARCH365 Graphic Design ARCH278

ARCH461 Landscape Architecture -

ARCH462 Vernacular Architecture -

ARCH463 Intelligent Buildings -

ARCH464 Geographic Information System -

ARCH465 Building Information Modelling -

ARCH466 Environmental Psychology -

ARCH561 History of Islamic Arts -

ARCH562 Conservation of Historic Buildings -

ARCH563 Regionalism in Architecture -

ARCH564 Site Planning -

ARCH565 Urban Morphology -

ARCH566 Environmental Impact Assessment -

ARCH567 Topics in Architecture -


28

Architecture Academic Program Sheet


29

II. Interior Design Program

Mission

The mission of the Interior Design Program at Beirut Arab University is to provide learning opportunities that integrates critical thinking skills with a wide variety of creative experiences in the field of Interior Design. Very broadly, the Interior Design Program seeks to provide students with the highest professional standards to advance a human-centered practice of interior design that contributes positively to the health, safety and well-being of people in local, regional and global contexts.

Objectives

The broad aim of interior design program is to provide a variety of transformative learning opportunities to shape creative, rational, and socially and environmentally responsible design professionals. This thorough goal is supported through the following objectives:

- To sustain premium standards for interior design education through professional accreditation. - To provide students with necessary skills for interacting with multiple disciplines in collaborative environments. - To promote communicative design methods which define and achieve users’ needs in various environments. - To develop effective communication skills, with a solid background of design theories, histories, environmental

responsiveness, and standards; along with creative, abstract and critical thinking skills. - To influence students with a high sense of social and ethical responsibilities.

Career Opportunities for Interior Design

A graduate of this program will be qualified to create the physical environments that are functional, sustainable, stimulating and healthy. Interior Design jobs cover a wide spectrum of firms and industries involved in the design for built environments including residential, commercial, hospitality, healthcare, office, retail, entertainment, exhibit, educational and industrial facilities, as well as, lighting / furniture / textile manufacturing.”

Admission Requirements



Successfully pass an entrance exam to measure the level of proficiency in English Language (or provide evidence of English Language abilities such as TOEFL, ILETS, SAT I.

All applicants are required to attend an Interview / Oral Exam and submit a portfolio.

Degrees Offered

The Faculty offers a Bachelor Degree in Interior Design, where the minimum duration of study is 6 semesters, and not exceeding 12 semesters.


30


To receive a Bachelor Degree in Interior Design, a student must satisfactorily complete the credit hours required and get an overall minimum grade point average (GPA) of 2.0 + ICDL.

The following table summarizes the number of credits required for graduation:

Program

* University Requirements + ICDL

Program Requirements Total Credit

Hours Mandatory Courses

Elective Courses

Major Core Courses

Major Elective Courses

INTD 5 13

- Common Foundation Requirements: 22 Crs.

- Mandatory Core Courses: 59 Crs.

Total: 81

9 108

* A total of 18 credits is required as General University Requirements; 5 credits are selected from the University Mandatory

Courses list including ARAB 001 (2Crs.), ENGL 001 (2Crs.), BLAW 001 (1Cr.) and another 13 credits are selected from the

University Elective Courses list + ICDL.


Graduates of this program will acquire the essential knowledge and skills of successful practitioners in the field of Interior Design. Six critical outcomes are identified as essentials for students to achieve the above-mentioned aim. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to:

- Formulate a complete understanding of the historical and theoretical fundamentals and universal principles of interior design.

- Develop a comprehensive, human-centered, socially and economically responsive design through creative problem solving within interior environments.

- Integrate designs within the context of building technology systems using appropriate materials and products. - Develop attitudes, traits and values of professional responsibility, accountability and effectiveness. - Communicate effectively and express ideas in writing, orally and graphically. - Acquire the necessary knowledge for applying laws, codes, regulations, standards and practices that maintain the

health, safety and welfare of the public. - Attain a managerial foundation required for professional practice.


31


Bachelor Degree in Interior Design

(108 Credit Hours)

First Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

ARTD 201 Design Fundamentals 4

ARTD 203 Photography 3

ARTD 205 History of Arts I 3

ARTD 207 Computer Aided Drafting and Design I 3

ARTD 209 Freehand Drawing 3

ENGL 001 General English 2

Second Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

INTD 202 Interior Design Studio I 4 Pre: INTD201

INTD 204 Building Systems 3

ARTD 206 History of Arts II 3

INTD 208 Computer Aided Drafting and Design II 3 Pre: ARTD207

INTD 210 Theory of Colors 3

ARAB 001 Arabic Language and Literature 2

Third Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

INTD 301 Interior Design Studio II 4 Pre: INTD202

INTD 303 Interior Materials and Specifications 3 Pre: INTD204

INTD 305 History of Interiors and Furnishing 3

INTD 307 Interior Perspectives 3

ARTD 309 Environmental Psychology 3

BLAW 001 Human Rights 1


Fourth Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

INTD 302 Interior Design Studio III 4 Pre: INTD301

INTD 304 Interior Execution Design and Detailing I 3 Pre: INTD303

INTD 306 Textile and Furnishing Materials 3

INTD 308 Lighting Design 3





32

Fifth Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

INTD 401 Interior Design Studio IV 4 Pre: INTD302

INTD 403 Interior Execution Design and Detailing II 3

INTD 405 Furniture Design 3

INTD 407 Internship 1

Elective2 3



Sixth Semester (17 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

INTD 402 Interior Design Senior Project 6 Pre: INTD401 INTD403

INTD 404 Interior Design Professional Practice and Ethics 3 Pre: INTD303

Elective2 3

Elective2 3



1 A total of 18 credits is required as General University Requirements; 5 credits are selected from the University Mandatory Courses list including ARAB 001 (2Cr.), ENGL 001 (2Cr.), BLAW 001 (1Cr.) and another 13 credits are selected from the University Elective Courses list.

Descriptions of the university requirement courses are shown in the Introduction section of this catalogue. 2 Selected from the list of Major Elective Courses offered.


33

Common Requirements

The following are the descriptions of the curricular components that are common to all Design programs.

University Requirements Student working for a Bachelor degree in Interior Design program must complete a total of 18 credit hours of University requirement courses distributed as follows: Mandatory University Requirements Courses

Courses Crs.




Common Foundation Requirements

Course Crs. Pre-/Co-requisites

ARTD 201 Design Fundamentals 4 -

ARTD 203 Photography 3 -

ARTD 205 History of Arts I 3 -

ARTD 206 History of Arts II 3 -

ARTD 207 Computer Aided Drafting and Design I 3 -

ARTD 209 Freehand Drawing 3 -

ARTD 309 Environmental Psychology 3 -


34

STAGE ONE

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

ARTD 201 Design Fundamentals - 4 1 6 6 60 40 - 100

ARTD 203 Photography - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

ARTD 205 History of Arts I - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

ARTD 207 Computer Aided Drafting and Design I

- 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

ARTD 209 Freehand Drawing - 3 1 4 2 70 30 - 100 University General Elective - 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100


Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

INTD 202 Interior Design Studio I ARTD 201 4 - 8 6 60 - 40 100

INTD 204 Building Systems - 3 1 4 4 60 - 40 100

ARTD 206 History of Arts II - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

INTD 208 Computer Aided Drafting and Design II

ARTD 207 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

INTD 210 Theory of Colors - 3 2 2 2 60 40 - 100

University General Elective - 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100



T: TUTORIAL WORK W: WRITTEN EXAM

O: ORAL EXAM

First Semester

Second Semester


35

STAGE TWO

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

INTD 301 Interior Design Studio II INTD 202 4 - 8 - 60 - 40 100

INTD 303 Interior Materials and Specifications

INTD 204 3 1 4 - 60 - 40 100

INTD 305 History of Interiors and Furnishing

- 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

INTD 307 Interior Perspectives - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

ARTD 309 Environmental Psychology - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100



Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

INTD 302 Interior Design Studio III INTD 301 4 - 8 - 60 - 40 100

INTD 304 Interior Execution Design and Detailing I

INTD 303 3 1 4 - 60 - 40 100

INTD 306 Textile and Furnishing Materials

- 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

INTD 308 Lighting Design - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100







O: ORAL EXAM

Third Semester

Fourth Semester


36

STAGE THREE

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

INTD 401 Interior Design Studio IV INTD 302 4 - 8 - 60 - 40 100

INTD 403 Interior Execution Design and Detailing II

INTD 304 3 1 4 - 60 - 40 100

INTD 405 Furniture Design - 3 1 4 2 60 40 - 100

INTD 407 Internship - 1 1 - - - - - 100

Major Elective - 3 - - 2 60/70 40/30 - 100




Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

INTD 402 Interior Design Senior Project

INTD 401 INTD 403

6 - 12 - 60 - 40 100

INTD 404 Interior Design Professional Practice and Ethics

- 3 1 4 2 60 40 - 100

Major Elective - 3 3 - 2 60/70 40/30 - 100

Major Elective - 3 3 - 2 60/70 40/30 - 100

University General Elective - 2 2 - 2 60 40 - 100





O: ORAL EXAM

Fifth Semester

Sixth Semester


37

Course Description of the Common Foundation Requirements

ARTD201 - DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS (4Crs.: 1Lec; 6Stu):This design fundamental course introduces ideas, methodologies, principles, and skills that comprise a common knowledge base important to all design disciplines. These fundamentals foster a multidisciplinary design experience among students and prepare them to move to the next level. Coursework explores basic design elements and processes of visual communication, through exercises that improve visual and manual drawing skills. These exercises encompass format, line, pattern, proportion, scale, and texture, as well as interpretation of space (edge, perspective, dimension), and conceptualization.

ARTD203 - PHOTOGRAPHY (3Crs.: 2Lec;2Sec): Students will develop a basic understanding of the digital camera and current electronic imaging technology. The course explores the utilization of photography as a means of design production and portfolios’ documentation. It covers the basic principles for lighting, setup and shooting with 35mm and digital cameras. Students will take pictures of both two-dimensional and three-dimensional objects.

ARTD205 - HISTORY OF ARTS I (3Crs.: 3Lec): The Course includes a chronological survey of the visual arts as an expression of the mind and culture of Western civilization from the Prehistoric period, through the Near Eastern, Egyptian, Greek, Roman, Early Christian, Jewish and Byzantine art; and Gothic, Renaissance (Italian and Northern), and Baroque Art and Architecture. The course is designed to help students increase their art historical vocabulary for discussing an art object’s medium, composition, style, and iconography.

ARTD206 - HISTORY OF ARTS II (3Crs.: 3Lec): This course is an introduction to Western art before the Neoclassical to the present day, and covers Neo-Classicism, Realism, Impressionism and Modernist movements from Fauvism through Abstract Expressionism to Contemporary. Concepts such as artists’ influence, artistic motifs, stylistic evolution, cultural context, patronage, function, reception, and censorship as well as the incorporation of non-European art forms into the Western Tradition will be covered in this class.

ARTD207 - COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND DESIGN I (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): Application of computer-aided drafting and design (CADD) concepts, methods, and skills used in all design disciplines. Digital 3D modeling and 2D presentation tools, used in conjunction with computer-aided design (CAD) software, are used to translate students’ fundamental manual presentation techniques to digital drawing, modeling, and layout. Emphasis on the utilization of the CADD functions and skills to further enhance the design development and production phases of the design process.

ARTD209 - FREEHAND DRAWING (3Crs.: 1Lec; 4Stu): A lecture/studio course for developing the student’s freehand drawing skills, with emphasis on analytic and descriptive drawings of everyday objects, building interiors, landscaping, vehicles, and people. Drawing media will include graphite, ink, charcoal, and pastel or colored pencil.

ARTD309 - ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY (3Crs.: 3Lec) : The aim of this course is to help students to create more effective and appropriate environments that address human needs. The Course investigates the interrelationships among the physical environment, natural environment, individual differences, and human behavior and experience. Student are taught to explore the distinctive features of environmental psychology in relation to other forms of psychology, the origin of environmental psychology and how an understanding of human behavior influences and informs responsible design decision making. Emphasis is on the effect of design decisions on human behavior in interior and exterior spaces.

Course Description of Mandatory Courses

INTD202 - INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO I (4Crs.: 0Lec; 8Stu): This course is an introduction to the field of interior design. Topics of functional and aesthetic elements for residential interiors are covered, including the identification of client needs, programming, standards, space planning, drawings, and presentations. Concept design, development, and articulation are emphasized and represented through the use of sketches, mechanical drawings, and perspectives tools, as well as models. Pre-req.: ARTD201


38

INTD204 - BUILDING SYSTEMS (3Crs.: 1Lec; 4Stu): This Course develops an understanding of the basic structural theories systems for buildings. This is followed by an overview of building components with a focus on structural impact for interior design practice. Students are also introduced to the function of environmental support systems, including the basic technical requirements for building systems (mechanical, electrical, and fire detection/control) and how they affect interior design decisions and construction drawings.

INTD208 - COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND DESIGN II (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): This course is designed to explore digital techniques of 2 and 3 dimensional interior spaces. .Students will explore advanced techniques and appropriate digital tools to help them quickly visualize their designs volumetrically and apply 3D design elements within the spatial envelope. Special attention is given to utilizing digital media as support for visual and verbal communication through a review of 3-D modeling concepts, computer-aided rendering concepts, and methods in the development of interior design. Pre-req.: ARTD207

INTD210 - THEORY OF COLORS (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Sec): This course introduces the use of color for interior design. Emphasis is on color theory, psychology of color and how it affects human mood and behavior, and application of color in interior environments and lighting conditions. Included is the vocabulary of color, color temperatures, the principles of the color wheel and how to use it. With the use of paint values, tones, and shades are mastered.

INTD301 - INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO II (4Crs.: 0Lec; 8Stu): Based on the foundation of Interior Design I, the aim of this course is to develop students’ knowledge of the fundamentals of interior design practice. The concept of place making is much considered in the given projects, emphasizing on the design methods and constraints. Students are introduced to commercial design theories and workspace ergonomics, applying them to specific design conditions to experience and develop an understanding of the designer's role in creating public spaces. Considerations are given to users of various age, culture, income, and physical abilities. Pre-req.: INTD202

INTD302 - INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO III (4Crs.: 0Lec; 8Stu): An intermediate studio course where students continue to develop their understanding of functional and formal elements of architectural interiors, as well as principles and characteristics of interiority. In this course, students acquire knowledge of retail shops design, focusing on programming skills, space planning and circulation strategies, to create interior environment that successfully display and market products with respect to standards and architectural constraints. Pre-req.: INTD301

INTD303 - INTERIOR MATERIALS AND SPECIFICATIONS (3Crs.:1Lec; 4Stu): This Course introduces students to the properties and specifications of appropriate materials, other than those of a structural nature, which are appropriate for the interior environments, including materials for floors, walls, ceilings, windows, and other interior surfaces. Special attention is given to the health effects and environmental impact of material choices in interior design. Students investigate the designer's role and responsibility in the process of material selection in order to provide aesthetic, standard compliance, and sustainable finish specifications for a variety of spaces. Pre-req.: INTD204

INTD304 - INTERIOR EXECUTION DESIGN AND DETAILING I (3Crs.:1Lec;4Stu):In this course, students develop their knowledge and graphical skills necessary for the production of working drawings of interior constructions, such as floor plans, elevations, sections, finish schedules, reflected ceiling plans, and details. Emphasis is placed on the selection, specification and illustration of appropriate materials, assemblies and components. Pre-req.: INTD303

INTD305 - HISTORY OF INTERIORS AND FURNISHING (3Crs.: 3Lec): This course reviews the historical aspects of architecture, interiors, and furniture from early civilizations through the Rococo period, focusing on developments in Western Europe, the English Georgian period in the early 18th century through the Victorian revivals of the 19th century, proto-modernist movements in the latter half of the 19th century in England, and concluding with the Neo-modern movement that concludes the 20th century. Students explore historic styles of the habitat and its furnishings as an expression of peoples’ needs and values of the time. Construction methods and materials are covered in more depth and specific color and fabric influences are explored.

INTD306 - TEXTILE AND FURNISHING MATERIALS (3Crs.: 3Lec): This course gives students a broad understanding of textiles and their usage in interior environment. Topics include textile design, fibers, methods of weaving, dyeing, finishes and trims, flammability, consumer protection, specification of textiles for residential and non-residential end-users, and designer responsibility as related to consumer health, safety and welfare.


39

INTD307 - INTERIOR PERSPECTIVES (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Stu): Students are expected to demonstrate an understanding of theory of two-point mechanical perspective, and to develop freehand drawing and sketching skills of interior and exterior spaces. This course explores the use of various media to define light, shadows, textures, and illustrate materiality and spatial character. Students also learn fundamental presentation board layout and composition.

INTD308 - LIGHTING DESIGN (3Crs.: 3Lec): This Course focuses on the fundamentals of light: its sources, variations, quality, design implications, product variations, technologies and cost/benefits. Students learn how to integrate appropriate lighting choices, from both technical and aesthetic perspectives, covering the four function of light: task, accent, decorative and ambient. Lighting for the specific sectors of built environments (residential, retail, corporate, etc.) is discussed and evaluated as an imperative creative design feature and form-maker.

INTD401 - INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO IV (4Crs.: 0Lec; 8Stu): An advanced studio course that aims to further develop students’ skills in design process and methods, as well as creative and critical skills, to propose solutions to complex residential projects. The students analyze spatial needs in terms of client needs, human behavior, life style and function and develop a design that integrates those needs with a focus on social, cultural, economic and technical issues and theoretical understanding to various concepts of home and living spaces. Pre-req.: INTD302. INTD402 - INTERIOR DESIGN SENIOR PROJECT (6Crs.: 0Lec; 12Stu): In this course, students choose their own complex senior design project topic and work towards more self-directed learning. In this advanced studio students are required to incorporate the skills and knowledge gained throughout their studies to create a comprehensive project, including a written research of the topic, programming and design requirements, presentation drawings, models, material and furniture boards, detail drawings and specifications. Students work independently with tutor’s guidance to generate creative professional level design outcomes with associated levels of detailing of their projects choosing to focus on one or more of the following: materiality, sustainability, universal design, human factors or any other areas. Pre-req.: INTD401, INTD403.

INTD403 - INTERIOR EXECUTION DESIGN AND DETAILING II (3Crs.:1Lec;4Stu): This course provides advanced study of interior building construction, materials, detailing and building services. Interior detailing includes but is not limited to, interior partitions, stairs, fireplaces, doors, windows. Students examine current practices and standards of building services, including electrical, plumbing, sprinklers, HVAC, communications and security. Pre-req.: INTD303

INTD404 - INTERIOR DESIGN PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE AND ETHICS (3Crs.: 3Lec): This course provides an introduction to business practices and procedures in the field of interior design . Students are introduced to the basic principles of operating an Interior Design business, planning for profit and growth, writing contracts, marketing, selling, and project management. Topics discussed also include professional ethics and socially responsible design. Emphasis is on the development of project administration documents within the context of legal and ethical obligations to the public.

INTD405 - FURNITURE DESIGN (3Crs.: 1Lec; 4Stu): This design studio focuses on the aesthetic and functional issues related to the construction of freestanding furniture. The design and construction of both hard and soft furniture elements are covered. Special attention is given to anthropometric and ergonomic considerations, as well as to the development of detailed drawings and model of the designed furniture piece to better understand construction connections and detailing.

INTD407 - INTERNSHIP (1Cr.:1Lec): Students spend 120 hours in a monitored professional environment to gain the necessary experience that compliments the program’s academic work. Work experience provides students with practical experience in areas which are relevant to their specific interests and skills. Students should be exposed to various aspects of the interior design field and must present a report about their experience.


40


Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g

Ho

urs

Exam

Du

rati

on

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Hr T W O

INTD 220 Scenography - 3 2 2 2 60 40 - 100

INTD 221 Building Information Modeling

- 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

INTD 222 Acoustics Design - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

INTD 223 Historic Interior Preservation

- 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

INTD 224 Introduction to Islamic Arts - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

INTD 225 Graphic Design - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

INTD 226 Parametric Design & Digital Fabrication

- 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

INTD 227 Special Topics in Interior Design

- 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

TOTAL REQUIRED CREDIT HOURS 9 TOTAL GRADES


41

Course Description INTD220 - SCENOGRAPHY (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Stu): Students are introduced to the methods, concepts and materials of designing for theatre sceneries. Through diverse-approach workshops, students explore the ways in which space, time, light, sound, object, color and form may be woven together on theatre stage to impress and communicate with spectator. Students study also the methods of developing a design from script analysis to presentation of the completed design.

INTD221 - BUILDING INFORMATION MODELING (3Crs.:2Lec; 2Lab): In this course, students explore the use of Building Information Modeling (BIM) technology as a communication and collaboration tools. Emphasis is on 3-D modeling and rendering as well as preparation of construction documents resulting at the professional level. INTD222 – ACOUSTICS DESIGN (3Crs.:3Lec): This course covers the fundamentals of architectural acoustics. Topics include: sound generation and propagates; human sound perceptions; sound level descriptors; acoustic properties of materials and their place in the development of holistic design concepts. Students apply acoustic design criteria, methods, and materials to spaces for various activities and functions, such as theatres, classrooms, auditorium, open-plan office, etc. INTD223 - HISTORIC INTERIOR PRESERVATION (3Crs.:3Lec): In this course, students learn the principles and theories of preservation and adaptive reuse of historical interiors. Topics include treatment of historic interior surfaces, materials, interior architectural features, and decorative arts in restoration and rehabilitation projects. INTD224 - INTRODUCTION TO ISLAMIC ARTS (3Crs.:3Lec): In this course, students are introduced to the different eras of Islamic arts. Emphasis is on the decorative patterns and motifs that distinguish the prominent Islamic periods, including the construction and applications of Islamic calligraphy, geometry and floral designs in interiors. Modern manifestations of this style in today’s Islamic world are also reviewed. INTD225 - GRAPHIC DESIGN (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): This course introduces students to two-dimensional elements and principles of graphic design as the basis of visual language and communication. Through problem solving approach, students manipulate graphic forms and design elements in black-and-white and color media to convey meaning, strategies for idea generation and development of distinctive concepts. Emphasis is given to the importance of presentation and craftsmanship.

INTD226 - PARAMETRIC DESIGN & DIGITAL FABRICATION (3 Cr.: 2Lec; 2 Lab); Prerequisite: ARTD207; This course introduces students to the history, theory, and application of parametric design for interior design production. The course will focus on the underlying concepts and mechanisms for creating performance-based parametric modules and will guide students through the process of using rapid prototyping and CAD/CAM devices in a studio environment. The objective of this course is to provide students with the conceptual, as well as technical, framework through which to better understand the relevant application of parametric design to the various design problems they will encounter as interior designers.

INTD227 - SPECIAL TOPICS IN INTERIOR DESIGN (3 Cr.: 3Lec; 0Lab) This course provides study in Interior design on a special topic.


42


Mandatory Courses


ARTD201 Design Fundamentals -

ARTD203 Photography -

ARTD205 History of Arts I -

ARTD207 Computer Aided Drafting and Design I -

ARTD209 Freehand Drawing -

INTD 202 Interior Design Studio I ARTD 201

INTD 204 Building Systems -

ARTD 206 History of Arts II -

INTD 208 Computer Aided Drafting and Design II ARTD 207

INTD 210 Theory of Colors -

INTD 301 Interior Design Studio II INTD 202

INTD 303 Interior Materials and Specifications INTD 204

INTD 305 History of Interiors and Furnishing -

INTD 307 Interior Perspectives -

ARTD 309 Environmental Psychology -

INTD 302 Interior Design Studio III INTD 301

INTD 304 Interior Execution Design and Detailing I INTD 303

INTD 306 Textile and Furnishing Materials -

INTD 308 Lighting Design -

INTD 401 Interior Design Studio IV INTD 302

INTD 403 Interior Execution Design and Detailing II INTD 304

INTD 405 Furniture Design INTD 305

INTD 407 Internship -

INTD 402 Interior Design Senior Project INTD 401 INTD 403

INTD 404 Interior Design Professional Practice and Ethics -

Elective Courses:


INTD220 Scenography -

INTD221 Building Information Modeling -

INTD222 Acoustics Design -

INTD223 Historic Interior Preservation -

INTD224 Introduction to Islamic Arts -

INTD225 Graphic Design -

INTD226 Parametric Design & Digital Fabrication -

INTD227 Special Topics in Interior Design -


43

Interior Design Program Academic Program Sheet


44

III. Graphic Design Program

Mission

The mission of the Graphic Design Program at Beirut Arab University is to provide students with the technical, conceptual, and cultural background necessary to demonstrate proficiency as visual communicators. The program introduces students to a progressive series of courses that develop students’ ability for problem solving through critical thinking, stimulating their sense of creativity and imagination, and preparing them into professionals ready for a wide variety of entry-level jobs in the field of Graphic Design.

Objectives

The aim of the Graphic Design Program is to inspire graphic designers into generating and creating effective visual communications through developing their individual talent, potential, and personal language. The key objectives of the graphic design program are to: - Help students develop strong technical and conceptual design skills. - Help students explore and understand the issues of contemporary Graphic Design practice. - Expose students to all the skills and tools relevant to this industry, both traditional and digital. - Provide students with practical knowledge and experience with industry-standard tools and equipments. - Develop an understanding of business and marketing practices, creating ethical and responsible industry

professionals.

Career Opportunities for Interior Design

A graduate of this program will be qualified to work in: Graphic Design Studios, Advertising Agencies, Multimedia Studios, Publishing Houses, Printing Companies, Art Departments in Large Corporations and Freelance Graphic Designer. Graphic design jobs cover all ends of the creative spectrum: Creative / Art Director, Layout Artist and Brand Identity Designer, Logo Designer, Flash Designer, Illustrator, Technical Illustrator, Photo Editing / Photoshop Artist, Multimedia Designer, Photographer, Web Designer and Advertising / Marketing




Successfully pass an entrance exam to measure the level of proficiency in English Language (or provide evidence of English Language abilities such as TOEFL, ILETS, SAT I.

All applicants are required to attend an Interview / Oral Exam and submit a portfolio.

Degrees Offered

The Faculty offers a Bachelor Degree in Graphic Design, where the minimum duration of study is 6 semesters, and not exceeding 12 semesters.


To receive a Bachelor Degree in Graphic Design, a student must satisfactorily complete the credit hours required and get an overall minimum grade point average (GPA) of 2.0 + ICDL.



45

Program




Elective Courses

Major Core Courses


GRAD 5 13



Total: 81

9 108





Graduates of this program will acquire the essential knowledge and skills of successful practitioners in the field of Graphic Design. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to:

- Demonstrate proficiency in design principles, design process, and contemporary design practice with a solid theoretical and historical background.

- Develop an understanding of design process and problem solving methods utilizing critical thinking skills. - Consider the effect of Graphic Design on the human environment through social responsibility,

environmental responsiveness, and interdisciplinary perspectives. - Demonstrate expertise in recognized technical skills.

Understand and apply basic principles in the process of designing, analyzing, and evaluating graphic design solutions in relation to specific end uses and consumer needs and Common Requirements



46


Bachelor Degree in Graphic Design

(108 Credit Hours)

First Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites







Second Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

GRAD 202 Graphic Design Studio I 4 Pre: ARTD201

GRAD 204 Theory & Philosophy of Visual Communication 3


GRAD 208 Computer Graphics 3

GRAD 210 Theory of Colors in Visual Arts 3


Third Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

GRAD 301 Graphic Design Studio II 4 Pre: GRAD202

GRAD 303 Typography I 3

GRAD 305 History of Visual Communication 3

GRAD 307 Digital Imaging 3 Pre: GRAD208




Fourth Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

GRAD 302 Graphic Design Studio III 4 Pre: GRAD301

GRAD 304 Typography II 3 Pre: GRAD303

GRAD 306 Web Design 3

GRAD 308 Motion Graphics 3





47

Fifth Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

GRAD 401 Graphic Design Studio IV 4 Pre: GRAD302

GRAD 403 Interactive Design 3

GRAD 405 Print & Production Media 3

GRAD 407 Internship 1

Elective2 3



Sixth Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/co-requisites

GRAD 402 Graphic Design Senior Project 6 Pre: GRAD401

GRAD 404 Graphic Design Professional Practice and Ethics 3

Elective2 3

Elective2 3


1 A total of 18 credits is required as General University Requirements; 5 credits are selected from the University Mandatory Courses list including ARAB 001 (2Cr.), ENGL 001 (2Cr.), BLAW 001 (1Cr.) and another 13 credits are selected from the University Elective Courses list.



48

Common Requirements



Courses Crs.














49

STAGE ONE

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

ARTD 201 Design Fundamentals - 4 1 6 6 60 40 - 100




- 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

ARTD 209 Freehand Drawing - 3 1 4 2 70 30 - 100 University General Elective - 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100


Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

GRAD 202 Graphic Design Studio I ARTD 201 4 - 8 6 60 - 40 100

GRAD 204 Theory & Philosophy of Visual Communication

- 3 3 - 4 60 40 - 100

ARTD 206 History of Arts II - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

GRAD 208 Computer Graphics - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

GRAD 210 Theory of Colors in Visual Arts

- 3 2 2 2 60 40 - 100





O: ORAL EXAM

First Semester

Second Semester


50

STAGE TWO

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

GRAD 301 Graphic Design Studio II GRAD 202 4 - 8 - 60 - 40 100

GRAD 303 Typography I - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

GRAD 305 History of Visual Communication

- 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

GRAD 307 Digital Imaging - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100




Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

GRAD 302 Graphic Design Studio III GRAD 301 4 - 8 - 60 - 40 100

GRAD 304 Typography II GRAD 303 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

GRAD 306 Web Design - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

GRAD 308 Motion Graphics - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100







O: ORAL EXAM

Third Semester

Fourth Semester


51

STAGE THREE

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

GRAD 401 Graphic Design Studio IV GRAD 302 4 - 8 - 60 - 40 100

GRAD 403 Interactive Design - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

GRAD 405 Print and Production Media

- 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

GRAD 407 Internship - 1 1 - - - - - 100

Major Elective - 3 - - 2 60/70 40/30 - 100




Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

GRAD 402 Graphic Design Senior Project

GRAD 401 6 - 12 - 60 - 40 100

GRAD 404 Graphic Design Professional Practice and Ethics

- 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

Major Elective - 3 3 - 2 60/70 40/30 - 100

Major Elective - 3 3 - 2 60/70 40/30 - 100






O: ORAL EXAM

Fifth Semester

Sixth Semester


52








ARTD309 - ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY (3Crs.: 3Lec) : The aim of this course is to help students to create more effective and appropriate environments that address human needs. The Course investigates the interrelationships among the physical environment, natural environment, individual differences, and human behavior and experience. Student are taught to explore the distinctive features of environmental psychology in relation to other forms of psychology, the origin of environmental psychology and how an understanding of human behavior influences and informs responsible design decision making. Emphasis is on the effect of design decisions on human behavior in interior and exterior spaces.

Course Description for Mandatory Courses

GRAD202 - GRAPHIC DESIGN STUDIO I (4Crs.: 0Lec; 8Stu):The course develops students’ basic skills needed to structure and organize visual communications in both conventional and digital environments. Emphasis is placed on conceptual development, structural organization of information, and interaction of form and verbal content to effectively communicate ideas. Students learn to think critically, evaluate design proposals aesthetically, and become familiar with a variety of tools and techniques used to produce professional work in the fields of graphic design and advertising. Pre-req.: ARTD201.


53

GRAD204 - THEORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF VISUAL COMMUNICATION (3Crs.: 3Lec): This course explores the theoretical and philosophical issues, concepts, and processes of visual communication in its many settings, to help students bring together message, meaning, and form. Students are trained to employ type and layout principles, image-making concepts, and design processes in visual/verbal communications with multiple media outcomes.

GRAD208 - COMPUTER GRAPHICS (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): This is an introductory course to bit-mapped and vector-based digital imaging. Students develop both creative and technical skills necessary to create and produce images for digital or print-based media using Macintosh computer Operating System, Adobe Photoshop and Illustrator, as well as a variety of image formats, color models, and file and font management.

GRAD210 - THEORY OF COLORS IN VISUAL ARTS (3Crs.:2Lec;2Sec): This fundamental course provides an introduction to the principles and theories of colours as it relates to graphic design and visual communication, by understanding how colours interact to make appropriate design decisions. Topics include the vocabulary of colour, perception and colour intensity, the value scale and simultaneous contrast, the effects and physics of colour, and theories of colour psychology. Students also explore colour calibration, both with software and hardware tools.

GRAD301 - GRAPHIC DESIGN STUDIO II (4Crs.: 0Lec; 8Stu): Graphic design is explored through the integration of typography and imagery from planning, conceptualization, and creation, through management of content for a variety of projects. Major themes addressed in this course are: contrast and fusion of graphic form, text/image collage, hierarchy, grid systems, and extended layouts. Critiques and discussions of professional work including traditional structures of books, catalogues, magazines, and brochures. Pre-req.: GRAD202.

GRAD302 - GRAPHIC DESIGN STUDIO III (4Crs.: 0Lec; 8Stu): Students learn to develop visual identity systems for organizations and companies applied to print, web, and broadcast media. This is achieved through the study of how organizations use identity design to express core values and impact consumer perceptions of brand. Students develop design projects with clear process starting from research and conceptualization, to image, type generation, layout, presentation, and evaluation. Pre-req.: GRAD301.

GRAD303 - TYPOGRAPHY I (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Stu): Typography I is an introductory course to the basic terminology, anatomy and structure of type. Students start to develop an appreciation of and sensitivity to letterform. The course includes a survey of the historical development of Typographic forms and different classifications of type families. Students generated designs that illustrate typography as a meaningful element of visual communication.

GRAD304 - TYPOGRAPHY II (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Stu): This course builds on the fundamentals learned in Typography I Course. Students explore the relationship between type and image across print and digital media. Emphasis is placed on the development of more complex design combining visual and verbal elements, as well as the development of advanced publication layout skills, grid-based typographic structures, and information design. Pre-req.: GRAD303.

GRAD305 - HISTORY OF VISUAL COMMUNICATION (3Crs.: 3Lec): This course reviews the historical context for the graphic arts of calligraphy, typography, book design, diagramming, and illustration. Emphasis is placed on the relationship of these applied arts to the fine arts, technology, and social and political history. Through informed discussions, the convergence of art and human-computer interactivity is examined in the last 25 years, triggering new forms of artistic visual expressions.

GRAD306 - WEB DESIGN (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): This course introduces students to the fundamentals of XHTML (extensible mark-up language) and CSS (cascading style sheets) content for the development and manipulation of websites, logging in to a web server, creating a web page template, uploading to a remote web server and modify web pages. Students also learn how to critically evaluate website quality, and how to create and maintain quality web pages.

GRAD307 - DIGITAL IMAGING (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): Students are introduced to Photoshop and Adobe Bridge applications for the efficient production, management and manipulation of raster images. Several exercises are given to students to become professional with the capabilities of given software applications by exploring both the technical aspects of image manipulation, as well as the artistic aspects of creating images. Topics include raster graphics, setting up files for different destinations, creating and manipulating raster graphics and photographs, applying and adjusting effects, non-destructive editing techniques applied in web design, print and application interfaces. Pre-req.: GRAD208.


54

GRAD308 - MOTION GRAPHICS (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): In this course, students gain a solid foundation of motion graphics and effects techniques that support their creativity and enhance their digital skills through learning to create short animated compositions by combining texts, images, and videos. Projects incorporate rotoscoping (drawing on live video), frame by frame hand-drawn animation, editing videos, adding audio tracks, cutting and pasting additional sources, utilizing 2D animation tools.

GRAD401 - GRAPHIC DESIGN STUDIO IV (4Crs.: 0Lec; 8Stu): This course focuses on the design and construction of three-dimensional forms such as packaging, exhibits, and displays. Students conceptualize and develop preliminary construction plans, and build three-dimensional models of their design projects using a variety of materials and techniques. Additional emphasis is placed on developing students’ ability to conduct significant research and analysis. Students may address projects involving the renewal of an existing brand and subsequent packaging applications within a coherent marketing program. Pre-req.: GRAD302.

GRAD402 - GRAPHIC DESIGN SENIOR PROJECT (6Crs.: 0Lec; 16Stu): In this course each student is required to develop a professional portfolio plus a written dissertation including self-promotion, resume, and visual documentation of the selected project. The prepared portfolio should demonstrate professional competence in design, concept, technical skills, and craft and meets high standards of excellence. Pre-req.: GRAD401

GRAD403 - INTERACTIVE DESIGN (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): This course introduces students to design elements and techniques for mobile applications. Through lectures and applied projects, students learn how to conceptualize, design, prototype, and execute interactive applications for portable digital devices. Students are challenged to examine the aesthetic, cultural, and technological implication of this emerging art field and market.

GRAD404 - GRAPHIC DESIGN PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE AND ETHICS (3Crs.: 3Lec): This course examines the historic and contemporary modes of graphic design practice including career strategies, professional ethics, and business practices. Students are introduced to the basic principles of operating a graphic design business, planning for profit and growth, writing contracts, marketing, selling, and project management.

GRAD405 - PRINT AND PRODUCTION MEDIA (3Crs.: 3Lec): Student investigates the production process of printed material from original copy and digital files. Topics include major printing processes, preparation of typography, photography, illustration, and colour separations for commercial output. The course also covers the relationships between cost, quality, and time constraints for printed materials, as well as recent developments in digital and print process.

GRAD407 - INTERNSHIP (1Cr.: 1Lec): Students spend 120 hours in a monitored professional environment to gain the necessary experience that compliments the program’s academic work. Work experience provides students with practical experience in areas which are relevant to their specific interests and skills. Students should be exposed to various aspects of graphic design and must present a report about their experience.


55


Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g

Ho

urs

Exam

Du

rati

on

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Hr T W O

GRAD 220 Portfolio Planning - 3 2 2 2 60 40 - 100

GRAD 221 Marketing and Social Media - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

GRAD 222 Digital Mixed Media - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

GRAD 223 Sequential Photography - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

GRAD 224 Arabic Topography - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

GRAD 225 Story Boarding - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

GRAD 226 Special Topics in Graphic Design

- 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100


Course Description GRAD220 - PORTFOLIO PLANNING (3Crs.: 3Lec): This course prepares students for job interviews by helping them compile a portfolio. Students plan a self-branding strategy and integrate this across all facets of their portfolio: online website, personal blog, printed portfolio, design samples, and résumé package. The accumulated and refined portfolio is to demonstrate student’s conceptual, design, craftsmanship and other skills. GRAD221 - MARKETING AND SOCIAL MEDIA (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): Students develop an understanding of social media as an essential strategy of marketing nowadays, and an intelligent aspect of any business plan. This course covers not only the fundamentals of social media marketing, but also the basics of integrating them into an online presence. From building Facebook pages to authoring Twitter bios, the course covers both online services and discusses how to make best use of them as a social marketing media. GRAD222 - DIGITAL MIXED MEDIA (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): This course provides students with the opportunity to explore the creative potential presented through the imaginative combination of both traditional and digital media. Students are asked to utilize and combine skills learned in traditional and digital illustration courses to present inspiring and creative illustrations unrestricted by a singular medium. GRAD223 - SEQUENTIAL PHOTOGRAPHY (3Crs.: 3Lec): This course concentrates on using images in sequence. Students explore how sequence based images, by way of editing and text, create relationships between images and ultimately tell stories that the single image cannot. Students work independently and in small groups to further explore notions of authorship and the roll of documentary photography in a contemporary art context. GRAD224 - ARABIC TYPOGRAPHY (3Crs.: 2Lec; 2Lab): This course is an introduction to the realm of publishing and print industries relative to Arabic culture and traditional forms. Students are introduced to the basic Arabic type and custom lettering. In addition, the course provides a survey of the history and evolution of Arabic typography, with particular reference to Islamic calligraphy and arabesque patterns. GRAD225 - STORY BOARDING (3Crs.: 3Lec): In this course, students study the theories and techniques of storytelling of art for graphic novels, comic books, children's books, and storyboards for animation and film. Topics include the development of scripts, storyboarding, pencilling, inking, digitizing, and computer colouring. GRAD226 - SPECIAL TOPICS IN GRAPHIC DESIGN (3 Cr. 3Lec; 0Lab): This course provides study in Graphic design on a special topic.


56


Mandatory Courses







GRAD 202 Graphic Design Studio I ARTD 201

GRAD 204 Theory & Philosophy of Visual Communication -

ARTD 206 History of Arts II -

GRAD 208 Computer Graphics -

GRAD 210 Theory of Colors in Visual Arts -

GRAD 301 Graphic Design Studio II GRAD 202

GRAD 303 Typography I -

GRAD 305 History of Visual Communication -

GRAD 307 Digital Imaging -

ARTD 309 Environmental Psychology -

GRAD 302 Graphic Design Studio III GRAD 301

GRAD 304 Typography II GRAD 303

GRAD 306 Web Design -

GRAD 308 Motion Graphics -

GRAD 401 Graphic Design Studio IV GRAD 302

GRAD 403 Interactive Design -

GRAD 405 Print and Production Media -

GRAD 407 Internship -

GRAD 402 Graphic Design Senior Project GRAD 401

GRAD 404 Graphic Design Professional Practice and Ethics -

Elective Courses:


GRAD 220 Portfolio Planning -

GRAD 221 Marketing and Social Media -

GRAD 222 Digital Mixed Media -

GRAD 223 Sequential Photography -

GRAD 224 Arabic Topography -

GRAD 225 Story Boarding -


57

Graphic Design Program Academic Program Sheet


58

IV. Fashion Design Program

Mission

The mission of the Fashion Design Program at Beirut Arab University is to provide learning opportunities that integrates critical thinking skills with a wide variety of creative experiences in the field of Fashion Design. Very broadly, the Fashion Design Program seeks to provide students with the highest professional standards to advance a human-centered practice of Fashion design that contributes positively to the health, safety and well-being of people in local, regional and global contexts.

Objectives

The broad aim of Fashion design program is to provide a variety of transformative learning opportunities to shape creative, rational, socially and environmentally responsible Fashion design professionals. This thorough goal is supported through the following objectives:

- To develop the intellectual and practical skills of the student in the concepts, principles, development and realization of costumes design for the fashion industry, with a solid background of design theories, histories, environmental responsiveness, and standards; along with creative and critical thinking skills.

- To foster the development of an open minded and creative attitude, balanced with organizational skills and responsiveness to the rapidly changing needs of the fashion industry and to achieve users’ needs in various environments.

- To develop effective communication skills in relation to written, oral and visual language, including proficient knowledge of information technologies.

- To prepare the students with a range of professional and transferable skills for interacting with multiple disciplines in collaborative environments.

- Develop an understanding of business and marketing practices, creating ethical and responsible industry professionals.

Career Opportunities for Fashion Designers

Fashion designer, Clothing/textile technologist, Retail buyer, Retail manager, Retail merchandiser Textile designer, Visual merchandiser, Event organizer.




Successfully pass an entrance exam to measure the level of proficiency in English Language (or provide evidence of English Language abilities such as TOEFL, ILETS, SAT I. All applicants are required to attend an Interview / Oral Exam and submit a portfolio.

Degrees Offered

The faculty of Architecture – Design and Built Environment offers a Bachelor of Fashion Design Degree in the undergraduate program.


To receive a Bachelor Degree in Fashion Design, a student must satisfactorily complete the credit hours required and get an overall minimum grade point average (GPA) of 2.0 + ICDL.


59


Program




Elective Courses

Major Core Courses


FASD 5 13



Total: 81

9 108





Graduates of this program will acquire the essential knowledge and hands-on skills of successful practitioners in the field of Fashion Design. Six critical outcomes are identified as essentials for students to achieve the above mentioned aim. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to:

- Demonstrate a comprehensive, human-centered, socially, economically and environmentally responsive design through the application of critical and analytical problem-solving methods within the fashion design process.

- Formulate a complete understanding of the historical and theoretical fundamentals and universal principles of Fashion design.

- Demonstrate professional technical competence in a range of pattern cutting and garment construction methods and all aspects of fashion production.

- Communicate effectively and express ideas in writing, orally and employ a range of information technologies applications to visualize, articulate and promote outcomes and ideas.

- Acquire the necessary knowledge required for professional practice. Demonstrate consistent development of transferable skills in collaborating effectively in teams, and working with professional designers


60


Bachelor Degree in Fashion Design (108 Credit Hours)

First Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/Co-requisites







Second Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/Co-requisites

FASD 202 Fashion Design Studio I 4 Pre: ARTD201

FASD 204 Pattern Making 3


FASD 208 Computer Aided Drafting and Design for Fashion Design

3 Pre: ARTD207

FASD 210 Fashion Illustration 3

ARAB 001 Arabic Language & Literature 2

Third Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/Co-requisites

FASD 301 Fashion Design Studio II 4 Pre: FASD202

FASD 303 Sewing Techniques 3

FASD 305 History of Costume and Fashion Design 3

FASD 307 Draping I 3 Pre: FASD204




Fourth Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/Co-requisites

FASD 302 Fashion Design Studio III 4 Pre: FASD301

FASD 304 Textile Design 3

FASD 306 Accessories Design 3

FASD 308 Draping II 3 Pre: FASD204, FASD307

Elective (University General Requirements)1 2




61

Fifth Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/Co-requisites

FASD 401 Fashion Design Studio IV 4 Pre: FASD302

FASD 403 Grading 3 Pre: FASD208

FASD 405 Fashion Portfolio 3 Pre: FASD208

FASD 407 Internship in Fashion Design 1

Elective2 3



Sixth Semester (18 Credits) Crs. Pre-/Co-requisites

FASD 402 Fashion Design Senior Project 6 Pre: FASD401, FASD403

FASD 404 Fashion Design Professional Practice and Ethics 3

Elective2 3

Elective2 3



1 A total of 18 credits is required as General University Requirements; 5 credits are selected from the University Mandatory Courses list including ARAB 001 (2Cr.), ENGL 001 (2Cr.), BLAW 001 (1Cr.) and another 13 credits are selected from the University Elective Courses list



62

Common Requirements



Courses Crs.














63

STAGE ONE

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

ARTD 201 Design Fundamentals - 4 - 8 6 60 40 - 100




- 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

ARTD 209 Freehand Drawing - 3 1 4 2 70 30 - 100



Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

FASD 202 Interior Design Studio I ARTD 201 4 - 8 6 60 - 40 100

FASD 204 Pattern Making - 3 2 2 3 60 40 - 100

ARTD 206 History of Arts II ARTD 205 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

FASD 208

Computer Aided Drafting and Design for Fashion Design

ARTD 207 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

FASD 210 Fashion Illustration ARTD 209 3 2 2 2 60 40 - 100



L: LECTURE

St: STUDIO

T: TUTORIAL WORK

W: WRITTEN EXAM

O: ORAL EXAM

First Semester

Second Semester


64

STAGE TWO

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

FASD 301 Fashion Design Studio II FASD 202 4 - 8 - 60 - 40 100

FASD 303 Sewing Techniques - 3 1 4 - 60 - 40 100

FASD 305 History of Costume and Fashion Design

ARTD 206 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

FASD 307 Draping I - 3 2 2 - 70 - 30 100




Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

FASD 302 Fashion Design Studio III FASD 301 4 - 8 - 60 - 40 100

FASD 304 Textile Design - 3 2 2 - 60 - 40 100

FASD 306 Accessories Design - 3 2 2 - 60 - 40 100

FASD 308 Draping II FASD 204 FASD 307

3 2 2 - 60 - 40 100





L: LECTURE

St: STUDIO

T: TUTORIAL WORK

W: WRITTEN EXAM

O: ORAL EXAM

*

Third Semester

Fourth Semester


65

STAGE THREE

Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading

To

tal G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

FASD 401 Fashion Design Studio IV FASD 302

4 - 8 - 60 - 40 100

FASD 403 Grading FASD 208

3 2 2 - 60 - 40 100

FASD 405 Fashion Porfolio FASD 208

3 1 4 - 60 - 40 100

FASD 407 Internship In Fashion Design

- 1 - - - - - - Pass

Major Elective - 3 - - 2 60/70 40/30 - 100

University General Elective

- 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100


- 2 - - 2 60 40 - 100


Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Tea

ch

ing

Ho

urs

Ex

am

Du

rati

on

Grading T

ota

l G

rad

e

L St Hr T W O

FASD 402 Fashion Design Senior Project

FASD 401

6 - 12 - 60 - 40 100

FASD 404 Fashion Design Professional Practice and Ethics

- 3 - - 2 60 40 - 100

Major Elective - 3 3 - 2 60/70 40/30 - 100

Major Elective - 3 3 - 2 60/70 40/30 - 100


- 2 2 - 2 60 40 - 100


- 1 1 - 2 60 40 - 100


L: LECTURE

St: STUDIO

T: TUTORIAL WORK

W: WRITTEN EXAM

O: ORAL EXAM


Fifth Semester

Sixth Semester


66







ARTD309 - ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY (3Crs.: 3Lec) : The aim of this course is to help students to create more effective and appropriate environments that address human needs. The Course investigates the interrelationships among the physical environment, natural environment, individual differences, and human behavior and experience. Student are taught to explore the distinctive features of environmental psychology in relation to other forms of psychology, the origin of environmental psychology and how an understanding of human behavior influences and informs responsible design decision making. Emphasis is on the effect of design decisions on human behavior in interior and exterior spaces. COURSE DESCRIPTION FOR MANDATORY COURSES

FASD202 - FASHION DESIGN STUDIO I (4 CR.: 1 LEC; 6 STU): This course is an introduction to the fundamental creative process of Fashion design and a continuation of the Integrative Studios. The course will focus on drawing methods and design techniques - in the process of developing casual wear- to integrate material skills, techniques and concepts from other courses like patternmaking and sketching into project work. Students will begin to identify and understand collaboration, conceptual development and primary research within the context of Fashion design while building their capacities for investigation, critical thinking, and working across media. PREREQUISITE: ARTD201


67

FASD204 - PATTERN MAKING (3 CR.: 2 LEC; 2 STU): This Course develops an understanding of basic patterns and how to manipulate them respecting the fundamental rules of pattern making. By understanding pattern construction students will be able to gain a wider understanding of the use of the pattern for various sectors while developing basic concepts.

FASD208 - COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN FOR FASHION DESIGN (3Cr.: 2Lec; 2Lab): This course is designed to explore digital techniques of 2D and 3D Modeling and animation software such as Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop. .Students will manipulate basic blocks using the pattern design software (PDS) and create garment models, orders, and markers for production. In addition, they will explore advanced techniques and appropriate digital tools to help them quickly visualize and enhance their ability to efficiently create original ideas by computer. Special attention is given to utilizing digital media as support for visual and verbal communication through a review of 3-D modeling concepts, computer-aided rendering concepts, and digital image creation. Pre-req.: ARTD207

FASD210 - FASHION ILLUSTRATION (3CR.: 2 LEC; 2 SEC): This course introduces the techniques of fashion design sketches and illustrations. Students will learn how to sketch fashion figures, add garments, and hand-rendering of different materials using media like colored pencils and markers. Emphasis is on the fast sketching of models and garments with the rendering of different textures, Theoretical and practical aspects of color are studied in-depth including practical problems dealing with color harmony, trends, association, symbolism, optical illusion, notation and terminology. Pre-req.: ARTD209

FASD301 - FASHION DESIGN STUDIO II (4 CR.: 0 LEC; 8 STU): Based on the foundation of Fashion Design Studio I, the aim of this course is to develop students’ knowledge of the fundamentals of fashion design practice. Students will be moving towards a competency in the application of design and research processes while seeking appropriate technical 3D solutions to produce tailored garments along with fitting knits. Considerations are given to users of various age, culture, income, and physical abilities. In addition to understanding the fitting process, selection of textiles and weaves, color scheming, sewing, and selection of accessories. Pre-req.: FASD202.

FASD302 - FASHION DESIGN STUDIO III (4CR.: 0LEC; 8STU): An intermediate studio course where students continue to develop their personal research methodologies, design philosophy, processes and innovative approaches to materiality, as well as examine more complex design concepts in order to demonstrate a breadth of understanding of brand identity and user contexts. In this course, Consideration will be given to the visual curation of the fashion process in terms of personal identity; focusing on development of original designs and execution incorporating draping, drafting and flat pattern techniques. Pre-req.: FASD301.

FASD303 - SEWING TECHNIQUES (3 CR.: 1 LEC; 4 STU): This Course introduces students to the basics of sewing from a technical point of view. During the semester the student will learn how to use various sewing machines, both industrial and household. Students will also investigate and then execute all the basic stitches used in the apparel industry.

FASD304 - TEXTILE DESIGN (3 CR.: 2 LEC; 2 STU): This course is a comprehensive overview of the textile industry with a study of textile science, covering the design and production techniques of textiles and fabric styling. Emphasis is on dyeing, printing and finishing of textiles. students learn many different textile techniques such as swatch weaving, dyeing yarns, direct painting and wet painting, discharge print, block printing, silk screening, free motion stitching and yarns appliqué, beading, smocking, etc. FASD305 - HISTORY OF COSTUME AND FASHION DESIGN (3CR.: 3 LEC): This course reviews the developments in Costume and Fashion design around the world from early civilizations to the present and the factors that influence style changes. An in-depth study of fashion creators, trends, and the political climate that has created men’s and women’s fashion during the 20th century. Students should gain a greater perspective on the historical, social, economic, industrial precursors and contexts to contemporary fashion's design and trends. FASD306 - ACCESSORIES DESIGN (3CR.: 2 LEC; 2 STU):


68

This course is focused on the exploration of the fundamentals of female accessories design: bags, shoes, belts and hats. Students will acquire the basic skills needed to coordinate and develop their own collection portfolio and will get acquainted with the technical methodology to make accessories design. FASD307 - DRAPING I (3CR.: 2 LEC; 2 STU): Students are expected to demonstrate an understanding of the basic rules of draping and create sample garments. Sewing machines and basic stitches will also be used to create personal creative projects from the conceptual phase to the finished garment. Pre-req.: FASD204.

FASD308 -DRAPING II (3CR.: 2 LEC; 2 STU): This is an advanced draping course in which students will realize items focusing on the cuts and fit of garments. Students will work on bias drapes, collar and sleeve variations. In the second part of the course students will execute three given projects, for example a dress, a bustier and business attire, that the student interprets according to his/her style and then executes from start to finish in their own size. Pre-req.: FASD204, FASD307.

FASD401 - FASHION DESIGN STUDIO IV (4CR.: 0 LEC; 8 STU): An advanced studio course that aims to further develop students’ skills in design process and methods, as well as creative and critical skills to expands and broadens technical skills to develop a personal design philosophy in readiness for senior capstone experience, Includes couture evening wear techniques and research processes. Emphasis is placed on Economic and Environmental sustainability in their design work. Pre-req.:

FASD302 FASD402 -FASHION DESIGN SENIOR PROJECT (6CR.: 0 LEC; 12STU): In this course, students choose their own senior design project topic and work towards more self-directed learning. In this capstone course, students are required to incorporate the skills and knowledge gained throughout their studies to create a full garment line from conception to execution, to be presented and judged by experts during finals in student fashion show. Emphasis is placed on creativity, originality, technical skill and execution, as well as marketability Students work independently with tutor’s guidance to generate original and creative professional level design outcomes. Pre-req.: FASD401

FASD403 - GRADING (3 CR.: 2LEC; 2 STU): In this course, Industrial theory and grading techniques are examined with respect to traditional manual grading and CAD applications. Anthropometric data and grading charts are analyzed in relation to size ranges and garment types. Pre-req.: FASD208.

FASD404 - FASHION DESIGN PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE AND ETHICS (3 CR.: 3LEC.): This course develops students understanding of professional practice and Ethics in the fashion design industry. Students are introduced to industry practices such as unit and inventory control and pricing, Licensing and retail environments. Topics discussed also include professional ethics, social responsibility and Intellectual property such as trademarks, copyrights..etc. Emphasis is on the different roles within fashion business structure, career development options, fashion marketing and manufacturing.

FASD405 - FASHION PORTFOLIO (3 CR.: 1 LEC; 4 STU): This advanced fashion design course is structured in order to expand students’ knowledge and application of digital skills applicable to their personal digital professional portfolio that will add to the paper one. The students will work on their fashion collection, starting with their previous projects and adding concept boards, color story, fabrics, trims, illustrations and technical drawings in addition to the creation of a personal resume, business card and a digital brochure. Pre-req.: FASD208.


69

FASD407 - INTERNSHIP IN FASHION DESIGN (1 CR): Students are required to complete 120 hours of documented work experience between first and third year in a monitored professional environment to gain the necessary experience that compliments the program’s academic work. Work experience provides students with hands-on practical training in areas which are relevant to their specific interests and skills, and may include but are not limited to: working on fabric/garment prototyping, design assistance, window display, merchandising. Students should be exposed to various aspects of the Fashion design field and must present a report about their experience. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis.


70


Co

de

Course Title

Pre

req

uis

ite

Cre

dit

s

Teac

hin

g

Ho

urs

Exam

Du

rati

on

Grading

Tota

l Gra

de

L St Hr T W O

FASD 220 Semiotics - 3 2 2 2 60 40 - 100

FASD 221 Advanced Color Theory FASD 210 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100

FASD 222 Special Topics in Fashion Design

- 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

FASD 223 Sustainability in Fashion - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

FASD 224 Fashion Event Planning - 3 3 - 2 60 40 - 100

FASD 225 Fashion and Local Identity - 3 2 2 2 70 30 - 100


COURSE DESCRIPTION FASD220 - SEMIOTICS (3 CR.: 3 LEC): Students are introduced to the problems associated with perception, understanding, interpretation and creation of visual representations. Students study also an introduction to the language of representation, through the analysis and comprehension of concepts such as rhetoric, narrative, stereotype, Signs and their meaning, the construction of reality, mythology and ideology, semiotics of art and mass media.

FASD221 - ADVANCED COLOR THEORY (3CR.: 2LEC; 2STU): This course begins with a conceptual review of basic color theory and reviews issues studied in earlier courses such as color systems, interaction and harmony. The course will provide students with advanced knowledge in the following specialized areas: color and lighting, color psychology/emotions, symbolism, forecasting, branding, visual merchandising, graphic design, ethnic color usage, science, measurement, technology, management, and careers in color. Pre-req.: FASD210

FASD222 - SPECIAL TOPICS IN FASHION DESIGN (3CR.): This course provides study in Fashion design on a special topic. May be repeated for credit if topics vary.

FASD223 - SUSTAINABILITY IN FASHION (3CR.: 3LEC): In this course, students learn the social, cultural and environmental ramifications of our design decisions. Students use their skills as designers to develop creative solutions to technical challenges in moving our industry and our society towards sustainability. More specifically students will review the ecological crisis and how fashion/textiles contribute to this crisis.

FASD224 - FASHION EVENT PLANNING (3CR.: 3LEC): This course will focus on the theoretical and practical application of event planning, including the selection of a suitable location, budget planning, promotion and public relations. The course will also include developing working schedule, and working within assigned time frames.

FASD225 - FASHION AND LOCAL IDENTITY (3CR.: 3LEC): This course fosters a broad understanding of the complex relationships between dress and culture in the non-Western world. Students should gain a greater perspective on the historical, social, economic, industrial precursors that has created men’s and women’s fashion trends in the Middle East. These geographical and cultural variations reflect a complex set of relations between historical change and clothing practices as markers of changing identity over time, including differences relating to gender, age, wealth, and religious status.


71


Mandatory Courses







FASD 202 Fashion Design Studio I ARTD201

FASD 204 Pattern Making -

ARTD 206 Computer Aided Design for Fashion Design ARTD207

FASD 208 Fashion Illustration ARTD209

FASD 210 Fashion Design Studio II FASD202

FASD 301 Fashion Design Studio III FASD301

FASD 303 Sewing Techniques -

FASD 305 Textile Design -

FASD 307 History of Costume and Fashion Design -

ARTD 309 Accessories Design -

FASD 302 Draping Design I FASD204

FASD 304 Draping Design II FASD204, FASD307

FASD 306 Fashion Design Studio IV FASD302

FASD 308 Fashion Design Senior Project FASD401

FASD 401 Grading FASD208

FASD 403 Fashion Design Professional Practice and Ethics -

FASD 405 Fashion Portfolio FASD208

FASD 407 Internship in Fashion Design -

FASD 402 Fashion Design Studio I FASD401, FASD403

FASD 404 Pattern Making -

Elective Courses:


FASD 220 Semiotics -

FASD 221 Advanced Color Theory FASD 210

FASD 222 Special Topics in Fashion Design -

FASD 223 Sustainability in Fashion -

FASD 224 Fashion Event Planning -

FASD 225 Fashion and Local Identity -


72

Fashion Design Program Academic Program Sheet


73

V. Course File Summary


74

Architecture

ARCH271. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS: VISUAL STUDIES

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: Architectural Design Fundamentals: Visual Studies Code: ARCH271 Hours Lecture: 02 Tutorial: 08 Credit: 06 Prerequisites: Academic Year / Level: First Term: Fall Specialization: Architectural Engineering

1- COURSE DESCRIPTION AND OVERALL AIMS:

The course aims to provide the specialized knowledge and develop the required skills needed to support, enthuse and inspire students during their early architectural design experimentations and throughout their future practice.

Within this overall aim, the course attempts to build-up the students' capabilities to:

a. Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and competencies that enable them to work efficiently -as architects- in geographically dislocated collaborative design environment.

b. Develop consciousness with a familiarity of spatial analysis, natural and formal ordering systems, design process methodologies that relate to Architectural Design.

c. Develop individual formal experiences within two dimensional and three dimensional spatial contexts d. Understand the fundamental role of orthographic projections in designing forms and buildings. e. Develop an initial balance between the creative/imaginative and rational/ practical thinking skills necessary

for the effective design thinking and Architectural Design process. f. Acquire the problem solving abilities required to solve problems relevant to Design and more especially

Architectural Design. g. Accomplish an initial development of professional attitude and skills in relation to communication,

teamwork, project planning and management, and responsibility for lifelong learning. h. Demonstrate an introductory understanding of the formal, environmental, social and technological

influences, which relate to Architectural Design. i. Have an opportunity to put theory into practice via work-based learning.


75

2- COURSE OUTLINE:

Week No. 1 Introduction and Course Outline – Organizational Instructions – Tools.

Introduction to Design and the physical environment

Week No. 2 Architectural drafting techniques, and the right way for using architectural drafting tools.

The architectural project – Design and the design process

Week No. 3 Feedback Feedback

Week No. 4 Architectural drafting techniques, and the development of personal performance.

Design elements / Learning how to see

Week No. 5 Feedback Feedback

Week No. 6 Orthographic projections, two dimensional representation

Design generators / Design Patterns

Week No. 7 7th week exam

Week No. 8 Orthographic projections, plans, sections, elevations

Architecture visual delight ( light/ texture/ materiality/ wayfinding)

Week No. 9 feedback feedback

Week No. 10 Architectural projection conversion Integrated Architecture ( inspirational examples)

Week No. 11 feedback Feedback + Final Exercise (experiencing Architecture)

Week No. 12 Architectural projection 12th week evaluation

Week No. 13 Architectural projection Experiencing Architecture

Week No. 14 Architectural projection

Week No. 15 Final exam


76

All intended learning outcomes (ILO) are aligned with core ARB/RIBA criteria, utilizing all or in part the

following five thematic headings: Design, Technology and environment, Cultural Context, Management

practice and law, and Communication. Each theme utilizes the terms awareness, knowledge, understanding

and ability as embedded outcomes [key skills] to indicate the level of achievement required in each theme.

(a) DESIGN (ARB/RIBA part1: GC1.1 / GC1.3 / GC2.2/ GC3.3/ GC6.3)

(a 1) - An awareness of the role of architect in making suitable architectural drawings.

(a 2) - An understanding of the fundamental principles and concepts underlying orthographic, paraline and lineal projection

(a 3) - An understanding of the role of drawings in the research and analysis phases of the design process.

(a 4) - An understanding of the qualities that make a drawing an appropriate and clear communication

(a 5) - An Ability to develop a design that addresses and synthesizes stated goals, constraints and requirements.

(a 6) - An awareness of the holistic process of architectural design

(a 7) - An ability to make cognitive judgement regarding the hierarchical relationship of spaces, and associated volumetric organisation.

(a 8) - An awareness of the totality of the creative design process, from inception, design development, to fabrication and construction.

(a 9) - An understanding of the basic formal concepts and relationship.

(a 10) - An understanding of the value of the conscious application of the formal concepts to creation, development and communication of ideas.

(a 11) - An ability to adopt an open-minded approach in the appraisal of design issues, requirements and opportunities.

(a 12) - An ability to generate alternatives and develop solutions to defined design problems.

(b) TECHNOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT (ARB/RIBA part1: GC1.2 / GC5.2/ GC8.3)

(b 1) - A preliminary understanding of the physical properties and characteristics of specific materials, components and systems, and the impact of specification choices.

(b 2) - An awareness of the opportunities and limitations of material properties on its structural capability on different scales (model making and one unit scale).

(b 3) - An ability to design three-dimensional form and spaces that experientially respond to natural and built site characteristics (sun location, glare, heat weather conditions, etc.)

Intended Learning Outcomes of the Course (ILO):


77

(c) CULTURAL CONTEXT (ARB/RIBA part1: GC2.2 / GC2.3/ GC5.1/ GC5.3)

(c 1) - A knowledge of the creative application of fine arts and other such work to studio design projects, in terms of their conceptualisation and representation.

(c 2) - An understanding of the need to critically review precedents relevant to the function, organisation and technology strategy of design proposals.

(c 3) - An awareness of the need to inspire and aspire users in physical environments.

(c 4) - An understanding of the way in which buildings fit into their local social, cultural and physical context.

(d) COMMUNICATION (ARB/RIBA part1: GC1.1 / GC3.3)

(d 1) - An awareness of the implication and applicability of „scale‟ in methods of representation.

(d 2) - An awareness of the relevance and applicability of various methods of visual representation.

(d 3) - An understanding of the value of representing information in graphic form.

(d 4) - An ability to present building design projects of diverse scale, complexity and type in a variety of contexts, using a range of media, and in response to a brief.

(d 5) - An ability to use conventional (3D model - making) as well as non-conventional techniques of architectural representation.

(d 6) - An ability to verbally present in clear manner the essential goals and concepts that underlay a design.

(d 7) - An ability to identify in writing specific things learned in the process of developing and communicating a design.

(d 8) - An ability to utilize a range of media, tools, techniques and pictorial systems to represent existing and imagined objects and environments on two- dimensional surfaces.

(e) MANAGEMENT PRACTICE AND LAW (ARB/RIBA part1: GC6.2)

(e 1) - An awareness of the process of evaluation and critical appraisal of one’s own work and the work of others.

An ability to work in collaboration with other students as members of a design team.

4- TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS:

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, seminars, directed reading, videos, computer assisted learning, case studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, research paper, workshops.

5- FACILITIES AND TEACHING MATERIALS:

Design studio (modeling & Drafting)

Lecture hall ( Lectures, Case study, Videos, tutorials)


78

6- STUDENT ASSESSMENT METHODS, SCHEDULE AND GRADING:

Asses No.

Type To Assess Start Week No.

Subm. Week No.

1

Mo

du

le A

Sheets

Drafting Skills: Pencil- Freehand and Tools

01 03

15% 2

Orthographic Projection- 2D Representation

05 08

7

Mo

du

le C

Sheets

Application exercise planar shades & shadows

09 12

8 Volumetric shade and shadows exercises

12 14

9-10

Mo

du

le B

Design process , Color, lines and 2D compositions

01 02

10% 11 Design elements and vocabularies, 3d Composition

02 03

12-13 Design principles in 3D compositions

04 06

Design formal orders / 12th week evaluation

06 11 15%

14 Constraints: Rationality in Composition

07 09 5%

15-16 Interpreting external and internal constraints in design compositions

09 11 5%

Early architectural experimentation (comprehensive)

10 14 10%

7 Assessment 7th 7th week assessment :student based learning

7 7 10%

16 Exam Final exam 15 15 30%

Performance record 1 15

Total 100%

7- LIST OF REFERENCES:

Course notes:

Each student has an A3 portfolio contains: Course outline: (Lecture Titles, list of references, and Assignments Titles) – Sheets - Projects briefs –Researches – class sketches – A3 hard copy of the submitted sheets.

Essential Books (Textbooks):


79

Ching F. D. K. (1996-2007). Architecture Form. Space and order. 2nd& 3rd Edition-Van

Nostrand Reinhold, New York.

Edwards, B. (2008). Understanding architecture through drawing. Taylor & Francis.

Farrelly, L. (2012). The fundamentals of architecture. Bloomsbury Publishing.

Fullmer, D. (2014). Studio Companion Series Presentation Basics. A&C Black.

Fraser, I., & Henmi, R. (1993). Envisioning architecture: an analysis of drawing. John Wiley & Sons.

Neufert, E., Neufert, P., & Kister, J. (2012). Architects' data. John Wiley & Sons.

Recommended Books:

Callender, J. H. (1997 or latest edition). Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design

Data. New York: McGraw-Hili Book Company.

Linton H. (1996). Color Model Environments (Color and Light in Three-Dimensional

Design). Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York.

Ramsey C. G. & Hoke, J. R. (2007). Architectural Graphic Standards. 11th Edition, John,

Willey and Sons Inc., USA.

Magazines:

Architectural Design Magazines Series.

Architectural Review Magazines Series.

Domus Magazines Series.


80

ARCH273. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION I

Course Code / Title: ARCH273. Building Construction 1 Credits: 2

Instructor: Assoc. Prof. Dr. Baher I. Farahat

Course Hours: 4 Hours/Week Course Duration:14 Weeks

Academic Semester: First Semester Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory Course (2hr. Lecture, -- 2hrs. Studio)

Location: Room Number A209– Floor Number B1

Time: Thursday 08:00am to 11:50am COURSE OBJECTIVES The course provides the student with introduction to the elements and components of construction, and the basic building materials and their properties. Also the course provides :

Classification of Building Types and Categories.

Structural Systems and Foundation Types.

General Fundamentals and principles of architectural construction.

General applications and characteristics of Materials.

Overview of materials techniques and procedures.

The course Aim to enable students to have an opportunity to :

Improving manual drafting skills and construction drawings techniques and symbols.

Improving Basic knowledge for construction materials properties.

Applying the construction knowledge in design.

Training Students for continuous Learning,

Improving researching, presentation skills, and professional communication with the real construction field and market.

LEARNING ACTIVITIES

Power point presentations.

Applied researches (about the basic building materials and their properties).

Evaluating the latest technical innovations applicable to construction drawings techniques.

COURSE OUTLINE

The course addresses the following topics:

Classification of Building Types and Categories.

Structural Systems.

Foundation Types.

Construction Materials.


81

Week No. 1 Introduction to Building Construction: Architectural Work Steps ( Architect, Client, Contractor)

Week No. 2 Architectural Symbols and Figures, Construction Materials

Week No. 3 Brick Work (1): Brick Types, English Bond, Flemish Bond

Week No. 4 Brick Work (2): Bricks Bond, English Bond, Flemish Bond

Week No. 5 Construction Systems (1): Traditional construction systems (Bearing Wall system),

Week No. 6 Construction Systems (2): Traditional Construction Systems (Bearing Wall system), Detailed Wall Sections

Week No. 7 Construction Systems (3): Skeleton Construction System

Week No. 8 Construction Systems (3): Skeleton Construction System

Week No. 9 Substructure (Foundations): Surface Foundations (Linear, Separate,), Deep foundations

Week No. 10 Insulation Work: Heat Insulation, Water Insulation Joints: Expansion Joints, Settlement Joints (Main Sections)

Week No. 11 Ceiling Types and Structure Systems: Vaults, Domes, Simple Beam, Flat Slab, Hollow Blocks, Frames, .....

Week No. 12 12th week evaluation

Week No. 13 Construction Systems (4): Steel Construction System

Week No. 14 Wall Details: Masonry Walls – Windows sills, thresholds and Arches. Openings, Lintels, Sills, and Arches

Final Exam


82

EVALUATION

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1

Individual and group assignments to be assessed

Assignments/assessment (1st week : 7th week)

3 6 15%

70%

2 7th Week Exam/Total assessment

Total Assessment 7 7 15%

3

Individual and group assignments to assess

Assignments/assessment (8thst week : 12th week) 8 11 20%

4 12th Week Total assessment

Total Assessment 12 12 20%

5 Final Exam 30%

Total 100% 100%

LIST OF REFERENCES Course Notes: - Each student has an A4 portfolio contains: course outline: ( Lecture Titles, List of References, and Assignments Titles) - Research Briefs - Researches - Reports - A3.

- Each student should attend the theoretical and analytical lectures which help him to apply the construction sheets in next semester.

- Training students for continuous learning by provide each lectures slide with references.

- Each students group should make a research for a title of the construction materials and present it for other groups to improve researching, and presentation skills.

- Compatible with design by applying the collecting and applicable knowledge which have got it from lectures, site - visits, and researches in the design projects.


CHING Francis D.K., Building Construction Illustrated- 4th edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York 2008.

Chudley R. and Greeno R., Building Construction Handbook 8th Edition, Elsevier, Great Britain, 2008.

Hegger Manfred, Construction Materials Manual ( Construction Manuals Series ), Birkhauser GmbH, 2006.

W.B.Mckay, Building Construction- Fifth Edition Volume (1,2,3,4,5)

Recommended Books:

Building Construction Metric Vol. 1-2-3

Building Construction Illustrated "Third Edition"

Techniques Of Staircase Construction

Fundamentals of Building Construction Materials and Methods

Construction Technology – Second Edition Vol. 1-2


83

Mitchell's Finishes

Mitchell's External Components Vol. 1-2

Fundamentals of Building

Architectural Graphic Standards

Standard handbook of architectural engineering

Addington M. & Schodek D.L. (2004). Smart Materials and Technologies in Architecture. Architectural Press.

Bell V.B.& Rand P. ( 2006 ) . Materials for Architectural Design. Laurence King.

Deplazes A. (2008). Costructing Architecture : Maerials, Processes, Structures. 2nd Extended edition, Birkhauser Verlag AG.

Foster J.S. & Harington R. (2007) Mitchell`s Structure & Fabric - Part 2, 7th Edition ( Mitchell`s series ), Prentice Hall, UK.

Course Instructor: Dr. Baher I. Farahat

Dean of Faculty: Prof. Ibtehal Youssef

Date: 01 / 09 / 2017


84

ARCH275. HISTORY of ARCHITECTURE I

Course Code / Title: ARCH275 / History of Architecture I Instructors: Dr. Massimiliano Gotti Porcinari Hours: 2 Lecture: 2 Tutorial: 0 Credit: 2 Duration: 14 weeks Prerequisites: None Academic Semester: 1st Module Info: Mandatory Course Specialization: Architectural Engineering

Course Objectives

The course provides a general survey of cultural, aesthetic, and socio-political factors that have affected and

shaped architecture from Prehistoric times through the end of Roman era. With emphasis on major forms of construction and artistic expressions that shaped Egyptian, Mesopotamian, Greek and Roman architecture and covers.

Egyptian Architecture: the Old Kingdom, the Middle and New Kingdoms.

Mesopotamia: Summer, Babylon and Assyria.

Classical Period: (Greek and Roman) including the Aegean, Greek, Hellenic and Hellenistic as well as Etruscan and Roman periods

Within this overall aim, the course helps students to:

Develop an understanding of the interrelation and influence between the organizations of the built environment and the social, political, cultural and technological aspects that shape the architectural character in the Ancient World and Classical Period.

Provide the student with knowledge of environmental responsiveness via underlining materials and techniques used in varied types of architecture.

Learning Activities

The course is delivered through lectures, reading, videos, case studies, research-based teaching materials and methods, class works including exams.

Course Calendar / Schedule

Week No.1

Definitions of: Architecture, History of Architecture, Architectural Character and Style; Influences: Environmental and Cultural factors. Panoramic review of styles from Prehistoric to Post-modern architecture.

Week No.2

PREHISTORIC ARCHITECTURE, Paleolithic, Mesolithic, Neolithic Ages. Birth of civilization. Prehistoric settlements. Megalithic architecture in Europe.

Week No.3

EGYPTIAN ARCHITECTURE: Social and Cultural Background: (Influences: geographical, geological, historical, social and religious

Old Kingdom: 3rd dynasty, Civil, Religious and Funerary architecture, Complex of King Zoser, Saqqara.

Week No.4 Old Kingdom: 4th dynasty: Pyramids of Guizeh; 5th. & 6th.dynasties

Middle Kingdom: Civil, Religious and Funerary architecture: Tomb of Mentuhutep II, Tombs of Beni Hassan.


85

Week No.5 New Kingdom: Civil and Religious architecture: TEMPLES: Temple of Amoon, , Karnak. Funerary architecture: Rock Hewn Temples (Abu Simbel, Nefertari).

New Kingdom: Funerary Temples: Hatshepsut.

Week No.6 MESOPOTAMIAN ARCHITECTURE: Social and Cultural Background. Civil, Religious and Funerary architecture; Architectural Character. Mesopotamian Art

Week No.7 Week 7 Exam and first presentation of Sketch book. (Individual)

Week No.8

GREEK ARCHITECTURE: Social and Cultural Background. Polis Archaic Greek Architecture: Religious architecture: Evolution of temples. ORDERS: Doric, Ionic and Corinthian. TEMPLES: The Heraion of Samo. The Basilica, Paestum. The Heraion of Olimpya. The Temple of Aphaia, Aegina.

Week No.9

HELLENIC ARCHITECTURE Religious architecture: The Temple of Zeus, Olympia. The Acropolis, Athens: The Parthenon, the Erechtheion, Propylaea. Civil architecture: THEATERS: Theatre of Thorikos, Theatre of Epidauros;Tower of the winds, Athens. The Monument of Lysikrates, Athens. Funerary architecture: Mausoleum at Halicarnassus

Week No.10 HELLENESTIC ARCHITECTURE Religious Architecture - TEMPLES: The Temple of Artemis Ephesus. The Temple of Apollo, Didyma. Tholos of Delphi, Tholos of Epidaurus ALTERS: Alter of Zeus, Pergamum. Civil architecture: AGORA: The Agora of Athens. STOA: Stoa of Atalos. HOUSES: Hellenestic houses, PHAROS: Pharos of Alexandria. POLIS: Priene, Pergamum, Alexandria.

Week No.11 ROMAN ARCHITECTURE Social and Cultural Background: Introduction: Birth of Roma, geographical condition in Italy, Tiberina island and 7 hills of Roma. Etruscan Period and Magna Graecia. Religious architecture: sacred area of Argentina Square, Roma. Differences between Greek temples and Roman temples, wood and marble, main direction Materials and construction techniques: concrete or opus caementicium: opus incertum, opus reticulatum opus latericium. Wall, arch, vault and dome

Week No.12 presentation of A1 Sheets and Physical models (Group Work)

Week No.13 submission of Sketch book (Individual) ROMAN ARCHITECTURE Social and Cultural Background: architectural experimentation of the ancient Romans: Opus caementicium: from technical improvement to expressive technique of inner architectural space: Sanctuary of Fortuna Primigenia, Palestrina (curved barrel vaults) Sanctuary of Jupiter Anxur, Terracina (cryptoporticus space) Domus Aurea, Roma (octagonal room) conquest of inner space: Pantheon, temple of Minerva Medica, Mausoleum of Costantina, Roma. FORUMS: Republic Forum, Imperial Forums. HOUSES: Domus and Insula. ENTERTAINMENT PLACES: Amphitheatre the Coliseum, Roma. Baths of Caracalla, Roma PUBLIC BUILDING: Basilicas TRIUMPHAL ARCHES: Arch of Septimius Severus, The Arch of Constantine, Rome.

Week No.14 general revision

TBA Final Exam.


86

Course Policies

Attendance:

5- Teaching and Learning Methods

The course comprises a series of lectures, and the material discussed and presented is recorded and illustrated in a history notebook, which forms the basis for assessment and serves as a future reference for students. Students must present a research on a given topic

Evaluation

Procedures used Subm

Week No.

Weighting of Asses. Asses No. To assess

1 Notebook Knowledge and understanding

7 – 13 20%

2 Week 7 exam.

Knowledge and understanding 7 20%

3

Week 12 Evaluation.

A1 Sheets and Physical Model

Knowledge and understanding 14 20%

4

Final exam. All skills TBA 40%

Total

100%

Books available at the BAU library:

• CRUIKSHANK, Dan, Sir Banister Fletcher's A History of Architecture, 20thedition, Architectural Press Books, 1996.

• CHING Francis D.K, JARZOMBEK Mark, PRAKASH V. A Global History of Architecture, John Wiley & Sons. Inc, 2011.

• KOSTOF, Spiro, A History of Architecture, Oxford University Press, New York, 1985. • MOFFET, Marian, FAZIO, Michael, WODEHOUSE, Laurence, A World History of Architecture, Laurence

Publishing, London, 2003. • TRACHTENBERG Marvin, HYMAN Isabelle, Architecture From Prehistory to Post modernity, 2nd.edition

Prentice Hall, Inc. Publishers 1986. • WATKIN David, A History of Western Architecture, Laurence King Publishing, London

Course Instructor: Dr. Massimiliano Gotti Porcinari

Dean of Faculty: Prof. Ibtihal El Bastawissi

Date: 14/ 02 / 2017


87

ARCH277. CAD DRAWING

Course Code / Title: ARCH 277 CAD Drawing Credit: 2

Prerequisite: none

Instructors: Dr. Kareem Galal Email: [email protected] Office Hours: M: 10:00 – 10:50 W: 13:00 – 15:50 Course Hours: Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 2 Course Duration: 3 Hrs

Academic Semester: Fall Semester: 1

Module Info: Location: Lecture: Room A210 - Studio: Lab101102

Time: Lecture (section 1): F 08:00 – 09:00

Lecture (section 2): F 13:00 – 14:00

Tutorial (section 1): F 09:00 – 11:00

Tutorial (section 2): F 14:00 – 16:00

1. Course Description & Overall Aims

Basic computer aided drafting skills using the latest release of CAD software including: file management, Cartesian coordinate system, drawing set-ups, drawing aids, layer usage, drawing 2D geometric shapes, editing objects, array, text applications, dimensions and dimension variables, paper space and viewports, templates, external references, and printing/plotting. 3D AutoCAD features and commands including: wireframe construction, surface modeling, solid modeling, extrusions, Boolean operations, 3D editing, and 3D views. The course strives to enable students to:

Understand the use of the different tools used in drafting. Learn the basic functions of Computer Aided Drafting software. Use the basic manual tools traditionally used in production drawings. Maintain a high standard of quality for drawings produced. Appreciate the concept of scale and proportion. Understand the representation of three-dimensional objects presented on a two-dimensional plane. Produce drawings for architectural projects. Produce working drawings for architectural projects Create drawings of basic objects in a three dimensional (3D) environment.

2. Intended Learning Outcomes of the course (ILO)

(f) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

(f 1) - Understand the nature and operations of CAD Drawing;

(g) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

(g 1) - Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the CAD Drawing;

(g 2) - Analyse and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to CAD Drawing;

(g 3) - Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to

CAD Drawing;

(g 4) - Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the CAD Drawing sector and debate

the potential benefits.

(h) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:


88

(c 7) - Apply the conventions of architectural representation to two dimensional and three-dimensional

graphics and to computer generated and physical models.

(d) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:

(d 3) - Apply a range of communication methods and media to present design proposals clearly and

effectively.

3. Course Calendar/Schedule

Week No. 1 02-09-2017

Course outline - Course policies - Introduction & drawing tools - AutoCAD interface - File management - Drawing units and drawing limits. The X-Y-Z coordinate system - Drawing lines and basic geometric shapes - Using the computer mouse for zooming and panning.

Week No. 2 09-09-2017

Basic editing tools: Move, copy, rotate. Advanced editing tools: The Offset command - The Array command - Create and insert blocks.

Week No. 3 23-09-2017

Organizing drawings with layers, colors…etc - Properties of lines.

Week No. 4 30-09-2017

Creating Text & Drawing Dimensions: Add and edit text and dimension lines.

Week No. 5 07-10-2017

Creating dimension styles.

Week No. 6 14-10-2017

Plotting and printing a drawing: Model space - paper space – viewports - templates. External references - Concept of scale and proportion.

Week No. 7 21-10-2017

Exam-1

Week No. 8 28-10-2017

Specifying 3D Coordinates: Surface modeling - 3D editing (3D move - 3D rotate - 3D views).

Week No. 9 04-11-2016

3D solid modeling: create drawings of 3D basic objects.

Week No. 10 11-11-2017


Week No. 11 18-11-2017


Week No. 12 25-11-2017

Exam-2

Week No. 13 02-12-2017

Representation of three-dimensional objects on a two-dimensional plane.

Week No. 14 09-12-2017

Produce drawings and working drawings for architectural projects

Week No. 15 Final Exam

Note: Alterations to the above plan and timetable are possible according to the actual progress of work and assessment as monitored by the course teaching staff. Therefore, interim submissions and evaluation could be required and their outcome communicated to the students to provide them with further guidance.

4. Course Policies

Student attendance must be at least 80% of course hours

Students must submit corrected sheets by teaching assistants with final submissions to evaluate academic performance and assure attendance.

Assignments must be handed in at the beginning of the lecture period. 5 points are deducted from each deadline missed. An additional 5 points are deducted from every late day. Students Work that has not been developed in consultation with the instructor will not be accepted. The work progress and


89

development is an important element that determines the assignment grade. Assignments should be submitted as hardcopies and as softcopies (CAD drawing file & PDF files); 5 points are deducted from the assignment grade for not submitting the PDF files. 50 points are deducted from the assignment grade for not submitting the CAD Drawing file.

The Final Exam is comprehensive (it includes all lecture content and tutorial work covered during the semester).

Class Participation: The Class participation grade is determined according to the below mentioned criteria: 1- Class attendance: Students are encouraged to attend classes, class attendance by itself is not enough to determine the class participation grade (please see active/positive class participation below) 2- Active/positive class participation: A student positive participation to a class session is appreciated. Active / positive class participation includes but is not limited to: Taking notes during a lecture session, asking interesting questions, answering the instructor questions, proving that lecture content was studied … 3- Class assignments performance and submission: A class assignment is introduced to the students at the beginning of a class session. A class assignment is performed by the students during the class session in which it is introduced and may be accomplished during the succeeding class sessions. Class assignments are graded but and submission affect the class participation grade. 4- Late attendance is penalized (please refer to the below mentioned Attendance policy) 5- Negative class participation: disruption and interference with the delivery of the course content are penalized.

5. Student Assessment Methods

Asses no.

Type To Assess Start week no.

Subm. Week

no.

Subm. Date

Weighting of asses.

1 Assignment 1

2D Tools

Knowledge base, intellectual qualities,

professional skills Constructional skills

1 6 21 Oct.

2017 15%

70%

2 Assignment 2

Exam - 1



7 7 28 Oct.

2017 15%

3 Assignment 3

3D Tools



8 11 25 Nov.

2017 15%

4 Assignment 4

Exam - 2



11 12 02 Dec.

2017 15%

5 Assignment

3D Tools Revision



13 14 16 Dec.

2017 10%


90

6 Final Exam



1 TBA TBA 30% 30%

Total 100%

6. ist of references

Shrock, Steve Heather (2014). Beginning AutoCAD 2015. South Norwlk, CT : Industrial Press, Inc. (eBook Academic Collection (EBSCOhost)). Course Instructors: Dr. Kareem Galal Dean of Faculty: Prof. El-Bastawissi Ibtihal Date: 13/02/2017


91

ARCH291. ARCHITECURAL DESIGN I

Course Code / Title: ARCH291. Architectural Design I

Instructor: Associate Prof. Dr/ Baher I. Farahat,

Hours: 10 Lecture: 0 Studio: 10 Credit: 5

Prerequisites: ARCH271– ARCH272 Academic Year / Level: 2nd Level Year: 2017-2018 Term: 3 Specialization: Architectural Engineering Location: Level 2 Studio Time: Monday 11:00 to 15:50 Wednesday 08:00 to 12:50 COURSE OBJECTIVES This course involves introductory studio problems in architectural design with highlighting on Fundamentals of Architectural Design Process. Design projects requiring theoretically informed and practically viable architectural design solutions. Designs in response to specific aims including modular design, architectural space grouping, articulation of spaces and functional relationships. The course intends to develop the students’ abilities to produce alternative ideas and solutions to projects with special emphasis on human needs and environmental conditions. The course aims to: - To experience, as a first design studio, projects involving a close fit to human requirements, and containing a

full dimension of design experience.

- To develop an awareness of the design process, including: The gathering of design data (library research – field research); The establishment of design and evaluation criteria; The generation and testing of design proposals; and The communication of those proposals.

- To develop abilities to modulate space in response to human dimensions and perceptions.

- To develop abilities to organize and articulate space that satisfies both functional and aesthetic requirements - Develop an ability to initiate research relevant to architecture design. - Emphasize the understanding of functional relationships and the use of space. - Encourage creativity in spatial and building design. - Encourage visual communication through drawing and model making. LEARNING ACTIVITIES




COURSE OUTLINE

Week No. 1

Project 1 (7 Weeks)

- Introduction, definitions, , design process, space adjacency analysis, analyzing home environments design


92

Week No. 2 - Research & case studies review: Discussing similar examples, Bubble diagram, Zoning….

- Working in Context (Analyzing the Physical Environment) - Research Submission

Week No. 3 - Conceptual (Reflection) Site & concept generator - Conceptual (Reflection) Site & concept Generator

Week No. 4 - Structural Concerns - Architectural Drawings

Week No. 5 - Follow up

Week No. 6 - Design Development - Pre-Final Submission of the project including all drawings

Week NO. 7 - Final Follow up - Final Submission of the first Project.

Week No. 8

Project 2 (7 Weeks) - Introduction, definitions, , design process, space adjacency analysis, analyzing

home environments design

Week No.9,10 - Research & case studies review: Discussing similar examples, Bubble diagram, Zoning….

- Design concepts Architectural concerns, Site analysis Programme, main Bubble Diagram, Matrix and Zoning by scale.

- Working in Context :Analyzing the Physical Environment

Week No. 11 - Following up ground floor plan (plans must represent concepts, module, functions, structural systems, and impact of site context)

- Design development.

Week No. 12 - Following up plans with 3d study models presenting

Week No. 13 - Pre-Final Submission of the project - Following up plans, sections, elevations, and 3d model

Week No. 14 - Final Submission

COURSE POLICIES

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, seminars, class activities, videos, studio project work, computer assisted learning, studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, workshops, and related projects.

EVALUATION

ASSES NO. TYPE TO ASSESS START

WEEK NO. SUBM. WEEK NO.

SUBM. DATE WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 First project 1st 7th 25%

2 Second Project 8th 14th 35%

3 Jury 40%

Total 100%

LIST OF REFERENCES (a) Course notes:

Notes are handed out to the students throughout the semester. (b) Essential books (textbooks):


93

NEUFERT, Ernst – Architects’ Data – Blackwell, 1980.

CROSBIE, Michael j. - Time-Saver Standards for Building Type – McGraw-Hill, 2001.

White, Edward T – Space adjacency analysis – Architectural Media Ltd, 1986.

Laseau, Paul. Graphic Thinking for Architects and Designers, second edition.

(c) Recommended books:

Donna, P. Duerk, Architectural Programming Information Management for Design.

CALLENDER John Hancock - Time Saver Standards for Standards for Architectural Design Data - 6th ed. -

McGraw – Hill Singapore - 1982.


94

Instructor: Dean of Faculty: Associate Prof. Dr/ Baher I. Farahat, Prof. Ibtehal Youssef El Bastwesy

Date: 1/9/2017


95

ARCH293. Building Construction III

Course Code / Title: ARCH293. Building Construction III Credits: 3

Instructor: Dr. Osama Mohamed Omar, Dr. Masemalliano, Mr. Mohamed Ghazal, Mrs. Nahed hamawi, Ms.

Rasha Sukariah

Course Hours: 6 Hours/Week Course Duration:15Weeks

Academic Semester: 3th Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory Course (1 hr. Lecture, 4 hrs. Studio)

Location: Level 2 Studio – B2

Time: Thursday 8:00 to 2:00

Course Objectives

This course presents a broad perspective of building construction methods, materials and processes. Lectures and exercises focus on the objective on the objective of enabling students to acquire good knowledge in the field of Architectural Construction, and gain insight into the range of typical components of the building and details of such elements as opening and staircases. It includes review of various systems of floor, wall, and roof including the study of structural properties, and construction techniques and materials. Indoor finishing materials and development of finishing schedule. Exercise based class simulating the understanding of construction including analysis and applications of standards, relationships, and material review and selection. Development of construction drawings and detailing.

Learning Activities




COURSE OUTLINE


Typical Components of the Building.

Types and details for the Staircases.

Types and details for the Doors & Windows.

How to apply the working drawing for (Section and Elevation).

WEEK STAGE LABEL & DESCRIPTION

1 - Introduction + course outline + general information - How to apply the working drawing (plans, sections, and elevations) with all indicators.

2 - Floor systems (one way slab - tow way slab - waffle slab - flat plate)

3 - Wall systems (masonry walls -solid wall -cavity wall -retaining wall)


96


4 - Roof systems (flat roof - sloping roof - reinforced concrete roof slab - precast concrete roof system - etc...)

5 - Finishing Work 1 (plaster over masonry - plaster ceiling - gypsum board application)

6 - Finishing Work 2 (ceramic tiles details)

7 7th Week Exam

8 - Finishing Work 3 (wooden floor)

9 Types and Details for Staircases - Group research (modeling)

10 Staircases: Drawing Plans, Section and Details.

11 Types and Details for Doors & Windows.

12 Doors & Windows: Drawing Plans, Section and Details.

13 Final Portfolio Submission.

14 Revision

15 Final Exam

Note : Alteration to the above plan and timetable are possible according to the actual progress of work and assessment as monitored by the course teaching staff. Therefore, interim submission and evaluation could be required and their outcome communicated to the students to provide them with further guidance.

Course Policies

This course combines theoretical lectures with studio-based teaching methods. Learning the technical basics

and fundamentals involves the combination of taught materials in lectures, individual research, group work

and applied exercises. Work and assignments are normally scheduled and provide ongoing monitoring and

evaluation of students output as well as their development in terms of knowledge and skills.

Evaluation

Asses No.

Type To Assess Start Week

No.

Subm. Week

No. Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.

1 Ground Floor knowledge base 1 2 1 / 9 /17

25%

2 Floor Systems Qualities and

Professional Skills 2 3 08 / 9 /17


97

3 Wall Systems knowledge base 3 4 22 / 9 /17

4 Roof Systems Qualities and


5 Finishing Work 1 knowledge base 5 6 06/ 10 /17

6 Finishing Work 2 Qualities and

Professional Skills 6 7 13/10/17

7 7th Week Exam Total Assessment 7 7 20/ 10 /17

8 Finishing Work 3 knowledge base 7 8 27/ 10 /17

35%

9 Types and Details for

Staircases Qualities and

Professional Skills 8 9 03/ 11 /17

10 Staircases knowledge base 9 10 10/ 11 /17

11 Types and Details for

Doors & Windows Qualities and

Professional Skills 10 11 17/ 11 /17

12 12th Week Exam Total Assessment 12 12 24 / 11 /17

13 Doors & Window Qualities and


14 15th Week

Final Exam (Oral Exam) 40%

Total 100%

List of References


Ching, F.D.K. ( 2008). Building Construction illustrated, 4th edition.

Ching, F.D.K. (1995). A Visual Dictionary of Architecture.

Recommended Books:


98

Chudley, R., Greeno, R.(2010). Building Construction Handbook, 8th edition.

Huth, Mark W. (2010). Understanding Construction Drawings, 5th edition.

Course Instructor: Dr. Osama Omar, Dr. Masemalliano

Dean of Faculty: Prof. Dr. Ibtihal El- Bastawissi

Date: 00/00/2017


99

ARCH331. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN III Course Code / Title: ARCH331. Architectural Design III Credit: 5 Instructors: Dr. Marwan Halabi, Dr. Maged Youssef, & Dr. Chadi Khoury Course Hours: 10 Studio Course Duration: 15 Weeks Academic Semester: Fall 2017/2018 Semester: 5th Module Info: Location: 3rd year studio - Floor: (B2) Time: Monday 11:00 - 16:00 + Wednesday 8:00 - 13:00 COURSE DESCRIPTION & OBJECTIVES Course Description: Design projects leading to the development of architectural concepts. Development processes of design are presented and critically evaluated, both graphically and orally. Constructivist design studio is emphasizing on structural systems. Portfolio of designs in response to specific aims comprising formal structural and universal space concept. Demonstrating theoretical and practical knowledge that will be required for architects, designers, engaged in Architectural Design and practices.

Retaining practicing skills of setting down functional relationships and efficient circulation between project elements.

Practicing principles of designing with natural and built context.

Being familiar with different structure systems

Going through the experience of integrating architectural masses with natural environment.

Solving contradiction between modern style and techniques, with local and traditional style and

making the interaction and interrelationship between indoors and outdoors.

Compromising between Hi-tech and contemporary features and Local Architecture.

The course is mainly concerned with inducing and vitalizing intellectual, mental, logic thinking capabilities of students.

COURSE CALENDAR/SCHEDULE

PHASE

NUMBER STAGE LABEL & DESCRIPTION

DATE OF COMPLETION

& SUBMISSION

Project One:

Phase 1 On Week 2

Submission of Teamwork Research Research, site analysis and programming of the first project

/9/2017

Phase 2 On Week 4

Submission of concepts + Plans, Site Plan, & 3d Model + Site analysis + Concept Study on A1 Sheets

/9/2017

Phase 3 On Week 6

Project pre-final submission including all drawings & details (not presented) on 4 A1 Sheets (Portrait Direction)

/10/2017

Phase 4 On Week 7

Project Final Submission on 4 A1 sheets (Portrait Direction) Complete drawing with details + A3 Portfolio + 3d Model

/10/2017

Project Two:


100

Phase 1 On Week 9


/11/2017

Phase 2 On Week 11


/11/2017

Phase 3 On Week 13


/12/2017

Phase 4 On Week 14


/12/2017

Note: Alterations to the above plan and timetable are possible according to the actual progress of work and assessment as monitored by the course teaching staff. Therefore, interim submissions and evaluation could be required and their outcome communicated to the students to provide them with further guidance. COURSE POLICIES


Students must submit previous stages with current assignments to evaluate academic performance.

Projects’ proposals that submitted without following the design process will be rejected and may let the course instructors make force-withdrawal to the student.

EVALUATION

Asses No. Type To Assess Start Week No.

Subm.Week No.

Subm. Date Weighting of Asses.

1

Research Phase: Group research & site analysis (printed sheet & oral presentation)

Observations, research capabilities, data collection, analysis and intellectual qualities

1 2 /9/2017 5%

25%

2

Concept Phase: Plans & study model (sketches & study model)

knowledge base, intellectual abilities, critical thinking

2 4 /9/2017 5%

3

Pre-Final Phase: Pre-Final Submission

knowledge base, intellectual abilities, critical thinking & formulation capabilities, communication skills

4 6 /10/2017 5%

4 Final Phase: Final Submission of the 1st project

knowledge base, intellectual abilities, critical thinking & formulation capabilities,

6 7 /10/2017 10%


101

communication skills

5



8 9 /11/2017 5%

35%

6 Esquisse: Manual Drawings

Critical Thinking, analysis, ability on current drawing

10 10 /11/2017 5%

7



9 11 /11/2017 5%

8 Pre-Final Phase: Pre-Final Submission

knowledge base, intellectual abilities, critical thinking & formulation capabilities

11 13 /12/2017 5%

9 Final Phase: Final Submission of the 2nd project


13 14 /12/2017 10%

Attendance 5%

10 Final and oral exam

knowledge base, intellectual abilities, critical thinking & communication skills, presentation skills

---- ---- TBA 40% 40%

Total 100%

CRITERIA OF EVALUATION


102

LIBRARY RESOURCES & SUPPORT SERVICES (d) Course notes:

- Lectures' handouts . (e) Essential books (textbooks):

• Neufert, E (2012) Architects Data, 4th Ed., Wiley – Blackwell, New York.

EVA

LUA

TIO

N C

RIT

ERIA

DESCRIPTION Weight

CO

NTE

XT

Considering site context means that design projects respect and interact with the environmental, historical, topographical, and cultural aspects of the site. This criterion evaluates how far students' projects reflect a clear understanding of the site through: - Presenting research site analysis - Applying the building regulations - Recognizing the urban design theories - Considering site-topography in drawings - Presenting surroundings and site-landscape in all design drawings - Applying the real dimensions of the surrounded urban fabric, landscape, and routes

10

CO

NC

EPT

Design concept may depend on a variety of sources; art, history, theories, science, literature, nature, technology, structure system, environment, site-interaction, extra. It can be driven from the contemporary trends of architecture. Concept should be characterized by depth, philosophy, and supported by research-evidence. This criterion evaluates how far students' projects use a clear idea which is sequentially developed through: - A design-process - A clear concept expressed by sketches, text, images, conceptual study models,

reflective drawings

20

FUN

CTI

ON

AL

REQ

UIR

EMEN

TS In this module, multi-functions are simple and required to be assembled under a wide-

span structure system into a universal space. This criterion evaluates how far students' projects fulfil the required functions through: - Applying research data in the design proposal - Solving correctly circulation, zoning, and entrances - Considering orientation of the building according to the environmental factors - Following the required areas in the program

20

FOR

M

&

ST

RU

CTU

RA

L

EXP

RES

SIO

N

A remarkable wide-span structure should be used in both projects. Students' projects have to: - Show a genuine structure system with new building materials - Following a structural module in span and spacing - Show how this structural system is correctly drawn in plans, sections, and if

externally apparent in elevations and site plan. - Select a structure system matched with the new millennium applying the new

building technologies and the new materials for the structural elements and membrane. This selection should be also based on the site context and the environmental circumstances.

40

CO

MM

UN

ICA

T

ION

This criterion evaluates: - The visual, verbal, and written methods and appropriate media (including

sketching, modelling, 2D & 3D drawings, digital and electronic techniques) showing an appraisal for the main design concept.

- The listening skills, the body-language, the way of response to jury's comments, the correct usage of terms, and the reasonable way of presenting ideas.

10

TOTAL 100


103

(f) Recommended books: (f 1) - Baker, G.H. (1996) Design Strategies in Architecture, an approach to the analysis of form,

2nd edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York.

(f 2) - Charleson, A. (2015) Structure as Architecture, Routledge, London.

(f 3) - Ching, F.D.K., Onouye, B. and Zuberbuhler, D. (2014), Building Structures Illustrated, Wiley, New Jersey.

(f 4) - Clark R. and Pause, M. (2012), Precedents in Architecture: Analytic Diagrams, Formative

Ideas, and Parts, 4th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, New York.

(g) General References:

Numerous articles in periodicals covering pertinent topics in most architecture periodicals, namely Architectural Review, Architectural Record, and Urban Design International.

Course Instructors: Dr. Marwan Halabi Dr. Chadi Khoury Dr. Maged Youssef

Dean of Faculty Prof. Ibtihal Youssef

Date: 30 / 08 / 2017


104

ARCH333. EXECUTION DESIGN I Course Code / Title: ARCH 333 Execution Design I Credit: 3 Instructors: Dr. Maged Youssef, Mr. Refaat Saad, Dr. Chadi Khouri, & Mr. Rabie Shbaro Course Hours: Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 4 Course Duration: 5 Hrs Academic Semester: Fall 2017/2018 Semester: 5th Module Info: Location: Hall of 3rd year studio at B2 Time: (Thursday) Lecture (section 1): 8:00 – 9:00 Lecture (section 2): 9:00 – 10:00 Studio: 10:00 – 14:00

COURSE DESCRIPTION & OBJECTIVES Principles of preparing a complete portfolio of working drawings. Application on building or a project initially designed by the student. Principles of producing integrated and detailed working drawings. Analysis and applications of standards, material review and selection, execution detailing and documentation.

Identify typical symbols, and expression methods & tools in Execution Design Drawings.

Going through the experience of presenting legible drawing set containing appropriate information for construction.

Managing such drawing set to make drawing and sheet referencing system and ensure details

compatibility.

The course is mainly concerned with inducing and vitalizing intellectual, mental, logic assembling thinking capabilities of students concerning construction industry.

COURSE CALENDAR/SCHEDULE

STAGE

NUMBER WEEK STAGE LABEL & DESCRIPTION

DATE OF COMPLETION AND SUBMISSION

1

Week 1

In Lecture: Course introduction + General Overview

In Studio: Selecting one project to be undertaken from the previous design projects submitted in ARCH292

/9/2017

Week2

In Lecture: Phase 1 (Plans) Details of Plans: Dimensions + table of finishing + table of doors & windows + (Panda) + Tones of printing + information about basement plan ( th. of walls, D.P.C., & protection wall) In Studio: Following up (Ground floor plan + First floor plan)

/9/2017

Week3

In Lecture: Continue Phase 1 (Plans) General notices on plans + information about roof plan (25% of the footprint, control room of elevators, drainage indications) In Studio:

/9/2017


105

Following up Plans

2 Week4

In Lecture: Phase 2 (Foundations)/ Implementation Plan & (Research) Informing students with research requirements: Create teamwork groups studying: R.C. Stairs + Claddings of Elevations + Wooden Doors + Aluminium Windows + Insulation Materials + Fences + Floor Finishing Materials + Elevators + Steel Doors In Studio: Submission of plans (Basement plan + Ground floor plan + First floor plan + Roof plan) & Correcting them in details

/10/2017

3 Week5

In Lecture: Phase 3 (Structural Plan) / Framing Structural Slab Types of structure systems (RC structures + Steel Structures) Presentation of (plans + sections ) of each type In Studio: Submission of Implementation Plan

/10/2017

4 Week6

In Lecture: Phase 4 (Sections) Details of Sections: Projection + centrelines + structure + layers + D.P.C. + H.I. + dimensions, etc In Studio: Submission of Structural Plan

/10/2017

5 Week7

In Lecture: Phase 5 (Elevations) Details of Elevations: Projection + centrelines + materials + panels + dimensions, etc Assessment of 7th Week Submission of 2 Sections

/10/2017

6 Week8

In Lecture: Phase 6 (Wall Sections) Details of Wall Sections: Cross reference + centrelines + th. of walls + structure + skylight + claddings + section in entrance + etc. In Studio: Submission of 2 Elevations

/11/2017

7 Week9

In Lecture: Phase 7 (Details of R.C. Staircase) Details of Concrete Stairs: Cross reference + centrelines + Numbering of stairs + light of stairs + handrail + landing + etc. In Studio: Submission of 3 Wall-Sections

/11/2017


106

8 Week10

In Lecture: Phase 8 (Site Plan) Details of Site Plan: Ropier Point + Centrelines + walkways + pavement + landscape + materials + + ramps + stairs + dimensions, etc In Studio: Submission of Plans and Section of RC Staircase

/11/2017

9 Week11

The whole day in Studio: Oral Presentations of Research PowerPoint Presentation + 3d Models + Samples + Catalogues + A0 Sheet

/11/2017

10 Week12

The whole day in Studio: + Submission of Site Plan

/12/2017

11 Week13

The whole day in Studio: Pre-final submission of students’ portfolios

/12/2017

12 Week14

The whole day in Studio: Final submission of students’ portfolios

/12/2017

Final Oral Exam TBA

Note: Alterations to the above plan and timetable are possible according to the actual progress of work and assessment as monitored by the course teaching staff. Therefore, interim submissions and evaluation could be required and their outcome communicated to the students to provide them with further guidance. COURSE POLICIES



EVALUATION

Asses no.

Type To Assess Start week no.

Subm. Week no.

Subm. Date

Weighting of asses.

1 Plans & schedules (CAD Drawings)

Knowledge base, intellectual qualities, professional skills Constructional skills

1 4th /9/2017 10%

25%

2 Implementation Foundations plan (CAD Drawings)


4 5th /10/2017 5%

3 Framing Structural Slab (CAD Drawings)


5 6th /10/2017 5%

4

Assessment of 7th Week Submission of (2 Sections)


6th 7th /10/2017 5%


107

5 Elevations (CAD Drawings)


7th 8th /10/2017 4%

6 Wall-Sections (CAD Drawings)


8th 9th /11/2017 4%

35%

7 RC staircase (CAD Drawings)


9th 10th /11/2017 4%

8 Research Presentation


4th 11th /11/2017 4%

9 Site Plan (CAD Drawings)


10th 12th /11/2017 4%

12 Pre final student portfolio


12th 13th /12/2017 ---

13

Final student portfolio


13th 14th /12/2017 10%

14 Attendance 5%

15 Final oral Exam

TBA 40% 40%

TOTAL: 100%

CRITERIA OF EVALUATION 1- EXECUTION DESIGN STANDARDS 30

Execution Design Standards are the basic principles, regulations, and norms of the execution drawings. These standards include the following items: - Symbols & legend - Axes - Structural module - Design module - Thickness of walls - Doors and windows - Levels - Dimensions - Description and annotation - Schedule of finishing materials - Schedule of doors and windows


108

This criterion evaluates how far students' projects were applied correctly these standards. 2- DESIGN, FUNCTIONS, & SERVICE REQUIREMENTS 15

In the Fall Semester of the 3rd year level, students work on one of the two 'design projects' that submitted in 'Architectural Design II' Arch 292. This project includes simple functions in limited areas & one distinguished bigger space. This criterion evaluates how far students' projects fulfil the required functions through: - Reflecting data analysed in lectures, research, & self-base learning site-experience - Applying this data in the drawings - Solving design problems correctly - (zoning, entrances, extra) - Solving vertical & horizontal circulation - Solving service-spaces such as; WC, fire-escape-staircase, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, ramps,

and parking lots, extra 3- STRUCTURE SYSTEM 15

This criterion evaluates how far students' projects consider the following points: - Organization & modularity of the structure systems - Drawing the structural elements & supports correctly in plans & sections - according to the chosen

system - The correct selection of the slab system - according to its dimension - Emphasize on using RC walls in both of elevators' core & staircase

4- COMBINATION OF MATERIALS AND LAYERS 20

One of the most important aims of this course is to teach student how to combine materials together organizing them into valid layers. This criterion evaluates the following points: - Selecting suitable materials for the structure system, the slab system, walls, finishing, openings, &

landscape elements - Drawing layers correctly in each floor (basement, ground, first, & roof) - Considering isolation materials of H.I. & D.P.C. in (basement, roof, WC slabs) - Considering the correct projection of the cladding panels in all drawings (plans, sections, elevations, &

wall-sections) 5- COMMUNICATION20

All execution drawings are generated using CAD or REVIT software programs. They are organized in A1 size sheets, documented in A1 portfolio. Communication criteria evaluate how far students' projects include the following items: - The 2D accurate execution drawings - Clarity of layers - Full information & annotation - Legend, text, & details - Graphic skills - Verbal & listening skills - Body language of student - Way of response to jury's comments - Correct use of terms

TOTAL 100 LIBRARY RESOURCES & SUPPORT SERVICES (h) Course notes: (i) Lectures' handouts. (j) Essential books (textbook):

Styles, Keith & Richard, Andrew. (2005). Working Drawings Handbook. Amsterdam: Elsevier. (k) Recommended books:

A range of Architectural Details and Standards textbooks and references cover the principal topics and issues addressed in the course of Execution Design.

Course Instructors: Dr. Maged Youssef,



109

Dr. Chadi Khouri Mr. Refaat Saad Mr. Rabie Shbaro Date: 30 / 8 / 2017


110

ARCH335- HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE III

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: History of Architecture III Code: ARCH 335 Hours Lecture: 2 Tutorial: -- Credit: 2 Prerequisites: ARCH135 – ARCH235 Academic Year / Level: 5th or Intermediate Level Year: 2017/2018 Term: Fall Specialization: Architectural Engineering


In this course, students are to examine the visual culture of the Islamic world. The course provides the student with wide vocabulary of concepts concerning visual expression in Islamic different traditions. This is to take place through an overview of some major Islamic monuments in a number of regions of the Islamic world. Building construction technology and its functional criteria are to be identified. Hence the structure functional purpose highly affects its shape i.e. a domestic structure would be totally different in form and shape from or a structure that is to be created for specific religious purpose, such as a mosque and or a tomb; all were being covered in chronological sequence. At the end, this course presents an overview of contemporary trends in mosque design.

The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge in History of Architecture, necessary for an architectural-engineering carrier.

Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

Understand analytical, developmental, and technical principles that relate to History of Architecture.

Demonstrate a systematic understanding of the economic, environmental, political, social and technological influences which relate to the History of Architecture

Demonstrate an ability to initiate and sustain in-depth research relevant to History of Architecture

Have an opportunity to put theory into practice.

(i) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

A1 Recognize the theories of urban design and the planning of communities. A2 Identify the needs and aspirations of building users; the impact of buildings on the environment and

the way in which buildings fit into their local context. (j) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

B1 Evaluate evidence, arguments and assumptions in order to make and present sound judgments within a structured discourse relating to architectural culture, theory and design. (k) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:

C1 Generate design proposals using understanding of a body of knowledge, some at the current

boundaries of professional practice and the academic discipline of architecture.

(l) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:

D2 Work in teams and manage teamwork.

D3 Apply a range of communication methods and media to present proposals and research clearly and

effectively.

5- COURSE OUTLINE:

4- INTENDED LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE COURSE (ILO):


111

Week No. 1 Influences and characters of Islamic architecture- Mosque Typology

Week No. 2 The architecture of The Umayyads

Week No. 3 The architecture of The Abbasids and the Tulunids

Week No. 4 The architecture of The Fatimids

Week No. 5 The architecture of The Ayyubids

Week No. 6 7th Week assessment

Week No. 7 The architecture of The Mamalukes

Week No. 8 The architecture of The Mamalukes

Week No. 9 The architecture of The Ottomans

Week No. 10 Domestic Architecture (private house) + project work

Week No. 11 Domestic Architecture (private house) + project work.

Week No. 12 Contemporary Examples in Domestic/ religious Architecture (Identity).

Week No. 13 Wrap up the course.

Week No. 14 Final submissions and presentations


The course is delivered through lectures, directed reading, videos, computer assisted learning, case studies, research and a project.


ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 7th Week Exam

Research Presentation 1 7 W 7 30%

60% 2 Group assignment (Project)

Wearable Architecture project

8 12/13 W 14 25%

3 Individual assignment

Class Performance / Attendance

W 14 5%

4 Final Exam 40%

Total 100% 100%


(l) Course Notes:

The handouts of the lectures. (m) Essential Books (Textbooks):

Hillenbrand, Robert. (1994) ISLAMIC ARCHITECTURE. Edinburgh University Press, BPC Hazell Books Ltd, Aylesburg, Great Britain. ISBN 0-74-86-0479-0

(n) Recommended Books:


112

• Frishman, Martin and Khan, Hasan-Uddin. (1994). THE MOSQUE. Thames and Hudson Ltd, London. ISBN 0-500-34133-8

• Barrucand, Marianne and Bednorz Achin.(1992). MOORISH ARCHITECTURE, Benedikt Taschen Verlag. ISBN 3-8228-9632-2

• Musgrove, John. (1987). A HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE. Butturworths, London. ISBN 0-408-01587-X

(o) A number of useful websites o http://www.islamicarchitecture.org/education o http://www.greatbuildings.com/

Course Instructor: Assoc.Prof. Nader Azab


Date: 1/9/2016


113

ARCH338. City and Town Planning

Course Title: City and Town Planning Code: ARCH338 Instructor: Prof. Ayman Afify – Assoc. Prof. Nader Azab

Hours: 03 Lecture: 01 Tutorial: 02 Credit: 02 Prerequisites: None

Academic Year / Level: 2017/2018 - Level 3 Year: 2017/2018 -Term1 Semester: 05 Mandatory Course/Intermediate Level Specialization: Architectural Engineering Time: Monday 08:00 – 11:00 Location: Level 3 Studio Friday 13:00 – 15:50

Course Description and Objectives

The course gives a brief review on the definition, types and levels of planning. It offers an overview of the evolution of early civilizations (Old Egyptian and Mesopotamia cities). It also explains the Industrial Evolution and focuses on the urban features that were followed by this evolution. The course also explains the garden city movement initiated by Ebenezer Howard, and clarifies the neighborhood-planning concept.

It provides an overview of Town Planning theories, practices and ideas, definitions, objectives and levels of Planning. It also identifies the origins and evolution of historical and contemporary ideas underlining planning practice in its various forms. Relevant topics: land use, housing, human settlements and urban environments. Current challenges and concerns of urban development or planning, aspects of the urban planning profession.

Learning Activities The course is performed through a set of lectures, case studies and research-based teaching materials, besides other methods including coursework assignments, projects, and researches. Course Outline The course addresses the following topics:

Definition of Planning.

Types and Levels of Planning.

History and theory of Planning (1-5).

Modern Theories of Planning (1-2).

Housing - Neighborhood Planning

Urban Revolution and its influence on housing.


1

Introduction to the course, structure, assignments, and advising. (Definition of Planning - Types and Levels of Planning)

2

History of Planning -1 Early Civilization - Urban Planning in Ancient Egypt

3

History of Planning -2

4


5


6

Early 20th century planning practices.


114

7

Mid-Term Assessment.

8

Modern Theories of Urban Planning

General Planning & Urban Development

9

Neighborhood Planning

10

Urban Revolution and its influence on the housing & human settlements

11

Urban Land Use/ Project Monitoring and Review

12

12th Week Evaluation

13 Sustainability and urban planning.

14

Project Evaluation and discussion

Evaluation

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Submission Date

Weighting of Asses.

1 Group

Research

Student Participation to assess intellectual skills

Standard Map Visualization

1 3 W 3 10%

30 %

70%

2

7th Week

Exam

Course Understanding 7 7 W 7 10%

3 Group

Research

Phase 1: Researches Evaluation and discussion

(01st week : 08th week) 3 7 W 7 10%

4 Group

Research

Phase 2: Researches Evaluation and discussion (8th week : 14th week)

7 11 W 11 10%

40 % 5

12th Week Evaluation

Course Understanding 12 12 W 12 10%

6 Group

Research

Phase 3: Researches Evaluation and discussion

12 14 W 14 20%

Final Exam Course and Research

Understanding 30% 30%

Total 100% 100%


115

List of References: (p) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts (q) Recommended books:

Mumford, Lewis (1961). The city in History: Its Origin, its Transformations, and its Prospects, New York: Harcourt Inc.

Howard, E. (1965). Garden Cities of Tomorrow. Intro. by Lewis Mumford. Cambridge, Massachusetts: The MIT Press.

Le Corbusier, K. (1929). The City of Tomorrow, J.Rodker

Hall, G. (1996). Cities of Tomorrow: An Intellectual History of Urban Planning and Design in the Twentieth Century.

Gallion, Arthur B. The Urban Pattern

Course Instructor: Prof./ Ayman Afify Associate Prof. Nader Azab

Dean of Faculty Prof. Dr. Ibtihal El- Bastawissi


116

ARCH431. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN V

Course Code / Title: ARCH431 Architectural Design V Credits: 5

Course Hours: 10 Hours/Week Course Duration: 16 Weeks

Academic Semester: 7-th Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory Course (00hr. Lecture, 10 hrs. Studio)

Location: Level 4 Studio – Basement 2 Time: Mon 11:00-16:00 & Wed 8:00-13:00

COURSE DESCRIPTION &OBJECTIVES

The intention of the Fourth Year Design Studio is to be a critical step in the design student’s development of design awareness, understanding, and ability. This studio will prepare the student for an expansion of these principles to prepare for the Fifth year and penultimate design studio.

While the major portion of the studio time will be spent in the patient search for solutions to architectural design problems, an important component of the work will involve looking into the nature of Architecture, to seek a deeper meaning by way of investigation and criticism. The balance between theoretical and practical aspects of our task will encourage the student to become more thoughtful in their day-to-day work. The student will explore theoretical design issues as well as comprehensive problem solving exercises, addressing a wide range of architectural issues from broadest contextual elements to more detailed technological components.

The role of the faculty is to assist the student in constructing a conceptual framework for design within which to develop their design decisions. The question becomes, what do you value in architecture, and why? The objectives of this course, then, are to explore, evaluate, interpret and communicate the design process, to develop critical thinking, concept generation, transformation and development as a basis for architecture, and to explore the inter-relationship between premise, process, and product.

The design studio projects is structured to enable the student to comprehend the integral relationship between site analysis and design methods, history and theory; program and site; and building technology and environmental sustainability. Individual instructors emphasize different knowledge areas among these based on their own experiences, the specifics of the design problem at hand, and the interests and abilities of individual students.

The student’s “design process” is assumed to be at the intermediate stage where analysis, synthesis, alternative design selection, and scheme development are thoroughly researched and communicated.

Students are expected to have developed knowledge and skills in: site and contextual analysis; researching and understanding the use of building precedents; developing a design concept and the use of digital modeling and representational software; creating physical sketch and presentation models; fundamental sustainable design principles; sketching design ideas; structural system and material selection; essential orthographic and perspective architectural representations; and graphic design and verbal presentation.



117

COURSE POLICIES DESIGN CRITIQUES Critiques are the essential format for architectural education and project development. They are the means by which faculty and student discuss and develop a project together. This is a two-way communication, and is only made possible through the student’s responsibility to be prepared with drawings, models, ideas, and questions for discussion each day of studio. PORTFOLIO AND DOCUMENTATION OF DESIGN WORK It is essential for architectural students, like architectural professionals, to thoroughly document and reproduce their work. It is the nature of architectural design work that reproduced images of work are critical to presentation. Reproduction creates backups of drawings and physical models that may eventually be lost or damaged. Students are therefore required to document all studio work in an A3 format. Digital copies of design work are also required after each final project presentation. Proper documentation does not include only images. It also includes preliminary design sketches, concise written descriptions of the design problem; and a basic description of the design proposal or solution. ATTENDANCE POLICY Faculty work proceeds at such a pace that regular attendance is necessary for each student to obtain maximum benefits for instruction. Regular and punctual attendance at all class and studio sessions is a student obligation, and each student is responsible for all the work, including tests and written work, in all class and studio sessions. If a student plan to be away from the studio and are working on project related matters, first notify your studio instructors to discuss the nature of the absence. Three unexcused absences will result in being withdrawn with failure (WF) from the class PLAGIARISM VS., ACCEPTED AND ETHICAL WAYS OF CITING SOURCES Although the issue of plagiarism is more commonly associated with written assignments, issues of plagiarism also apply in design work. Plagiarism “includes the intentional or unintentional copying of language, structure, or ideas of another and attributing the work to one’s own efforts.” In written work, plagiarism is considered the failure to acknowledge references and sources. Similarly, in studio work, two examples of plagiarism are the unacknowledged use or abuse of precedents, and the reproduction and use of images without acknowledging their sources. In case of plagiarism, student will be withdrawn with failure (WF) from the course.

COURSE CALENDAR /EVALUATION

Weeks Stages & Description MARKS

1

Firs

t P

roje

ct

First Project.

Group work research

2 Submission of the Research (Group Work); 2.5

Submission of the Research (Individual Work);

3 Stage1: Preliminary Design Ideas & Initial Concepts – Study Model,

(Evaluation of Stage 1) Submission First Sketch 2.5

4 Stage 2: General layout: Initial Planning, Circulation & Zoning

Interpretation of Ideas, Detailed Architectural Drawings

5 Evaluation of Stage 2 Pre Final submission 5

Stage 3: Elaboration of Design & Complete Drawings


118

6 Evaluation. Final Submission (A1 & A2 Sheets, Ppt., CD.) 15

Second Project. MT Exam 10

7

Seco

nd

Pro

ject

Submission of the Research (Group Work); 2.5

Submission of the Research (Individual Work);

9 Stage1: Preliminary Design Ideas & Initial Concepts - Layout & Site Plan – Study Model, Parking & Green Spaces, and Main Entrances & Evaluation of preliminary concepts

10

(Evaluation of Stage 1) Submission First Sketch 2.5

11 Stage 2: General layout: Initial Planning, Circulation & Zoning

Interpretation of Ideas, Detailed Architectural Drawings

12

Evaluation of Stage 2) Pre Final submission 5

13

Stage 3: Elaboration of Design & Complete Drawings

14

Evaluation. Final Submission (A1 & A2 Sheets, Ppt., CD.) 15


119

LIBRARY RESOURCES & SUPPORT SERVICES Course Notes:

Lectures' hand-outs.


Bassler, B. (ed.) (2008) Architectural Graphic Standards: Student Edition, 11th ed. New York: John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

De Chiara, J. and Hancock Callender, J. (eds) (2001) Time-Saver Standards for Building Types, 4th ed., New York.: McGraw-Hill Book Company.

Watson, D. & Crosbie, M. (2005) Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design: Technical Data for Professional Practice, 8th ed., New York: McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc.

Recommended Books:

Sassi, P. (2006) Strategies for Sustainable Architecture, New York: Taylor & Francis.

Williamson, T, A. Radford and H. Bennetts (2003) Understanding Sustainable Architecture, London: Spon Press.

Katy Lee, Liu Kecheng (2013). Museums, Design Media Publishing Limited,. ISBN 978-988-15662-5-6

Arthur GAO. Thematic Museums: Design Media Publishing Limited, 2012. ISBN 978-988-15450-3-9

Chris Van Uffelen. Contemporary Museums: Braun Publishing AG, 2011. ISBN 978-3-03768-067-4

Philip Jodido. — Koln, ( 2011) Architecture Now ! Museums; ISBN 978-3-8365-1224-4

Michael J. Crosbie. — Mulgrave (2003) Designing the World 's Best Museums and Art Galleries : The Images

Publishing Group Pty Ltd,. ISBN 1-86470-072-6

Hongkong Polytechnic (2013), Awaken II. Vol. 1 : Green Office Building / International Publishing Co. Ltd. —

China : Dalian University of Technology Press,. ISBN 978-7-5611-7401-2

Detail Now. I : Curtain Wall Office Building. — Seoul : CA Press, 2008. ISBN 978-89-7748-319-4

I Jeong and Ji-Song. Modern Architecture. Vol. 06 : Office Building / Korea : CA Press Co., Ltd., 2003. ISBN 89-7748-085-X

Han Ji-su, Won Yu-hee, Ra Hye-ju, Ban Jung-eun. (2013) I. Small Building : Commercial Facilities,

Neighbourhood Facilities, Other Facilities, Seoul : Archiworld Co., Ltd., []. ISBN 978-89-5770-473-8

General References:

Periodicals, Websites, etc.

Dean of Faculty: Prof. lbtihal El-Bastiwissi

Date: 01 / 09 / 2017


120

ARCH433. Execution Design III

Course Code / Title: ARCH433. Execution Design III Credits: 3 Instructors: Dr. Kareem Galal Arch. Abdel Razzak Balaa

Arch. Ashraf Saade Arch. Bassam Ali Hasan Arch. Daoud Badran

Course Hours: 5 Hours/Week Course Duration: 15 Weeks Academic Semester: 7th Semester: Fall 2017/2018 Module Info: Mandatory Course (1 hr. Lecture, 4 hrs. Studio)

Location: Fourth Year Studio – Floor 1 Time: Thursday 08:00 to 09:50 10:00 to 13:50

Course Description & Objectives

Development and preparation of complete sets of tender drawings for a building initially designed in ARCH332. Preparation of electro-mechanical working drawings (sanitary, lighting, power supply, and HVAC). Advanced study, analysis and interpretation of composite processes, techniques and treatments. The course aims to provide students with the professional knowledge necessary for engineering carrier in Execution Design. With this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and competencies that will be required for architectural design position in the international Execution Design industry.

Understand analytical, developmental, legal, managerial and technical principles that relate to Execution Design.

Develop the academic abilities and personal characteristics required to solve problems relevant to Execution Design and critically assess relevant aspects of the industry.

Demonstrate a systematic understanding of the economic, environmental, political, social and technological influences which relate to the Execution Design field.

Demonstrate an ability to initiate and sustain in-depth research relevant to Execution Design.

Have an opportunity to put theory into practice via work-based learning.


121


STAGE



1 Design aspects- structure systems 22/09/2017

2 Plumping (Drainage/Water Supply) 20/10/2017

3 Midterm Exam 20/10/2017

4 Electricity 03/11/2017

5 HVAC 17/11/2017

6 Fire Fighting and Detection 24/11/2017

7 Project Revision- Final Submission 08/12/2017

8 Final Exam - Oral Examination As Scheduled


Course Policies

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, site visits, seminars, directed reading, videos, computer assisted learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, workshops. Exposure to the Execution Design environment and related projects are an important aspect of the teaching and learning methods. General Policies:

Students should respect the general instructions given by the course staff.

Attendance percentage should be above 80%, otherwise attendance warnings would be issued.

Avoid plagiarism, the penalty of a plagiarism is cancelling your project / assignment.

The lecture starts from 14:00 to 14:50 and the studio work starts from 08:00 to 11:50 on Friday. Course Policies:

Each student should create an A1 portfolio contains: Final Project and the Weekly submissions.

Each student should create an A4 portfolio contains: Course outline: (Lecture Titles, list of references, and Assignments Titles) - Research briefs – Researches – Reports.

Each student should attend the theoretical and analytical lectures which help him in class and home work.

Training students for continuous learning by provide each lecture’s slide with references.

Each student should make a report for the site visit to evaluate understanding which completes the theoretical information taken in lectures, and present the real construction application for students.

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Design aspects- structure systems

intellectual qualities and

professional skills

1 3 22/09/2017 05.0%

60% 2

Plumping (Water Supply)


professional skills

3 5 06/10/2017 05.0%

2 Plumping (Drainage) intellectual

qualities and 5 7 20/10/2017 05.0%


122

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

professional skills

3 Midterm Exam intellectual

qualities and professional skills

7 7 20/10/2017 10.0%

4 Electricity intellectual


7 9 03/11/2017 07.5%

5 HVAC knowledge base and intellectual

qualities

9 11 17/12/2017 07.5%

6 Fire Fighting and Detection


professional skills

11 13 08/12/2017 07.5%

7 Project Revision- Final Submission


professional skills

13 14 15/12/2017 12.5%

8 Final Exam -Oral

Examination-

knowledge base, professional skills and transferable

skills

16 16 As Scheduled 40.0% 40%

Total 100%

Library Resources & Support Services

Course notes:

Lectures' handouts.

Essential books (textbooks):

CHING Francis D.K., Building Construction Illustrated-4th Edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New

York 2008.

Chudley R. andGreeno R., BUILDING CONSTRUCTION HANDBOOK 8th Edition, Elsevier, Great

Britain, 2008.

Grondzik, W. T., Kwok, A. G., Stein, B. & Reynolds, J. S. (2010). Mechanical and Electrical Equipment for Buildings-9th Edition, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Recommended books:

Addington M. & Schodek D. L. (2004). Smart Materials and Technologies in Architecture. Architectural Press.

Bell V. B. & Rand P. (2006). Materials for Architectural Design. Laurence King.

Blanc A. (1994). Internal Components (Mitchell’s Building Series). Longman, UK.

Bouchlaghem, D. (2006). Teaching and Learning Building Design and Construction. London : Earthscan.

Ching Francis D. K.(2001) A Visual Dictionary of Architecture.

Compagno, Andrea (1999). Intelligent glass facades, material practice design. Birkhauser publishers, Berlin Germany.

Deplazes A. (2008). Constructing Architecture: Materials, Processes, Structures. 2nd Extended edition, Birkhauser Verlag AG.

Dernie D. (2003 or latest edition). New Stone Architecture. McGraw Hill Higher Education.

Fleming. E. (2005). Construction Technology : An Illustrated. Oxford : Blackwell Publishing Ltd.


123

Foster J. S. & Harington R. (2007). Mitchell’s Structure & Fabric – Part2, 7th Edition (Mitchell’s series), Prentice Hall, UK.

Mcevoy M. (1994 or latest edition), Mitchell’s External Components (Mitchell’s series), Longman, UK.

Ramsey C. G. & Hoke, J. R. (2007). Architectural Graphic Standards. 11th Edition, John, Willey and Sons Inc., USA.

Ritter A. (2006). Smart Materials in Architecture, Interior Architecture and Design: Types, Products, Architecture. Birkhäuser GmbH.

Schittich C. (2007). Glass Construction Manual (Construction Manuals series). Birkhäuser GmbH.

Schulitz H. C. and Sobek W. (2000 or latest edition). Steel Construction Manual (Construction Manuals Series). Birkhauser Verlag AG.

Magazines:

Detail Magazine Architecture.

Websites:

http://products.construction.com/




124

ARCH 435. Urban Design

Course Code / Title: ARCH435 - Urban Design Credits: 2


Academic Semester: 5th Semester: Spring 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory Course (2 hr Lecture, 2h Studio)

Location: Auditorium A209 and 4th year Studio

Time: Section1: Lecture: Fri 08:00 to 09:00 Studio: Fri 10:00 to 12:00

Course Description & Overall Aims

The aim of this course is to promote students learning the theory, planning method, problem solving of urban design, and to recognize the aesthetics and human scale of urban context. Its academic objective is to bridge the gap between architecture and urbanism.

Learning Activities

The course is delivered through lectures, seminars, case studies and research-based teaching materials and methods including coursework assignments, projects, and researches.

Course Outline

The course offers a brief review on the comprehensive planning process steps. It also explains the main elements that construct the mental image of the city. The course describes the urban form of the city and clarifies its environmental image. It distinguishes the contrast between the city (urban) and nature (rural), identifies the routes of movement and the city’s district, and focuses on the urban spaces characteristics.

WEEK STAGE LABEL & DESCRIPTION NOTES

1 Introduction to the course

2 Comprehensive Planning Process Steps

3 Definition and Levels of Planning

4 Elements that construct the mental image of a city

5 The image of the city and its urban form

6 The City’s Mental Image (Environmental Image)

7 6th Week Exam

8 City and Nature

9 Routes of movement

10 City’s district


125

11 Scale in urban design

12 Urban Spaces

13 Group Research : Case Study Presentation and Evaluation

14 Group Research : Case Study Presentation and Evaluation

Evaluation

Attendance Policy

Attendance is mandatory. Tardiness is not acceptable. In the case that you do miss the class, you are still responsible for all material covered.

Asses No.


No.

Subm. Week

No.


1 Individual

participation Student Participation to assess intellectual skills

1 7 5%

30%

70%

2 Group Research

2 7 10%

3 6th Week

Exam

Course Understanding 6 6 15%

4 Individual

participation Student Participation to assess intellectual skills

8 13 5%

40%

5

Group Research

8 12 20%

6 Group

Research 8 14

15%

7 Final Exam Course and Research

Understanding 30%

30%

Total 100% 100%

List Of References

(r) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts (s) Essential books (textbooks):

Lynch, K. (1960). The image of the city, Cambridge MA.: MIT Press.

Mumford, L. (1961). The city in History: Its Origin, Its Transformations, and its prospects, New York: Harcourt Inc.

Fyfe, N. (1998). Images of the street: Planning, Identity, and Control in public space, New York: Routledge.

(t) Recommended books:

Carmona, M. (2003). Public Places Urban spaces. 3rd ed. Oxford: Architectural Press.

Evans, H. (1972). New Towns: The British Experience, London: Charles Knight and Co. Ltd.

Howard, E. (1942). Garden City of To-Morrow, London: Faber and Faber.


126

Osborn, F., Mumford, L. and Whittick A. (1963). The New Towns: The answer to Megalopolis, New York: Mc Graw-Hill.

(u) General References:

www.urban-age.net

www.newurbanism.org

SAGE Journal in Urban Studies and Urban Planning

Japan Architect (JA)

Date: 04 / 09 /2016

Course Instructor: Dr. Said Jazairi

Dean of Faculty Prof. Ibtihal El-Bastawissi

http://www.urban-age.net/

http://www.newurbanism.org/


127

ARCH 437 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Basic Information

Course Title: Project Management

Code: ARCH437

Hours:2 Lecture:2 Tutorial: N/A Credit: 2

Prerequisites:

Academic Year / Level: 2017 - 2018 / Level 4 Year: 2017-2018 Term: Fall

Specialization: Architecture

Location:

Course Objectives

General knowledge pertinent to the Project Management principles.

Theoretical background related to Project Management knowledge areas.

Role, characteristics and interpersonal skills of the Project Manager.

Project Manager Duties and Responsibilities.

Key aspects of the Project Management Context.

Organizational influence on the Project Management Processes.

Project live cycle and stakeholders for the design consultancy services projects as well as the construction supervision consultancy services projects.

Technical and analytical principles related to value engineering process and how to be incorporated within the project live cycle phases and processes.

Project Management constrains (Quality versus Scope, Cost, and Time).

Learning Activities

The course is delivered through lectures, seminars, directed reading, videos and computer assisted learning. However, and while participating to the course, students will be required to attend PowerPoint lectures covering the theoretical part. Students will be divided into groups and asked to submit a research covering a subject related to the course content, and present their work in group seminars, making sure that the student has covered the mentioned learning activities.

Course Outline

Being registered in this course, Students will acquire the knowledge pertinent to the Project Management principles and the theoretical background related to Project Management Knowledge Areas.


1 Course Introduction – Course Outlines

2 Project Management Overview

3 Project Live Cycle and Organization Part “A”


128

4 Project Live Cycle and Organization Part “B”

5 Project Management Processes

6 Project Integration /Scope / Time Management

7 7th Week Exam

8 Project Cost / Quality / Human Resources Management

9 Project Communication / Risk / Procurement Management

10 Project Management for Design Consultancy Projects

11 Project Management for Construction Supervision Projects

12 12th Week Assessment

13 Introduction to Value Engineering

14 14th Week Assessment

Evaluation:

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date Weighting of

Asses.

1 Quiz

Students understanding of Project Manager

Knowledge area and the relevant processes

(1st week : 7th week)

30%

60% 2

7th Week Exam/Total assessment

Total Assessment 7 7

3 12th Week

/assessment Research preparation

8 12

20%

4

Individual and group

assignments

Research Presentation (Value engineering)

(11th week : 14th week) 12 13

5 15th Week

/assessment Total Assessment 14 14 10%

6

Final Exam

Total Assessment TBD 40%

40%

Total

100%

100%


129

List of References:

A Guide to The Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK GUIDE), (5th Edition). Project Management Institute PMI. 2013

Dale H. Besterfield, Carol Besterfield-Michna, Glen H. Besterfeild, Mary Besterfield-Sacre (2003) Total Quality Management , Pearson Education, Inc, new Jersey. ISBN, 0-13-099306-9

Lock , Dennis (1994) Project Mana1gement (5th Edition). USA, Gower Publishing Company Limited. ISBN 0-566-07340-4

Harrison F.L (1992) Advanced Project Management (a Structural Approach). England, Gower Publishing Company Limited. ISBN 0-566-07340-4

James J.O’Brien, CPM in Construction Management, (4th Edition). McGraw-Hill New York, 1993

Course Instructor: Arch. Khaled Sadek

Dean of Faculty Prof. Ibtihal Y. El-Bastawissi

Date: 15/09/2017


130

ASRCH534 – Graduation Thesis

Course Title: Graduation Thesis Code: ARCH534

Hours: 3 Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 2 Credit: 2 Prerequisites: --------

Academic Year / Level: Fifth Year: 2017/2018 Term: Fall Specialization: Architecture - Design & Built Environment Place: Lecture Hall A210 - Floor: B-1 Time: Friday 1.00 pm to 4.00 pm

Course Objectives

The course objectives are to:

Gain a better understanding of the common language used in the Architectural/Planning profession.

Develop students' communication skills with themselves.

Develop design work and to communicate to others in a professional context.

Develop methods of representation that underpin a more personal approach to design.

Develop student understanding of Architecture and to portray own ideas in written/oral form.

Develop the ability to read, write and draw the level of confidence required to initiate a design project;

Direct student ideas and knowledge for the betterment of communities and society at large.

Learning Activities The course learning activity is to prepare a dissertation of 10,000 words in which student has to:

State clearly problem and associated research questions arising, including both descriptive and exploratory questions.

Conduct literature review of the research topic.

Develop a well-organized content in clear sections and paragraphs, allowing a logical flow of reasoning and development of ideas.

Course Outline

This module provides the student with an opportunity to investigate a specific topic within the realm of architecture (history and theory, technology, environment, architectural design, etc). The student will undertake sustained and in-depth research and present a coherently argued, fully referenced and appropriately illustrated piece of academic writing not less than 10,000 words in length. The module will develop research methods relevant to writing a dissertation, and student's intellectual curiosity and critical thinking relating to the dissertation topic.

WEEK STAGE & DESCRIPTION

1 Course Introduction (Description of the whole course content, course objectives and Definition of keywords).


131

2 Thesis Structure (Titles, Abstract, Introduction ,Material and methods ,Theory/calculation ,Results ,Discussion ,Conclusions, Appendices, References, Appendices, Acronyms and Abbreviations)

3 Thesis Structure … (contd.) Titles, Abstract, Introduction ,Material and methods ,Theory/calculation ,Results ,Discussion ,Conclusions, Appendices, References, Appendices, Acronyms and Abbreviations)

4 Assigned Thesis Topic and Outline: Student Oral Presentation of the research Introduction Chapter which includes research problem, Hypothesis and thesis Structure.

5 Time Management in Thesis Writing (Effective use of research time, practice time management and set deadlines for each research phase)

6

Rules in Academic Writing (Paraphrasing, use of first person, gender sensitive language, footnotes, text format, cohesion words, things to avoid in academic writing) Referencing (What is referencing, why referencing is importance, how to reference – in text reference and list of reference, referencing styles – Harvard, APA, Oxford)

7 7th Week Submission

8 Monitoring: 1st Draft of Introduction: Student Oral Presentation of the research Introductive part including research problem, Hypothesis and thesis Structure

9 How to summarize an article and write argumentation (application of paraphrasing and critical thinking)

10 Monitoring: 2nd Draft of Body Text: Student Oral Presentation of the research body text

11 Monitoring: 3rd Draft of Body Text: Student Oral Presentation of the research body text

12 Thesis Pre-Final Draft Submission

13 Developed Thesis Final Draft

14 Thesis Final Submission

TBA Thesis Oral Discussion Jury

Evaluation:

Asses No.


No.

Subm. Week

No.

Weighting of Asses.

1

Research Topic Outline

introduction ,Material and

methods Homework assignment

Ability to select Research Topic and Develop

Thesis Outline 1 3 5

25% 60%

2 ,Research Proposal

Homework assignment

General Knowledge about selected research topic and his/her ability

to develop research structure

3 5 10


132

3 Theoretical Part

7th Week Submission

General Knowledge about selected research topic and his/her ability

to develop research structure

5 7 10

4 Analytical Part

Submission Review of Literature and

methods of research 7 9 10

35% 5 Findings + First

Draft Submission Critical thinking Skills and Presentation Skill

9 11 10

6 Complete Thesis

Submission Writing and Critical

Thinking skills 12 14 15

7 Oral Discussion

Final Exam Communication Skills -- -- 40 40%

T o t a l 100%

7- List of References:

o Yliopisto L. (2007) General Guidelines for Academic Writing. University of Lapland. International Studies. Acquired from: http://www.ulapland.fi/loader.aspx?id=29d47c7f-485d-435c-a462-23c8a451691d

o Naoum, S.G. (2004), Dissertation Research and Writing for Construction Students, Oxford : Elsevier Butterworth-Heineman. Acquired from: http://www.google.com.eg/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fxa.yimg.com%2Fkq%2Fgroups%2F21054417%2F1331535098%2Fname%2FDissertation%2BResearch%2B%2526%2BWriting%2B4%2BConst.%2BStudent.pdf&ei=8IMRVNP2Gs3maMqygLAO&usg=AFQjCNHboCCGppv89aMhCdPVJsbzX1LGtQ

o Soles, D. (2010), The Essentials of Academic Writing. 2nd Edition, Australia : Wadsworth, Cengage Learning. Acquired from: https://www.nelsonbrain.com/content/soles81337_0547181337_02.01_chapter01.pdf

o Newman, I., Benz, C.R., Weis, D. and McNeil, K. (1997) Theses and Dissertations: A Guide to Writing in the Social and Physical Sciences, Lanham : University Press of America.

o Johnson, A Andrew.P. (2003) A Short Guide to Academic Writing. Lanham: University Press of America.

Course Instructors: Prof./ Ayman Afify

Dr./ Maged Youssef Dr./ Chadi Khouri

Dean of Faculty Prof./ Ibtihal El-Bastawissi

Date: 30 / 08 / 2017

ARCH535 – Building Regulations and Professional Practice Mon 11/09/2017

Basic Information

http://www.ulapland.fi/loader.aspx?id=29d47c7f-485d-435c-a462-23c8a451691d

http://www.ulapland.fi/loader.aspx?id=29d47c7f-485d-435c-a462-23c8a451691d

http://www.google.com.eg/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&ved=0CBsQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fxa.yimg.com%2Fkq%2Fgroups%2F21054417%2F1331535098%2Fname%2FDissertation%2BResearch%2B%2526%2BWriting%2B4%2BConst.%2BStudent.pdf&ei=8IMRVNP2Gs3maMqygLAO&usg=AFQjCNHboCCGppv89aMhCdPVJsbzX1LGtQ





133

Course Title: Building Regulations and Professional Practice Code: ARCH535 Hours: 24 Lecture: 12 Tutorial: Dr. Mohamad Yassine Credits: 2

Prerequisites: None Academic Year / Level: Intermediate Year: 2017 2018 Term: Fall

Specialization: Architectural Engineering

6- Course Description and Overall Aims:

The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge necessary for engineering carrier in Building Regulations.

Introduction to building legislation and codes. Theoretical and analytical investigation of methods available to architects. Legal, ethical and professional obligations. Clients and other parties affected by both the practice and business of architecture. Overview of construction industry. Office practice including accounting and financial reporting, employment, procurement of buildings, tendering, building contract administration. Control of cost, time and quality, quality assurance. Programs and regulatory constraints, building legislations, building law and ordinances, urban planning legislation and housing laws, syndicate regulations, servitude and labor union laws.


Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and analytical investigation of method available to architect.

Explore the relation between theoretical knowledge and practice, to acquire all related data, laws, and legislations in connection to the implementation of permits, supervision of works, prepare tender file, as well as the knowledge how to distinguish between Consultant, Contractor and Developer.

Understand the mechanism of office practice including accounting and financial reporting, employment, procurement of buildings, tendering, building contract administration.

Generalize the basics of tendering, the method of preparing the tender files, the invitation to tender, and the contractor’s evaluation, and all related trades to finalize a tender.

Estimate the building contract administration, and the means of contract and arbitration.

Determine the knowledge of cost control, time and quality, as well as quality assurance. Predict how to price a project, and the time for completion and handing-over.

Classify the building laws, legislations and ordinances, the initial laws issued by Lebanese state and the modifications made till the latest issue version of building laws in Lebanon.

Relate the importance between the project main concept and complying it with the building laws and legislations; and the importance of respecting these laws for obtaining a permit.

Paraphrase the housing laws and urban planning legislations and the relation with the instructive planning issued from the concerned parties in Lebanon, and the correlation with theoretical knowledge.

Applying the syndicate regulations, and the relation between the engineer and syndicate from the registration and the selection of appropriate branch; in addition to the knowledge of the engineers’ responsibilities and rights towards the syndicate.

Servitude and labor union laws, the work condition, and what is related to the conditions of foreign labors in Lebanon, and the engineers’ role in supervising, controlling, and adopting labor.

Have an opportunity to put theory into practice through work-based learning.

7- Intended Learning Outcomes of the Course (ILO):

(m) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

(m 1) - Develop familiarity with theories and concepts used in building regulations and professional practice, to enable him to carry a discussion and have confidence in his performance, which provoke better and advanced concepts and projects.


134

(m 2) - In the theoretical field, to generalize the importance of respecting the project site and context, as well as being familiar with the laws and regulations necessary for setting a design in conformance with these restrictions.

(m 3) - In the field of profession, knowing the comprehensive laws of building and professional practice.

(n) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

(n 1) - Analyze and synthesize information obtained from a variety of sources relevant to building regulations.

(n 2) - Implement appropriate theories, principles, and concepts relevant to the adoption of building regulations.

(n 3) - Judge the proper and suitable mean of professional practice. (o) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:

(o 1) - Exercise organized activities in any engineering or administrative office; and be familiar with all issue related to professional practice and respect of laws.

(o 2) - Enable him in case he managed a personal company, to be familiar with all principles of professional practice and the applicable regulations in this respect.

(p) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:

(p 1) - Be able to work effectively as a part of a group, involving leadership and inter personal skills. (p 2) - Task and time management within a group and individually. (p 3) - Use ideas and techniques to solve problems relevant to building regulations and professional

practice. (p 4) - Utilize theoretical and practical knowledge in setting a proper architectural design. (p 5) - Develop written and oral communication skills in the field of building regulations and

professional practice. 3- Course Outline:

September

Week No. 1 11-09-2017

General overview about the importance of the course (Building Regulations) and its constituents, and the relation between these constituents and how to deal with the course and the grade distribution and evaluation.

Week No. 2 18-09-2017

The syndicate and the conditions for engineers’ registry, and the professional status and practice, rights and responsibilities towards the Order.

Week No. 3 25-09-2017

Professional ethics of engineers. A. Drawing the Building he lives in/from the Legal side/within Lot.

October

Week No. 4 02-10-2017

FIDIC :

Contracts, types of contracts, and what explanations they comprise regarding the owner, consultant, and contractor duties and documents.

Construction Industry, Financial and Accounting reports, labor, and labor law.

Bills of Quantities

Week No. 5 09-10-2017

Insurance, Taking-Over Certificate and other Definitions. Controlling time, cost, benefit and Insurance.

Week No. 6 16-10-2017

The General Directorate of Urban Planning regulations and the applied ordinances.

Week No. 7 23-10-2017

7th Week Exam


135

Week No. 8 30-10-2017

Building permits with all their inclusions, and the related parties.

Secretion and its conditions, the relevant regulations, and general terms and conditions of buildings.

The works from permits and its effectiveness.

B. Handle all the data from the Deed of Assignment, Attestation Factual Certificate, Real Estate Statement, Easement and Planning.

November

Week No. 9 06-11-2017

The envelope lines.

Works exempt from licensing

Natural Land Leveling Works

Handing Exercise B

Week No. 10 13-11-2017

Calculating the rate of general and surface exploitation; in addition to the parts which enter in the calculation of exploitation.

Week No. 11 20-11-2017

Field of Vision / Parts of the Building which is outside Exploitation.

Week No. 12 27-11-2017

12th Week Exam

December

Week No. 13 04-12-2017

Calculations + Exercise Solving Sample exercise in class by the Tutor

Week No. 14 11-12-2017

Car parking (Terms & Conditions)

Handing Exercises

Negotiate and follow up with the students to handle a complete sheet with all the studies.

Solving the Exercises Final

Handling the final sheet Assessment Types of Engineering companies, and its relation with the declarations in Finance Ministry and Real State Circles.

Feasibility Study. (Through Lectures)

End of Fall semester ------------

Final Exam ------------

4- Evaluation:


136

Asses No.


No.

Subm. Week

No. Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.

1

Personal Discussion and Individual Questionnaire

Knowledge

Base

1

14

11-09-2017 To

11-12-2017

1-7w -1% 7-12w -0.5% 12-17w-0.5%

Sum=2%

2

Individual Exercise A. Drawing the

building he lives in from the Legal Side

B. Assessment of note book,

collection and filing of all documents required for

reference after graduation

C. Exercise

Knowledge Base,

Intellectual Skills and to realize the

relation between

concept and regulations in

implementing a building

+ All Exercises

+ Handing all

documents on one sheet

3

6

5

8

25-09-2017 to 09-10-2017

16-10-2017 to 30-10-2017

11-12-2017

1st stage A 2%

2nd Stage B 2%

3rd Stage C 4%

8%

4

Attendance

1

14

11-09-2017 To

11-12-2017

1-6w 3% 8-11w 2%

13-17w 1% Sum=6%

5

Midterm Exam 1 Week No.7

Midterm Exam 2 Week No.12

Knowledge Base,

Intellectual Skills and the importance of understanding the main basics

of Course

1 6

11-09-2017 To 16-10-2017

Mid.1

26%

8

11 30-10-2017

To 20-11-2017

Mid.2

18%

6

Final Exam

Knowledge Base,

Intellectual Skills and

Précising the Lectures from the

Lecturer

Starting

40%


137

Assessment 1: PD+IQ (1) + Att. (3) + Mid. 1 (26) = 30% Assessment 2: Att. (2) + Mid. 2 (18) = 20% Assessment 3: PD+IQ (1) + Att. (1) + Ex. (8) = 10% Final = 40%

PD: Personal Discussion IQ: Individual Questionnaire Att.: Attendance Mid: Midterm Exam Ex.: Exercise


(v) Course notes:

Lectures’ handouts. Official documents, Syndicate and local authorities’ documents.

(w) Essential books (textbooks):

FIDIC Standard Agreement.

Managing the professional practice, in the built environment, Hedley Smyth (May 2011).

Prospects for an Ethics of Architecture, Michael P. Levine, William M. Taylor (March 2011).

دار النشر )صادر ( –كتابة نقابة المهندسين –ثالثة أجزاء –كتاب قوانين الهندسة في لبنان

(x) Recommended books:

FIDIC.

Applied Official Ordinances.

Drawings issued by the General Directorate of Urbanism and Planning. (y) General References:

Lebanese building laws book.

Applied Ordinances in Lebanon.

Syndicate and General Directorate of Urban Planning, and the Lebanese labor law.

The Real Estate Circle Data/ Labor Law/ Companies in the Lebanese Government.

Professional Ethics for Engineers, Complied by Fouad Mrad & Nesreen Ghaddar (January 2002).

Date: 13/09/2017

knowing the basis of

profession practice after graduation.

Some lectures

and exercise from the Tutor

Total

100%

Course Instructor: Dr. Mohamad Fouad Yassine Dean of Faculty: Prof. Ibtihal Al Bastweisi


138

ARCH 537. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN VII

Course Code / Title: ARCH 537. Architectural Design VII Credit: 5hr

Instructors:

Course Hours: 10 Hours/Week Course Duration: 15 weeks

Academic Semester: 9th Semester: Fall 2017-2018

Module Info:

Location: 5th Year Studio - Floor B2

Time:


The course explores architectural design work coupled with rigorous analysis, research and experimentation. Studio-based work addresses diverse design topics requiring theoretically informed, viable architectural solutions, and responses to increasing complexity, conditions, and contexts.

Students are required to carry out detailed research and subsequently develop a comprehensive design project, covering one approved topic of their choice within the field of architectural design;

Based on this research, the project program is developed, followed by a complete and detailed architectural proposal, together aiming to provide general training to handle large architectural problems with emphasis on all professional and technical problems through research work, formulation of concepts, and design processes;

Final Submission would include both an architectural project (of which copies are submitted in both printed and electronic formats) in addition to text and explanatory illustrations and diagrams;

The submitted portfolio of design drawings should reflect adequate interpretation and together represent innovative solutions considering contemporary concerns, social, economic, structural aspects, within specific contexts, as well as the local, cultural and urban environments.

The candidates’ work is to be presented and discussed with a panel of referees that includes internal, external members in addition to course staff and advisors.

Course Calendar/Schedule

Evaluation of work progress will be carried out for phased submissions as indicated in the timetable below.

Students are required to submit their work on the marked dates, and have their drawing fixed on the designated boards no later than 10:00 am.

Projects will be evaluated in terms of Architectural Excellence which includes the integration and efficiency of architectural and structural solutions as well as the originality of ideas presented

The blending of the proposal with the distinct cultural and natural characteristics of the region and site

Architectural Expression of the concept

Organization of Spaces and Functions inside & out

Structure, Construction, materials, and services

Quality and Clarity of Presentation materials

After every evaluation, students will be advised on their performance, grades, and also on any comments / relevant guidelines specified by the referees' panel.


139

Stages Stage Label & Description Date of

Submission Marks

Total grades / 60

1 Site Studies (Group Work) Studies concerning the identification of:

- Building-society-environment relation - External & internal factors - Building codes & regulations - Technical & Architectural systems data - Building context, development & creation of

architectural character & identity in response to human, social, cultural, & economic/practical needs.

Submission Format: A1 (6 Landscape sheets) + A3 copy (portfolio) + (Site Model).

(2 weeks)

5

25

Group Evaluation

2 Program Development (individual Study) Each student shall elaborate his studies in order to define

the design problem and develop an appropriate building

program (Schedule of accommodation) including the main

elements/components of the project

Submission Format: A3 + A3 copy (portfolio).

(2 weeks)

5

3 Concept Design Alternatives - Development of alternative solutions to the problem - Evaluation of Alternative Solutions - Development of the selected solution based on spatial requirements & organization, Structural systems, & Study of relationships, circulations, connections & associations. The design process should be evident. Submission Format: A3 & Modelling (Site/ Study Model) + A3 copy (portfolio).

(2weeks)

5

4 Development of Concept Design Complete conceptual project drawings, detailed illustrations on conceptual design drawings (schematic diagrams, flow charts, circulation diagrams, modular systems...), 3D views & models to interpret conceptual proposals, Visual presentation of entire project including explanations of concept & physical design. Submission Format : A1 ,Final Conceptual Drawings; Site Plan, Plans, Sections, Elevations, & Modelling (Site/ Study Model), Analytic Diagrams) + A3 copy (portfolio).

(3weeks)

10


140

Stages Stage Label & Description Date of

Submission Marks

Total grades / 60

5 Detailed Architectural Drawings

Elaboration of design decisions into precise architectural drawings while emphasizing on functional requirements & relationships, Spatial organization, Structural system, Study of relationships, circulations, connections & associations. - Special emphasis on the response to increasing complexity of ethical, social, conceptual & formal conditions, such as sustainability, identity, cultural imperatives. - Advanced Study of building context, development & creation of architectural character & identity. - Re-compare program with selected solution and modify solution/program. Representation skills are essentially evaluated & should be broadened to include a range of media & not solely CAD. Submission Format : Final Drawings; Site Plan, Plans, Sections, Elevations, & Modelling (Site/ Study Model), as well as all analytical diagrams & written explanations necessary for better understanding of the final product. Submission Format: A1 (6 Landscape sheets) & Modelling (Site/ Final Model) + A3 copy (portfolio).

(4 weeks) (Pre-Final

Submission Review)

15

35 All Staff

Evaluation

(1 week) (Final

Submission) 20

TOTAL 60

Oral Presentation & Jury Examination 40

External Examiners



141

Course Policies

Extensive work within the design studio (10 hrs/week) involves regular and adequate periods of contact, discussion, and review of progress achieved by students;

The studio-based course provides necessary guidance and assistance throughout the process of project development by course staff, visiting tutors, and other advisors;

The research work involved in this course allows a debate-like review and discussion of a set of selected projects/examples that interpret contemporary directions, applications, and emerging theories in the field of Architecture;

The students' regular attendance is accorded utmost priority. Passing the course necessitates a minimum attendance of 80%, by which a student becomes eligible for final stages of submission and examination.

Evaluation

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.


1 Group Work assignments

to assess

- Ability to present research-generated knowledge - Ability to present Site Analysis

1 2 5%

(Group Staff Evaluation)

2 Individual

assignments to assess

- Ability to Develop Project Program

3 4 5%


3 Individual


- Ability to present design Ideas and creativity

5 6 5%


4 Individual


Ability to initiate, develop, design ideas

7 9 10%


5

Individual assignments

and Individual

presentations to assess

- Ability develop, interpret & communicate valid design ideas

10 14 35%

(All Staff Evaluation)

6

Oral Presentation

& Jury Examination

Knowledge base, professional skills and transferable

skills

TBA 40%

Total 100%


142


The specialized library within the Faculty offers a wide range of textbooks, references, and periodicals that cover diverse topics relevant to the field of Design process, approaches, guidelines and contemporary architectural theories and directions.

The quality of teaching and research is further supported by first-rate facilities such as a specialized library, computer laboratories, in addition to fully equipped graphics and GIS laboratories.

Additional amenities are provided on-campus to all students, such as internet terminals, audio-visual equipment, seminar rooms, printing and copying facilities.


143

ARCH262. HISTORY OF ARTS Course Code / Title: ARCH262. History of Arts Credits: 2 Instructor: Dr. Maged Youssef Course Hours: 2 Hours/Week Course Duration: 16 Weeks Academic Level: Elective / intermediate course Semester: Fall 2017/2018 Module Info: Elective Course (2 hrs. Lecture)

Location: S1: Lecture A210 - First Basement

Time: Tuesday 12:00 to 14:00

Course Objectives

The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge necessary for engineering carrier in the field of architecture.


Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and competencies that will be required for an architectural position in the international industry.

Identify the artistic and historic technical principles that relate to the history of arts.

Relate between the vocational skills necessary for immediate employment in architectural engineering and the more fundamental principles necessary for further study.

Develop the academic abilities and personal characteristics required to solve problems relevant to architectural engineering and critically assess relevant aspects of the industry.

Cultivate a professional attitude and develop skills relation to communication, teamwork, project planning and management, and responsibility for individual learning.

Demonstrate a systematic understanding of the artistic influences which relate to the history of arts.

Demonstrate an ability to initiate and sustain in-depth research relevant to the history of arts.

Defend theory and put it into practice via work-based learning.

Learning Activities

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, directed reading, videos, computer assisted learning, case studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects and research paper. The main learning activities are arranged in four categories: 1- Sketch-Book: On two stages, students are asked to submit a sketch-book that gathers all the art trends

mentioned in lectures. This sketch-book is required to be a manual product to determine accurately the ability of each student on his/her analytical and sketching skills.

2- Teamwork Research: The instructor asks students to conduct a plural research including the whole trends of arts appeared throughout history. This requires an accurate distribution for tasks and loads among students. This research documents the evolution of art. Each group will be responsible for specific period of art and will be asked to prepare a short clip skimming its important landmarks of art works. In week 12, students will present their clips. After making corrections given by the instructor, two editors of students will collect all the clips to produce it into one full movie that does not exceed 15 minutes.

3- The 7th Week Exam: At week no.7, a written exam will be held to examine the ability of students in analyzing, knowing, and sketching the given art trends and periods in the first seven weeks. This exam considers refreshment for students' minds to motivate them to study, read, and train on sketching projects.


144

4- Oral Quiz: At the final lecture of the course, as a concentrated revision, the students will be examined

individually an oral quiz. In this quiz, the instructor will ask each student - one by one - a question, if the student does not know the answer; a chance is given to change the question with another one. So, student has only two chances. This quiz aims to assure that the students already understand the architectural languages that distinguish every architectural trend.


The course material is arranged into 15 stages. The table below outlines the content of each stage. Week No.1 Tue. 30/8/2017

INTRODUCTION TO ART

Week No.2 Tue.6/9/2017

PREHISTORIC ART + ANCEINT EGYPTIAN ART Prehistoric Art: Paleolithic, Mesolithic, Neolithic, & Metal Ages Ancient Egyptian Arts

Week No.3 Tue. 20/9/2017

MESOPOTAMIAN ARTS + GREEK & ROMAN ARTS Mesopotamian Arts: Sumer, Akkad, Persian, & Babylon Arts Greek and Roman Arts

Week No.4 Tue. 27/9/2017

MEDIEVAL ARTS Early Christian, Byzantine, Romanesque & Gothic Arts

Week No.5 Tue. 4/10/2017

ISLAMIC ART Islamic Art in the Mediterranean Region

Week No.6 Tue. 18/10/2017

RENAISSANCE, BAROQUE, & ENLIGHTENMENT ARTS Renaissance, Baroque, and Enlightenment ages covering art of 18th & 19th centuries Realism, Impressionism, Art Deco, & Art Nouveau

Week No.7 Tue. 25/10/2017

(Submission of the 1st phase of the sketch-book) 7th Week Exam

Week No.8 Tue. 1/11/2017

ARTS OF THE 20TH CENTURY Futurism, Fauvism, Cubism, and Expressionism

Week No.9 Tue. 8/11/2017

Continue… ARTS OF THE 20TH CENTURY Abstractionism, Suprematism, Dadaism, & Surrealism

Week No.10 Tue. 15/11/2017

Continue… ARTS OF THE 20TH CENTURY De Stijl, Constructivism, Pop Art, & Kinetic Art

Week No.12 Tue. 29/11/2017

ARTS OF THE 21ST CENTURY

Week No.13 Tue. 6/12/2017

Submission of the 2nd phase of the sketch-book Presentation of Research Groups


145

Week No.14 Tue. 13/12/2017

Submission of the full movie An individual oral quiz

TBA FINAL EXAM - Written, closed book exam

Course Policies

Attendance Policy Faculty work proceeds at such a pace that regular attendance is necessary for each student to obtain maximum benefits for instruction. Regular and punctual attendance at all class sessions is a student obligation, and each student is responsible for all the work, including tests and written work, in all class sessions. Three unexcused absences will result in being withdrawn with failure (WF) from the class.

Evaluation

Asses No.


No.

Subm. Week

No.

Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.

1 1st Stage of

Sketchbook: Individual Work

The students’ knowledge of the material delivered.

1 7

30%

60%

2 7th Week

Exam/Total assessment


3 2nd Stage of Sketchbook:

Individual Work

The student’s knowledge of the material up to the

10th week 7 13

20%

4

Research Presentation &

Submission: Group Work


5

Oral Quiz Students’ understanding of the material given in

that period 14 14 10%

6

Final Exam

Overall learning outcomes 40%

40%

Total 100% 100%

REFERENCES

(z) Course Notes:

Notes provided by instructor (aa) Essential Books (Textbooks):

Janson, H. W. & Janson, A. F., 'History of Art', 4th Edition, Thames and Hudson, London, UK, 1991

(bb) Recommended Books:

Histoire de l'art l'essentiel de la peinture , de la sculpture et de l'architecture a portee de main, edition Librio 2009

Xavier barral I Altet, Histoire de l'Art PUF, 2004


146

Albert Chatelet, Bernad-Philippe Groslier, Histoire de l'Art Larousse 2001

Man and Art, The History of Fine Arts Across the Ages - Michael Assaf/Joseph Hokayim 1993, Beirut Course Instructor: Dr. Maged Youssef Dean of Faculty: Prof. Ibtihal Youssef Date: 30 / 08 / 2017


147

ARCH 263. ARCHITECTURAL PHOTOGRAPHY

Course Code / Title: ARCH 263 Architectural Photography Credits: 3

Instructor: Saleh Rifai


Academic Semester: Faculty Elective Semester: Summer 2016/2017

Module Info: preliminary Level Course (3hr. Lecture – workshop)

Location: Room Number – 204

Time: Monday – Wednesday 10:00 - 13:00

Course Objectives

The objective of this course is to first provide a fundamental understanding of visual and technical skills necessary to pursue and value photography as an architectural and landscape component.

Learning Activities

The course is delivered through PowerPoint slides, practical workshops on campus, and project assignments.

Course Outline

The course discusses the fundamental principles of photography starting with a brief historical context, camera’s components and elements, camera controls (shutter, speed, ISO, light meter) and processes, lights and exposure, variety of lens and equipments, aperture and depth of field and focus, framing ( rule of thirds , golden points). As a result, assignments and project and practices are going to take place in order to maintain, develop and widen architectural and landscaping photography.


1 - Kinds of Camera - Camera elements

2 - Camera controls - Types and uses of lenses - aperture and depth of field

3 - Eye of Photographer - Composition and framing

4 - Practical photo shooting - Workshop in BAU campus

5 - Corrections the practical photo shoots - Explaining landscape photography - 1st project

6 - Correction 1st project

7 - Receiving the 1st project


148


8 - Workshop: reflection photograph

9 - Explaining the Architectural Photography - Explaining the Interior Design Photography - Filters

10 - Portraits photography - Lighting (available light) - 2nd Project

11 - Correction 2nd project

12 - Receiving the 2nd project

13 - Introduction to photography - Brief historical context - Digital photography – scanners

14 - Photography copyrights laws - Review the session

Evaluation

SSES NO. TYPE TO ASSESS START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 7th Week

1st Project Project 6 8

30

70% 2 12th Week 2nd Project

Project 10 12

30

3 Absence Total of 14 weeks 1 14

10

4 14th Week


Mastering photography - -

30 30%

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course Notes:

Students are responsible their own camera


Recommended Books:


149

Composition by David Prakel

Landscape Photography by Rob Sheppard


150

Architectural Photography by Axel Hausberg & Anton Simons

Course Instructor:

Mr. Saleh Rifai

Dean of the Faculty:

Prof. Dr. Ibtehal El-Bastawissi

Date:

Jun 2017


151

ARCH362. Social Studies in Architecture

Course Code / Title: ARCH362. Social Studies in Architecture Credits: 2

Instructor: Assoc. Prof. Dr. Baher I.Farahat


Academic Semester: Faculty Elective Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Preliminary Level Course (2 hrs. Lecture)

Location: A210 – B1 Floor

Time: Thur. 02:00 to 04:00

Course Objectives

This course deals with the social and cultural aspects and the design field. The main focus is to reinforce the inter-relation between human behavior and style of life in one side and aspects of the built environment on the other side. The overall aim is to develop awareness enable students toward social aspects involved in the design process. Within this overall aim, the course intends to : Demonstrate how people’s style of life shape and shaped by characteristics of the built environment

Recognize the architect’s role in designing responsive environments with respect to complex social aspects, human aspiration and diverse culture issues.

Have an opportunity to put theories of environmental psychology into practice via work-based learning.

Understand the basic theoretical & applied knowledge in human aspects related to architecture and design.

Employ aspects of visual research methods and tools to investigate human aspects related to architecture and design.

Learning Activities

The course is delivered through lectures, seminars, case studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, research paper, workshops. Exposure knowledge pertaining to sociology and psychology and related fields are an important aspect of the teaching and learning methods.

Course Outline

This course is designed for students of architecture to understand the social aspects in design. The course tends to deal with the question of why in architecture with respect to people needs, motivations, and style of life. Students will explore several issues pertaining cultural variables, man-environment relation and their reflections on architecture and community shaping . During the course students conduct critical reports, and practice design preliminary stages for creating responsive Architecture

Week No. 1 - Course scope ( why, what, of the course)

Week No. 2 - Architecture & Society - Ass.1: Successful Physical Environment

Week No. 3 - Architecture and Human needs


152

- Corrupted / corrupting needs

- The nature of human nature Maslow expanded Pyramids (needs / wants).

- Architectural Concerns

- Ass.2: Designers’ responses to human needs / wants

Week No. 4

- Establishing Connections

- Stage one: Connecting People (People and the built environment (friendship formation, social interaction ) )

Week No. 5 - Connecting People 2 : Successful social places - Ass. 3: Students workshop + Questionnaire

Week No. 6 - Ass. 3:reading list

Week No. 7 - 7thweek Evaluation

Week No. 8 - Student research 2 presentation

Week No. 9

- Stage two: Connection to the place (space and sense of place) People and the built environment ( territoriality, and sense of belonging).

-Ass 4: Reflections on Architecture

Week No. 10

- Stage three: Connection to the place 2 (People and the built environment ( communication , cue searching, way finding ) )

- Research project

Week No. 11 - Stage Four: Empowering people (People and the built environment

(motivation, the Architecture of power, rebel architecture).

Week No. 12 - Visual research methods in architecture methods, behavior Mapping,

multiple sorting, observation techniques.

Week No. 13 - Students research presentations

Week No. 14 - Students research presentations

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

Exercise.1

Successful physical

environment 2 3 5%

1 Exercise.2

Ability to Identify human needs pertaining to the

design of the built environment

3 7 10 %

30 %

2 Exercise.3

Understanding and demonstrating the

successful place/space relation

5 7 5%

3 Mid term Total assessment 8 10%

5 Exercise.4

Ability to analyze buildings and spaces in terms of their attribution

9 10 10%


153

to human activities

6 Research

- Ability to Employ aspects of visual research methods and tools to investigate human aspects related to architecture and design.

10 13 20% 30%

7 Final exam Total comprehension of the

given material 40% 40%

Total 100% 100%

REFERENCE (cc) Course

notes

(dd) Essential

Books (Textbooks):

Deasy, C.M. (1974). Design for Human affairs, shen kman com, Cambridge, mass.

. Deasy C.M. , Thomas E. Lasswell (1990). Designing Places for People: A Handbook on Human Behavior for Architects, Designers and Facility Managers. Watson-Guptill Publications, Incorporated.

Lawson, Bryan (2006). The language of space, Elsevier, Oxford, UK Canter, D. and Lee, T. (eds) (1974). Psychology and the Built Environment. London: The Architectural

press. Salam, Ashraf (1998). Human Factors in Environmental Design. An Introductory Approach to

Architecture. The Anglo Egyptian Bookshop, Cairo, Egypt. .

(ee) Recommended Books: Sommer, R. (1969). Personal space: The Behavioral Basis of design. Englewood Cliffs, Prentic Hall. Rapoport, A. (1988 ) , Meaning of the Built Environment, Sage Pub., London.

David Wang, Linda Groat (2001). Architectural Research Methods. Wiley, John & Sons, Incorporated. Rapaport, A. (1969). House Form and Culture (Foundations of Cultural Geography Series). Englewood

Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall. 150 pp.

Course Instructor: Assoc. Prof. Dr. Baher I. Farahat


Date: 29/ 9 / 2018


154

Course Code / Title: ARCH363. Theory of Housing Credits: 2

Instructor: Assoc. Prof. Baher Farahat

Course Hours: 2 Hours/Week Course Duration: 14Weeks


Module Info: Advanced Level Course (2 hrs. Lecture)


Time: Tuesday 10:00 to 11.50

COURSE OBJECTIVES 1-The course objectives are as follows:

This course concisely introduces contemporary theories, approaches, and concerns in the field of housing, with

particular emphasis on the Third World context.

Lectures address broad issues such as the roots of housing problem, and typology of housing. It reviews basic

housing theories and their impact on the economies of the housing sector.

A review of the mechanisms and forces shaping the housing market, and affecting both supply and demand at

various levels.

2- Learning Activities

The course is delivered through lectures, seminars, directed reading, videos, case studies, research-based

teaching methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, research paper, and coverage of the Housing environment and related projects.

5- Course Outline:

ARCH363 – THEORY OF HOUSING

September Week No. 1

Introduction and Scope / General Overview- Course Objective and Course Outline

Week No. 2

Definitions and Keywords – General Information about Housing – What is Housing – Roots of the Housing Problem

Week No. 3

Housing Sector and Housing Market Market Dynamics: Factors affecting Supply and Demand

Week No. 4

Housing Typologies and Classification A. Groups specification and choosing title out of this lecture. Research –

Definitions / Give examples for analysis.


155

No. Type To Assess Start Week

Sub Week


1


assignments to be assessed

Assignment/ Assessment 1st:8th week

1 6

3% (Att.) 5%

2%(PD) 30%

20%

10%

2 6th Week Exam Grade 1 6

25%

3



Assignment/ Assessment

10th:12th week 8 10

2% (Att.) 3%

1%(PD)

4 10th Week

Exam Grade 17%

5



Delivering and evaluating research

3 13

2% (Att.) 10%

8%(PD)

6 Final Exam 40%

Total 100%

Assessment 1: PD+ID (2) + Att. (3) + Mid. 1 (25) = 30%

Assessment 2: PD+ID (1) + Att. (2) + Mid. 2 (17) = 20%

(Each group 5 - 6 students)

Week No. 5

The Neighborhood Unit / Definition / Main Component

October Week No. 6

Groups discussing the Research / Definitions, Analysis and Examples.

Week No. 7

Classification of Human Settlements

Week No. 8

Feasibility Studies: Cost and Value Assessment

November Week No. 9

Delivering the researches and discussing with students

Week No. 10

Economics of Housing Projects

Week No. 11

Housing Policies and Role of Government

Week No. 12

12 week Evaluation

December Week No. 13

Handing Over and Discussing Researches B. Final Handing of the groups.

Week No. 14

The Perspective of Housing Problem in the Third World Countries and the planning process

6- Evaluation:


156

Assessment 3: Ex. (8) + Att. (2) = 10%

Final 40% PD: Personal Discussion IQ: Individual Questionnaire Att.: Attendance Mid: Midterm Exam Ex.: Exercise


(ff) Course notes:

Lecture Handouts

(gg) Essential books (textbooks):

Housing Development, Theory, Process Andrew Golland, Ron Blake, 2004

Housing: the Essential Foundations Maureen Rhoden, Paul N. Balchin, 1998

Housing Policy: an Introduction Paul N. Balchin,1985

Housing Economics & Public Policy, Tony O’sullivan and Kenneth Gibb (hh) Recommended books:

Apostolou Doxiad’s Books: The Inevitable City of the Future An Introduction to the Science of Human Settlements

(ii) General References:

Internet References

Course Instructor: Assoc. Prof. Baher I. Farahat


Date: 01 / 09 / 2017


157

ARCH 365. GRAPHIC DESIGN

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: Graphic Design Code: ARCH 365 Hours:3 Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 2 Credit: 2

Prerequisites: ARCH278

Academic Level: Faculty Elective Term: Fall



The course aims to help students making use of the principles of visual communication and to combine them

successfully with basic production techniques. and to gain awareness of how important ethics and social

responsibility are in the creation of visuals.

With this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and competencies

that will be required for Graphic Design. These involve the identification of the required expertise and

skills that help students of architecture to design immersive Graphic Design, and capture an active role in

this emerging 3D graphical market;

Understand analytical, developmental, legal, managerial and technical principles that relate to the

development of Graphic Design, this understanding would provide students of architecture with many

helpful uses. It would assist in the brainstorming of new ideas, allowing them as future designers to

explore with new issues without making anything permanent;

Have an appropriate balance between the vocational skills necessary for immediate employment in

Graphic Design industry and the more fundamental principles necessary for further study;

Develop the academic abilities and personal characteristics required to solve problems relevant to Graphic

Design and its use to drastically altering the architect's design process;

Cultivate a professional attitude and develop skills in relation better communication between Graphic

Design and Computer Graphics specialists, who are the main builders of such environments;

Demonstrate a systematic understanding of the economic, environmental, political, social and

technological influences which relate to the development of Graphic Design.





158



(q) DESIGN (ARB/RIBA part1: GC1.1 / GC1.3 / GC2.2/ GC3.3/ GC6.3)

(q 1) - An Understanding of the nature and operations of the Graphic Design concepts, categories, tools and techniques;

(q 2) - A knowledge of theories and concepts used in the development of Graphic Design mainly those related to the principles of computer graphical methods which deal with time, and space requirements for the computational, physical, and mathematical algorithms;

(q 3) - An awareness of the role of architect in making suitable architectural drawings.

(q 4) - An understanding of the fundamental principles and concepts underlying orthographic, paraline and lineal projection

(q 5) - An understanding of the role of drawings in the research and analysis phases of the design process.

(q 6) - An understanding of the qualities that make a drawing an appropriate and clear communication

(q 7) - An Ability to develop a design that addresses and synthesizes stated goals, constraints and requirements.

(q 8) - An ability to adopt appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the field of graphic design;

(q 9) - An ability to critically assess and evaluate a variety of resources relevant to the scope of the graphic design;

(q 10) - An ability to exercise appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information using various methods of presentation and interpretation;

(q 11) - An ability to adopt appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the field of graphic design;

(q 12) - An ability to critically assess and evaluate a variety of resources relevant to the scope of the graphic design;

(q 13) - An ability to exercise appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information using various methods of presentation and interpretation;

(q 14) - An Awareness of different theoretical and practical issues which are pertinent to the development of a comprehensive project and related contemporary approaches of design;

(q 15) - An Ability to plan, produce and present a complete graphic design project which reflects adequate emphasis on all the professional and practical requirements achieved through interactive work, innovative concepts, and developed design processes;

(q 16) - An awareness of the holistic process of design

(q 17) - An awareness of the totality of the creative design process.

(q 18) - An understanding of the basic formal concepts and relationship.


159

(q 19) - An ability to adopt an open-minded approach in the appraisal of design issues, requirements and opportunities.

(q 20) - An ability to generate alternatives and develop solutions to defined design problems.

(r) CULTURAL CONTEXT (ARB/RIBA part1: GC2.2 / GC2.3/ GC5.1/ GC5.3)

(r 1) - A knowledge of the creative application of fine arts and other such work to studio design

projects, in terms of their conceptualisation and representation.

(r 2) - An understanding of the need to critically review precedents relevant to the function, organisation and technology strategy of design proposals.

(r 3) - An awareness of the need to inspire and aspire users.

(r 4) - An understanding of the way in which graphic messages fit into their local social, cultural and physical context.

(s) COMMUNICATION (ARB/RIBA part1: GC1.1 / GC3.3)

(s 1) - An awareness of the relevance and applicability of various methods of visual representation.

(s 2) - An understanding of the value of representing information in graphic form.

(s 3) - An ability to use conventional as well as non-conventional techniques of grahic design representation.

(s 4) - An ability to verbally present in clear manner the essential goals and concepts that underlay a design.

(s 5) - An ability to identify in writing specific things learned in the process of developing and communicating a design.

(s 6) - An ability to utilize a range of media, tools, techniques and pictorial systems to represent existing and imagined objects and environments on two- dimensional surfaces.


160

10- COURSE OUTLINE:


1 What is Graphic Design ,The Design Process

2 Graphic design principles

3 Logos, Symbols, and Trademarks

4 Influences on Contemporary Graphic Design

5 The Terminology & Typesetting Basics

6 Designing Information Materials

7 7th week evaluation + Exam



10 Advertising Design

11 Using Illustrations

12 12th week evaluation

13 Packaging

14 Working With Color

15 Final Exam

4-A TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS:

Studio-based teaching, review and discussion (one-to-one and in groups), Guidance and orientation lectures Research-based teaching materials and methods, Interim submissions and focused assignments.


Open and closed-book examinations to assess knowledge base Graphic Design environment categories, methods and tools;

Class work to assess the ability of the students to carry out series of exercises.

Individual and group assignments to assess the ability of the students to carry out group work; Individual and group oral presentations to assess the students' ability to acquire skills of analysis,

interpretation, and evaluation of Graphic Design tools and applications after being subjected to Graphic Design principles, potentials and limitations. Students are to be able to express their judgment and observation both verbally through discussions and literary through text, and drawings.

Ass. No.


No.

Subm Week

No.

Weighting of Asses.

1 Individual and

group assignments

Identity project 1 4

30%

70%

Poster Design 4 7

2 7th Week


Total Assessment

8 8

3 Individual and

group assignments

Brochure Design 9 10

30% CD cover 11 12


161

4 12th Week


Total Assessment

13 13

5


assignments

Packaging Design

12 14 10%

6 Final Exam 15 15 30%

30%

100%

100%


(jj) Course notes:

Series of lectures cover a wide range of topics that introduce and set the scope of Graphic Design

principles, potentials and the support it offers to architect. Guiding principles and basic rules related

to Adobe Photoshop are given in a series of introductory lectures prior to tutorial session.

(kk) Essential books (textbooks):

Gordan, Bob. (2005) The complete guide to Digital Graphic Design, Thames and Hudson. ISBN 0-500-28560-8

Toor, Marcelle Lapow. (1998) Graphic Design on the desktop, John Wiley & Sons.

(ll) Recommended books: A range of Graphic Design textbooks and references cover the principal topics and issues addressed in

the course.


162

ARCH 462. Vernacular Architecture Course Title: Vernacular Architecture Code: ARCH 462 Hours: 2 Lecture: 2 Tutorial: 0 Credit: 2 Prerequisites: None Academic Year / Level: Elective/Intermediate Level: 4 Year: 2017/2018 Term: Fall

Specialization: Architectural Engineering Location: Faculty of Architectural Engineering - Time:

Course Objectives

The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge on Vernacular Architecture which is necessary for carrier in Architectural Design field. This course examines, tools, methods, concepts, theories and criticism through the presentation and study of significant texts and buildings of the present and old past. The goal of the course is to introduce and investigate the formal, technological, social, political, and economic debates at issue within the discipline. Students learn to evaluate and articulate the interactions between theory and practice, cultures and buildings, materials and climate. thereby enabling them to formulate and assess strategies for the making of architectures that respect their environment.

Learning Activities Lectures, discussions and research papers.

Course Outline

Scope and key definitions. Surveying vernacular architecture. Culture and place influences. Local trends, traditions and practices. Elements and components. Lesson and values. Connections, continuity and future prospects. COURSE OUTLINE:

Week No. 1 Introduction and course overview, Definition of Vernacular Architecture, influence

of climate and culture

Week No. 2 Why study Vernacular Architecture. Sustainable features of Vernacular Materials of construction Research 1 starts.

Week No. 3 Mediterrenean and Middleast Vernacular Architecture

Week No. 4 Africa Subsaharian Vernacular Architecture

Week No. 5 Europe and EurAsia Vernacular Architecture

Week No. 6 Research 1 presentation and submission.

Week No. 7 7th week exam


163

Week No. 8 Vernacular Architecture in Lebanon Research 2 starts.

Week No. 9 Latin America Vernacular Architecture

Week No. 10 North America Vernacular Architecture.

Week No. 11 Oceania and Australasia Vernacular Architecture Progress Research 2 REVIEW

Week No. 12 Asian Vernacular Architecture

Week No. 13 Presentation of Research 2 and Submission of 3D models

Week No. 14 TBA

Modern and contemporary Vernacular Architecture – Open Source Architecture - General Revision Final exam

EVALUATION:


WEEK NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. WEIGHTING OF ASSES.

1 Assign. 1

“Dirty Research” make materials with hands

Knowledge of

Vernacular Architecture (Series of

Presentations)

3 6 10%

2

7th Week Exam

Basic knowledge 7 3 20%

3

Assign. 2

“Look around” Analysis of

architectural types

Traditional Architecture in Lebanon

8 13 20%

4

Assign. 2

“Look around” 3D Model and concept

Traditional Architecture in Lebanon

8 13 10%

5

Final Exam

Total Assessment TBA 40%

Total 100%

LIST OF REFERENCES:


164

(mm) Course Notes:

(nn) Essential Books (Textbooks): (textbooks available in Debbeih Campus Library):

Liger-Belair, J. (2000). “L’habitation au Liban / The dwelling in Lebanon”, Geuthner, France

Oliver, p. (1997), ‘Vernacular Architecture of The World" Volume 2-3, Cultures and Habitants. Cambridge University Press, Inc. UK.

Reggette, F. (1975). “Architecture in Lebanon”. Syracuse Univ Pr (Sd).

Rudofsky, B. (1964), ‘Architecture without Architect. A short introduction to non-pedigreed Architecture’, museum of modern art, New York.

(textbooks not available in Debbeih Campus Library):

Ratti, C. Claudel M. (2015), “Open Source Architecture”, Thames and Hudson, UK (c) Websites

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Open-source_architecture

http://www.poval.org.uk/ Course Instructor: Dr. Massimiliano Gotti Porcinari

Dean of Faculty

Prof. Ibtihal El Bastawissi Date: 14/02/2017


165

ARCH463. Intelligent Buildings

Course Code / Title: ARCH463. Intelligent Buildings Credits: 2Hr

Instructor: Dr. Osama Mohamed Omar



Module Info: Advanced Level Course (2 hr. Lecture)

Location: A 209 – B2 Floor

Time: Tue 12:00 to 02:00

Course Objectives

The course provides the student with advanced knowledge of intelligent buildings. The course is to create an environment that allows organizations to achieve their business objectives and maximize the effectiveness of its occupants, while allowing efficient management of resources with a minimum lifetime cost, and recognizing that intelligent buildings are responsive to human needs. At the end of this course student should know last update of technical innovations Linked to intelligent buildings.

Learning Activities


Providing advanced materials for intelligent buildings.

Applied researches (comparison between two or three intelligent buildings).

Evaluating the latest technical innovations applicable to intelligent buildings.

Learning to critically assess the balance between high and low technology.

Course Outline


Environmental concerns underlying responsive design.

Principles of interactive design.

Management of indoor environments.

The building envelope, automated technologies and smart materials.

Integrated building management systems.

Efficient use of energy, utilization of renewable energy systems, sustainable management of resources.

Analytical techniques and computing tools for studying and assessing building energy and environmental performance.


1 Introduction (general)

2 Intelligent Building Definitions (the need for intelligent building)

3 Environmental Concern (Greenhouse effect, Energy context and Energy use, sustainability, eco- design)


166


4 Management of indoor environment (environmental data, occupant control, ventilation, heating and temperature controllers)

5 Automated technologies (programming and monitoring platforms)

6 Intelligent Skins (the human skin, low- energy building, new glass)

7 7th Exam

8 Zero Energy, Clean Energy, Efficient use of Energy (learning ability)

9 Integrated building management systems

10 Renewable recourses (solar cells, wind turbine, water turbine )

11 Smart Materials (Smart Window, insulation, self-clean, double skin, etc…)

12 12th Exam

13 Principles of interactive design (passive systems in buildings, the building concept)

14 Analytical techniques (for studying assessing building energy and environmental performance)

15 Final Exam

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1

Individual assignments to

be assessed (Research)

Definitions and Comparison between two

intelligence building (2st week : 5th week)

2 5 04/10/17 15%

60% 2 6th Week


Total Assessment 7 7 15/10/17 15%

3

Group assignments to

be assessed (Research)

Comparison between two intelligence building

(7thst week : 12th week) 12 12 22/11/17 30%

4 15th Week Final Exam 40%

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course Notes:

N/A


167


Wigginton, M. & Harris, J. (2002). Intelligent Skins. Plant a Tree.

Addington, M.D & Schodek, D.L. (2005). Smart Materials and New Technologies for the Architecture and Design Professions. Architecture Press.

Recommended Books:

Wang, Shengwei. (2010). Intelligent Buildings and Building Automation. Spon Press.

Harrison, A. , Leo, E. & Read, J.(1998). Intelligent building in South East Asia.

Course Instructor: Dr. Osama Mohamed Omar


Date: 30/ 08 / 2016


168

ARCH465. BIM

Course Code / Title: ARCH465. Building Information Modeling Credits: 2

Instructors: Dr. Samer El Sayary Course Hours: 4 Hours/Week Course Duration: 15 Weeks Academic Semester: 7th Semester: Spring 2017/2018

Module Info: Elective Course (1 hr. Lecture, 2 hrs. Studio)

Location: Computer Lab

Time: Monday 08:00 to 09:50

10:00 to 10:50


The course objectives focus on fundamentals of Building Information Modeling (BIM) as a construction documentation system. Introduces concepts and features of BIM. It includes software structure and features, modeling and editing techniques, and sheet creation and organization. It focuses on applying BIM software to develop a set of construction documents.

The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge necessary for architectural engineering carrier in the field of Perspective and Rendering and Contemporary Approaches that address them.

The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge in Building Information Modeling. Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

a. Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and competencies that will be required for positions in the international Information Modeling industry.

b. Understand analytical, developmental, legal, managerial and technical principles that relate to Building Information Modeling.

c. Have an appropriate balance between the vocational skills necessary for immediate employment in Building Information Modeling and the more fundamental principles necessary for further study.

d. Develop the academic abilities and personal characteristics required to solve problems relevant to Building Information Modeling and critically assess relevant aspects of the industry.

e. Cultivate a professional attitude and develop skills in relation to communication, teamwork, project planning and management, and responsibility for individual learning.

f. Demonstrate a systematic understanding of the economic, environmental, political, social and technological influences, which relate to the Building Information Modeling field.

g. Demonstrate an ability to initiate and sustain in-depth research relevant to Building Information Modeling. h. Have an opportunity to put theory into practice via work-based learning. i.

INTENDED LEARNING OUTCOMES (t) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

Understand the nature and operations of Building Information Modeling;

Demonstrate familiarity with theories and concepts used in the Building Information Modeling;

Understand the domestic and international nature and dimensions of Building Information Modeling;

Discuss the structure and organization of the public and private sectors of the Building Information Modeling;

Understand the factors which influence the development of organizations operating in the Building Information Modeling field and the most appropriate ways to manage this development;


169

Demonstrate an understanding of the contribution and impacts of the Building Information Modeling in social, economic, environmental, political and cultural terms;

(u) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the Building Information Modeling;

Critically assess and evaluate the literature within Building Information Modeling;

Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to Building Information Modeling;

Exercise appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information using various methods relevant to Building Information Modeling;

Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to Building Information Modeling;

Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the Building Information Modeling sector and debate the potential benefits.

(v) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:

Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to Building Information Modeling;

Plan, design, record, execute and communicate a piece of independent research using Building Information Modeling media and techniques;

Recognize moral, ethical and safety issues which are pertinent to Building Information Modeling;

Respond to change within the external and internal Building Information Modeling environments. (w) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:

Develop appropriate effective written and oral communication skills relevant to Building Information Modeling;

Demonstrate the ability to work effectively as part of a group, involving leadership, group dynamics and interpersonal skills such as listening, negotiation and persuasion relevant to Building Information Modeling;

Use organization skills (including task and time management) relevant to Building Information Modeling both individually and in a group situation;

Solve problems relevant to Building Information Modeling using ideas and techniques some of which are at the forefront of the discipline;

Develop the ability to self-appraise and reflect on practice relevant to Building Information Modeling.

STAGE



1 Introduction and Course Outline – Organizational Instructions – The Meaning of BIM - BIM Software -Types of BIM Detailing-Instructions - How to Install Software-The Revit Interface.

30/1/2017

2 Starting a Project-A : Template files - project settings - Modeling Basics-Based Modeling Components (Walls)-A

6/2/2017

3 Starting a Project-B: Modeling Basics - Selection and modification basics - Options - columns - Sketch-Based Modeling Components (Complex and stacked Walls)-B

13/2/2017

4 Floors - footprint roofs - slope arrows 20/2/2017

5 Roof modifications and examples - extrusion roofs - slope arrows

27/2/2017

6 Curtain Walls (curtain grids, mullions, and panels) 6/3/2017


8 Rooms (Adding and Controlling room numbering - room bounding elements) Schedules and Tags (Adding tags and schedules - key schedule).

20/3/2017

9 Visibility and Graphic Controls 27/3/2017

10 Annotation 3/4/2017


170

11 Visualization and Presentation-A 10/4/2017


13 Sheets, Plotting, and Publishing 1/5/2017

14 Revision 8/5/2017

15 Final Exam 15/5/2017


171



Course Policies





The lecture starts from 8:00 to 8:50 and the studio work starts from 09:00 to 10:50 on Monday. Course Policies:

Each student should create an A4 portfolio contains: Final Project and the Weekly submissions in a digital format.





Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 BIM definitions intellectual


1 1 30/01/2017

60%

2 Start-up Basics – template file


professional skills

2 2 06/02/2017

3 Modifications basics intellectual


3 3 13/02/2017

4 Floors - footprint roofs - slope arrows


professional skills

4 4 20/02/2017

5 Roof Modelling and modifications


professional skills

5 5 27/02/2017


172

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

6

Curtain Walls (curtain grids, mullions, and panels)

knowledge base and intellectual

qualities

6 6 06/03/2017



professional skills

7 7 13/03/2017

8 Rooms , Schedules and Tags


professional skills

8 8 20/03/2017

9 Visibility and Graphic Controls


professional skills

9 9 27/03/2017

10 Annotation intellectual


10 10 03/04/2017

11 Visualization and Presentation-A


professional skills

11 11 10/04/2017



professional skills

12 12 24/04/2017

13 Sheets, Plotting, and Publishing


professional skills

13 13 1/05/2017

14 Revision – Final Portfolio preview


professional skills

14 14 8/05/2017

15 Final Exam -Oral

Examination-


skills

15 15 As Scheduled 40%

Total 100%


Course Notes:

Course outline: (Lecture Titles, List of References, and Assignments Titles)

Sheets

Projects Briefs


Krygiel, E., Read, P. & Vandezande, J. (2015). Revit Architecture 2015 Essentials. Wiley Publishing, Inc, Canada.

Recommended Books:

Krygiel, E., Read, P. & Vandezande J. (2014). Mastering Autodesk Revit Architecture 2014. Wiley Publishing, Inc, Canada.


173

ARCH467. Digital modelling

Course Code / Title: ARCH467. Digital Modelling

Credits: 2

Instructor: Dr. Marwan Halabi




Location: Digital Modelling Lab

Time: Tue 08:00 to 11:00

Course description and Objectives

The course will deal with the investigation of design problems through the use of computer graphics from the initial stages of design conceptualization to design development, visualizing a new approach to different issues of computer aided design. This studio will concentrate on the idea of digital design that is giving rise to new architectonic possibilities. Architecture is a question of building, and forms generated on the screen are just utopian fantasies if they do not conform to the tectonic requirements of the real world. There is a big difference between designing according to the algorithmic potential of software programs and the tectonic parameters of actual building materials. At the same time, the old opposition of tectonics versus the digital design has given way to a new tectonics of digital design that can be lead to the desired materialization through the help of CAM technologies.


1. Further develop the students’ digital skills in modeling techniques as well as applying the computer as a design tool for the generation of a project

2. Investigate new tools in design, which provide the possibility of studying the transformation of a drawing with respect to changing variables, and the integration of different parameters in the design process

3. Present an opportunity for students to creatively explore new ideas, theories and techniques and to integrate their personal research in the generation of a comprehensive design project

4. Explore different strategies to create an architecture composed of complex geometries, solids, complex surfaces and curves such as NURBS (Non-Standard Uniform B-Splines). For such experiment, we will be using different softwares, among them Rhinoceros as the main tool, combined with the traditional CAD and with the flexibility of the Spline-based technology to precisely represent complex forms instead of just vectorial lines o polygon meshes. An up-to-date set of new tools will be introduced lately in order to parametrically control the process of design and construction.

TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS:

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, seminars, directed reading, videos, computer

assisted learning, case studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and

methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments and projects.

Students should have basic computer drafting skills. The course seeks to provide students with digital modelling strategies by using “Rhinoceros” as the main software in addition to complementary programs such as AutoCad, 3D Max, and Photoshop.

In addition, through the realization of a series of exercises of different scales, students will be provided with the following:


174

1- A set of conceptual and visual tools as supportive information when realizing exercises and designing projects.

2- Exposure to innovative ways to design and obtain complex and, at the same time, rational results.

3- Awareness of the visual qualities of architecture in general, while also learning how to translate observation, knowledge, and intentions into the digital design process.

Course Outline


1

- Visualization options

- Basic drawing definitions : lines, splines, fillet, offset, extrude, copy, move, rotate

1d, 2d and 3d

- Design of basic geometrical shapes

- Extrusion options

2

- Basic descriptive geometry principles : points in space and its relation with

volumes

- Introduction to NURBS

- Surface generation principles: planar surfaces, edge curves, loft, curve network,

revolve and rail sweeping

- Transforming complex surfaces into volumes

3

- Importing design principles and data from different softwares

- Basic operation differences : Boolean operations, trim, split

- Basic geometrical deformations: scale 1d, 2d, & 3d, twist

- Transforming and Deforming shapes

4

- Acquisition of data from shapes: duplicate edges, extract wireframe, extract

isocurves

- Fluidity in design

- Splitting lines, surfaces and volumes

- Geometrical control

5

- Simplification of data for generation of surfaces

- Joining surfaces

- Combination of simple and complex shapes

- Moulding process with splines and control points

- Projecting data into surfaces and shapes

6 - 6th Week Assessment

7

- Control points in space

- Design with splines

- Single curved surfaces

- Double curved surfaces


175


- Boolean operations with simple and complex shapes

8

- Building models with digital data using manual approach

- Building models with digital data for Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM)

- Unroll developable surfaces

9

- Strategies for shape development and control

- 3d section

- Introduction to parametric design

10

- Form contours

- Unfolding surfaces techniques for models and real scale components


12

- Optimization of construction process

- Exporting data for presentations

- Exporting data for rendering

13

- Basic rendering with Rhino

- Exporting data for other platforms

- Transforming designed objects for 3d printing

14 - Generation of a complex project and building of a model (vertical city)

15 - Final Exam

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Exercises Digital Files 3 4 26/09/2017

30%

2 Individual Exercises and quiz

4 5 03/10/2017

3 6th Week

Assessment Total Assessment - 6 17/10/2017

4 11th Week


30%

5 Individual


Assign. 2 (Individual work) 7 13 05/12/2017

6 15th Week Final Exam

Total Assessment - 15 T.B.A. 40% 40%

Total 100% 100%


176

General Policies

The course has introduced to students through lectures, 2 hrs per week.



LIST OF REFERENCES

- Rhinoceros for Windows User Guide

- Rhinoceros modelling tools for designers: Training Maual Level 1


- www.rhino3d.com

Course Instructor: Dr. Marwan Halabi

Dean of Faculty: Prof. Dr. Ibtihal El-Bastawissi

Date: 11 / 04 / 2017


177

ARCH563. Regionalism in Architecture

Course Code / Title: ARCH563. Regionalism in Architecture Credits: 2







Course Objectives

This course is designed to provide an overview of p o s s i b l e n e w i n t e r p r e t a t i o n s a b o u t regionalism in architecture. Students w i l l learn from their own local experiences about architecture and regionalism and issues concerning process and practices.

Course Outline

The course investigates various definitions of regionalism and theoretical approaches to the problem of designing architecture that reflects its time, place, culture and environment. Thus, the shape of buildings and environments are studied in relation to climate, landscape, availability of resources and cultural backgrounds. I explores the concept of regionalism in architecture; local architectural models around the world; the power of invented regionalism, the persistence of regional revivals; and the impact of regional architecture in historic preservation.


1 Introduction. Styles of Architecture

2 last-trends-in-architecture

3 Vernacular Architecture (revision)

4 Research work ( case study presentation)

5 Architecture and culture of the place

6 Regionalism in Architecture ( concept and definition)

7 Research work presentation

8 Approaches to Regionalism in Architecture

9 Traditional Mediterranean Architecture


11 (local Lebanese Architecture)

12 12 week Exam

13 Pre-final research work presentation

14 Introduction to Conservation of Historic Buildings


178

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Group

Assignments

Assignments /assessment (Research on a selected

topic) 3rd 6th 20%

60%

2 Group

Assignments Total Assessment ----- 8th 10%

3

Group Assignments

Assignments /assessment (Research on a selected

topic) 9th 12th 20%

4

Individual Assignments

Assignments /assessment (Research presentation)

----- 14th 10%

5 Final Exam Total Assessment ----- -------- --------- 40% 40%

Total 100% 100%

List of References

(oo) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts.

(pp) Essential books (textbooks): Vincent B. Canizaro, 2007, Architectural Regionalism, Princeton Architecture Press, New York. Lefaivre, Liane (2003) Critical Regionalism : Architecture and Identity in a Globalized World / Liane Lefaivre; Alexander Tzonis. — Munich : Prestel Gallion, Arthur B.& Eisner, Simon.(1963). The Urban Pattern : City Planning and Design 2nd ed. — New Jersey : D. Van Nostrand Company, IN

http://libserver2.bau.edu.lb/baulibrary/result.aspx?Pid=%2219375%22&TP=0&fromp=3



179

(qq) Recommended books:

Jenks, Mike. Edt. Burton, Elizabeth and Williams, Kate (1996) The Compact City : A Sustainable Urban Form? /— London : E. & F.N. Spon Ltd Nakhla, Samir (1971) An Approach to Regional Architecture : A Case Study of the Middle East With Special Reference to Egypt / Samir Nakhla. — Nurnberg : Druckshnelldienst Proceedings of the Regional Seminar in the series Exploring Architecture in Islamic Cultures (1983 : Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia) Architecture and Identity / Proceedings of the Regional Seminar in the series Exploring Architecture in Islamic Cultures Held in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia. — Singapore : Concept Media Pte Ltd, 1983 Williams, Katie. Edt. Burton,Elizabeth and Jenks, Mike. (2000) Achieving Sustainable Urban Form .London : E. & F.N. Spon Ltd

(rr) General References:

Books available in the BAU library. Other texts and links of papers to be proposed by the Instructor during the lessons



Date: 01 / 09 / 2017







180

ARCH564. SITE PLANNING

Course Code / Title: ARCH564. Site Planning Credits: 2


Academic Semester: 500 level Elective Semester: Fall 2017


Location: A203 -Level 4 Studio – B1 Floor

Time: Tue 12:00 to 14:50


Theory, practice and impacts of site planning: zoning, growth management, methods and techniques of land use control. Site identity and character. Systematic surveys and site analysis. Physical, cultural and economic contexts. Critique of recent cases of site planning. Developing land use plans and guidelines, land use ordinances and legal frameworks.

THE GOALS OF SITE PLANNING ARE TO CONTRIBUTE TO THE OVERALL FUNCTIONAL EFFICIENCY, CONSERVATION OF RESOURCES,

ECONOMIC STABILITY AND QUALITY OF LIFE OF THE INSTALLATION.

Learning Activities

The course is delivered through lectures and practice surveys and site analysis with hands on researches and applications. theory, practice ( methods and techniques of scientific steps for site planning as a reconnaissance and inventories( physical, biological, cultural and economic contexts), site analysis and evaluate the results . The course including project a compound for residential area. The students will learn how to apply the previous subjects according to the program, site analysis, site environmental issues and there exists regulations and constraints .

Course Outline


1 Introduction and definitions

2 Site Planning and Design Principles

3 Scientific steps for Site Planning

4 Site visit (Site selection).

5 Systematic Surveys & Site Analysis.

6 Principles of Neighborhood Design.

7 7th Week Exam (oral)

8 Developing land use plans and guidelines

9 Conceptual Design.

10 Design Development.

11 Construction Documentation

12 12th Week Evaluation (oral)


181


13 Project implementation

14 Final presentation group / Open discussion & assignment submission

List of References: (ss) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts (tt) Recommended books:

Mumford, Lewis (1961). The city in History: Its Origin, its Transformations, and its Prospects, New York: Harcourt Inc.

Gallion, Arthur B. The Urban Pattern

Howard, E. (1965). Garden Cities of Tomorrow. Intro. by Lewis Mumford. Cambridge, Massachusetts: The MIT Press.

Hall, G. (1996). Cities of Tomorrow: An Intellectual History of Urban Planning and Design in the Twentieth Century.

Date: 10/ 02 / 2017



182

ARCH566. Environmental Impact Assessment

Course Code / Title: ARCH566. Environmental Impact Assessment Credits: 2 Instructor: Hiba Mohsen Course Hours: 2 Hours/Week Course Duration: 14 Weeks Academic Semester: 5th Semester: Fall 2017/2018 Module Info: Elective Course (2 hrs. Lecture) Location: Auditorium A209 Time: Thursday 2:00 to 4:00


This course introduces the process of environmental impact assessment, analysis and implementation. It provides a critical overview of the theory and practice of EIA as operated internationally. It also provide a basic understanding of the EIA process as it is used for research, planning, project or program evaluation, monitoring. The student will be able to relate the uses of scientific research to practical situations in project planning and decision making. It also introduce students to the legal, economic, administrative and technical process of preparing and/or evaluating environmental impact documents

The intended learning outcomes of the course are:

(x) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

(x 1) - To identify the purpose and aims of EIA; (x 2) - To define the concept of associated assessment processes; (x 3) - To list the key elements of the EIA process.

(y) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

(y 1) - To analyze the role of public participation; (y 2) - To determine the strengths and limitations of EIA; (y 3) - To classify the options for estimating environmental and social impacts;

(z) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:

(z 1) - To distinguish the costs and benefits of undertaking EIA (z 2) - To prepare the screening process; (z 3) - To experiment the scoping process and how it is applied;

(aa) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:

(aa 1) - To verify the factors that assist, and detract, from the usefulness of the EIA Report;

(aa 2) - To propose an EIA Report (Environmental Impact Statement, or Environmental Statement);

(aa 3) - To communicate with teams comprised of impact assessment professionals

Learning Activities

The learning that students will achieve will come from the structured materials that form the basis of the course, the activities that are contained within the course and the research that is approved by the tutor of the course.

Research (Group work)

Relate your assignment to an every-day situation from the following possibilities:


183

An EIA project that is planned in your local area (or anywhere in Lebanon)

Construction or redevelopment of a road, or public transport facility

Expansion of part of the operations of a heavy engineering firm on a new (but nearby) site

Development (or redevelopment/expansion) of a regional shopping centre

Discuss and agree your choice of what you would like to do, and resources, with your instructor. After you have selected your topic, following negotiation with your instructor, you are asked to prepare a 2000 word maximum report. This report will provide a critically thought-through plan for an EIA (related to the situation you have chosen). You should prepare a framework that could be given to someone else to complete all the details. As part of this report you will: briefly describe the situation to which the EIA applies; discuss why the EIA is needed; identify the components that will constitute the EIA; discuss the purpose/role of each component; and base your discussion on the literature related to EIA theory or practice. Imagine that you are an environmental consultant, and you have been commissioned by a developer to undertake an EIA of a local example of a proposed or current development project or policy.

In a letter to the developer, outline the local legal and regulatory framework for EIA and its role in gaining permission to apply the policy or construct and operate the proposed development. (10% marks)

Develop a scoping matrix for the development and produce a brief method statement to justify your choice of impacts (15% marks).

Develop a document as if you were an environmental consultant outlining how you would go about carrying out an environmental baseline study for one of the chosen elements taken from scoping list already developed (15% marks).

Create Assessment and mitigation summary table, using information about your proposed project or policy, and supplementary reading (10% marks).

Provide a written commentary explaining your choice of impact magnitude and significance descriptors, and your suggested mitigation measures (15% marks).

Choose the main impacts and explain why they may prevent the project from proceeding (15% marks).

Quizzes:

Each class may include a quiz covering the previous week’s reading assignment. These cannot be made up if missed.


STAGE LABEL & DESCRIPTION NOTES

Week 1 Introduction to the Course

Week 2

1. Background 1-2 Purpose and aims of EIA 1-3 Nature and Scope of environmental issues and impacts 1-4 Principles of EIA administration and practice 1-5 Key elements of the EIA process 1-6 Costs and benefits of EIA

Week 3

2. Law, Policy and Institutional Arrangements 2-1 Introduction 2-2 About EIA Systems 2-3 EIA Policy and Legislation 2-4 EIA Requirements of International Organizations 2-5 Principles for a Functional EIA System

http://eia.unu.edu/course/?page_id=28







184

Week 4

3. Pollution 3-1 Air Pollution 3-2 Water Pollution 3-3 Noise Pollution 3-4 Soil contamination 3-5 Light Pollution 3-6 Visual Pollution 3-7 Global warming 3-8 Pollution reduction methods 3-9Renewable resources

Week 5

4. Public involvement 4-1 Introduction 4-2 What is public involvement? 4-3 Stakeholders involved 4-4 Principles of public involvement 4-5 Scope of involvement 4-6 Planning a public involvement program 4-7 Public involvement techniques 4-8 Arguments for and against public involvement

Week 6

5. Screening 5-1 Introduction 5-2 Screening procedure 5-3 Project lists for screening 5-4 Preliminary EIA 5-5 Other types of Screening 5-6 Criteria for the determination of the need for, and level of, EIA

Week 7

Mid-Term 6. Scoping

6-1 Introduction 6-2 Purpose of scoping 6-3 Approaches to scoping 6-4 Scoping methods 6-5 Alternatives

6-6 EIA Terms of Reference

Week 8

7. Impact analysis 7-1 Impact Identification 7-2 Impact Analysis/Prediction 7-3 Characteristics of environmental impacts 7-4 Social Impact Assessment 7-5 Evaluation of impact significance 7-6 Significance Criteria

Week 9

8. Mitigation and Impact Management 8-1 Link between EIA process and Mitigation 8-2 Main Elements of Mitigation 8-3 Approaches to Mitigation 8-4 Environmental Management Plan and Mitigation Measures

Week 10

9. EIA Reporting 9-1 What is an EIA Report? 9-2 Typical Elements of an EIA Report 9-3 Shortcomings encountered in Preparing EIA Reports 9-4 Guidelines for effective EIA report preparation and

production

Week 11

10. Review of EIA Quality 10-1 Role and Purpose of the EIA Review Process 10-2 Need for a Systematic Approach 10-3 Procedural Aspects
















































185

10-4 Main Steps in the EIA Review 10-5 Carrying out the review 10-6 Procedures for Evaluating EIA Reports

Week 12 Report submission 1 / Discussion

Week 13 Pre-final submission / Discussion

Week 14

11. Decision-making 11-1 Role of the Decision-makers 11-2 EIA as part of the Decision-making Process 11-3 Responsibility of the Decision-Makers

12. Implementation and Follow-up 12-1 Key Objectives of EIA implementation and follow up 12-2 Tools for Environmental Management and Performance Review 12-3 Monitoring 12-4 Environmental Auditing 12-5 Evaluation of EIA Effectiveness and Performance

Course Policies

Attendance is mandatory, Tardiness is not acceptable. The use of cell phones is disruptive, and is therefore prohibited during class.

Evaluation

Asses No.


No.

Subm. Week

No. Subm. Date

1 Individual & group

assignments

Research/ Quizzes / Week 7 Exam

(week 4st : week 7th) 1 6

Refer to schedule

30%

60%

2 6th Week



3 Individual & group

assignments

Screening, Scoping

(week 8thst : week 12th)

7 12 20%

4 Quiz Total Assessment 12 12

5

Individual and group assignments

EIA Report Submission

12 14 10%

6 Final Exam

Final Exam 40%

40%

Total

100% 100%
















186

List of References

Essential Books Noble, B. (2010) Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment, Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Recommended Books Wood, C. (2002) Environmental Impact Assessment: A Comparative Review (2nd Edition), Harlow: Prentice Hall. Kevin, H. (2009) Environmental Impact Assessment, Oxford: Oxford University Press.

UNDP (2010) State and Trends of the Lebanese Environment, UNDP, Beirut.

Clayton B. D. & Sadler B. (2005) Strategic Environmental Assessment: A sourcebook and Reference Guide to International Experience. Earthscan, UK

Course Instructor: Hiba Mohsen

Dean of Faculty: Prof. Ibtehal El-Bastawissi


187

SPRING

ARCH272 – ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS: PHYSICAL STUDIES

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: Architectural Design Fundamentals: Physical Studies Code: ARCH272 Hours Lecture: 02 Tutorial: 8 Credit: 05 Prerequisites: ARCH 271 Academic Year / Level: First Term: Spring Specialization: Architectural Engineering


The course aims to build up the specialized knowledge and develop/ sustain the required skills needed to support, enthuse and inspire students during their early architectural design experimentations and throughout their future practice.


Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and competencies that enable them to work efficiently -as architects- in geographically dislocated collaborative design environment.

Understand analytical, developmental, legal, managerial and technical principles that relate to Architectural Design.

Develop an initial balance between the creative/imaginative and rational/ practical thinking skills necessary for the effective design thinking and Architectural Design process.

Develop the academic abilities and personal characteristics required to solve problems relevant to Architectural Design and critically assess relevant aspects of the industry.


Accomplish an initial understanding of the economic, environmental, political, social and technological influences which relate to the architectural design problem.

Demonstrate an ability to initiate and sustain in-depth research relevant to Architectural Design.

Demonstrate an introductory understanding of the formal, environmental, social and technological influences, which relate to Architectural Design.







(bb) DESIGN


188

(ARB/RIBA part1: GC1.1 / GC1.3 / GC2.2/ GC3.3/ GC5.1/ GC5.3/ GC6.3)

(bb 1) - An awareness of the holistic process of architectural design

(bb 2) - An awareness of the totality of the creative design process, from inception, design development, to fabrication and construction.

(bb 3) - An understanding of the role of drawings in the research and analysis phases of the design process.

(bb 4) - An understanding of scale and the way in which building fit into their local context.

(bb 5) - An understanding of the qualities that make a drawing an appropriate and clear communication.

(bb 6) - An understanding of the basic formal concepts and relationship.

(bb 7) - An understanding of the value of the conscious application of the formal concepts to creation, development and communication of ideas.

(bb 8) - An understanding of a range of basic architectural design concepts (i.e., approach, entry, arrival, open/implied versus closed/explicit space and clear spatial figure.)

(bb 9) - An ability to plan, carry out and reflect on a process for creating design solutions.

(bb 10) - An ability to design in three dimensions and prepare and present building design projects in response to a brief

(bb 11) - An ability to develop a conceptual and critical approach to architectural design that integrates and satisfies the aesthetic and technical aspects of a building and needs of the user

(bb 12) - An Ability to develop a design that addresses and synthesizes stated goals, constraints and requirements.

(bb 13) - An ability to make cognitive judgement regarding the hierarchical relationship of spaces, and associated volumetric organisation.

(bb 14) - An ability to adopt an open-minded approach in the appraisal of design issues, requirements and opportunities.

(bb 15) - An ability to generate alternatives and develop solutions to defined design problems.

(cc) TECHNOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT (ARB/RIBA part1: GC1.2 / GC5.2/ GC8.2/ GC8.3)

(cc 1) - An awareness of the opportunities and limitations of material properties on its structural capability on different scales (model making and one unit scale).

(cc 2) - An awareness of Constructability and structural theories.

(cc 3) - A preliminary understanding of the physical properties and characteristics of specific materials, components and systems, and the impact of specification choices.

(cc 4) - An ability to design three-dimensional form and spaces that experientially respond to natural and built site characteristics (sun location, glare, heat weather conditions, etc.)

(dd) CULTURAL CONTEXT (ARB/RIBA part1: GC2.2 / GC2.3/ GC5.1/ GC5.3/ GC6.3/ GC7.1)

(dd 1) - An awareness of the need to inspire and aspire users in physical environments.


189

(dd 2) - A knowledge of the creative application of fine arts and other such work to studio design projects, in terms of their conceptualization and representation.

(dd 3) - An understanding of the need to critically review precedents in informing the function, organization and technology strategy of design proposals.

(dd 4) - An understanding of the way in which buildings fit into their local social, cultural and physical context.

(dd 5) - An understanding of the diverse needs, values, behavioral norms, physical abilities, and social and spatial patterns that characterize different cultures and individuals and the implication of this diversity on the societal roles and responsibilities of architects.

(ee) COMMUNICATION (ARB/RIBA part1: GC1.1 / GC3.3)

(ee 1) - An awareness of the implication and applicability of „scale‟ in methods of representation.

(ee 2) - An awareness of the relevance and applicability of various methods of visual representation.

(ee 3) - An understanding of the value of representing information in graphic form.

(ee 4) - An ability to use conventional (3D model - making) as well as non-conventional techniques of architectural representation.

(ee 5) - An ability to verbally present in clear manner the essential goals and concepts that underlay a design.

(ee 6) - An ability to identify in writing specific things learned in the process of developing and communicating a design.

(ee 7) - An ability to present building design projects of diverse scale, complexity and type in a variety of contexts, using a range of media, and in response to a brief.

(ee 8) - An ability to utilize a range of media, tools, techniques and pictorial systems to represent existing and imagined objects and environments on two- dimensional surfaces.

(ff) MANAGEMENT PRACTICE AND LAW (ARB/RIBA part1: GC6.2)

(ff 1) - An awareness of the process of evaluation and critical appraisal of one’s own work and the work of others.

(ff 2) - An ability to work in collaboration with other students as members of a design team.

13- COURSE OUTLINE:

Week No. 1

Introductory Lectures (Human Needs) First Design/Model Project

Week No. 2

Group work Human Needs (Housing Unit) Model Making Lecture 1

Week No. 3

Shade and Shadow 1 First Design/Model Project Submisision EVALUATION 1 – Human Needs + 1st project


190

Week No. 4

Second Design/ Model Project Model Making Lecture 2 Research: Site (Analysis & Concept)

Week No. 5

Shade and Shadow 2 Design Development

Week No. 6

EVALUATION 2 - Site (Analysis & Concept) + 2nd Project Model Making Lecture 3

Week No. 7

Model workshop (7th week assessment)

Week No. 8

Shade and Shadow 3 TERM Project

Week No. 9

Design Development (Plans and model development + Elevations)

Week No. 10

Design review 1 (Drawings & model development + Sections)

Week No. 11

Client’s character research review Client’s character research submission

Week No. 12

pre final Submission (12th Week Evaluation) (Layout model, presentation technique, Typography, Diagrams...etc

Week No. 13

Drawings refinement for final submission

Week No. 14

Final Submission

Week No. 15

Final exam

Note that:

1. More orthographic projection sheets might be given during the course of the semester along the

design work or as needed by the design tutors.

2. The shade and shadows module, its lectures and assignments will be merged with the course layout in

the following sequence:

The effect of light and Shadow. (planar)

The effect of light and Shadow. (volumetric)

Architectural shades & shadows Architectural examples

3. Interim assessments (7th & 12th week) will most probably include grades for shade and shadow

exercises.

4. You will be provided with a short reading list to inspire discussion during the design classes.

5. Course files will be inspected from time to time so be prepared.

6. Alterations to the above plan and timetable are possible according to the actual progress of work and

assessment as monitored by the course teaching staff. Therefore, interim submissions and evaluation

could be required and their outcome communicated to the students to provide them with further

guidance.

4- Teaching and Learning Methods:

The course is delivered through lectures, seminars, directed reading, case studies and experimental

learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, and research paper. Exposure to the ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN environment and related projects are an important aspect of the teaching and learning methods.


191

5 - Course Policies

General Policies:



The studio work starts from 11:00 to 15:50 on Monday and from 08:00 to 12:50 on Wednesday.

The break times: 12:30 to 12:45 & 14:15 to 14:30 on Monday 09:30 to 09:45 & 11:15 to 11:30 on Wednesday

Course Policies:

Each student should create an A2 portfolio contains: Course outline: (Lecture Titles, list of references, and Assignments Titles) – Sheets - Projects briefs – Researches – class sketches – A3 hard copy of the submitted sheets.

Refer to your Studio policies at (Studio Etiquette)


192

6- Student Assessment Methods, Schedule and Grading:

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.


1 Researches

EVALUATION 1 - researches & case studies 01 07 15% 2

Sheets

Orthographic Projection 01 07

3 Sheet EVALUATION 2 – 7th week evaluation Pin UP 1

06 07 10%

4 Sheets Project (Pin Up2) 07 08 5 %

5 Sheets - Model

EVALUATION 3 – pre final Submission

08 10 5%

6 Sheets - Model EVALUATION 4 – 12th week Project 1 Final Submission

10 12 10%

7 Sheet Shade & Shadow

07 12 5%

8 Sheet Shade & Shadow

11 14 3%

9 Model Evaluation 5 – Model MAKING 1 7 7%

10 Final Exam 30%

Total 100%


193


Course notes:

Each student has an A2 portfolio contains: Course outline: (Lecture Titles, list of references, and Assignments Titles) – Sheets - Projects briefs –Researches – class sketches – A2 hard copy of the submitted stages.

Given Reading List:

Zumthor, Peter, et al. Thinking architecture. Vol. 113. Birkhäuser, 2006.

Lawson, Bryan. Language of space. Routledge, 2007.


Ching F. D. K. (2007). Architecture Form. Space and order. 3rd Edition-Van Nostrand

Reinhold, New York.

Ching F. D. K. (2009). Architecture Graphics. 5th Edition-Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York.

Edwards, B. (2008). Understanding architecture through drawing. Taylor & Francis.

Farrelly, L. (2012). The fundamentals of architecture. Bloomsbury Publishing Fraser, I., & Henmi, R.

(1993). Envisioning architecture: an analysis of drawing. John Wiley & Sons.

Jencks, C., & Baird, G. (Eds.). (1970). Meaning in architecture. Barrie & Jenkins.

Lyall, S. (1991). Designing the new landscape. Thames and Hudson.

Mills, C. B. (2010). Designing with models: A studio guide to making and using architectural design models.

John Wiley & Sons.

Mi-Young, P.(2012) Construction and design manual architectural models 1 &2. DOM publisher

Seonwook, K.(2012) Construction and design manual Architectural and Program Diagrams 1 &2. DOM

publisher

Recommended Books:

(2006). 50 of The World’s Best Apartments. Images Publishing Dist Ac.

Callender, J. H. (1997 or latest edition). Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data. New York: McGraw-Hili Book Company.

De Chiara J., Panero J. & Zelnik M. (2001 or the latest edition). Time-Saver Standards for Housing and Residential Development. New York: McGraw-Hili Book Company.

De Chiara J. (2001 or the latest edition). Time-Saver Standards for Building Types. New

York: McGraw-Hili Book Company.

Fajardo J. (2008). Design Apartments. h. f. ullmann.

Kim, & yong – sam. (2003). Interior Design (ID Series) – Apartments and Villas. CA Press Co. Ltd., Soul, Korea.

Kim, and yong – sam. (2003 or the latest edition). Interior Space Series. Arch-world Co. Ltd., Soul, Korea.

Binggeli K. (2004). Interior Graphic Standards, Wiley; USA.

Laseau, P. (1988 or the latest edition). Graphic Thinking for Architects and Designers.

2nd Edition, Wiley.

Neufert, P. (2012). Architect's Data-4th edition. Wiley-Blackwell.

http://www.amazon.com/Paul-Laseau/e/B001IO9PA8/ref=ntt_athr_dp_pel_1


194

Ramsey C. G. & Hoke, J. R. (2007). Architectural Graphic Standards. 11th Edition, John,

Willey and Sons Inc., USA.

Zelnik, M. (2001 or the latest edition). Time-Saver Standards for Interior Design and

Space Planning. 2nd Edition, New York: McGraw-Hili Book Company.

Magazines:

Architectural Design Magazines Series.

Architectural Review Magazines Series.

Domus Magazines Series.

Ikea catalogs.


195

ARCH274 – Building Construction II

Course Title: Building Construction II Code: ARCH274 Hours Lecture: 02 Tutorial: 04 Credit: 03 Prerequisites: ARCH273 Academic Year / Level: Level 1 Year: 2017-2018 Term: Spring 2018 Specialization: Architecture-Design


The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge necessary for engineering carrier in Building Construction field.


- Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and competencies that will be required for Building Construction position in the international Building Construction industry. - Understand analytical, developmental, legal, managerial and technical principles that relate to Building Construction. - Have an appropriate balance between the vocational skills necessary for immediate employment in Building Construction and the more fundamental principles necessary for further study. - Develop the academic abilities and personal characteristics required to solve problems relevant to Building Construction and critically assess relevant aspects of the industry. - Cultivate a professional attitude and develop skills relation to communication, teamwork, project planning and management, and responsibility for individual learning. - Demonstrate a systematic understanding of the economic, environmental, political, social and technological influences, which relate to the Building Construction field. - Demonstrate an ability to initiate and sustain in-depth research relevant to Building Construction. - Have an opportunity to put theory into practice via work-based learning.

Week No. 1 Reinforced concrete staircase one flight (Drawings, details, techniques )

Week No. 2 Reinforced concrete staircase Circular (design and construction)

Week No. 3 Walls (solid, cavity) concrete, bricks, stone…

Week No. 4 Walls (retaining) concrete, bricks, stone…


196

Week No. 5 Site visit [field survey] (under construction site)

Week No. 6 Masonry works (Brick, stone work)

Week No. 7 Masonry works (stone work)

Week No. 8 Midterm Exam

Week No. 9 Wooden Doors and Windows

Week No. 10 Semester Project: Two floors building. Construction system: Skeleton Construction System

Week No. 11 Project Plans by courses (studio work)

Week No. 12 Feedback on Plans by courses (lecture) and start Sections (studio)

Week No. 13 Project Sections (studio work)

Week No. 14 Feedback on Sections (lecture) and start Elevations (studio)

Final Exam

4-a Teaching and Learning Methods:

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, seminars, directed reading, videos, computer assisted

learning, laboratories, case studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, research paper, workshops.

Exposure to the BUILDING CONSTRUCTION environment and related projects are an important aspect of the teaching and learning methods. 4-b Teaching and Learning Methods for Students with Special Needs:


Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.

1 Class work Ex-1 Staircase one flight

2 3 5%

2 Class work Ex-2 Staircase Circular

4 5 5%

3 Class work Ex-3 Wall Sections 6 6 5%

4 Class work Ex-4 Wall Sections Stone work

7 7 5%

Total 20%

5 In class Exam Midterm Exam 8 8 10%

6 Individual project Step No.1

Foundation Plan 9 10 5%

Plans Submission 5%


Final Plans + Sections Submission

11 12 5%


Elevations & Details Submission

13 13 5%

Total 20%


197

9

Individual project Step No.4

Final Submission 14 10%

Jury 10%

Total 70%


(a) Course Notes:

Each student has an A4 portfolio contains: Course outline: (Lecture Titles, list of references, and Assignments Titles) – Sheets - Research briefs – Researches – Reports – A3 hard copy of the submitted sheets.

(b) Essential books (textbooks):


Ramsey & Sleeper. (1989) Architectural Graphic Standards. John Wiley & Sons; Student edition, abridged from the seventh edition. ISBN 0-471-62060-2

W.B.Mckay, Building Construction- Fifth Edition Volume (1,2,3,4,5)

Chudley R. and Greeno R., Building Construction Handbook 8th Edition, Elsevier, Great Britain, 2008.

Hegger Manfred, Construction Materials Manual ( Construction Manuals Series ), Birkhauser GmbH, 2006.

(c) Recommended books:


Hansen, Jurgen (1971) Architecture in wood. Gerhand stalling verlag, Germany

Liebing, Ralph & Paul Mimi. (1977) Architectural working drawings. John Wiley & Sons. New York.

Barry R. (1970) The Construction of Buildings. Volume 1,2 Granada, London. Second edition.

Ching Francis D. K.(2001) A Visual Dictionary of Architecture. John Wiley & Sons. New York.

Course Instructor: Assoc. Prof. Dr. Baher Farahat

Dean of Faculty: Prof. Dr. Ibtehal Youssef

Date: 1/2/2018

http://www.amazon.com/exec/obidos/tg/detail/-/0471288217/ref=pd_sim_books_2/002-7600262-8623246?v=glance&s=books


198

ARCH276. Theory of Architecture I

Course Code / Title: ARCH276. Theory of Architecture I Credits: 2

Instructor: Dr. Massimiliano Gotti Porcinari


Academic Semester: 2nd Semester: Spring 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory Course (2 hrs. Lecture)

Location: Time:

Course Objectives

This course is designed for beginners students of architecture to sensitize them with main aspects involved in the creation of architecture. Students are encouraged to perceive and understand aspects of form, function and structure in buildings as three interrelated component in design. The course provides an in-depth Knowledge of architecture design elements and their inter-relations. The contents include: basic design theories and strategies related to the development of spatial concepts in architectural design, emphasis on concept generation and evaluation morphological study of essential architectural elements of form and space and those principles controlling their organization in the built environment, 2d and 3d design drawings. Also emphases is drawn upon how elements of form, as the primary tool of design, counter and transcend functional aspects. Within this perspective, in class and off campus exercises are designed to analyze models of architecture work .Learning Activities

Understanding main components of architecture and design

Defining architecture and what it should do

Determining the inter-relationships among Form, Space, function, structure…

Analysing architectural projects; planning, elevations, perspectives…

Course Outline


1 INTRODUCTION: architecture fundamentals. Primary elements. Concepts of space and form.

2 SPACE IDENTIFICATION: Activities, boundaries: inside, outside and in-between spaces.Void, space and place. ANTHROPOMETRY: human measurements, ergonomics, distances. Assign. 1

3 EUCLIDEAN GEOMETRY and other geometries. Primary shapes, Surfaces, solids and their properties, irregular shapes. DIMENSIONS IN ARCHITECTURE: bidimensional, perspective, 4th dimension

4 TRANSFORMATION OF FORM: operations: subtractive, additive (groups), modelling. Articulation of form: Corners, surfaces CONSEQUENCES IN THE SPACE: Urban and architectural spaces

5 Submission of Assign. 1

6 THEORIES AND FORMS IN ARCHITECTURAL HISTORY; different types of space and life: from human scale of the Greeks to the plan libre and organic space of modern era.

7 7th week exam


199

8 CONTEMPORARY ARCHITECTURE: new aesthetics and organizations of the space

9 ARCHITECTURE AND PATHS: CLASSICAL PATH SYSTEMS: courtyard, gallery, enfilade and corridor. LINEAR DISTRIBUTION, OPEN DISTRIBUTION, COMPLEX DISTRIBUTION Assign. 2

10 PROPORTION & SCALE. REVIEW Assignment 2

11 Submission 1st phase of Assign. 2

12 REVIEW Assignment 2 Principles: Ordering Principles, Axis, Symmetry, Hierarchy, Datum, Rhythm, Repetition, Transformation

13 Submission 2nd and 3rd phase of Assign. 2

14 GENERAL REVIEW

TBA FINAL EXAM

Evaluation

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Weighting of Asses.

1 Assign. 1 Understanding Architectural Boundaries / Elements

1 6 10

60

Attendances 1 7 5

Weekly assign. 5

2 7th Week Exam Total Assessment - 7 10

3 Assign. 2

Learning from architectures: study, evaluate and explain 2 projects of villas in 3 phases; a)Researching materials, b)Analysis: study and investigate

9 11 13

20

5

Assign. 2

Learning from architectures: study, evaluate and explain 2 projects of villas in 3 phases; c)Comparison and explain

8 13 10

6 Final Exam

TBA 40 40

Total

100

100

LIST OF REFERENCES Text Books:

Ching, Francis D.K. (1996). Architecture: Form, Space and Order. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold.


200

Class notes and handouts.

Reference Books:

NEUFERT, Ernst – Neufert Architect's Data – 2nd edition – Blackwell Science Ltd., 1997 (ID: Ref. 720 NE-AR)

VON MEISS, Pierre– Elements of Architecture: From Form to Place – E&FN Spon, 1998.

GIEDION Sigfried - Space, Time and Architecture. The Growth of a new tradition - Harvard University Press 1941

EVANS, Robin - “Figures, doors and passages” in Translations from Drawing to Building and Other Essays, Architectural Association, 1997.

ZEVI, Bruno – Saper vedere l’architettura (know how to see architecture) – Einaudi 1948

PRESTINENZA PUGLISI, Luigi – This is tomorrow, avanguardie e architettura contemporanea (this is tomorrow, avantgarde and contemporary architecture) - Testo & Immagine 1999. www.prestinenza.it

DI MARI Anthony, Operative Design: A Catalog of Spatial Verbs, Bis Pub 2013

DI MARI Anthony, Conditional Design: An Introduction to Elemental Architecture, Bis Pub 2014


Dean of Faculty: Prof.Ibtihal El Bastawissi

Date: 14/02/2016


201

ARCH278 – Computer Graphics

Course Title: Computer Graphics Code: ARCH278 Instructor: Assist. Prof. Osama Omar

Hours: 03 Lecture: 01 Tutorial: 02 Credit: 02 Prerequisites: ARCH277

Academic Year / Level: 2017/2018 - Level Year: 2017/2018-Term2 Semester: 02 Mandatory Course/Intermediate Level Specialization: Architectural Engineering Time: Friday 08:00 – 11:00 Location: Computer Lab Friday 13:00 – 15:50

Course Objectives

In this course, students learn how to use 3D Studio max as a designing media, to think and explore design possibilities of form making. Students will learn how to model, apply material, add lights and cameras, render still images and animate architectural or interior scenes. Scenes could be either imported from AutoCAD as 2D or fully modeled in Max. Although this course is titled for architects to provide the fundamental knowledge for them to either visualize their designs or to use it as a platform for design and form making. Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

Understand the use of the different tools used in Computer Graphics software’s.

Learn the basic functions of 3D Studio Max and Adobe Photoshop software’s.

Use the basic manual tools traditionally used in drawings representation.

Maintain a high standard of quality for drawings representation.

Understand the representation of three-dimensional objects presented on a two-dimensional plan.

Create drawings of basic objects in a three-dimensional (3D) environment.

Learning Activities The learning outcomes will include but not limited to Theoretical lectures that will provide them with foundation to understand and apply the practice of 3D. In addition, the Lab. Activities will be integrated with the course assignments to provide the students with the professional practice they need to work and produce still images, and/or animations. Course Outline The course addresses the following topics:

User Interface Basics.

Advanced Geometric Modeling.

Spline based Modeling.

Landscape Modeling and rendering using Daylight (Interior & Exterior).

Photoshop (Rendering Plans and Elevations).

Photoshop (Retouching 3d Images)


1 User Interface Basics (Transformation & Control Navigation Buttons)


202

Teaching and Learning Methods:

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, seminars, directed reading, videos, computer assisted learning, laboratories, case studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, research paper, workshops. Exposure to the Computer graphics environment and related projects are an important aspect of the teaching and learning methods.

Evaluation:

2 Geometric Modeling ( Object Types, Boolean, Groups)

3 Advanced Geometric Modeling (Furniture Modeling & Building Modeling)

4 Modifiers ( Extrude, Lathe, Bevel, Sweep, Bevel Profile)

5 Spline based Modeling and Vertices

6 Classical Facades Modeling, Lighting (1) (Daylight & Artificial Light) / Applying and editing colors, camera, Walk Through animation.

7 7th Week Exam

8 Lighting (2) (Daylight & Artificial Light) / Applying and editing colors, camera, lighting.

9 Applying and Editing Materials (1), Background

10 Making and Editing Material (2), Layers, Objects ( Diffuse, Bump, Reflection, Refraction, Self-illumination)

11 Landscape Modeling and rendering, using Daylight (Interior & Exterior) Interior Rendering 1 (Living Room) Materials Using Mentalray.

12 12th Week Evaluation (Final Project Submission)

13 Photoshop (Rendering Plans and Elevations and 3d Perspective)

14 Project Monitoring (Editing Objects, Filters and Effects )

15 Final Exam

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.

1

Individual assignments to be assessed


1 7 17/3/18 20%


Total Assessment 7 7 17/3/18 15


203

List of References:

Book references

(uu) Course Notes:

3D Studio Max Help 2016 / Adobe Photoshop Help.

(vv) Essential Books (Textbooks):

Murdock K. 3Ds Max 2011 Bible, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2010.

Daylay L. & Daylay B., Adobe Photoshop cs5 Bible, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2010.

(ww) Recommended Books:

Gerhard M. & Harpper J., Mastering Autodesk 3ds Max Design 2011, Focal Press, 2010.

(xx) General References:

3 Individual assignments to assess

Assignments/assessment (8thst week : 12th week)

8 11 14/4/18

20%

70%


Total Assessment 12 12 21/4/18

5

Individual assignments to assess


13 15 12/5/18 15%

6

15th Week Final Exam

30%

30%

Total

100%

100%


204

Autodesk 3DsMax Official Help 2016.

Cardoso J. & Cusson R., Realistic Architectural Visualization with 3ds Max and mental ray,

Barnes & Noble, 2012.

Randi L. Derakhshani R.& Derakhshani D., Autodesk 3ds Max 2015 Essentials, Autodesk

Official Press, 2014.

(yy) WEB REFRENCES

www.cgarchitect.com

www.3dtotal.com

Course Instructor: Assist. Prof. Osama Omar


http://www.cgarchitect.com/

http://www.3dtotal.com/


205

ARCH280 – Academic Writing

Course Title: Academic Writing Course Code: ARCH280

Hours: 2 Lecture: 2 Tutorial: 0 Credit: 2

Prerequisites: None

Academic Year / Level: 2017/2018 / Level 1 Year: 2017/2018 Term: 2 -Spring


Course Objectives


Achieve an understanding of the key features of a good essay.

Develop critical analysis skills and reflective writing.

Develop student’s writing style and structure that is appropriate for the task of good quality and easy reading academic assignments.

Develop student’s writing style to produce a clearly written paper.

Learning Activities

The course learning activities highlight the following:

Academic writing content: relevant and substantial, to include the use of source materials, referenced evidence, description of factual information, discussion of the issues involved such as an analysis of strengths and weaknesses, reflective discussion of further issues arising out of previous discussion and conclusions

Written paper Structure: well-organized content in clear sections and paragraphs, allowing a logical flow of reasoning and development of ideas.

Academic Language: formal style throughout; clear and concise expression of the intended meaning; accuracy in grammar, spelling and punctuation.

Presentation and layout: consistent throughout in the format of sections, paragraphs and sub-headings to reflect the structure clearly and appropriately; correct style of referencing.

Course Outline The course addresses the following topics:

Principles of writing, standards, requisites, considerations, phases, and subject-related requirements.

Basic knowledge about various steps, stages, and process of production of complete research papers and technical reports.

Methods and tools needed to prepare academic and professional documents.



206

1 Course Introduction Description of the whole course content, course objectives and Definition of keywords.

2 Generating and Evaluating, edit and organize Pre- Writing, First draft, Re-vision, Editing Reading Critically Comprehension Strategies: note taking

3 Sources and Notes primary and secondary sources, Credible Source WordPress

4 Rating checklist for academic writing Sources and Notes, Notes for comprehension article

5 What is Academic Writing Objective vs subjective language, Creating structure Presentation of Academic Assignment Structure

6 The particulars of academic writing. Abstract, the introductory paragraph, paragraphs, transition words and sentences, grammar and punctuation, sentences, citations, quotations, quantifying reality

7 7th Week Exam

8 Rules in Academic Writing I (text format, cohesion words, things to avoid in academic writing)

9 Rules in Academic Writing II (approaches of literature review, taking notes, writing types, summarizing, paraphrasing)

10 Referencing (What is referencing, why referencing is importance, how to reference – in text reference and list of reference, referencing styles – Harvard, APA, Oxford)

11 How to Prepare for a good Presentation (Why a good presentation really matters, how to be ready for an oral presentation, presentations tips to be covered – outline, slide structure, font, background, background, animation)

12 12th Week presentation academic assignment

13 How to Write a Resume, Cover Letter and a CV (The function of the resume, cover letter and the CV, formal structure of resume, cover letter and CV, Things to avoid in writing CV)

14

Software (Organize document format using text styles – headings and subheadings, insert captions for tables for figures, cross referring and generating, Table of Content, list of Figures and list of tables) general review

TBA Final Exam

Evaluation

Assess No.

Formal Assess.


Subm. Week No.

Weighing of Assessment

1

Assess. 1

From informal to formal writings (Assignments)

Communication skills through oral and written presentation of the Topic

1 6 20%

60%

2 Working group and use of WordPress

Knowledge base and intellectual qualities

1 7 10%

3

Assess. 2

Research topic selection and structure Arch. Documentary Critique


4 12 20%

4 Assess. 3

From informal to formal writings (Assignments)

Paraphrasing and Critical thinking

8 14 10%


207

5 Assess. 4

Written Examination


TBA 40% 40%

T o t a l 100% 100%

List of References

Course Handouts printed material and notes.

University of Essex (2008) How to Improve your Academic Writing. University of Essex Printing Services.

Johnson, A.P. (2003) A Short Guide to Academic Writing. Lanham: University Press of America.

Soles, D. (2010) The Essentials of Academic Writing. 2nd Edition, Australia : Wadsworth, Cengage Learning.

Cornwell, J. & Robertson, S.A. (Ed.) (2011) Guidelines for Academic Writing and Referencing. Grahamstown: Education Department, Rhodes University. Retrieved January 10, 2012. Retrieved from: http://www.ru.ac.za/media/rhodesuniversity/content/education/documents/2011%20Academic%20Writing%20and%20Reference%20Guide.pdf

Course Instructor:

Dr. Massimiliano Gotti Porcinari

Dean of Faculty

Prof./ Ibtihal El-Bastawissi

Date: 14/02/2017

http://www.ru.ac.za/media/rhodesuniversity/content/education/documents/2011%20Academic%20Writing%20and%20Reference%20Guide.pdf

http://www.ru.ac.za/media/rhodesuniversity/content/education/documents/2011%20Academic%20Writing%20and%20Reference%20Guide.pdf


208

ARCH292. ARCHITECURAL DESIGN II

Course Code / Title: ARCH292. Architectural Design II

Instructor: Dr. Baher I. Farhat, Dr. Masimiliano Gotti, Dr. Heba Mohsen,

Hours: 10 Lecture: 0 Studio: 10 Credit: 5

Prerequisites: ARCH 291 Academic Year / Level: Level 2 Year: 2017-2018 Term: 4 Specialization: Architectural Engineering

Course Objectives

This course involves introductory studio problems in architectural design with highlighting on design process, visual representation, spatial organization, morphology, functional needs, and environmental aspects. Through this course, fundamentals of architectural design through the design process, definition, analysis, concepts, development and presentation are emphasized. The course intends to develop the students’ abilities to produce alternative ideas and solutions to projects with special emphasis on human needs and local environmental conditions The course aims to: - To experience, as a first design studio, projects involving a close fit to human requirements, and containing a

full dimension of design experience. - To develop an awareness of the design process, including:

The gathering of design data (library research – field research); The establishment of design and evaluation criteria; The generation and testing of design proposals; and The communication of those proposals.

- To develop abilities to modulate space in response to human dimensions and perceptions. - To develop abilities to organize and articulate space that satisfies both functional and aesthetic

requirements - Develop an ability to initiate research relevant to architecture design. - Emphasize the understanding of functional relationships and the use of space. - Encourage creativity in spatial and building design; - Encourage visual communication through drawing and model making.

Learning Activities




COURSE OUTLINE

Week No. 1

Project 1: -----------

Project Brief Site and Context Analysis Research Submission

Week No. 2 Concept & Study Model Bubble Diagram, Zoning

Week No. 3 Design development.

Week No. 4 Architectural Drawings -Plans


209


Week NO. 6 Pre-Final Submission

Week No. 7 Week No. 8

Final Submission

Project 2: -----------

Project Brief Site and Context Analysis\ Research Submission

Week No. 9 Concept & Study Model Bubble Diagram, Zoning


Week No. 11 Architectural Drawings -Plans

Week No. 12 Pre-Final Submission


Week No. 14 Final Submission

Course Policies

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, seminars, class activities, videos, studio project work, computer assisted learning, studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, workshops, and related projects.

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 First project 1st 7th 25%

2 Second project 8th 14th 35%

3 Jury 40%

Total 100%


(zz) Course notes:

Notes are handed out to the students throughout the semester. (aaa) Essential books (textbooks):


210

NEUFERT, Fourth Edition – Architects’ Data – Blackwell,

CALLENDER, John Hancock – Time-Saver – Fourth Edition Standards for Architectural Design Data – McGraw-Hill.

CROSBIE, Michael j. - Time-Saver Standards for Building Type – McGraw-Hill, 2001.

White, Edward T – Space adjacency analysis – Architectural Media Ltd, 1986.

Laseau, Paul. Graphic Thinking for Architects and Designers, second edition.

(bbb) Recommended books:

Donna, P. Duerk, Architectural Programming Information Management for Design.


211

CALLENDER John Hancock - Time Saver Standards for Standards For Architectural Design Data - 6th ed.

- McGraw – Hill Singapore - 1982.

Books available in the BAU library

Course Instructor: Dr. Baher I. Farhat, Dr. Heba Mohesn, Dr. Masimiliano Gotti.

Dean of Faculty:

Prof. Dr. Ibtihal El- Bastawissi

Date : 28 /01/2018


212

ARCH294. Building Construction IV

Course Code / Title: ARCH294. Building Construction IV Credits: 3 Instructor: Dr. Osama Mohamed Omar, Dr. Masemalliano, Mr. Mohamed Ghazal, Mrs. Nahed hamawi, Course Hours: 6 Hours/Week Course Duration:15Weeks Academic Semester: 4th Semester:Spring2017/2018 Module Info: Mandatory Course (2 hr. Lecture, 4 hrs. Studio)

Location: Level 2 Studio – B1


Course Objectives

The aim of this course is to present a broad perspective of building construction methods, materials and processes. The course will be based on the provision of lectures and exercises for students in order to acquire good knowledge in the field of Architectural Construction and to broaden their insight based on a range of typical components of buildings and details of elements such as External envelope and Internal Features. The course will be based on:

- Materials and techniques for internal and external finishes including internal partitions, openings, and façade systems (curtain walls, double skin façade, etc.).

- Types and details of skylights; - Landscape detailing and street furniture; - Analysis and applications of standards, material review and selection; - Development of construction drawings and detailing.

Learning Activities



Evaluating the latest technical innovations applicable to construction drawings techniques. COURSE OUTLINE


Typical Components of the Building.

Types and details for Steel Stairs.

Curtain Wall Systems + Double skin façade.

How to apply the working drawing for (Section and Elevation).


1 Introduction ( Remarks from Jury Notes )

2 Doors

3 Windows

4 Wooden Construction

5 Clay tiles Roof Finishing

6 Cladding


213


7 7th Week Exam

8 Curtain Wall Systems + Double skin facade

9 Skylights

10 Fire Place.

11 Internal Partitions (Wooden Studs - Metal Studs – Modular Partitions)

12 Steel Stairs.

13 Outdoor Furniture + Detailing.

14 Final Portfolio Submission.

15 Final Exam

Note: Alteration to the above plan and timetable are possible according to the actual progress of work and assessment as monitored by the course teaching staff. Therefore, interim submission and evaluation could be required and their outcome communicated to the students to provide them with further guidance.

Course Policies

THIS COURSE COMBINES THEORETICAL LECTURES WITH STUDIO-BASED TEACHING METHODS, IN ADDITION TO LEARNING THE

TECHNICAL BASICS AND FUNDAMENTALS INVOLVED IN ITS CONTENTS. STUDENTS WILL THUS BENEFIT FROM COMBINING TAUGHT

MATERIALS IN LECTURES WITH INDIVIDUAL RESEARCH, GROUP WORK AND APPLIED EXERCISES. WORK AND ASSIGNMENTS WILL BE

NORMALLY SCHEDULED AND PROVIDED FOR ONGOING MONITORING AND EVALUATION OF STUDENTS OUTPUT AS WELL AS THEIR

DEVELOPMENT IN TERMS OF KNOWLEDGE AND SKILLS.

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Doors knowledge base 2 2 09/02/2018

25%

2 Windows Qualities and Professional Skills

3 3 16/02/2018

3 Wooden Construction

knowledge base 4 4 23/02/2018

4 Clay tiles Roof Finishing

Qualities and Professional Skills

5 5 02/03/2018

5 Cladding knowledge base 6 6 09/03/2018


214

6 7th Week Exam Total Assessment 7 7 16/03/2018

7 Curtain Wall Systems + Double skin facade


35%

8 Skylights Qualities and Professional Skills

9 9 30/03/2018

9 Fire Place. knowledge base 10 10 06/04/2018

10

Internal Partitions (Wooden Studs - Metal Studs – Modular Partitions)


11 11 13/04/2018

11 Suspended Ceiling (False Ceiling).


12 Steel Stairs. Qualities and Professional Skills

13 13 27/04/2018

13 Outdoor Furniture + Detailing.


15th Week Final Exam(Oral Exam)

40%

Total 100%

List of References


Ching, F.D.K. (2008). Building Construction illustrated, 4th edition.

Hoke, John Ray (2000). Architectural Graphic Standards. New York: John Wiley & Sons.

Ching, F.D.K. (1995). A Visual Dictionary of Architecture.


215

Recommended Books:

Chudley, R., Greeno, R.(2010). Building Construction Handbook, 8th edition.

Huth, Mark W. (2010). Understanding Construction Drawings, 5th edition.

Garcia, David Fernandez. Construction Encyclopedia-2. Cordoba: New Daily Construction Encyclopedias.

Garcia, David Fernandez. Construction Encyclopedia-4. Cordoba: New Daily Construction Encyclopedias.

Basset, C.R. (1973). Construction Technology, Vol.1. London: Longman.

Course Instructor: Dr. Osama Omar, Dr. Masemalliano



216

ARCH296 – Theory of Architecture II

Basic Information

Course Title: Theory of Architecture II Code: ARCH296 Hours Lecture: 2 Tutorial: - Credit: 2 Prerequisites: ARCH196 Academic Year / Level: 2nd Year: 2017-2018 Term: Spring Specialization: Architectural Engineering


The course explores architectural form, space and scale: form defining space, qualities of architectural

space, articulation and organization of form and space, circulation elements and building approaches. It investigates the intentions in architecture: Design process, architectural concept and unity. It also reviews the principles of aesthetics: vocabulary of architectural compositions, visual and aesthetic relationships. The course includes analysis of design principles and their application in various architectural examples. Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to: -Explore the spatial interaction between man and architecture, and visual perception of architecture. -Understand the principles of architectural form and space design, through elaborated analysis of ancient and modern architectural examples. -Go through the basics of design process, particularly conceptual design. -Demonstrate spatial, perceptual and conceptual knowledge that will be required for architects & designers. -Understand expression language, tools and principles of architecture.

16- Intended Learning Outcomes of the Course (ILO):

(gg) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

(gg 1) - Describe spatial, perceptual and conceptual aspects influencing architectural composition;

(gg 2) - Generalize contextual aspects influencing architecture;

(gg 3) - Describe expression language, tools and principles of architecture;

(gg 4) - Develop knowledge about ancient and contemporary architectural examples and architects.

(hh) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to: (hh 1) - Determine that both ancient and contemporary architecture expressed the same idea and

vocabulary in relevant expression tools and techniques;

(hh 2) - Analyze and evaluate information from variety of sources relevant to Theory of Architecture;

(hh 3) - Apply appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information using various methods

of research, analysis and appraisal.

(ii) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to: (ii 1) - Determine the different theoretical and practical issues which are pertinent to development

of architecture and related contemporary approaches;


217

(ii 2) - Plan, prepare and present a piece of collective research using multiple communication media

and techniques.

(jj) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to: (jj 1) - Develop appropriate effective written and oral skills relevant to the Theory of Architecture;

(jj 2) - Develop the ability to self appraise and reflect on practice relevant to architectural

vocabulary.

Course Outline:


1 INTRODUCTION: architecture fundamentals. Primary elements. Concepts of space and form.

2 SPACE IDENTIFICATION: Activities, boundaries/ Types: in-out spaces. ANTHROPOMETRY: human measurements- ergonomics- distances. Assign. 1

3 PRIMARY SHAPES. solids and their properties, irregular shapes. TRANSFORMATION OF FORM: Dimensional, subtractive, additive.

4 TRANSFORMATION OF FORM: additive: groups ARTICULATION OF FORM Corners, surfaces

5 SPATIAL ORGANIZATION: 2 spaces, a number of spaces. Submission of Assign. 1

6 FORM, SPACE AND ACTIVITIES: the influence of activities/ cultural background on spatial formation.

7 7th week exam

8 FORM, SPACE AND ACTIVITIES: the influence of activities/ cultural background on spatial formation CIRCULATION-MOVEMENT THROUGH SPACE. Assign. 2

9 APPROACHES, ENTRANCES. HORIZONTAL CIRCULATION: Types and principles

10 Circulation elements VERTICAL CIRCULATION. Stairs and ramps, mechanical circulation.

11 REVIEW Submission of Assign. 2

12 12th week exam Final Submission of individual research papers I

13 ORDERING PRINCIPLES: Theories of proportion ORDERING PRINCIPLES/ ORGANIZATION: visual devices. Axis, symmetry, hierarchy, rhythm Assign. 3

14 EXPLORING THE DESIGN PROCESS, architectural concept and unity Submission of Assign. 3

4-a Teaching and Learning Methods:

The course is delivered through lectures, seminars, interactive intellectual and critical analytical thinking

discussions during lectures, directed reading, research based teaching materials and methods, coursework assignments.


218

List of References: Text Books:

Ching, Francis D.K. (1996). Architecture: Form, Space and Order. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold.

Class notes and handouts.

Reference Books:

NEUFERT, Ernst – Neufert Architect's Data – 2nd edition – Blackwell Science Ltd., 1997 (ID: Ref. 720 NE-AR)

VON MEISS, Pierre– Elements of Architecture: From Form to Place – E&FN Spon, 1998.

Course Instructor:

Dean of Faculty Prof. Dr. Ibtihal El-Bastawissi

Date: 26/01/2017


219

ARCH298 – Indoor Environmental Controls

Course Title: Indoor Environmental Controls Code: ARCH298 Hours:2 Lecture: 2 Tutorial: - Credit: 2

Prerequisites: None

Academic Year / Level: 2017-2018 / Level: 2 Term: Spring 2018


Course Objectives

The course objectives are as follow:

The students will be able to: 1. Understand principles of lighting (daylight and artificial) in buildings, 2. To work on reducing noise and enhancing sound for communication. 3. Understand how to regulate heat transfer for occupant thermal comfort. 4. Understand the passive means for environmental controls. 5. Comprehend design guidelines for use in the preliminary schematic design phase regarding

indoor environment.

Learning Activities

Course Outline

Principles of lighting (daylight and artificial) in buildings, Reducing noise and enhancing sound for communication. Regulating heat transfer for occupant thermal comfort. Description of passive means for environmental control, including presentation of scientific explanation and design guidelines for utilizing these means. Design guidelines for use in the preliminary schematic design phase.

17- Course Outline:


1 introduction

2 Architectural acoustics and sound physical properties

3 Sound measuring and sound propagation (reflection, absorption, and transmission)

4 Noise and sound insulation

5 Room acoustics and reverberation time –Simulation software application


220

6 Introduction to Building Illumination

7

- 7th Week Exam (In Acoustics)

- Light properties

8 Daylight and daylight factor

9 Electrical light

10 Lumen method in lighting design

11 Introduction to Thermal Comfort

12 12th Week Exam – Thermal comfort parameters

13 Conduction and convection

14 Calculation of U-Value

15 Final Exam

Evaluation:

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.


Total Assessment (Knowledge base and intellectual skills)

7 7 13-03-2018

30%

60%

3

Group assignments (Software application)

Intellectual skills

5 8 20-03-2018

20%

4

Group assignments (Software application)

Intellectual skills

8 12 24-04-2018

10%

5 Final Exam

Total Assessment Knowledge base and intellectual skills

15 15 40% 40%

Total

100%

100%


221


(ccc) Course notes: Distributed as needed

(ddd) Essential books (textbooks):

Szokolay Steven V., Introduction to ARCHITECTURAL SCIENCE: the basis of sustainable design, Architectural Press, 2014.

(eee) Recommended books:

M. David Egan, Architectural Acoustics, McGraw Hill, New York, 2007.

David Lee Smith, Environmental Issues for Architecture, John Wiley and Sons Inc., New Jersey, 2011.

Madan Metha, Jim Johnson, and Jorge Rocafort., Architectural Acoustics: Principles and Design. Prentice-Hall, Inc. 1999.

M. David Egan and Victor Olgyay, Architectural Lighting, McGraw Hill, 2002.

Course Instructor: Dr. Kareem Galal Date: 27 / 01 /2018

Dean of Faculty


222

ARCH332. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN IV Course Code / Title: ARCH332 Architectural Design IV Credit: 5 Instructors: Professor Dr. Mohamed Fikri, Dr. Marwan Halabi, Dr. Chadi Khoury, & Dr. Maged Youssef Ms. Nahed Hamawi, Mr. Bassam Ali Hassan, Ms. Lamis Mantash, & Mr. Salah Missi Course Hours: 10 tutorials Course Duration: 10 Academic Semester: Spring 2017/2018 Semester: 6th Module Info: Location: 3rd year studio - Floor: B2 Time: Monday 11:00 – 16:00 Wednesday 8:00 – 13:00


Series of exercises leading to the development of design projects based on the disciplinary or inter-disciplinary theme of the design studio. Detailed knowledge of the specialist aspect of design, its presentation and demonstration, both graphically and orally. Portfolio of designs in response to specific aims: advanced study of building context, development and creation of architectural character and identity in the design of spaces and buildings. Demonstrating theoretical and practical knowledge that will be required for architects, designers, engaged in Architectural Design and practices.

Retaining practicing skills of setting down functional relationships and efficient circulation between project elements.

Practicing principles of designing with natural and manmade context. Being familiar with symbolic and abstraction expressions in architecture. Going through the experience of integrating architectural masses with natural and built environment. Solving contradiction between modern style and techniques, with local and traditional style and

making the interaction and interrelationship between indoors and outdoors. Compromising between Hi-tech and contemporary features and Local Architecture. The course is mainly concerned with inducing and vitalizing intellectual, mental, logic thinking

capabilities of students. Making response to building context, character and identity.


PHASE


DATE OF COMPLETION

& SUBMISSION

Project One:

Phase 1 On Week 2


/2/2018

Phase 2 On Week 4


/2/2018

Phase 3 On Week 6


/3/2018

Phase 4 On Week 7


/3/2018


223

Project Two:

Phase 1 On Week 9


/3/2018

Phase 2 On Week 11


/4/2018

Phase 3 On Week 13


5/2018

Phase 4 On Week 14


/5/2018


Course Policies


Students must submit previous stages with current assignments to evaluate academic performance.

Evaluation

Asses No. Type To Assess Start Week No.

Subm.Week No.


1



1 2 /2/2018 5%

25%

2



2 4 /2/2018 5%

3

Pre-Final Phase: Pre-Final Submission


4 6 /3/2018 5%

4 Final Phase: Final Submission of the 1st project


6 7 /3/2018 10%


224

5



8 9 /3/2018 5%

35%

6 Esquisse: Manual Drawings

Critical Thinking, analysis, ability on current drawing

10 10 /4/2018 5%

7



9 11 /4/2018 5%

8 Pre-Final Phase: Pre-Final Submission

knowledge base, intellectual abilities, critical thinking & formulation capabilities

11 13 /05/2018 5%

9 Final Phase: Final Submission of the 2nd project


13 14 /05/2018 10%

Attendance 5%

10 Final and oral exam

knowledge base, intellectual abilities, critical thinking & communication skills, presentation skills

---- ---- TBA 40% 40%

Total 100%


225

Criteria of Evaluation

EVA

LUA

TIO

N C

RIT

ERIA

DESCRIPTION Weight

CO

NTE

XT

Considering site context means that projects respect & interact with the historical, cultural, topographical, and environmental aspects of the site. This criterion evaluates how far students' projects reflect a clear understanding of the site through: - Presenting research site analysis - Applying the building regulations - Recognizing the urban design theories - Considering site-topography in drawings - Presenting surroundings and site-landscape in all design drawings - Applying the real dimensions of the surrounded urban fabric, landscape, and routes

30

CO

NC

EPT

Design concept may depend on a variety of sources; art, history, theories, science, literature, nature, technology, structure system, environment, site-interaction, extra. It can reflect one of the contemporary trends of architecture. It should be characterized by depth, philosophy, and supported by research-evidence. In this semester, concept should: - Emphasize on the architectural character and the identity - Represented through a way of assembling units and components into an urban

composition. - Have a clear idea which is sequentially developed through a design-process and

expressed by (sketches, text, images, conceptual study models, reflective drawings)

20

FUN

CTI

ON

AL

REQ

UIR

EMEN

TS

In this module, residential or recreational functions are required to be assembled into an urban composition. This criterion evaluates how far students' projects fulfil the required functions through: - Applying research data in the design proposal - Solving correctly circulation, zoning, entrances, parking lots, public spaces, and

landscape elements - Considering orientation of buildings according to the environmental factors - Following the required areas in the program

30

FOR

M

&

STR

UC

TUR

AL

EXP

RES

SIO

N

A modular simple structure should be used in both projects. Students' projects have to: - Show an organized structural module in order to solve the residential or

recreational spaces. - Select building materials of construction and finishing reflected the architectural

character of the site. - Show how this structural system is correctly drawn in plans, sections, and if

externally apparent in elevations and site plan - Select a structure system matched with the new millennium applying the new

building technologies and the new materials for the structural elements. This selection should be also based on the site context and the environmental circumstances

10

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N

This criterion evaluates: - The visual, verbal, and written methods and appropriate media (including

sketching, modelling, 2D & 3D drawings, digital and electronic techniques) showing an appraisal for the main design concept.

- The listening skills, the body-language, the way of response to jury's comments, the correct usage of terms, and the reasonable way of presenting ideas.

10

TOTAL 100


226


(fff) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts (ggg) Essential books (textbooks):

Neufert, Ernst & Neufert, Peter. (2000). Architect's Data. Oxford: Black Well Science. (hhh) Recommended books:

A range of Architecture and Urban Design textbooks and references cover the principal topics and issues

addressed in the course of Architectural Design.

(iii) General References:

Numerous articles in periodicals covering pertinent topics in most architecture periodicals, namely Architectural

Review, Architectural Record, and Urban Design International.

Course Instructors: Prof. Mohamed Fikry Dr. Marwan Halabi Dr. Chadi Khoury Dr. Maged Youssef


Date: 20 / 01 / 2018


227

ARCH334. EXECUTION DESIGN II Course Code / Title: ARCH 334 Execution Design II Credit: 3

Instructors: Dr. Maged Youssef - Dr. Chadi Khoury Mr. Refaat Saad - Arch. Rabie Shbaro

Course Hours: Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 4 Course Duration: 5 Hrs

Academic Semester: Spring 2017/2018 Semester: 6th

Module Info: Location: Hall of the 3rd year studio and Lecture Hall No. A209

Time (Thursday): Lecture (section 1): 8:00 – 9:00

Lecture (section 2): 9:00 – 10:00

Studio: 10:00 – 1:50


The course aims to prepare an integrated portfolio of working drawings related to a design project by the student within the same study level. Performing complete and detailed execution drawings, interpreting the components relationships and information relevant to the construction materials, methods and processes.

Identifying typical symbols, and expression methods & tools in Execution Design Drawings.

Going through the experience of presenting legible drawing set containing appropriate information for construction.

Managing such drawing set to make drawing and sheet referencing system and ensures details

compatibility.

The course is mainly concerned with inducing and vitalizing intellectual, mental, logic assembling thinking capabilities of students concerning construction industry.


WEEK STAGE LABEL & DESCRIPTION DATE OF COMPLETION AND SUBMISSION

1 INTRODUCTION & PROJECT START / 2 / 2018

2 FALSE CEILING DETAILS Submission of the reviewed plans

/ 2 / 2018


228

3 CURTAIN WALL DETAILS Submission of Looking Up Plan 1/100 & False Ceiling details

/ 2 / 2018

4 PUBLIC TOILETS' DETAILS Submission of Wall Section & Curtain Wall Details

/ 3 / 2018

5 FIXED FURNITURE DETAILS (KITCHEN & COUNTER) Submission of Public Toilets' Details

/ 3 / 2018

6 EXPANSION JOINTS' DETAILS Submission of Fixed Furniture (Kitchen & Counter)

/ 3 / 2018

7 (Submission of the Joins' Details) (7th Week Submission)

/ 3 / 2018

8 STEEL STAIRS Make Up for the previous submissions, then announcing 7th Marks on I-Connect

/ 4 / 2018

9 SKYLIGHT DETAILS Submission of Steel Staircase Details

/ 4 / 2018

10 SITE PLAN DETAILS Submission of Sky Light Details

/ 4 / 2018

EASTER VACATION / 4 / 2018

11 Submission of Site Plan Details / 4 / 2018

12 Submission of Site Plan Details + Making Up / 5 / 2018

13 PROJECT REVIEW Pre-Final Submission of Portfolio / 5 / 2018

14 FINAL SUBMISSION OF PORTFOLIO / 5 / 2018

TBA Final oral exam TBA


Course Policies



Evaluation

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.


229

1 PLANS (1/100) (CAD DRAWINGS)


1 2 / 2 / 2018 4%

25%

60%

2 FALSE CEILING DETAILS 1/100 (CAD DRAWINGS)

Knowledge base, intellectual qualities, professional & Constructional skills

2 3 / 2 / 2018 4%

3

WALL SECTION AND CURTAIN WALL DETAILS (CAD DRAWINGS)

Knowledge base, intellectual qualities, professional & constructional skills

3 4 / 3 / 2018 4%

4 PUBLIC TOILETS DETAILS (CAD DRAWINGS)


4 5 / 3 / 2018 4%

5

FIXED FURNITURE DETAILS OF (KITCHEN & COUNTER) (CAD DRAWINGS)


5 6 / 3 / 2018 4%

6 EXPANSION JOINT DETAILS (CAD DRAWINGS)


6 7 / 3 / 2018 5%

7 STEEL STAIRS (CAD DRAWINGS)


8 9 / 4 / 2018 5%

35% 8

SKY LIGHT DETAILS (CAD DRAWINGS)


9 10 / 4 / 2018 5%

9 SITE PLAN DETAILS (CAD DRAWINGS)

Knowledge base, intellectual qualities, professional skills

10 11 / 4 / 2018 5%


230

10

Pre-Final Submission of the Portfolio PROJECT REVIEW 1


11 13 / 5 / 2018 15%

13

Final Submission of the Portfolio


13 14 / 5 / 2018 ---

Attendance 5%

14 FINAL ORAL EXAM

knowledge base, intellectual abilities& communication skills,

TBA 40%

Total 100%

Criteria of Evaluation

6- EXECUTION DESIGN STANDARDS 30

Execution Design Standards are the basic principles, regulations, and norms of the execution drawings. These standards include the following items: - Symbols & legend - Axes - Levels - Dimensions - Description and annotation - Referencing system This criterion evaluates how far students' projects were applied correctly these standards.

7- REFERENCING DOCUMENTS (CATALOGUES & SAMPLES) 20

In Spring Semester of the 3rd year level, students continue working on the same project of the Fall semester, focusing specifically on details of (false ceiling, curtain walls, WC, fixed furniture, sky-lights, steel staircase, expansion joints, & site-plan details). Importantly, students are asked to visit firms, offices, exhibitions, workshops, libraries to bring catalogues & samples. Half of the weekly sheet's mark is on these documents. This criterion evaluates how far students' projects fulfil the following points: - Site-experience - Reflecting data of catalogues & samples into project's details - Best selection of these samples to match with project's functions - Expressing these documents in the right margin of each sheet

8- DESIGN OF DETAILS 10

This criterion evaluates how far students' projects consider the following points: - Originality of designing the execution detail - Correct drawing of the detail - Understanding of the detail or not - Indicating the reference supported the designing of detail

9- MATERIALS & LAYERS OF EXECUTION DETAIL 20


231

One of the most important aims of this course is to teach student how to combine materials & layers of the execution detail. This criterion evaluates the following points: - Selecting suitable materials for the execution detail - Considering organization of layers and drawing them correctly - Considering isolation materials - Showing the materials' references (samples)

10- COMMUNICATION 20

All execution drawings are generated using CAD or REVIT software programs. They are organized in A1 size sheets, documented in A1 portfolio. Communication criteria evaluates how far students' projects include the following items: - The accurate execution drawings - Representing the referencing documents - Full information & annotation - Legend, text, & details - Graphic skills - Verbal & listening skills - Body language of student - Way of response to jury's comments - Correct use of terms

TOTAL 100


(jjj) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts

(kkk) Essential books (textbooks):

Styles, Keith & Richard, Andrew. (2005). Working Drawings Handbook. Amsterdam: Elsevier.


(lll) Recommended books:

Boshetti, Joe (1999). Details in Architecture vol. 1. Mulgrave. National Library of Australia.

Boshetti, Joe (2001). Details in Architecture vol. 2. Mulgrave. National Library of Australia.

Barkauskas, Kind (2002). Concrete construction Manual. Birkhauser, Basel.

Lang, Herzog (2004). Façade construction Manual. Birkhauser, Basel.


Brookes, A J (1992). Cladding of Buildings. London: Longman Scientific & Technical.

A range of Architectural Details and Standards textbooks and references cover the principal topics and issues addressed in the course of Execution Design.

Course Instructors: Dr. Maged N. A. Youssef Arch. Rabie Shbaro


Date: 20 / 01 / 2018


232

ARCH336. THEORY OF ARCHITECTURE III

Course Code / Title: ARCH336. Theory of Architecture III Credits: 2 Instructor: Dr. Maged Youssef Course Hours: 2 Hours/Week Course Duration: 14 Weeks Academic Semester: 6th Semester: Spring 2017/2018 Module Info: Mandatory Course (2 hrs. Lecture)

Location: S1: Lecture A210 Time: Tuesday 10:00 to 12:00 Location: S2: Lecture A203 Time: Friday 9:00 to 11:00

Course Objectives

The course aims to provide students with the specialist theoretical knowledge on Modern and Contemporary Architecture which is necessary for carrier in Architectural Design field. This course examines modern & contemporary architectural theory and criticism through the presentation and study of significant texts and buildings of the present and recent past. The goal of the course is to introduce and investigate the formal, technological, social, political, and economic debates at issue within the discipline. Students learn to evaluate and articulate the interactions between theory and practice, thereby enabling them to formulate and assess strategies for the making of architecture. Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to: - Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and

competencies that will be required for ARCHITECT position in the ARCHITECTURE industry.

- Classify analytical, developmental, legal, managerial and technical principles that relate to MODERN & CONTEMPORARY ARCHITECTURE.

- Have an appropriate balance between the vocational skills necessary for immediate employment in ARCHITECTURAL field and the more fundamental principles necessary for further study.

- Develop the academic abilities and personal characteristics required to solve problems relevant to ARCHITECTURE and critically assess relevant aspects of the industry.

- Build a professional attitude and develop skills relation to communication, teamwork, project planning and management, and responsibility for individual learning.

- Demonstrate a systematic understanding of the economic, environmental, political, social and technological influences which relate to ARCHITECTURAL field.

- Demonstrate an ability to initiate and sustain in-depth research relevant to MODERN & CONTEMPORARY ARCHITECTURE.

- Have an opportunity to put theory into practice via study of significant texts and buildings of the present and recent past.

TEACHING & LEARNING METHODS

This course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, directed reading, videos, computer assisted learning, case studies and experimental learning, research-base learning, student-base learning, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects and research paper. The main learning activities are arranged in four categories:


233

5- Sketch-Book: On two stages, students are asked to submit a sketch-book that gathers all the projects mentioned in lectures. This sketch-book is required to be a manual product to determine accurately the ability of each student on his/her analytical and sketching skills.

6- Teamwork Research: The instructor asks students to conduct a plural research including the whole trends of architecture appeared from 1900 till now. This requires an accurate distribution for tasks and loads among students. This research documents the most important architectural features for the trends of the referred period. To produce it, each group will be consisted of two students who will sketch a single project on A1 Sheet (Landscape Direction) manually, fully presented and inked. This A1 sheet will include a specific template of (Title of the project, its opening date, location, and the name of the architect, and to which architectural trend this project belongs). A student will be entrusted to combine these A1 sheets, adding a cover sheet.

7- The 7th Week Exam: At week no.7, a written exam will be held to examine the ability of students in analyzing, knowing, and sketching the given projects in the first seven weeks. This exam considers refreshment for students' minds to motivate them to study, read, and train on sketching projects.

8- Quiz: At the final lecture of the course, as a concentrated revision, the students will be distributed into groups; each group will consist of five students. This quiz is a presentation for unknown projects. After the presentation, each group will submit a paper recording their opinions in these shown projects; identifying each project's architectural trend. This quiz aims to assure that the students already understand the architectural languages that distinguish every architectural trend.


The course materials are arranged into 15 stages. The table below outlines the content of each stage. Week No.1 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

GENERAL INTRODUCTION OF THE COURSE Introduction to Modern & Contemporary Architectural Theory The Industrial Revolution Appearance of new ART TRENDS affected on architecture: Futurism, Cubism, Expressionism, Abstractionism, De Stijl, Constructivism, Bauhaus Recognition of the required research

Week No.2 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

ARCHITECTURE OF MODERNISM: 1900 - 1955 C.I.A.M. Team /Congrès Internationaux d’Architecture Moderne: Calling for functionalism Organic Approach: Works of Frank Lloyd Wright Functionalism + International Style: Works of Le Corbusier Functionalism + Minimalism: Works of Ludwig Mies van der Rohe Bauhaus: Works of Walter Gropius

Week No.3 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

ARCHITECTURE OF LATE MODERNISM: 1960 - 1980 Romanticism: Masterpiece of Le Corbusier; Ronchamp Chapel Brutalism: Works of Paul Rudolph, Le Corbusier, and Louis Khan Metabolism: Works of the Japanese architects as Kisho Kurokawa Archigram: Imaginary works for futuristic cities Symbolism: Works of Eero Saarinen, Jorn Utzon, and Oscar Niemeyer

Week No.4 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

Continue… ARCHITECTURE OF LATE MODERNISM: 1960 - 1980 Structuralism: Works of Buckminster Fuller, Frei Otto, and Santiago Calatrava High Tech. Architecture: Works of Richard Rogers, Renzo Piano, Norman Foster, Nicholas


234

Grimshaw, Helmut Jahn

Week No.5 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

ARCHITECTURE OF POST-MODERNISM: 1960 - 1980 Theory of 'Double Code' for Charles Jencks + Theory of 'Complexity and Contradiction' for Robert Venturi Historicism: Works of Philip Johnson, Charles Moore, and Paolo Portoghesi Revivalism: Works of Abdel-Wahed Elwakil Vernacular: British examples and works of Hassan Fathy Adhocism: Works of SITE Metaphoric Sculpture: Works of Veldon Simpson and Michael Graves Metaphorical Trend: Works of Kazumasa Yamashita, Ricardo Bofill, and Stanley Tigerman

Week No.6 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

(Submission of the 1st phase of the sketch-book) – Mark out of 10 An Evaluation Exam - Mark out of 20

Week No.7 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

ANNOUNCEMENT OF THE 7TH WEEK EVALUATION – MARK OUT OF 30 ARCHITECTURE OF DECONSTRUCTION: 1980 - 2000 Theories of Jacques Derrida + Works of Daniel Libeskind

Week No.8 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

Continue… ARCHITECTURE OF DECONSTRUCTION: 1980 - 2000 Works of Frank O' Gehry + Works of Peter Eisenman + Bernard Tschumi

Week No.9 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

PERFORMATIVE ARCHITECTURE: 2000 - Now Concept of Sustainability Works of Norman Foster

Week No.10 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

Continue… PERFORMATIVE ARCHITECTURE: 2000 - Now Concept of Sustainability Works of Toyo Ito + Jean Nouvel

Week No.11 Tue. /2018

DIGITAL ARCHITECTURE: 1990 - NOW Theory of free meaning Cyberspace Architecture: Works of Marcos Novak Hypersurface Architecture: Works of Diller & Scofidio, Peter Cook, and Lars Spuybroek Hybrids: Works of Peter Eisenman and Santiago Calatrava

EASTER VACATION


(Submission of the 2nd phase of the sketch-book) – mark out of 10 Submission of the team work research groups - Mark out of 10


ANNOUNCEMENT OF THE 12TH WEEK EVALUATION – MARK OUT OF 20 Announcing the marks of 12th & 15th

Week No.14 Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

Individual Oral Quiz - Mark out of 5 + Accounting the attendance – mark out of 5 ANNOUNCEMENT OF THE 14H WEEK EVALUATION – MARK OUT OF 10

TBA FINAL EXAM - Written, closed book exam


235

Course Policies

Attendance Policy Faculty work proceeds at such a pace that regular attendance is necessary for each student to obtain maximum benefits for instruction. Regular and punctual attendance at all class sessions is a student obligation, and each student is responsible for all the work, including tests and written work, in all class sessions. Three unexcused absences will result in being withdrawn with failure (WF) from the class.

Evaluation

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.

1 1st stage of the Sketch-Book

Individual assignment

1 6

Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

10%

30%

60%

2 Evaluation Exam closed-book examination

Knowledge base, intellectual qualities, & critical thinking

6 6

Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

20%

3 2nd stage of the Sketch-Book

Individual assignment

7 12

Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

10%

20%

4 Teamwork Research Final Submission

Knowledge base, Class participation, & oral and visual presentation

3 12

Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

10%

5

Oral Quiz Individual evaluation

Class participation, transferable skills, professional skills, intellectual qualities, & critical thinking

14 14

Tue. /2018 Fri. /2018

5% 10%

7 Attendance 5%

8


Knowledge base, intellectual qualities, & critical thinking

16 16 40% 40%

Total

100%

100%


236

List of References

(mmm) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts. (nnn) Essential books (textbooks):

- Jencks, Charles, “Architecture Today”, John Wiley & Sons, West Sussex, England, 1993, new editions, 2000, 2006

- Youssef, Maged, “Architecture and Metaphor”, Published by Beirut Arab University, Printed and distributed by Stephan Library, Beirut, Lebanon, 2016

(ooo) Recommended books: - Jencks, Charles, “The Language of Post-Modern Architecture”, Academy Edition, Academy Group,

London, England, 1987 - Fletcher, Banister, “A History of Architecture”, 19th ed., Butterworths, UK, 1996 - Weston, R. “Modernism”, Phaidon Press, London, England, 2005 - Tietz, Jürgen, “The Story of Architecture of the 20th Century”, Konemann, New York, USA, 1999 - Trachtenberg, M. & Hyman I., “Architecture: From Prehistory to Post-Modernism”, 2nd ed., Prentice-

Hall, New Jersey, USA, 2002 - Frampton, K., “Modern Architecture”, Thames and Hudson Ltd., London, England, 2007 - Jencks, Charles, “Esctatic Architecture”, Academy Edition, London, England, 1999 - Jencks, Charles, “Meaning in Architecture”, Barrie & Rockliff The Crescent Press, London, England,

1969 - Jencks, Charles, “The Architecture of Jumping Universe”, Academy Edition, Academy Group, London,

England, 1995 - Jencks, Charles, “Critical Modernism: Where is Post-Modernism Going?”, John Wiley & Sons, West

Sussex, England, 2007

Course Instructor: Dr. Maged Youssef Dean of Faculty: Prof. Ibtihal Youssef Date: 20 / 01 / 2018

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=J%C3%BCrgen+Tietz&search-alias=books&text=J%C3%BCrgen+Tietz&sort=relevancerank




237

ARCH337 – Interior Design

Course Title: Interior Design Code: Arch337 Instructor: Nader Azab,

Hours: 3 cr.

Lecture: 1

Tutorial: 2

Credit: 2

Prerequisites:

Academic Year / Level: Architectural Engineering Year: 2017-2018 Term: Spring

Specialization: Architectural Engineering Course Objectives


The course provides students with an overview introduction to Interior Design in Architectural Engineering. Development of interior spaces from conceptual phase to final design resolution, based on interior considerations and external influences with participation of color, space, form, light and materials. Emphasis on three dimensional design process and detailed graphic representation of designed spaces The course aims to provide the specialist knowledge necessary for students in Interior Design and Architecture field. Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

- Effectively provide from their own structural measurements a set of detailed floor plans.

- Use and understand the elements (space, form, line, texture, ornament) and principles (scale, proportion, balance, rhythm, emphasis, harmony) of design through the use of assigned projects and exams.

- Use and understand the various aspects of lighting, space planning and color dynamics through the use of related projects and exams.

Learning Activities - The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, directed reading, computer assisted learning, case studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, research paper, workshops. Exposure to the Interior Design environment and related projects are an important aspect of the teaching and learning methods. The course provides students with an overview introduction to Interior Design. Development of interior spaces from conceptual phase to final design resolution, based on interior considerations and external influences with participation of color, space, form, light and materials. Emphasis on three dimensional design process and detailed graphic representation of designed spaces. The course aims to provide the specialist knowledge necessary for students in Interior Design field, the skills and technical image processing COURSE OUTLINE:


1 Intro to interior design, realms, boundaries, practices.

Assignment #1 “ THE CUBE.”

2 Interior design process. Studio work ………


238

3 “Mood boards” within the process. Submit the cube (10).

4 Assignment #3: Term Project: Intro

Biomimicry and Re-using materials. 100 cubes composition 5

5 Studio work. Mood boards, research

6 Studio work research

7 7th w assessment present. / Submission. (Research in groups) (15).

Total grades = 30

8 Color Schemes in Interior Design.

Studio work: users needs, cases,

9 Lighting Design

Studio work: Submit concept development (10).

10 Studio work: Start working on scale 1:1 Model for the building and piece of furniture.

11 Studio work

12 Assessing development (20).

Total = 30

13 Pre-final submission of the model

14 Final submission. 10

15 Final Exam (30).

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.

1



1 3

30%

70%


Total Assessment 7 4, 7

3



8 9

30%




239

5



12 14 10%

6


15 15 30%

30%

Total

100%

100%


1- Understanding Color and Introduction for Designers. Linda Holtzchue. Fourth Edition 2- A Guide to Color Symbolism. Jill Morton. 3- Drawing for Interior Designers. Gilles Ronin. 4- Color in Interior Design. John Pile. 5- Color for Interior design. David Rompilla. 6- Gibbs ,Jenny. (2010). Interior Design (Portfolio). Lauurence King Publishing Ltd

7- Starmer, Anna. (2005). The Color Scheme Bible: Inspirational Palettes for Designing Home Interiors.

Firefly Books

8- Judith ,Miller.(2008).The Style Sourcebook: The Definitive Illustrated Directory of Fabrics, Wallpapers,

Paints, Flooring, Tiles. Firefly Books

9- Hale, Gill.(1999). The Practical Encyclopedia of Feng Shui: Understanding the Ancient Arts of

Placement. Hermes House

Course Instructor: Assoc. Prof. Nader Azab

Dean of Faculty Prof. Ibtihal El Bastawissi


240

ARCH339. Environmental Design Course Code / Title: ARCH339. Environmental Design Credits: 2

Instructor: Hiba Mohsen Course Hours: 3 Hours/Week Course Duration: 14 Weeks

Academic Semester: 5th Semester: Spring 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory Course (1 hr Lecture, 2h Studio)

Location: Auditorium A209 and 4th year Studio

Time: Section 1 Mon8:00 to 11:00 Section 2 Wed1:00 to 4:00


Environmental design is the process of addressing surrounding environmental parameters when devising plans, programs, policies, buildings, or products. It involves the study of built and natural environments. Various forms of practice include architecture, planning, urban design, and social and environmental activism. This course is a survey of relationships between people and environments, designed and non-designed, with an introduction to the literature and professional practices. It will provide fundamental knowledge of sustainable building concepts, current environmental design building rating systems including LEED, BREEAM, Green Globes.

The course will examine many case studies exemplifying various sustainability features to determine best practices. The class will also be exposed to a range of examples illustrating the benefits and demands of integrated design. It includes an overview of green building design and construction process; the LEED rating system; integrated design; a high-level overview of how buildings work.

The learning outcomes of this course are:

o To identify the conceptual history and emerging issues involving sustainability; o To state common sustainability issues from multiple perspectives; o To list the placement for building orientations, renewable energy/storage, and ventilation using LEED

planning criteria. o To classify different categories for environmental design; o To differentiate sustainable materials that have to be selected for a project; o To illustrate a working knowledge of sustainable design as it relates to the built environment. o To analyse a substantive applied sustainability project; o To apply the use of indoor quality of air, light, and views as they are specified by LEED criteria; o To design a sustainable project by implementing the concept of whole systems thinking and the use of building simulation software. o To propose sustainable features and communicate ideas to the design project; o To follow aspects of various sustainable building rating systems; o To communicate creatively to propose environmentally responsive interventions in community based projects.

Learning Activities


241

Students will acquire learning activities from the structured materials that form the basis of the course, the assignments and the research that is approved by the tutor of the course, in addition to the design project.

Assignment # 1: LIGHT MEASUREMENT: SELECT ONE OF THE CLASSROOMS IN THE FACULTY, AND USING THE LIGHT METER MAP THE

LIGHTING AT DIFFERENT TIMES OF THE DAY.

Assignment # 2: Site CHECKLIST (Week 3)

The Environmental Site Checklist is a useful tool to analyze numerous elements

including location, neighborhood context, site and zoning, natural physical features,

biodiversity, circulation, utilities, human and cultural, and climate components. Apply this checklist on your

Design project (clarify your analysis with concise text and sketches).

Assignment # 3: Design Project- Group Work (Week 4-14) Refer to Design Brief

This design project aims to explore the use of building performance simulation as a tool to evaluate the impact

of design parameters and reveal the importance of design decisions particularly taken in the early stages and

to underline the effects of climatic differences on energy consumption.

Exams:

Final and 6th week Exam reinforce and evaluate students' understanding of the course content and main

ideas. Students' work is also monitored and assessed continuously throughout a semester.

Quizzes:

Each class may begin or end with a quiz covering the previous week’s reading assignment. These cannot be made up if missed.


The course materials are arranged into 14 stages. The table below outlines the content of each stage.

WEEK STAGE LABEL & DESCRIPTION NOTES

1 Introduction to the Course – Overview of the Environmental Issues

2 Definitions and Concepts

3 Environmental Design Strategies

4 Environmental Site Planning Urban Greenery and Biodiversity

5 Building rating Systems

6 6th week exam

7 Building rating Systems Presentation of Local projects

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Location_(geography)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Neighborhood

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Construction

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zoning

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nature

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Circulation_(fluid_dynamics)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Utilities

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Climate


242

8 Indoor environmental quality Research Presentations

9 Research Presentations

10 Comfort, Health and Environment

11 Building Energy Simulation and Modeling

12 Quiz + Introduction to Design Builder

13 Design Builder

14 Project final pre-final submission / Discussion

Course Policies

Attendance Policy

Attendance is mandatory. Tardiness is not acceptable. In the case that you do miss the class, you are still responsible for all material covered.

Disclaimer:

Changes or revisions to the course syllabus and/or schedule may be made at any time during the term by announcement of the instructor. Students may request a written copy of the revisions.

Evaluation

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date

1 Individual quizzes & group assignments

Research/ Quizzes

1 6 Refer to schedule

10% 30%

70%

2 6th Week Exam Course Understanding

6 6 20%

3 Individual quizzes Student Participation

8 16 10%

40% 4 Group assignments

Design Project Phase 2

7 12 10%

5

Group assignments

Design Project Final Submission

14 14 20%


243

6 Final Exam Final Exam 30 Marks 30% 30%

Total

100%

100%


LECTURE HANDOUTS

RECOMMENDED BOOKS

Attman, O. (2010) Green Architecture: Advanced Technologies and Materials ,New York: McGraw-Hill Professional.

Lovell, J. (2010) Building Envelopes An integrated Approach, New York: Princeton Architectural Press.

Pelsmarkers, S. (2012) The Environmental Design Pocketbook, London, Riba Publishing

Thomas, R. (2006) Environmental Design: an Introduction for architects and engineers, New York: Taylor and Francis

E-books:

Green Building Council (2013) LEED Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction Vol. 4 - London: Green Building Council.

Green Building Council (2013) LEED Core Concepts Guide: An Introduction to LEED and Green Building / 3rd ed. - London: Green Building Council.

Course Instructor: Hiba Mohsen

Dean of Faculty Professor Ibtihal El-Bastawissi


244

ARCH432. ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN VI

Course Code / Title: ARCH432 Architectural Design VI Credits: 5


Academic Semester: 8-th Semester: Spring 2017/2018


Location: Level 4 Studio – Basement 2 Time: Mon 11:00-16:00 & Wed 8:00-13:00

Course Description &Objectives

The intention of the Fourth Year Design Studio is to be a critical step in the design student’s development of design awareness, understanding, and ability. This studio will prepare the student for an expansion of these principles to prepare for the Fifth year and penultimate design studio.

While the major portion of the studio time will be spent in the patient search for solutions to architectural design problems, an important component of the work will involve looking into the nature of Architecture, to seek a deeper meaning by way of investigation and criticism. The balance between theoretical and practical aspects of our task will encourage the student to become more thoughtful in their day-to-day work. The student will explore theoretical design issues as well as comprehensive problem solving exercises, addressing a wide range of architectural issues from broadest contextual elements to more detailed technological components.

The role of the faculty is to assist the student in constructing a conceptual framework for design within which to develop their design decisions. The question becomes, what do you value in architecture, and why? The objectives of this course, then, are to explore, evaluate, interpret and communicate the design process, to develop critical thinking, concept generation, transformation and development as a basis for architecture, and to explore the inter-relationship between premise, process, and product.

The design studio projects is structured to enable the student to comprehend the integral relationship between site analysis and design methods, history and theory; program and site; and building technology and environmental sustainability. Individual instructors emphasize different knowledge areas among these based on their own experiences, the specifics of the design problem at hand, and the interests and abilities of individual students.

The student’s “design process” is assumed to be at the intermediate stage where analysis, synthesis, alternative design selection, and scheme development are thoroughly researched and communicated.

Students are expected to have developed knowledge and skills in: site and contextual analysis; researching and understanding the use of building precedents; developing a design concept and the use of digital modelling and representational software; creating physical sketch and presentation models; fundamental sustainable design principles; sketching design ideas; structural system and material selection; essential orthographic and perspective architectural representations; and graphic design and verbal presentation.



245

Course Policies

DESIGN CRITIQUES Critiques are the essential format for architectural education and project development. They are the means by which faculty and student discuss and develop a project together. This is a two-way communication, and is only made possible through the student’s responsibility to be prepared with drawings, models, ideas, and questions for discussion each day of studio. PORTFOLIO AND DOCUMENTATION OF DESIGN WORK It is essential for architectural students, like architectural professionals, to thoroughly document and reproduce their work. It is the nature of architectural design work that reproduced images of work are critical to presentation. Reproduction creates backups of drawings and physical models that may eventually be lost or damaged. Students are therefore required to document all studio work in an A3 format. Digital copies of design work are also required after each final project presentation. Proper documentation does not include only images. It also includes preliminary design sketches, concise written descriptions of the design problem; and a basic description of the design proposal or solution. ATTENDANCE POLICY Faculty work proceeds at such a pace that regular attendance is necessary for each student to obtain maximum benefits for instruction. Regular and punctual attendance at all class and studio sessions is a student obligation, and each student is responsible for all the work, including tests and written work, in all class and studio sessions. If a student plan to be away from the studio and are working on project related matters, first notify your studio instructors to discuss the nature of the absence. Three unexcused absences will result in being withdrawn with failure (WF) from the class PLAGIARISM VS., ACCEPTED AND ETHICAL WAYS OF CITING SOURCES Although the issue of plagiarism is more commonly associated with written assignments, issues of plagiarism also apply in design work. Plagiarism “includes the intentional or unintentional copying of language, structure, or ideas of another and attributing the work to one’s own efforts.” In written work, plagiarism is considered the failure to acknowledge references and sources. Similarly, in studio work, two examples of plagiarism are the unacknowledged use or abuse of precedents, and the reproduction and use of images without acknowledging their sources. In case of plagiarism, student will be withdrawn with failure (WF) from the course.

Course Calendar / Evaluation


WEEK NO. SUBM. WEEK NO.

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1

Fris

t p

roje

ct

Group work research

Phase I: Layout & Site Plan – Study Model. Evaluation of preliminary concepts

1 2

2.5

25 3

Phase II: Commercial and Services Zone (Plans, Sections & Elevations) 3 6

2.5

4 Pre Final: (2d & 3D Drawings and Presentation) 5 6

5

5 final Submission 3D Drawings and Presentation 7 15

1st MT Exam 5 5

1

Seco

nd

pro

ject

Group work research

Phase I: Layout & Site Plan – Study Model. Evaluation of preliminary concepts

8 9

2.5

25


246

3

Phase II: Sections & Elevations + study model 9 12

2.5

4 Pre Final: (2d & 3D Drawings and Presentation) 12 13

5

5 final Submission 3D Drawings and Presentation

14 10

2nd MT Exam 5 5

Final Exam (Oral discussion All Submitted Projects) 40

Total 100


247


Course Notes:

Lectures' hand-outs.


Bassler, B. (ed.) (2008) Architectural Graphic Standards: Student Edition, 11th ed. New York: John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

De Chiara, J. and Hancock Callender, J. (eds) (2001) Time-Saver Standards for Building Types, 4th ed., New York.: McGraw-Hill Book Company.

Watson, D. & Crosbie, M. (2005) Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design: Technical Data for Professional Practice, 8th ed., New York: McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc.

Recommended Books:

Sassi, P. (2006) Strategies for Sustainable Architecture, New York: Taylor & Francis.

Williamson, T, A. Radford and H. Bennetts (2003) Understanding Sustainable Architecture, London: Spon Press.

General References:

Periodicals, Websites, etc.

Dean of Faculty: Prof. lbtihal El-Bastiwissi

Date: 10 / 02 / 2017


248

ARCH434. Execution Design IV

Course Code / Title: ARCH434. Execution Design IV Credits: 3

Instructors: Prof. Mohamed Fikry Dr. Kareem Galal

Arch. Abdel Razzak Balaa Arch. Bassam Ali Hasan

Arch. Huda Zeaiter Course Hours: 5 Hours/Week Course Duration: 14 Weeks Academic Semester: 8th Semester: Spring 2017/2018


Location: Fourth Year Studio – Floor 2


11:00 to 13:50


Composite drawings illustrating particular execution details of sustainable features considered in a project designed in ARCH431. Preparation of Specification and quantities report for the execution of a part of the project completed in ARCH433. The course aims to provide students with the professional knowledge necessary for engineering carrier in Execution Design. With this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and competencies that will be required for architectural design position in the international Execution Design industry.

Understand analytical, developmental, legal, managerial and technical principles that relate to Execution Design.

Develop the academic abilities and personal characteristics required to solve problems relevant to Execution Design and critically assess relevant aspects of the industry.

Demonstrate a systematic understanding of the economic, environmental, political, social and technological influences which relate to the Execution Design field.

Demonstrate an ability to initiate and sustain in-depth research relevant to Execution Design.



249


Week No. 1 Design aspects – Structure systems – Materials -a:

- Lecture: Course outline - project brief - Conveying System. - Library Floors materials.

Week No. 2 - Mar Maroun

Week No. 3

Design aspects – Structure systems – Materials -b: - Lecture: Façade Finishes. - Revision. - Final Submission: 13:50

Week No. 4

Sections and elevations-a: - Lecture: Skylights - Expansion & Seismic building joints. - Library Sections and elevations. - Revision.

Week No. 5

Sections and elevations-b: - Lecture: Light weight and modular partitions - Suspended ceilings & noise

insulation and absorption. - Final Submission: 10:00. - Revision.

Week No. 6

Reading area floor details -a: - Lecture: Modern light weight steel & modern wooden stairs – Counters. - Pre Final: 10:00. - Revision Indoor materials – sustainable applications – Smart Materials.

Week No. 7

Reading area floor details -b: - Lecture: Decorative Metal. - Final Submission: 10:00 - Quiz.

Week No. 8

Spatial Details-a: - Lecture: Curtain walls - Dry fixed cladding (stone, metal, GRC, ceramic..) - Pre Final: 10:00. - Revision Materials specs –In pattern floor – Color Scheme.

Week No. 9

Spatial details-b: - Lecture: Wall Lining – Built in Furniture. - Final Submission: 10:00. - Revision.

Week No. 10

External envelope: - Lecture: Sustainable management of building materials - Natural ventilation:

wind towers induced with stack effect. - Pre Final: 10:00. - Revision Sustainable applications - Smart Materials - Wall Sections (Exterior

Details for typical floor).

Week No. 11

Site (Sustainable applications)-a: - Lecture: Roof lighting: systems and efficiency - Glass as a smart material -

Nano-technology - External envelop Final Submission: 10:00 - Site Pre-Final Submission: 10:00. - Revision Hardscape – Waterscape – Plantation – Fences – Gates – Color

scheme.

Week No. 12 Site (Sustainable applications)-b:

- Lecture: Hardware Gates. - Final Submission: 10:00


250

- Revision.

Week No. 13

Restaurant’s Public Toilets (Specs and quantities): - Lecture: Pavements-Green Roof-Fences. - Final Submission: 10:00. - Revision.

Week No. 14 - Project Final Submission: 10:00


Course Policies









Training students for continuous learning by provide each lecture’s slid with references.


Evaluation

WEEK SUB-DATE TOPICS MARKS

03 16-Feb-18 Design aspects – Structure systems – Materials 9.0

05 02-Mar-18 Sections and elevations 9.0

07 16-Mar-18 Reading area floor details 7.0


251

WEEK SUB-DATE TOPICS MARKS

10 06-Apr-18 External envelope 10.0

11 27-Apr-18 Site (Sustainable applications) 10.0

12 11-May-18 Restaurant’s Public Toilets (Specs and quantities) 5.0

14 18-May-18 Project Final Submission 10.0

As Scheduled Final Exam -Oral Examination 40.0

Total 100.0


Course notes:

Lectures' handouts.


CHING Francis D.K., Building Construction Illustrated-4th Edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New

York 2008.

Chudley R. andGreeno R., BUILDING CONSTRUCTION HANDBOOK 8th Edition, Elsevier, Great

Britain, 2008.

Recommended books:

Grondzik, W. T., Kwok, A. G., Stein, B. & Reynolds, J. S. (2010). Mechanical and Electrical Equipment for Buildings. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Hegger Manfred, Construction Materials Manual (Construction Manuals series), Birkhäuser

GmbH, 2006.

Addington M. & Schodek D. L. (2004). Smart Materials and Technologies in Architecture. Architectural Press.

Bell V. B. & Rand P. (2006). Materials for Architectural Design. Laurence King.

Blanc A. (1994). Internal Components (Mitchell’s Building Series). Longman, UK.

Bouchlaghem, D. (2006). Teaching and Learning Building Design and Construction. London : Earthscan.

Ching Francis D. K.(2001) A Visual Dictionary of Architecture.

Compagno, Andrea (1999). Intelligent glass facades, material practice design. Birkhauser publishers, Berlin Germany.

Deplazes A. (2008). Constructing Architecture: Materials, Processes, Structures. 2nd Extended edition, Birkhauser Verlag AG.

Dernie D. (2003 or latest edition). New Stone Architecture. McGraw Hill Higher Education.

Fleming. E. (2005). Construction Technology : An Illustrated. Oxford : Blackwell Publishing Ltd.

Foster J. S. & Harington R. (2007). Mitchell’s Structure & Fabric – Part2, 7th Edition (Mitchell’s series), Prentice Hall, UK.

Mcevoy M. (1994 or latest edition), Mitchell’s External Components (Mitchell’s series), Longman, UK.

Ramsey C. G. & Hoke, J. R. (2007). Architectural Graphic Standards. 11th Edition, John, Willey and Sons Inc., USA.

Ritter A. (2006). Smart Materials in Architecture, Interior Architecture and Design: Types, Products, Architecture. Birkhäuser GmbH.


252

Schittich C. (2007). Glass Construction Manual (Construction Manuals series). Birkhäuser GmbH.

Schulitz H. C. and Sobek W. (2000 or latest edition). Steel Construction Manual (Construction Manuals Series). Birkhauser Verlag AG.


253

Course Title: Specifications and Quantities Code: ARCH438 Hours: 3 Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 2 Credit: 2

Prerequisites: ARCH438

Academic Year / Level: 2017- 2018 / Level 4 Year: 2017-2018 Term: 2nd

Specialization: Architecture

Location: Lecture Room ----

Course Objectives

The relationships between the Employer, the Consultant, and the Contractor in terms of duties and

responsibilities.

General knowledge pertinent to the preparation of Contract Documents including specifications and

Bills of quantities for various trades and works.

Elucidating the General Conditions of Contract between Employer, Consultant and Contractor.

Analytical and technical principles related to Quantity Surveying as well as Methods of Measurement

and Calculations.

Method of Preparing, organizing and summarizing Bills of Quantities (BOQ) including preamble,

calculation sheets, and summaries.

General knowledge related to materials specifications and various constructional works and execution

procedures.

Illustrating the technical writing procedure for Specifications including divisions’ organization.

Bids evaluation process including activities pertinent to the preparation of comparative tables of

prices.

Putting theory into practice via work-based learning and develop student’s skills related to

communication with different project’s parties, building materials suppliers, and sub-contractors.

Learning Activities

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, seminars, directed reading, videos and computer assisted learning. However, and while participating to the course, students will be required to attend PowerPoint lectures covering the theoretical part. They will conduct weekly exercises where they acquire ability to fill BOQs with full sense of responsibility, and learn how to handle numerical results of measurements. Students will be divided into groups and asked to submit a research covering a subject related to the course content, and present their work in group seminars, making sure that the student has covered the following learning activities.

ARCH438 – Specifications and Quantities


254

Course Outline

Being registered in this course, Students will acquire the knowledge of project’s parties’ relationships, duties, and responsibilities. In addition, students will learn the specifications’ writing methodology as well as the structure and the technique of BOQ preparation and tender evaluation.

Evaluation:

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.


1 Individual and group assignments

Assignments: BOQs preparation Assessment: BOQ organization Methods of calculations (1st week : 7th week)

2 4 5

4 5 6

30%



Week No. 1 Introduction / Overview

Week No. 2 Employer / Consultant Relationship - (General Overview)

Week No. 3 Employer / Consultant Relationship - (Duties)

Week No. 4 Employer / Contractor Relationship (Tender Condition)

Week No. 5 Condition of Contract – (General conditions)

Week No. 6 Condition of Contract – (General conditions)

Week No. 7 7th week Exam

Week No. 8 Condition of Contract – (Particular conditions)

Week No. 9 Specifications (General Information)

Week No. 10

Specifications (Main Structure)-a

Week No. 11

Specifications (Main Structure)-b

Week No. 12

12th week assessment Research presentation and evaluation

Week No. 13

Bill of Quantities (Structure of BOQ)

Week No. 14

BOQs Compilation / 14th week assessment

Final Exam


255


Assignments: BOQs preparation Assessment: BOQ organization Methods of calculations (8thst week : 12th week)

8 9 10

9 10 11

30%

70%

4

12th Week Individual and group assignment

Assignments: Research Preparation Assessment: New material provision Research organization Presentation

8 12

5

Individual and group assignments

Assignments: BOQs preparation Assessment: BOQ organization Methods of calculations (14st week : 15th week)

13 14 10%

6 Final Exam

TBD 30% 30%

Total

100%

100%

List of References:

Principles of Measurement (International) For Works of Construction

Published by RICS (Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors)

MasterFormat® 2010 Update Numbers & Titles April 14, 2010

Deputy Ministry of public Works "General Specifications for Building Construction" Ministry of Public

Works and Housing, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, 2002

"١٩٨٠خلوصي محمد ماجد " الكميات و المواصفات و معدالت األداء ألعمال البناء

"١٩٨٠خلوصي محمد ماجد " الكميات و المواصفات و معدالت األداء لألعمال التكميلية

"2٠٠٠خلوصي محمد ماجد " الموسوعة الھندسية في الكميات و المواصفات و و معدالت األعمال التكمياية في المباني

2٠٠١الھيئة المصرية للتوحيد القياسي "المواصفات القياسية المصرية" القاھرة

السعودية وزارة األشغال العامة و اإلسكان "المواصفات العامة لتنفيذ المباني" وزارة األشغال العامة و اإلسكان, المملكة العربية

١٩٨2

Course Instructor: Arch. Khaled Sadek

Dean of Faculty Prof. Ibtihal Y. El-Bastawissi

Date: 15 / 02 /2017


256

CVEE 332 –Surveying for Architects

Course Title: Surveying for Architects Code: CVEE332 Hours:3 Lecture: 1 LAB: 2 Credit: 2

Prerequisites: none

Academic Year / Level: third year Year: 2017-2018 Term: 6th


Course Objectives

An accreditable program in Surveying for Architects will prepare graduates with the technical skills necessary to enter careers in boundary and Surveying , geographic and land information systems , engineering project surveying , mapping , or other related areas. The level and scope of career preparation will depend on the degree level and specific program orientation. Graduates of associate degree programs typically have strengths in utilizing measurement technologies and field mapping.

Learning Activities a. utilizing modern measurement technologies to acquire spatial data ; b. Applying technical concepts to the design of measurement systems to meet project

requirements ; c. Analyzing data for conformance with precision and accuracy requirements ; d. Employing industry-standard software to solve technical problems.

Course Outline Basic principles, Linear Surveying, Compass Surveying, Theodolite Surveying Traverses ,Leveling, Contouring , Areas, Volumes.


1 Basic principles

2 Linear Surveying

3 Compass Surveying

4 Compass Surveying (cont.)

5 Theodolite Surveying

6 Traverses


257

7 Exam1

8 Engineering Leveling

9 Engineering Leveling (cont.)

10 Areas

11 Volume

12 Exam2

13 Contouring

14 Practical Exam

Asses No.


Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.

TOTAL

1 Open &closed book exam

Knowledge base

2 Class tests Knowledge base


Knowledge base 5%

5%

4 Exam 1 7th 25% 30%

5 Exam2 12 15% 45%

6 Lab.Exam 14 15% 60%

7 Project 14 10% 70%

8 Final Exam last 30% 100%


* Surveying for Construction * Engineering surveying * Solving Problems in surveying

Course Instructor: Eng. Mahmoud Rihabi

Dean of Faculty Prof. Dr .Ibtehal El-Bastawissi

Date: 22 / 2 /2017


258

ARCH533 – Architectural Criticism

Course Title: Architectural Criticism Code: ARCH533 Hours: 2 Lecture: 2 Tutorial: 0 Credit: 2 Prerequisites: ---Academic Year / Level: 5th Level Year: 2017-2018 Term: Spring

Specialization: Architecture - Design & Built Environment Module Info: Mandatory Course (2 hrs. Lecture) Sec.1: Time: Tuesday 8:00 to 10:00 - Location: Lecture A209 - First Basement Sec.2: Time: Thursday 2:00 to 4:00 - Location: Lecture A303 - Second Basement

Course Objectives

The course addresses the following topics: - Evaluation of architectural works, ideologies and approaches; - Critical review and assessment of design, interpretation, and responses by different actors; - Criteria and methods of analysis and criticism; and - Appraisal of the delivery process and architectural product.


- Introduce students to practices of critical analysis in architecture and urbanism, - Establish criticism's context with regard to professional practice & public opinion. - Explore the ethics, values and responsibility of criticism within the context of the critic's role as a

proxy for the public in articulating responses to contemporary building design and urban development; and

- Focus on the improvement of writing skills

Learning Activities The course learning activities are as follows:

Develop appropriate effective written and oral communication skills;

Demonstrate the ability to perform an oral presentation, involving any subject presentation and performing discussion with audience;

Use organization skills (including task and time management) while conducting any evaluation / assessment of an architectural work; and

Develop the ability to self appraise and reflect on practice relevant to architecture.

Course Outline Lectures and group seminars addressing the evaluation of architectural works, ideologies and approaches. Critical review and assessment of design, interpretation, and responses by different factors. Criteria and methods of analysis and criticism. Appraisal of the delivery process and architectural product.



259

Week 1 Tuesday /2018 Thursday /2018

COURSE INTRODUCTION Description of the whole course content, course objectives and Definition of keywords. Meaning of Criticism. Types of Criticism: Meaning of architectural criticism What are the objects that will be criticized? Real projects, proposals of architects, proposals of students, architectural research, methods of the architectural education What are the conditions that should be available in the critic? Reasons of Architectural Criticism + What is the right time of criticism? During / After Methods and Levels of Architectural Criticism Selecting the criteria of the Normative Criticism that will be used throughout the course


ANALYZING AND CRITICIZING PROJECTS FROM ARCHITECTURES OF MODERNISM & LATE-MODERNISM German Pavilion for Mies van der Rohe Falling Water for Frank Lloyd Wright Ronchamp Chapel for Le Corbusier Nakagin Capsule Tower for Kisho Kurokawa Sony Center for Helmut Jahn Teamwork groups, each group consists of 5 students – taking notes, sketches, & opinions The instructor informs students that each group will submit a sketch-book at Week no.6 The sketch-book will be a detailed table criticizing each project using the Normative Criticism within the 7 criteria. A3 submission


ANALYZING AND CRITICIZING PROJECTS FROM ARCHITECTURES OF POST-MODERNISM & DECONSTRUCTION Piazza d’Italia for Charles Moore Frankfurt Museum, Court Exhibition - for Stanley Tigerman The Jewish Museum for Daniel Libeskind The same teamwork groups take notes, sketches, & opinions


Continue ANALYZING AND CRITICIZING PROJECTS FROM ARCHITECTURES OF DECONSTRUCTION Guggenheim Bilbao Museum for Frank Gehry


ANALYZING AND CRITICIZING PROJECTS FROM PERFORMATIVE ARCHITECTURE & DIGITAL ARCHITECTURE Reichstag Dome - for Norman Foster Sendai Mediatheque - for Toyo Ito Blur Building - for Diller & Scofidio Kunsthaus Museum - for Peter Cook and Colin Fournier The same teamwork groups take notes, sketches, & opinions


SEMINAR AND DISCUSSING STUDENTS' WORKS Each group will make PowerPoint presentation criticizing the previous 13 projects Presentation's mark out of 10 (Submission of the groups' sketch-books (Criticizing Projects) - mark out of 10


7th WEEK EXAM - Written & Closed book exam – mark out of 10

http://www.google.com.lb/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=1&cad=rja&uact=8&ved=0CBwQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.arch2o.com%2Fkunsthaus-graz-peter-cook-and-colin-fournier%2F&ei=qs2fVP2UBMP2aJbdgOgE&usg=AFQjCNGbZO7q4HAfmpUb9_R6GOgDPUWGgg&sig2=COvRcSPU9SDB9pHtD4asbw&bvm=bv.82001339,d.d2s


260


Announcing marks of 7th week – mark out of 30 CRITICIZING THE ARCHITECTURAL RESEARCH Difference between thesis/paper/ and report Using the Normative Criticism to analyze and criticize researches based on the following criteria: Format, Content, Interdependence between parts, Findings, & Referencing Example: Criticizing a scientific paper using the previous criteria - in open discussion The instructor informs students that each group will bring next time a paper that already published in a journal or in a conference to be criticized.


CLASS OPEN DISCUSSION ABOUT THE PAPERS / ARTICLES Each group will identify its chosen paper, recognizing its author, title, field, content, length, place of publishing. Each group must take the approval from the instructor that this paper is appropriate or not. Groups are asked to submit next time critiques of papers using the Normative Criticism within the 5 previous criteria. A3 submission

EASTER VACATION


The following up of the criticized papers with the teamwork groups


PowerPoint presentation for the criticized papers - mark out of 10


Discussion and the final submission of the criticized papers - mark out of 10


Announcing marks of 12th week – mark out of 20 QUIZ I: - Mark out of 5 Presenting a number of the architectural projects - Individually, the student has to criticize each projects using the Normative Criticism based specifically on the following criteria: Clarity of concept, Form & Composition, Colors, & Context with Site


Announcing marks of 14th week – mark out of 10 QUIZ II: - Mark out of 5 Presenting an architectural article - Individually, each student has to criticize this article using the Normative Criticism based specifically on the following criteria: Format, Content, Interdependence between parts, Findings, & Referencing

TBA FINAL EXAM - Written & closed book exam

Evaluation:

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.


261

1

Sketch-Book of criticizing pioneers' projects

Communication skills through written presentation made by teamwork groups

3 6

Tue. /2018 Thu. /2018

10%

30%

60%

2 Visual & Oral Presentation For projects

Communication skills through oral presentation of pioneers' projects

3 6

Tue. /2018 Thu. /2018

10%

3 7TH Week Exam Closed-book examination

knowledge base, intellectual qualities, & Critical thinking

7 7

Tue. /2018 Thu. /2018

10%

4

Visual & Oral Presentation For a selected paper

Communication skills through oral presentation of the criticized papers

8 11

Tue. /2018 Thu. /2018

10%

20%

5

Final Submission of the criticized papers

Communication skills through written presentation made by teamwork groups, knowledge base, and intellectual qualities

8 12

Tue. /2018 Thu. /2018

10%

6 Quiz I on Projects Individually


13 13

Tue. /2018 Thu. /2018

5%

10%

7 Quiz II on Articles Individually


14 14

Tue. /2018 Thu. /2018

5%

8 Final Exam Closed-book Examination

knowledge base, intellectual qualities, & critical thinking

-- -- TBA 40% 40%

Total 100% 100%


(ppp) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts.

(qqq) Recommended books:


262

Youssef, M. (2016) Architecture and Metaphor, published by Beirut Arab University, Printed and distributed by

Stephan Library, Beirut, Lebanon

Arnold, D. (2002) Reading Architectural History, Routledge, London, UK.

Forty, A. (2000) Words and Buildings: A Vocabulary of Modern Architecture,

Thames & Hudson, New York, USA

Whiffen, M. (1970) The History, Theory and Criticism of Architecture: papers from the 1964;

Cambridge: The M. I. T. Press.

(rrr) General References: Periodicals, Websites, Architecture documentaries etc.

Course Instructor: Dr. Maged N. A. Youssef


Date: 20 / 01 /2018


263

ARCH 540. SENIOR PROJECT Course Code / Title: ARCH 540. Senior Project Credit: 8 Cr.


Academic Semester: 10th Semester: Spring 2017-2018

Module Info:

Location: 5th Year Studio - Floor B2

Time:

Instructors:


The course explores architectural design work coupled with rigorous analysis, research and experimentation. Studio-based work addresses diverse design topics requiring theoretically informed, viable architectural solutions, and responses to increasing complexity, conditions, and contexts.

Students are required to carry out detailed research and subsequently develop a comprehensive design project, covering one approved topic of their choice within the field of architectural design;

Based on this research, the project program is developed, followed by a complete and detailed architectural proposal, together aiming to provide general training to handle large architectural problems with emphasis on all professional and technical problems through research work, formulation of concepts, and design processes;

Final Submission would include both an architectural project (of which copies are submitted in both printed and electronic formats) in addition to text and explanatory illustrations and diagrams;

The submitted portfolio of design drawings should reflect adequate interpretation and together represent innovative solutions considering contemporary concerns, social, economic, structural aspects, within specific contexts, as well as the local, cultural and urban environments.

The candidates’ work is to be presented and discussed with a panel of referees that includes internal, external members in addition to course staff and advisors.


Stages Stage Label & Description Date of Submission

Marks Total Year Work /60

1

Pre-Concept Design Studies and Alternatives:

Developing the studies and analyses performed in Arch. 539 after incorporating the Juries’ comments / notes (if any).

Performing a Detailed Site Analysis on the Macro and Micro Levels including Studies of building context, architectural character & identity in response to human, social, cultural, & economic/practical needs.

Developing the building program (Schedule of accommodation) including the main elements/components of

(4 weeks)

10 25


264



the project.

Presenting Design Alternatives (including Study Models) for the project configuration showing the buildings’ volumes, the main functions distribution and the general zoning in addition to the architectural character of the Project.

Submission Format : A3 & Modelling (Site/ Study Model)

2

Concept Design

Developing the selected alternative solution and preparing conceptual Drawings illustrating the main functions and the relationships of the Project components. These drawings shall include:

o Floor Plans o Elevations, o Sections drawings o Diagrams o 3D Model(s)

Preparing master Site Plan, showing the Project main building(s) location, parking structures, as well as all proposed on and off-site improvements and amenities. The site study shall cover internal roads, walkways, playgrounds, Fences and Gates.


(4 weeks)

15

3

Developed Design – Detailed Architectural Drawings:

Elaborating on the design decisions and providing precise architectural drawings while emphasizing on functional requirements & relationships, spatial organization, structural system, study of relationships, circulations, connections & associations.

Emphasising on the response to increasing complexity of ethical, social, conceptual & formal conditions, such as sustainability, identity, cultural imperatives.

Studying the building context and developing the architectural character & identity of the project.

Re-comparing program with selected solution and modify solution/program

Emphasising on applying execution details and the integration of all external & internal details of finishes, services, and construction techniques


(4 weeks)

15 35


265



4

Final Submission & Evaluation:

Preparing a Final Detailed representation of complete detailed design project to interpret comprehensive understanding of architectural design as a holistic activity, which would be reviewed & examined by a panel of referees. This would be reached through the development of the optimum alternative solution in response to the design problem selected in the 1st stage.

Note:

Representation skills are essentially evaluated & should be broadened to include a range of media & not solely CAD.

Submission Format : A1 (9 Landscape sheets) ,Final Drawings; Site Plan, Plans, Sections, Elevations, Details & Modelling (Site/ Study Model), as well as all analytical diagrams & written explanations necessary for better understanding of the final product.

(Final Submission Evaluation) (2week)

20

TOTAL 60 60


Course Policies

Extensive work within the design studio (16 hrs/week) involves regular and adequate periods of contact, discussion, and review of progress achieved by students;

The studio-based course provides necessary guidance and assistance throughout the process of project development by course staff, visiting tutors, and other advisors;

The research work involved in this course allows a debate-like review and discussion of a set of selected projects/examples that interpret contemporary directions, applications, and emerging theories in the field of Architecture;

The students' regular attendance is accorded utmost priority. Passing the course necessitates a minimum attendance of 80%, by which a student becomes eligible for final stages of submission and examination.

Evaluation

Evaluation of work progress will be carried out for phased submissions as indicated in the timetable below.

Students are required to submit their work on the marked dates, and have their drawing fixed on the designated boards no later than 10:00 am.

Projects will be evaluated in terms of Architectural Excellence which includes the integration and efficiency of architectural and structural solutions as well as the originality of ideas presented

The blending of the proposal with the distinct cultural and natural characteristics of each region and site


266

Architectural Expression of the concept

Organization of Spaces and Functions inside & out

Structure, Construction, materials, and services

Quality and Clarity of Presentation materials * The evaluation criteria are to be variably ranked in order of importance according to each project TYPOLOGY

After every evaluation, students will be advised on their performance, grades, and also on any comments / relevant guidelines specified by the referees' panel.

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.



- Ability to

present research-

generated

knowledge

- Skills of design,

analysis &

criticism

1 4 10% (Group Staff Evaluation)


-Ability to present research-generated knowledge & design development outcome -Ability to present

design

development

outcome and

creativity

5 8 15% (Group Staff Evaluation)


Ability to present design development outcome and creativity

9 12 15% (All Staff Evaluation)

4

Individual assignments and Individual presentations to assess

Ability to initiate, develop, interpret & communicate valid design ideas

13 14 20% (All Staff Evaluation)

5

Oral Presentation & Jury Examination

Knowledge base, professional skills and transferable skills

16 16 TBA 40%

Total 100%


267


The specialized library within the Faculty offers a wide range of textbooks, references, and periodicals that cover diverse topics relevant to the field of Design process, approaches, guidelines and contemporary architectural theories and directions.

The quality of teaching and research is further supported by first-rate facilities such as a specialized library, computer laboratories, in addition to fully equipped graphics / GIS laboratories and model making workshop.

Additional amenities are provided on-campus to all students, such as internet terminals, audio-visual equipment, seminar rooms, printing and copying facilities.


268

ARCH 261 – Introduction to Painting

Course Title: Introduction to Painting Code: ARCH261 Hours: 3 Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 2 Credit: 3

Prerequisites: none

Academic Year / Level: 2016-2017 /

Elective/Intermediate Level

Year: 2016-2017 Term: 1


Location Studio 2 COURSE OBJECTIVES


This course aims at introducing the students to the study of painting language through color, form, materials and techniques. It also helps them get acquainted with aspects of traditional and modern pictorial composition including proportion, space , and color theory and their role in architectural design through the presentation of a variety of subjects. Moreover, the course also aims at introducing the student to the physical and chemical properties of color as well as methods of use. Learning Activities

The students will analyze geometrical form, depth, space, and composition to acquire visual and manual skills in architectural and artistic design. They will also exercise drawing natural scenes and make judgments on aesthetic issues. Course Outline

Below is a detailed weekly schedule of this course’s outline. The course is delivered over a period of 16 weeks. There will be two exams and one final exam and grading will be carried out according to the table found on page 3.

18- Course Outline:


1 Introduction to painting as a study

2

Color Theory; A Brief history; Introduction to primary, secondary and tertiary color. Shade and

shadow, Principles on basic geometrical forms

3

Tools and methods; Insight on beauty; Hue, value, saturation, and chromatic scales.

Introduction to aquarelle Technique and monochromatic coloring of cube

4 Perception of color; Color as language; Psychology of color. Aquarelle practice on basic form, composition(cube, cone and square) using different colors.


269

5 The vocabulary of painting; The artists' spectrum, aquarelle practice (fruit composition)

6 Color perspective; shades and shadows, aquarelle practice on naturel scene.

7 Exam

8 Painting and Architectural Engineering, introduction to oil pastel

9 The artistic style of painting, practice of oil pastel

10 From classic arts to modern arts, introduction to colored pencils

11 Landscape rendering, introduction to touch markers (water color) practice on different objects.

12 Exam

13 Drawing the human body; Illusion and impression, application using Touch Markers

14 Impressionism; Fauvism, Cubism, application using Touch Markers.

15 Revision

16 Final Exam

Evaluation:

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.

1


Acquired knowledge

2 3

30%

60%

4 5


Total Assessment

3


Acquired knowledge

8 9

20% 10 11


Total Assessment

5


Acquired knowledge 13 14 10%

6



40%


270

Total

100%

100%


(sss) Course notes:

Delivered by instructor.

(ttt) Essential books (textbooks):

1. Holtzschue Lina, Understanding Color in Introduction for Designers - fourth edition 2011 Mexico. 2. Crofton, Ian - A Dictionary of Art - London: Routledge, 1988 3. Danger, Eric Paxton. The Color Handbook, Aldershot England: Gower Technical Press, 1987 4. Chevreul, Michel Eugene. The Principles of Harmony and Contrast of Color and Their Applications to

Arts. New York: Reinhold publishing1967 5. History of art, by E. H. GOMBTIC, publishing by Phaidon 2012 6. Histoire mondiale de l’Art, by Hugh Honour, John Fleming, Bordas 1988.

(uuu) Recommended books: .

Koenig Becky. Color workbook (2nd Ed) upper Saddle River , nj : Person Education 2007 .

Feisner, Edith Anderson. Color studies. New York : Fairchild Publications, 2001 (vvv) General References:

***

***

Course Instructor: Prof Adnan Khouja Date 06\ 02\2017

Dean of Faculty Prof. Ibtihal El Bastawisy


271

ARCH264. INTRODUCTION TO SHAPE GRAMMARS

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: Introduction to Shape Grammars Code: ARCH264 Hours Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 2 Credit: Prerequisites: N/A Academic Year / Level: Faculty elective Term: Spring Specialization: Architectural Engineering


Shape Grammar’s concept draws on analogies between visual and natural language, capturing a sense of order in matter and form. It is therefore familiar beside other terms like “style” and “theme” that highlight the awareness of form repetitive patterns, constituent parts, compositional rules and families of designs that share common features. Using “grammar” and “language” as metaphor in design is an attempt to make seemingly tacit practice explicit through defined criteria. Shape grammars provide a formal mechanism for generating compositions based on shapes and their spatial relationships by specifying methods to replace parts of shapes with others. The course aims

tointroducespatialgrammarsandtheirapplications,primarilytodesignandcomposition.Emphases

ontheformalandinformalaspectsofgrammars,evolutionofgrammaticalideas,theirrelevance,ap

plicationanduseintheanalysesof‘styles’,synthesisof‘form’,andincorporationof‘function‘,and

notleast,inteachinggrammarstoacomputer.


Understand the meanings behind Design Computation’s concepts, reasoning and approaches.

Practice and Understand Shape grammars processes of Analysis and Synthesis.

Develop a flexible eye (Visual reasoning).

Be able to extract common features of Simple to medium complex designs

Develop a better understanding of composition and visual correlations and an ability to develop Innovative design following simple formal rules.

Develop the students’ skill of thinking and making respectively as well as a good understanding of and control over their own design processes.

Create drawings of basic objects in a three dimensional (3D) environment.






(kk) DESIGN


272

(ARB/RIBA part1: GC1.1 / GC3.1 / GC3.3)

(kk 1) - An awareness of the Architectural process when designing projects.

(kk 2) - An understanding of composition and visual correlations

(kk 3) - An ability to think and make respectively as well as a good understanding of and control over the design processes.

(kk 4) - An ability to Develop a flexible eye capable of extracting common features of simple to medium complex designs

(ll) TECHNOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT (ARB/RIBA part1: GC2.3/ GC7.1)

(ll 1) - An understanding of the nature and operations of Generative systems.

(ll 2) - An Ability to apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the Shape Grammars;

(ll 3) - An Ability to build a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to shape grammars;

(ll 4) - An Awareness of some of the current and emerging issues within the generative systems sector and debate the potential benefits.

(ll 5) - An Ability to plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to shape grammars.

(ll 6) - An Ability to self-appraise and reflect on practice relevant to Shape grammars.

(mm) CULTURAL CONTEXT

(ARB/RIBA part1: GC7.1)

(mm 1) - An Ability to solve problems relevant to Style recognition using ideas and techniques some of which are at the forefront of the discipline;

(nn) COMMUNICATION (ARB/RIBA part1: GC6.2/ GA1.2/ GA1.4)

(nn 1) - An ability to write clearly and accurately

(nn 2) - An ability to develop appropriate/effective written and oral communication skills.

(nn 3) - An Ability to work effectively as part of a group, involving leadership, group dynamics and interpersonal skills such as listening, negotiation and persuasion

21- COURSE OUTLINE:

Week No. 1 The Course Outline & Background ( Design and Design reasoning)

Week No. 2 An introduction to Shape grammars (recognition, production and evaluation)

Week No. 3 Recognition / Ambiguity Vocabularies/ Design elements


273

Week No. 4 Seeing Shape in different perspectives

Week No. 5 Seeing Shape in different perspectives 2

Week No. 6 Production/ Doing Shapes/ Rules Additive Rules

Week No. 7 Subdivision Grammars

Week No. 8 7th Week Exam

Week No. 9 Designing with constraints/ Labeled rules

Week No. 10 Parametric Grammars/ Product Grammars

Week No. 11 The Analytical and design process & SG scenarios

Week No. 12 TERM PROJECT(2)

Week No. 13 TERM PROJECT(3)- Pre-Final Presentation

Week No. 14 Final presentation



The course is delivered through lectures with hands on experience via practical exercises in the computer lab. Problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, research paper, workshops. Exposure to the DESIGN COMPUTATION environment is an important aspect of the teaching and learning methods.


ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK NO.

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 2D assignments intellectual qualities and professional skills

3 7 10%

2 7th Week Exam knowledge base and intellectual qualities

8 8 15%

3 Assignments & 12th week Assessment

intellectual qualities and professional skills

8 12 30%

4 Term Projects 11 14 10%


274

4 Attendance

1 14 5%

5 Final Exam

knowledge base, professional skills and transferable skills

15 15 30%

Total 100%


Course notes:

Course Lectures


KNIGHT, T. 1999. Shape grammars in education and practice: history and prospects. International Journal of Design Computing (IJDC), MIT press, 2. Access the paper online at http://www.mit.edu/¬tknight/IJDC/.

Online resources at : www.Shapegrammars.org Recommended books:

KALAY, Y. E. 2004. Architecture's new media: Principles, theories, and methods of computer-aided design, The MIT Press.

STINY, G. 2008. Shape: talking about seeing and doing, The MIT Press.

STINY, G. & GIPS, J. 1972. Shape grammars and the generative specification of painting and sculpture. Information processing, 71, 1460-1465.

STINY, G. & MITCHELL, W. J. 1978. The Palladian grammar. Environment and Planning B, 5, 5-18.


275

Arch 361. Architecture and Environment

Course Code / Title: ARCH361. Architecture and Environment Credits: 2

Instructor: Dr. Kareem Saad Galal


Academic Semester: 300 Level Faculty Elective Semester: Spring 2017/2018

Module Info: (2 hrs. Lecture)

Location: A209

Time: Tuesday 10:00 -11:50

Course Outline

Basic theories and interpretations of environmental studies in relation to the built environment. Review of environmental concerns and their scope. Environmental problems, pollution, threats and impacts of human actions. Design of the built environment engaged with the natural environment. Influence of natural elements on the making of architecture. Relationship of architecture to site and landscape.


Provide students with a basic knowledge in the social sciences, humanities, and physical and biological sciences.

Develop interdisciplinary perspectives on “human interaction with the environment”.

Open doors to a satisfying, healthy, sustainable way of life for Architecture students, their communities and our world as a whole.

Use interdisciplinary approach for studying environmental issues and human roles to change our environment.

The environmental control systems to better understand the architectural, cultural, and ecological implications of the technological choices necessarily made in the process of design.

Learning Activities

The course learning activities highlight the following:

The use of interdisciplinary approach for studying environmental issues in architecture.

The architect’s role in harming and / or protecting the environment.

The knowledge of environmental friendly design concerns.

Course Outline


1 Tue 31/01/2018

Course outline - Introduction and environmental Definitions: In relation to the built environment in relation to the built environment

2 Tue 07/02/2018 Environmental Concerns and their scope: Environmental problems, pollution,

threats and impacts of human actions.

3 Tue 14/02/2018 Renewable Energy Systems: Wind power - Hydroelectric - Solar Energy – Biomass

- Geothermal energy.


276

4 Tue 21/02/2018

Design of the built environment engaged with the natural environment: Interaction between Architectural Creation and Environmental Impact - Biophilic Architecture Hypothesis.

5 Tue 28/02/2018

Design of the built environment engaged with the natural environment: Principles of climate - Solar principles in climatic design.

6 Tue 07/03/2018

Design of the built environment engaged with the natural environment: Wind flow around buildings

7 Tue 14/03/2018

7th Week Exam - Design of the built environment engaged with the natural environment: Contemporary architectural response - (Passive Buildings).

8 Tue 21/03/2018

Design of the built environment engaged with the natural environment: Buildings and low energy design - Energy systems in domestic buildings

9 Tue 28/03/2018

Design of the built environment engaged with the natural environment: Improvement of Thermal Insulation

10 Tue 04/04/2018

Research-1 (workshop-analytical and problem solving)-a. Design in Hot arid zones - Design in temperate zones - Design in cold zones

11 Tue 11/04/2018

Relationship of architecture to site and landscape: Microclimate, site planning and bioclimatic design.

12 Tue 25/04/2018

Relationship of architecture to site and landscape: The Urban Heat Island Phenomenon upon Urban Components.

13 Tue 02/05/2018

Research-2 Presentation-a (Passive Design).

14 Tue 09/05/2018

Research-2 Presentation-b (Passive Design) - Revision

Final Exam

Course Policies

The course is delivered through lectures, seminars, directed reading, videos, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including projects. General Policies:




Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 7th week exam 7 7 14 March

30% 30%

2

Group Assignments

Assignments/assessment (Research presentation)

10 11 04 April

10%

30%

3 Group Assignments


13 14 09 May

20%

4 Final Exam 40 As Scheduled 40% 40%


277

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course notes:

Lectures' handouts. (www) Essential books (textbooks):

Botkin, Daniel B. and Keller, Edward A. (2011), Environmental Science-Earth as a Living Planet, 8th edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. USA ISBN: 978-0-470-52033-8.

(xxx) Recommended books:

Almusaed, A.(2011), Biophilic and Bioclimatic Architecture, Springer-Verlag London Limited. ISBN: 978-1-84996-533-0.

Ahluwalia, V K (2013), Environmental studies basic concepts, The Energy and Resources Institute TERI Press New Delhi, India, ISBN: 978-81-7993-321-3.

Sharples, Steve and Bougdah, Hocine (2010 ), Environment Technology and Sustainability, Taylor & Francis New York ISBN: 0-203-87840-X Master e-book ISBN.

Turner, Tom (2005),Landscape planning and environmental Impact Design, Taylor & Francis e-Library, ISBN: 0-203-21453-6 Master e-book ISBN.

Hernández, S. Brebbia, C. A. and De Wilde, W.P. (2010), Eco-Arch-III-HARMONISATION BETWEEN ARCHITECT RE AND NATURE, WIT Press UK ISBN: 978-1-84564-430-7.

Schröpfer, Thomas (2012), Ecological urban architecture (Qualitative Approaches to Sustainability), Birkhäuser Verlag GmbH, Basel Switzerland ISBN 978-3-0346-0800-8.

Course Instructor: Kareem Saad Galal

Dean of Faculty: Prof. Ebtihal El-Bastawissi

Date: 17 / 01 / 2018


278

ARCH461. Landscape Architecture

Course Code / Title: ARCH461. Landscape Architecture Credits: 2

Instructor: Dr. Massimiliano Gotti Porcinari


Academic Semester: Faculty Elective Semester: Spring 2017/2018

Module Info: Intermediate Level Course (2 hrs. Lecture)

Location: Time:

Course Outline

The course brings in fundamentals of landscape including design elements and principles. Students with an in-depth understanding of how the two disciplines architecture and landscape can be combined to produce integrated sustainable solutions. The course content focuses on both theoretical and applicable aspects involved in landscape studies. Issues of site analysis, soft and hard landscape elements are introduced and elaborated through an active learning environment to enhance students’ self learning.

Course Objectives

This course aims to allow students to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

1. Elements of landscape architectural design; 2. Functional, aesthetic, social and environmental aspects of landscape architectural design and urban

design in particular. 3. Analyizing the different elements and vocabularies of landscape design project, 4. Applying the natural and artificial landscape characteristics of the local environment to form

environmentally-friendly buildings and societies.


1 Introduction to the Course - Definitions

2 The History of Landscape Architecture landscape and urban design

3

Research Presentation Competition Parc de la Villette, Paris 1982 Site and context

4 Inhabiting the landscape Research Presentation

5 Spaces concept

6 Paths and user concept 7 Mid-Term 7th week exam presentation

8 Edge, foci, thresholds, Spatial Characteristics of Plants


279

9 Functional Aspect of Landscape Design linear park; High line New York, Promenade Plantee Paris

10 Aesthetic Aspect of Landscape Design Burle Marx

11 Holland experience West 8 Adriaan Geuze

12 Copenhagen landscape experience Superkilen: Topotek 1 + BIG Architects + Superflex

13 The anatomy of a project and professional profile

14 Presentation/ Pre final

TBA Final Exam

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Group Assignments


2rd 4th

30%

60% 2

Group Assignments Mid-term exam

Assignments/assessment (concept)

4th

7h

3 Group/ individual Assignments

Assignments/assessment (general Project and specific solutions)

8th 12th 20%

4

Group/ individual Assignments

Assignments/assessment (pre-final)

10th 14th 10%

5 Final Exam Final TBA 40% 40%

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course notes: Lectures' handouts Architects and landscape architects to know: OMA Rem Koolhaas, BIG architects, Bernard Tschumi, Diller and Scofidio + Renfro, Field Operation, Charles Jencks, Carlos Ferrater, Roberto Burle Marx, Martha Schwartz, Topotek 1, West8 Adriaan Geuze, Kristine Jensen, EMBT Miralles Tagliabue, NL architects, Philippe Rham, Patrick Blanc, Raymond Jungles, Mia Lehrer, Walter Hood Essential books:

WATERMAN Tim, The fundamentals of landscape architecture, Fairchild books New York 2009


280

DEE Catherine, Form and fabric in landscape architecture a visual introduction, Spon Press 2001

(Books available in the BAU library.)


Dean of Faculty: Prof. Ebtihal El-Bastawissi

Date: 14 / 02 / 2017


281

ARCH465. BIM Course Code / Title: ARCH465. Building Information Modeling Credits: 2





10:00 to 10:50












INTENDED LEARNING OUTCOMES (oo) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:







(pp) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:



282






(qq) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:




Respond to change within the external and internal Building Information Modeling environments. (rr) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:






STAGE




30/1/2017


6/2/2017


13/2/2017



27/2/2017




20/3/2017







283



Course Policies











Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 BIM definitions intellectual qualities and professional skills

1 1 30/01/2017

60% 2

Start-up Basics – template file


2 2 06/02/2017

3 Modifications basics intellectual qualities and professional skills

3 3 13/02/2017

4 Floors - footprint intellectual 4 4 20/02/2017

14 Revision 8/5/2017

15 Final Exam 15/5/2017


284

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

roofs - slope arrows qualities and professional skills



5 5 27/02/2017

6


knowledge base and intellectual qualities

6 6 06/03/2017



7 7 13/03/2017



8 8 20/03/2017



9 9 27/03/2017

10 Annotation intellectual qualities and professional skills

10 10 03/04/2017



11 11 10/04/2017



12 12 24/04/2017



13 13 1/05/2017



14 14 8/05/2017

15 Final Exam -Oral Examination-

knowledge base, professional skills and transferable skills


Total 100%


Course Notes:


Sheets

Projects Briefs



Recommended Books:


285



286

ARCH467. Digital modelling

Course Code / Title: ARCH467. Digital Modelling

Credits: 2

Instructor: Dr. Marwan Halabi




Location: Digital Modelling Lab

Time: Tue 08:00 to 11:00

Course description and Objectives

The course will deal with the investigation of design problems through the use of computer graphics from the initial stages of design conceptualization to design development, visualizing a new approach to different issues of computer aided design. This studio will concentrate on the idea of digital design that is giving rise to new architectonic possibilities. Architecture is a question of building, and forms generated on the screen are just utopian fantasies if they do not conform to the tectonic requirements of the real world. There is a big difference between designing according to the algorithmic potential of software programs and the tectonic parameters of actual building materials. At the same time, the old opposition of tectonics versus the digital design has given way to a new tectonics of digital design that can be lead to the desired materialization through the help of CAM technologies.

Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to: 5. Further develop the students’ digital skills in modeling techniques as well as applying the computer

as a design tool for the generation of a project 6. Investigate new tools in design, which provide the possibility of studying the transformation of a

drawing with respect to changing variables, and the integration of different parameters in the design process

7. Present an opportunity for students to creatively explore new ideas, theories and techniques and to integrate their personal research in the generation of a comprehensive design project

8. Explore different strategies to create an architecture composed of complex geometries, solids, complex surfaces and curves such as NURBS (Non-Standard Uniform B-Splines). For such experiment, we will be using different softwares, among them Rhinoceros as the main tool, combined with the traditional CAD and with the flexibility of the Spline-based technology to precisely represent complex forms instead of just vectorial lines o polygon meshes. An up-to-date set of new tools will be introduced lately in order to parametrically control the process of design and construction.

TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS:

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, seminars, directed reading, videos, computer

assisted learning, case studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and

methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments and projects.

Students should have basic computer drafting skills. The course seeks to provide students with digital modelling strategies by using “Rhinoceros” as the main software in addition to complementary programs such as AutoCad, 3D Max, and Photoshop.

In addition, through the realization of a series of exercises of different scales, students will be provided with the following:


287

4- A set of conceptual and visual tools as supportive information when realizing exercises and designing projects.

5- Exposure to innovative ways to design and obtain complex and, at the same time, rational results.

6- Awareness of the visual qualities of architecture in general, while also learning how to translate observation, knowledge, and intentions into the digital design process.

Course Outline


1

- Visualization options

- Basic drawing definitions : lines, splines, fillet, offset, extrude, copy, move, rotate

1d, 2d and 3d

- Design of basic geometrical shapes

- Extrusion options

2

- Basic descriptive geometry principles : points in space and its relation with

volumes

- Introduction to NURBS

- Surface generation principles: planar surfaces, edge curves, loft, curve network,

revolve and rail sweeping

- Transforming complex surfaces into volumes

3

- Importing design principles and data from different softwares

- Basic operation differences : Boolean operations, trim, split

- Basic geometrical deformations: scale 1d, 2d, & 3d, twist

- Transforming and Deforming shapes

4

- Acquisition of data from shapes: duplicate edges, extract wireframe, extract

isocurves

- Fluidity in design

- Splitting lines, surfaces and volumes

- Geometrical control

5

- Simplification of data for generation of surfaces

- Joining surfaces

- Combination of simple and complex shapes

- Moulding process with splines and control points

- Projecting data into surfaces and shapes


7

- Control points in space

- Design with splines

- Single curved surfaces


288


- Double curved surfaces

- Boolean operations with simple and complex shapes

8

- Building models with digital data using manual approach

- Building models with digital data for Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM)

- Unroll developable surfaces

9

- Strategies for shape development and control

- 3d section

- Introduction to parametric design

10

- Form contours

- Unfolding surfaces techniques for models and real scale components


12

- Optimization of construction process

- Exporting data for presentations

- Exporting data for rendering

13

- Basic rendering with Rhino

- Exporting data for other platforms

- Transforming designed objects for 3d printing

14 - Generation of a complex project and building of a model (vertical city)

15 - Final Exam

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Exercises Digital Files 3 4 26/09/2017

30%

2 Individual Exercises and quiz

4 5 03/10/2017

3 6th Week


4 11th Week


30%

5 Individual


Assign. 2 (Individual work) 7 13 05/12/2017


289

6 15th Week Final Exam

Total Assessment - 15 T.B.A. 40% 40%

Total 100% 100%

General Policies

The course has introduced to students through lectures, 2 hrs per week.



LIST OF REFERENCES

- Rhinoceros for Windows User Guide



- www.rhino3d.com

Course Instructor: Dr. Marwan Halabi


Date: 11 / 04 / 2017


290

Arch468. Parametric Design & Digital Fabrication

Course Code / Title: Arch468 Credits: 2

Instructor: Dr. Chadi Khoury

Course Hours: 3 Course Duration: 3

Academic Semester: 2017/2018 Semester: spring

Module Info:

Location: A203/Lab

Time: Friday 08:00 – 11:00

Course Objectives

- Learn the overall structure of parametric modeling systems. - Acquire technical fluency in visual programming environments. - Gain experience in the embedding of design knowledge into a parametric model. - Employ appropriate parametric techniques to convey essential formal elements at each stage of the design process.

Course Outline

Week No. 1 Course presentation…

Lecture _ Introduction to digital media, computation and design/ Lab _ Introduction to Grasshopper: Installation and first step with the canvas of Grasshopper.

Week No. 2 Lecture _ Geometry and typology / Lab _ Associative geometries Week No. 3 Lecture _ Mathematical and logical functions/ Lab _ Components: [Range], [Series]

and [Interval], the component [Function], Boolean operators, trigonometric Week No. 4 Lecture _ Theoretical outline of curves/ Lab _ Curve analysis in Grasshopper:

[Evaluate curve], [curvature]… Week No. 5 Lecture _ Theoretical outline of surfaces/ Lab _ Surface analysis in Grasshopper:

[Divide surface], [Evaluate surface], [Isotrim (subSrf)]… Week No. 6 Lecture _ Geometrical transformations/ Lab _ Transformation with shape

preservation/variation: Vectors, translations, rotations…/ [Paneling], [image sampler], [cluster]…

Week No. 7 Lecture _ Data Tree/ Lab _ Components: [Flatten tree], [merge], [Graft tree], [tree branch], [path mapper]…

Week No. 8 7th week exam Week No. 9 Lecture _ Attractors/ Lab _ Attractor point, attractor curve Week No. 10 Lecture _ Mesh/ Lab _ NURBS and polygonal surfaces, Mesh topology, triangulations:

Delaunay, Voronoi Week No. 11 Lecture _ Dynamics Lab _ Consumable Dynamics “objects 1” Week No. 12 12th week exam Week No. 13 Lecture _ Fabrication / Lab _ Project and fabrication Week No. 14 Final exam

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

SUB

M. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.


291

NO. WEE

K

NO.

1 7th Week



15/04/2016 30% --%

2 12th Week



27/05/2016 30%

--% 3 Final exam 06/06/2016 30%

4 Attendance 10%

Total 100% 100%

ARCH 561 – History of Islamic Arts

Course Title: History of Islamic Arts Code: ARCH 561 Hours: 2 Lecture: 2 Tutorial: 0 Credit: 2

Prerequisites: none

Academic Year / Level: 2016-2017

/Elective/Intermediate Level

Year: 2016-2017 Term: 2


Location 203 Time 14-16 COURSE OBJECTIVES


From this course, students will develop a sound historical memory of Islamic societies as expressed by their art and architecture from the 7th century to the present. This course also aims at increasing the student's knowledge of the history of human architecture , changes in artistic styles, architectural advances in its various forms,including Islamic architecture and art which are part of the region’s civilization. Learning Activities

This course introduces to the students the cultural history of the Islamic world and the world of Art during that period. It also uncovers the aesthetics pertaining to Islamic Art and the architectural advances and changes in artistic styles during the Islamic era. Finally , the course will help students understand the influences of Islam on society throughout history . Course Outline

Below is a detailed weekly schedule of this course’s outline. The course is delivered over a period of 16 weeks. There will be two exams and one final exam and grading will be carried out according to the table found on page 3.


292

22- Course Outline:


1 Introduction to Islamic Art

2 Characteristics of the environment

3

Influence of religious creed, Innovation and originality, Absence of luxury Absence of

concretization

4

Elements of Islamic Ornamentation, Types of Ornamentations: Architectural Ornamentations

Plant Ornamentation Graphic Ornamentation Animal Ornamentations

5

Orders of Islamic Architecture: The Umayyad Order Religious Architecture \ Umayyad Mosque

Urban Architecture \ Damascus Home Applied Arts \ Miniatures , Mosaics

6 The Abbasid Order, Mutawakkel mosque

7 Exam

8 The Egyptian Fatimid Order

9 The Egyptian Mamlouk Order - Cairo & Tripoli/Lebanon

10 The Moroccan Order, Taj Mahal

11 The Turkish Order, Sultan Ahmed mosque – Istanbul & Tripoli/Lebanon

12 Exam

13 The Indo-Iranian Order

14 Elements of Islamic Architecture, Islamic Painting

15 revision

16 Final Exam


293

Evaluation:

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Subm. Date

Weighting of Asses.

1 Umayyad art(Report)

Ability to gather specific and relevant information

2 4

30%

60%

2 Fatimid Art (Report)

Organization of report 4 6


Total Assessment

4 Islamic ornament (Project)

Overall ability of student’s application

8 10

30%


Total Assessment

6

Turkish Art Acquired Knowledge 12 14

7



40%

Total

100%

100%


(yyy) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts


294

(zzz) Recommended books:

Islamic Art – An introduction/ David James(Hamlyn London- Newyork 1947)

History of Islamic Art & Architecture/Toufiq AbdulJawwad (Cairo 1988)

A., L'Islam et L'art Musulman / Papadopulo, Paris 1976

Islamic Art and Architecture 650- 1250 Richard Etteinghausen Oleg Grabar Marilyn Jenkis- Madina . Yale University press 2001

(aaaa) General References: 1974 Islamic Art, Nicola Sursock museum, Beirut

١٩٩5غازي مكداشي ، وحدة الفنون اإلسالمية ، شركة المطبوعات بيروت ١٩٩٩موسوعة التصوير اإلسالمي، ثروت عكاشة ، مكتبة لبنان، بيروتـ 2٠٠2أبو الحمد محمود فرغلي ، التصوير اإلسالمي، القاھرة

Course Instructor: Prof Adnan Khouja

Dean of Faculty Prof. Ibtihal Bastawissy

Date: 06 /02/2017


295

ARCH563. Regionalism in Architecture

Course Code / Title: ARCH563. Regionalism in Architecture Credits: 2







Course Objectives

This course is designed to provide an overview of p o s s i b l e n e w i n t e r p r e t a t i o n s a b o u t regionalism in architecture. Students w i l l learn from their own local experiences about architecture and regionalism and issues concerning process and practices.

Course Outline

The course investigates various definitions of regionalism and theoretical approaches to the problem of designing architecture that reflects its time, place, culture and environment. Thus, the shape of buildings and environments are studied in relation to climate, landscape, availability of resources and cultural backgrounds. I explores the concept of regionalism in architecture; local architectural models around the world; the power of invented regionalism, the persistence of regional revivals; and the impact of regional architecture in historic preservation.


1 Introduction. Styles of Architecture

2 last-trends-in-architecture

3 Vernacular Architecture (revision)


5 Architecture and culture of the place

6 Regionalism in Architecture ( concept and definition)

7 Research work presentation

8 Approaches to Regionalism in Architecture

9 Traditional Mediterranean Architecture


11 (local Lebanese Architecture)

12 12 week Exam

13 Pre-final research work presentation


296


14 Introduction to Conservation of Historic Buildings

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Group Assignments

Assignments /assessment (Research on a selected topic)

3rd 6th 20% 60%

2 Group Assignments

Total Assessment ----- 8th 10%

3

Group Assignments

Assignments /assessment (Research on a selected topic)

9th 12th 20%

4

Individual Assignments

Assignments /assessment (Research presentation)

----- 14th 10%

5 Final Exam Total Assessment ----- -------- --------- 40% 40%

Total 100% 100%

List of References

(bbbb) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts.

(cccc) Essential books (textbooks): Vincent B. Canizaro, 2007, Architectural Regionalism, Princeton Architecture Press, New York. Lefaivre, Liane (2003) Critical Regionalism : Architecture and Identity in a Globalized World / Liane Lefaivre; Alexander Tzonis. — Munich : Prestel Gallion, Arthur B.& Eisner, Simon.(1963). The Urban Pattern : City Planning and Design 2nd ed. — New Jersey : D. Van Nostrand Company, IN




297

(dddd) Recommended books:

Jenks, Mike. Edt. Burton, Elizabeth and Williams, Kate (1996) The Compact City : A Sustainable Urban Form? /— London : E. & F.N. Spon Ltd Nakhla, Samir (1971) An Approach to Regional Architecture : A Case Study of the Middle East With Special Reference to Egypt / Samir Nakhla. — Nurnberg : Druckshnelldienst Proceedings of the Regional Seminar in the series Exploring Architecture in Islamic Cultures (1983 : Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia) Architecture and Identity / Proceedings of the Regional Seminar in the series Exploring Architecture in Islamic Cultures Held in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia. — Singapore : Concept Media Pte Ltd, 1983 Williams, Katie. Edt. Burton,Elizabeth and Jenks, Mike. (2000) Achieving Sustainable Urban Form .London : E. & F.N. Spon Ltd

(eeee) General References:

Books available in the BAU library. Other texts and links of papers to be proposed by the Instructor during the lessons



Date: 01 / 09 / 2017







298

ARCH565 – URBAN MORPHOLOGY

Course Code / Title: ARCH565 Urban Morphology

Instructor: Associate Prof. Dr/ Baher I. Farahat

Hours: 2 Lecture: 2 Tutorial: - Credit: 2

Prerequisites: -

Academic Year / Level: Elective Year: 2017-2018 Term: Spring


Location: Lecture Hall 209 Time: Tuesday 12:00 to 02:00 COURSE OBJECTIVES 1-The course objectives are as follows:

Nature of Urban Morphology. Systematic study of Morphology: elements, components and relationships.

Morphology in relation to urban contexts. Variables and parameters. Morphology and local identity.

Approaches to deal with particular morphologies within urban contexts.

2- Learning Activities

The course is delivered through Lectures, seminars, direct reading, case study (will be in an urban district of Beirut based on the principles and basis tutored) and experimental learning, research-based teaching methods. 7- Course Outline:

Week No. 1

General overview about the importance of the course and its constituents, and the relation between these constituents and how to deal with the course and the grade distribution and evaluation.

Determine the urban problems and the absence of harmony between human and environment.

General summary.

Week No. 2

Urban Design Keywords and Concepts

Week No. 3

The importance and the comprehensive role of urban design.

Urban design and the Urban Morphology.

Definition of Urban Morphology. Specifying the groups and Places of study

Week No. 4

Lessons from History and theories for the elements of Urban Morphology.


299

Week No. 5

The elements of Urban Morphology(Historical and Theoretical backgrounds)

Week No. 6

The city and the vocabulary of Urban Morphology.

Week No. 7

Negotiating the study zones selection with the groups.

Week No. 8

Basis, principles and methods of district anatomy.

Anatomy of a district.

Forms, activities, features and details.

Week No. 9

Theories of Urban Morphology

Concept of Land Use (the model of Urban Land Use)

Week No. 10

Midterm Two

Week No. 11

The methods of design in the Urban Morphology.

Relation between mass, space and time movement.

Week No. 12

Relation of simultaneous movement systems with urban design.

Urban Morphology.

Week No. 13

Case Studies

A conversant study on International and National Square/ Plazas.

Week No. 14

Practice, implementation and use of technology in urban design.

Urban Morphology studies.

Final Exam

8- Evaluation:

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.


1

4 Assignment

- Site analysis - Design Principles - Plaza Analysis - Urban Quality

3

11

Week 4-6-10-11

20%

2

Research and Analysis of an Urban District similar to the study (Group Work)

8

12

Week 12

15%


300


(ffff) Course notes:

Lectures’ handouts.

Official documents, Syndicate and local authorities’ documents.

(gggg) Essential books (textbooks):

Elsner, Simon. The Urban Pattern, Sixth Edition (1938)

Lang, Joon . Urban Design, A Typology of Procedures and Products: Elsevier.

Gosling, David & Mitland Barry (2005). Concept of Urban Design: Martin,s Press, Ney York.

Hayward, R. & McGlynn, S. (1993). Making Better Places Urban Design Now. London, UK.

Lynch, K. (1960). The Image of the City. The M.I.T. Press, Cambridge Mass., USA.

Lynch, K. (1972). What Time Is This Place?. The M.I.T. Press, Cambridge Mass., USA.

Lynch, K. (1981). A Theory of Good City Form. The M.I.T. Pres: Cambridge, Mass., USA.

(hhhh) Recommended books:

Kostof, S.(1992). The City Assembled, the Elements of Urban Form through History. London, UK.

Alexander, Ch. (1977). A Pattern Language, Towns- Buildings- Construction. Oxford University Press, New York, USA.

Bacon, E. (1974). Design of Cities. Thames and Hudson. London, UK

Bor, W. (1972). The Making of Cities. Leonard Hill Books, London, UK.

Deasy, C.M. (1985). Designing Places For People. Whitney Library of Design New York, USA

Giedion, S. (1980). Space, Time and Architecture. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass., USA.

Gosling, D. & Mailtland, B. (1984). Concepts of Urban Design. Academy editions, Saint Martin’s press. London, New York.

(iiii) General References:

Lynch, K. (1990). City Sense and City Design, A Theory of Urban Form. Catherines, David, Lama, and Peter Lynch. London, UK

Morris, AEJ. (1974). History of Urban Form, Prehistory to the Renaissance. George Godwin Limited.

Saliba, R. (1998). Domestic Architecture Between Tradition and Modernity, Beirut 1920-1940. The Order of Engineering and Architecture, Beirut, Lebanon.

3

Attendance

1

14

5%

4

Midterm Exam

Knowledge Base, Intellectual Skills and Transferable Skills

Week 7

5%

Week 12 15%

5

Final Exam

Knowledge Base, Intellectual Skills to fully understand the course

40% Some lectures and exercises from the Tutor

Total 100%


301

Spreiregen, P. D. (1965). Urban Design: The Architecture of Towns and Cities. McCraw-Hill Book Co., New York, USA.

Whyte, W. H. (1980). The Social Life of Small Urban Spaces. The Conservation Foundation, Washington DC, USA.

Course Instructor: Assoc. Prof. Dr. Baher Farahat

Dean of Faculty: Prof. Dr. Ibtehal El Bastawissi

Date: 01/03/2018


302

Interior Design Program Course Summary

Beirut Arab University

FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE –DESIGN & BUILT ENVIRONMENT – INTERIOR DESIGN PROGRAM

FALL SEMESTER 2017/2018, STAGE FOUR

ARTD201. DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS

Course Code / Title: ARTD 201 . DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS Credits: 4

Instructors: Dr. Samer El Sayary Mrs. Farah El Zein

Miss Roua Ghosh

Course Hours: 8 Hours/Week Course Duration: 15 Weeks Academic Semester: 1ST Semester: Fall 2017/2018


Location: First Year Studio – Floor B2


10:00 to 13:50


This design fundamentals course introduce ideas, methodologies, principles and skills that compromise a common knowledge base important to all disciplines that student should choose from later in the next semester. These fundamentals foster a multidisciplinary design experience among students and prepare them to move to the next level. Course work explores basic design elements and processes of visual communication, through exercises that improve visual and manual drawing skills. These exercises encompass format, line, pattern, proportion, scale, and texture, as well as interpretation of space (edge, perspective, dimension), and conceptualization.

This course is intended to develop the following set of skills:

1. Acquired Knowledge: Demonstrate theoretical knowledge about: 1. The principles of art. 2. The elements of composition. 3. The pioneers of design and their schools of though. 4. The furniture types and dimensions and furnishing theories 5. The printed and non-printed graphical materials.

2. Intellectual Skills: The course develops the essential skills of thinking in the field of design fundamentals, like: 1. The critical thinking , 2. Deductive reasoning, 3. Develop the analytical skills essential for the student to start evaluating art principles hence

working with and/or developing it. 3. Practice Skills:

1. Projection skills and Architectural drafting.


303

2. How to draw and understand orthographic projections. 3. Express intellectual meanings through artwork. 4. Learning how to express art through poster design and portfolio making 5. Mastering Physical Paper models as a of design development for both exploration and

representation of an environment 4. Collaboration techniques:

Collaboration and teamwork is highly encouraged to develop their communication skills and effective presentation to mimic real life situations through peer to peer discussions and criticism.

Learning Activities The learning outcomes will include but not limited to theoretical lectures that will provide them with foundation to understand and apply the practice of Interior design. In addition, the Lab. Activities will be integrated with the course activities to provide the students with the professional practice they need to work and produce Proper design fundamentals documents. The lecturing Style include: 1.Direct lecturing. 2.Interaction through workshops and Site visits. 3.Using Digital learning media as youtube channel.

4.Practice through the Studio Hours.Course Calendar / Schedule

STAGE



1 Basics of Geometric Drafting methods 1 5/09/2017


3 Art Principles 1 26/9/2017





8 Orthographic Projections 31/10/2017

9 Architectural drawing– Packaging Design – Pattern Making 7/11/2017

10 Model making 14/11/2017

11 Theories and Criteria of Residential design, Personal branding, Fabric textiles. 21/11/2017

12 Experimenting with light (Paper Art) 28/11/2017

13 Pioneers of Design ( Each major is specific ) 5/12/2017

14 Sketching for design and design thinking 19/12/2017

15 Final Exam As Scheduled


Course Policies

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, site visits, seminars, directed reading, videos, computer assisted learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including


304

coursework assignments, projects, workshops. Exposure to the Execution Design environment and related projects are an important aspect of the teaching and learning methods. General Policies:




The lecture starts Wednesday from 08:00 to 08:50 and the studio work starts from 09:00 to 11:50 on Wednesday and Friday from 08:00 to 10:50.

Course Policies:






Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Basics of Geometric Drafting methods 1


professional skills

1 3 22/09/2017 05.0%

60%

2 Art Principles intellectual


3 5 06/10/2017 05.0%



5 7 20/10/2017 05.0%



7 7 20/10/2017 10.0%

4 Orthographic Projections


professional skills

7 9 03/11/2017 07.5%

5 Model making


qualities

9 11 17/12/2017 07.5%

6

Theories and Criteria of Residential design, Personal branding, Fabric textiles.


professional skills

11 13 08/12/2017 07.5%

7 Pioneers of Design ( Each major is specific )


professional skills

13 14 15/12/2017 12.5%

8 Final Exam

knowledge base, professional skills

15 15 As Scheduled 40.0% 40%


305

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

and transferable skills

Total 100%


(a) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts.

(b) Essential Books: 1. Ching, F.D.K, (2007). Architecture: Form, Space, and Order., John Wiley & Sons.

2. Ching, F.D.K, (2009). Architectural Graphics., John Wiley & Sons.

3. To be determined for graphic and design majors

(c) Recommended Books:

Ching, F.D.K, (1995). A Visual Dictionary of Architecture., John Wiley and Sons INC.


306

BEIRUT ARAB UNIVERSITY FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE DESIGN PROGRAMS 1ST SEMESTER 2016/2017, STAGE 1 OR MAJOR ELECTIVE

ARTD205. History of Arts 1

Course Code / Title: ARTD205. History of Arts 1 Credits: 3

Instructor: Therese Yared


Academic Semester: 1st Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory Course (3 hr. Lecture)

Location: Room Number – Floor Number

Time: --

Course Objectives

To gain a basic understanding of Western European art history linked to historical events, intellectual history, and scientific and cultural trends

Become familiar with key works of art, their artists, styles, materials and working methods.

Acquire a working knowledge of the specialized vocabulary used in art history

Enhance their visual literacy and critical thinking skills

Developing skills in identifying, describing, and analyzing works of art.

Recognize and understand major artistic works, artists, methods, and theories, and be able to assess the

qualities of works of art and architecture.

Visually analyze and communicate relationships between formal elements (style and medium) in works of

art within various religious, political, and social contexts in from the Gothic to Romanticism.

Apply critical thinking to the thematic and/or ideological traditions of western and non-western works of

art and architecture.

Understand the importance of visual culture in everyday life – within a historical context and in our

modern culture.

Compare and contrast works of art in order to understand and express the means through which they are

articulating meaning.

Clearly express ideas related to the course content through writing and researched presentations

Work cooperatively to identify and communicate the associations between works of art across cultures

and chronologically.

Learning Activities

Learning to identify common characteristics among diverse artworks based on periods/styles and themes.

Developing strong writing skills when describing, analyzing, and comparing works of art.

Cultivate an appreciation for all styles of art.

Relate works of art to their proper cultural and historical origins


307

Course Outline



1 Reading syllabus and introduction

2 Prehistoric age: Paleolithic, Mesolithic and Neolithic

3 Ancient Egypt: Architecture, Sculpture, Paintings and writing

4 Mesopotamia and Sumerian art: Architecture, Sculpture, Paintings and writing

5 Greek Art: Architecture, Sculpture, Paintings and writing

6 1st Exam

7 Roman Art: Architecture, Sculpture, Paintings and writing

8 Christianity and Jewish Art

9 Byzantine and Iconoclasm

10 2nd Exam

11 Byzantine Architecture, Gothic and Romanesque art

12 Islamic art: Writing, architecture and arabesque

13 Early and high Renaissance

14 Baroque and Rococo Neoclassicism and course overview


308

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1



Assignments/assessment (1st week: 7th week)

3 6 10

30%

2 7th Week



3



Assignments/assessment (8thst week: 12th week)

8 11 10

30% 4 12th Week



5




13 16 10

6 Final exam 40%

Total 100% 100%

List of References


“A World History of Art”- Laurence King

“The history of art”- Phaidon

“What makes a master piece? - Christopher dell Recommended Books:

“A World History of Art”, Laurence King

“The history of art”, Phaidon

Course Instructor: Ms Therese Yared

Design Programs Coordinator: Dr. Hisham El-Arnaouty

Date: 20 / 6 / 2017

Dean of the Faculty: Prof. Dr. Ibtihal El-Bastawissi


309

ARTD207. COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING AND DESIGN I

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: ARTD207. Computer Aided Drafting and Design I Code: ARTD207 Hours 4 Lecture: 2 Tutorial: 2 Credit: 3 Crs Prerequisites: --- Academic Year / Level: 1st /Major Elective Term: spring Specialization: Art and Design


The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge for Basic computer aided drafting skills using the latest release of CAD software. This includes: file management, Cartesian coordinate system, drawing set-ups, drawing aids, layer usages, drawing 2D geometric shapes, editing objects, array, text applications, dimensions and dimension variables, paper space and view ports, templates, external references and printing/plotting. 3D AutoCAD features and commands including: wire frame construction, surface modeling, solid modeling, extrusion, Boolean operations, 3D editing, and 3D views. The course aims to provide the students with state of the art knowledge regarding Compute Aided Drafting (CAD) software. Special focus is given to 2D and 3D drafting using the latest version of AutoCAD. Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

Understand the use of different tools used in drafting.

Learn the basic functions of Computer Aided Drafting software.

Use the basic manual tools traditionally used in production drawings.

Maintain a high standard of quality for drawings produced.

Appreciate the concept of scale and proportion.

Understand the representation of three-dimensional objects presented on a two-dimensional plane.

Produce drawings for architectural projects.

Produce working drawings for architectural projects.



310

(ss) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

(ss 1) - Understand the nature and operations of CAD Drawing. (tt) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

(tt 1) - Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the CAD

Drawing;

(tt 2) - Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to CAD Drawing;

(tt 3) - Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to

CAD Drawing;

(tt 4) - Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the CAD Drawing sector and debate


(uu) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to: (uu 1) - Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to

CAD Drawing.

(vv) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to: (vv 1) - Solve problems relevant to CAD Drawing using ideas and techniques some of which are at the

forefront of the discipline;

(vv 2) - Develop the ability to self appraise and reflect on practice relevant to CAD Drawing.

25- COURSE OUTLINE:

Week No. 1 Design Computation and CAD introduction

Week No. 2 X-Y Co-ordinate system, inputting points, AutoCAD interface. Drawing and Modifying Commands.

Week No. 3 Drawing and Modifying Commands 2. Panning and Zooming around a drawing.

Week No. 4 Layers/ Dimensioning / Text/ Scale/ Printing.

Week No. 5 Changing the Properties of Objects. (LType, Lweight,Lsc)

Week No. 6 Planning a drawing (Text, Dimension , polyline)


Week No. 8 (Q&A) , Introduction to Blocks- Creating and Inserting.

Week No. 9 Introduction to 3D, X-Y-Z Co-ordinate system. Working and Viewing 3D objects. Creating Solids ( Primitive Solids) & Extrude

Week No. 10 Creating Solids (Lofting and Revolving), Boolean Operations

Week No. 11 Creating Solids ( Extruding, Lofting and Revolving)

Week No. 12 Introduction to material, light and rendering

Week No. 13 Complementary 3D Assignments




311



The course is delivered through lectures with hands on experience via practical exercises in the computer lab.


ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO. SUBM. WEEK NO. WEIGHTING OF ASSES.

1 2D

assignments intellectual qualities and

professional skills 3 7 20%

35%

2

7th Week Exam (open book

examinations to assess)


8 8 15%

35 % 3 2D & 3D

assignment intellectual qualities and


4 Attendance 1 14 10%

5 Final Exam knowledge base,

professional skills and transferable skills

15 15 30%

Total Total 100%


(jjjj) Course notes:

a. AutoCAD Help.

(kkkk) Essential books (textbooks): i. Alan J., Lang K., Autocad 2011 Tutor For Engineering Graphics, Autodesk Pess, NY,2011.

(llll) Recommended books:

Finkelstein E., AutoCAD 2010 & AutoCAD LT 2010 : Bible, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009. (mmmm) General References:

Finkelstein E., AutoCAD 2011 & AutoCAD LT 2011 : Bible, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2011.


312

ARTD 209 - FREE HAND DRAWING

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: Free Hand Drawing Code: ARTD 209 Hours Lecture:1 Tutorial: 4 Credit: 3 Prerequisites: no prerequisites Academic Year / Level: First / Level 1 Year: 2017-2018 Term: Fall Specialization: Design & Art Program - Interior Design

1-COURSE DESCRIPTION AND OVERALL AIMS:

The foundation for all studio courses. The fundamentals of freehand drawing techniques are discussed and worked with in depth. The study of natural forms and three- dimensional still-life objects will be developed based on the study of line, perspective, light and shade, form and proportion.

In this course, students develop effective drawing techniques as a specialized form of visual communication. Quality and expressiveness of line are developed. Life drawing, still life drawing and sketching techniques are utilized, to assist students in creating images of their ideas about two-dimensional shapes and three-dimensional forms and spaces, objects from nature, human figure & hands sketches and perspective drawings of architectural & interior environments.

Upon successful completion of this course, the student will have reliably demonstrated the ability to:

Appraise intellectual and visual unity through participation in critiques.

Articulate the vocabulary of terms used in art.

Combine effective composition with the development of a personal style.

Observe proportional relationships between objects.

Apply proportional relationships to drawings by utilizing ratios.

Utilize a variety of drawing media to communicate two- and three- dimensions.

Execute the use of line as symbol, as contour, as form, as pattern (texture), as direction and as emphasis.

Create the use of light, shadow, tone and texture on a two-dimensional plane in the production of drawings, which accurately represent still life, figurative and architectural subjects.

Apply and demonstrate a basic understanding of structure, proportion.

Apply the terminology, theories and skills of freehand perspective (one- and two-point) to produce the illustration of three dimensions on a two-dimensional surface.

Produce sketches of interiors which also accurately and expressively delineate the human form to scale, in the architectural context.

Explore the use of graphite, charcoal, pen & ink, colored pencils, and pastels for achieving tonal values, variable lines, and shapes.



313

Apply drawing techniques by observing still life, landscapes, and people, then rendering from the visual information acquired.

Equally concentrate on positive and negative spaces.

Utilize creativity and critical thinking in solving problems.

Identify and analyze the three basic components of a work of art:

Subject, form, and content.

Identify and analyze the Spatial Properties of the Elements within a composition: Line, shape, value, texture, and color.

Research and apply specialized knowledge to complete assignments.

3- COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The primary objectives of the course are to explore various approaches to solving drawing problems. Emphasis will be placed on developing the student's ability to see and understand how to create life-like representation of real forms and how to select appropriate approaches and technique to create effective drawings.

4- COURSE CONTENT:

Studies of line, tone, light and shade through geometric forms.

Exploration of texture and pattern through line work.

Still- life drawing of plants.

Gesture and sustained drawing of the hands & figure.

One- and two- point freehand perspective drawing.

Still- life drawing of interior furnishings & accessories.

5- STUDENT ASSESSMENT METHODS:

List identified College Learning Outcomes(s)

Specific assessment measure(s)

Oral Communication

Appraise intellectual and visual unity.

Define and articulate the vocabulary of terms used in art.

Assessed through the participation of students in

formal and informal critiques.

Also, through observation and discussion during studio time.

Critical Thinking

Appraise intellectual and visual unity. Combine effective composition with the development of a personal style.

Assessed through the participation of students in formal and informal critiques.

Also, measured through the review of

projects. The instructor will provide the

students with written and or verbal feedback.


314

Mathematics

Observe proportional relationships

between objects.

Apply proportional relationships to drawings

by utilizing ratios.

Assessed through measurement and accuracy of

drawings.

Also, measured through the ability of students to translate drawings from sketch to final image.

Other

Demonstrate basic freehand drawing techniques such as contour, modeling, and simple perspective.

Assessed through review of final

submitted drawings.

6- COURSE SCHEDULE:

1st

Week: Course Overview/Information

Introduction to the course and studio. Assignment: Preparing the materials.

2nd Week: Contour Line Drawing & shading Project

Pencil drawing of sphere showing outline & detailed description of surface and shadows & trying many type & style of hatching.

Pencil drawing of Cylinder showing detailed description of surface and shadows.

Pencil drawing of a composition between sphere & Cylinder showing detailed description of surface and shadows. (proportion & composition)

3rd Week: Perspectives & Value Drawing Project

One point perspective rules.

Two points perspective rules.

Pencil drawing of a box (cube), cylinder & cone showing different position of surface in two point perspective.

4rd Week: Composition & Space Drawing Project - Exploring Color – Light

Pencil drawing of a composition between sphere, Cylinder & box showing detailed description of outline surface and shadows with color tones of forms then texture. (proportion, composition, eye-hand coordination)

Pencil drawing of a tree limbs and foliage showing detailed description of surface, texture and shadows. (eye-hand coordination)

5th Week: Value Drawing Project

Pencil drawing of a composition between complex shapes (Glass in Composition with pottery , wood, brick & glossy objects) showing detailed description of outline surface and shadows with color tones of forms then texture. (proportion, composition, eye-hand coordination)

6th Week: Creative Drawing Project

Drawing the human hands, lips, ears, mouth, eyes & head with slides (portrait).

7th Week: Exam – (Composition, Values in drawings, methods of shading) October 24/2016

Pencil drawing of a composition between complex shapes (4 or 5 different shapes (objects) in size, form, texture & position) showing detailed description of outline surface and shadows with color tones of forms then texture. (proportion, composition, eye-hand coordination).


315

8th Week: Positive and Negative Space Drawing

Charcoal drawing of a composition between complex shapes (4 or 5 different vegetables) in size, form, texture & position) with Draped cloth showing detailed description of outline surface and shadows with color tones of forms. (proportion, composition, eye-hand coordination)

9th Week: Perception & Creative Process (Exploring Chiaroscuro)

Ink drawing of a cropped zone from previous tree limbs or foliage showing detailed description of surface, texture and shadows in positive & negative, then transforming to an abstract form used as a ceramic tile design.

10th Week: Perception & Creative Process (Exploring Dry Coloring)

Pastel drawing of a composition between complex shapes (4 or 5 different fruits & vegetables & glass with Draped cloth) showing detailed description of outline surface and shadows with color tones of forms. (proportion, composition, eye-hand coordination)

11th Week: Perception & Creative Process (Exploring Wet Coloring)

Water color painting of some flowers showing detailed description of outline surface and shadows with color tones of forms. (proportion, composition, eye-hand coordination)

12th Week: Exam – (Composition, Values in drawings, shading & Coloring)

Free style rendering. (pencil, ink, charcoal, pastel, water color)

13th Week: Three Point Perspective – ( Interior & exterior theme)


14th Week: Imaginative Perspectives


Ready portfolios. Display of best items for the gallery.

7- RECOMMENDED BOOKS:

Exploring the Basics of Drawing, 2ndEdition, Victoria Vebell, Pratt Institute

©2015, ISBN-13. 8- RECOMMENDED SITES:

Artist Daily website: [email protected]

Course Instructor: Dr. Nael AlSarrag

Program coordinator: Dr. Hisham El-Arnaouty



316

INTD 301. INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO II

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO II Code: INTD 301 Hours: 8H/Week Lecture: M-W (8 STU) Tutorial: Credit: 4 Prerequisites: INTD202 Academic Year / Level: Second Year Year: 2017/2018 Term: Fall Specialization: Interior Design

- COURSE DESCRIPTION AND OVERALL AIMS:

Based on the foundation of Interior Design I, the aim of this course is to develop students’ knowledge of the fundamentals of interior design practice. The concept of place making is much considered in the given projects, emphasizing on the design methods and constraints. Students are introduced to commercial design theories and workspace ergonomics, applying them to specific design conditions to experience and develop an understanding of the designer's role in creating public spaces. Considerations are given to users of various age, culture, income, and physical abilities.

(ww) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

(ww 1) - Understand the way to design commercial places. (ww 2) - Demonstrate familiarity with theories and concepts used in designing public areas.

(ww 3) - Understand the domestic and international nature and dimensions of needed designs to complete the given projects.

(ww 4) - Discuss the structure and organization of the public and private sectors of the interior design given project.

(ww 5) - Understand the factors which influence the development of organizations operating in designing public spaces in interior design field and the most appropriate ways to manage this development.

(ww 6) - Identify the steps required to carry out a piece of research on a specific related information to design the public space

(ww 7) - Demonstrate an understanding of the contribution and impacts of designing commercial places in social, economic, environmental, political and cultural terms.

(xx) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

(xx 1) - Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles, inspiration and concepts relevant to design a commercial place.

(xx 2) - Critically assess and evaluate the function of each area

(xx 3) - Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to accomplish the specific design

(xx 4) - Exercise appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information using various methods relevant to implement the idea

(xx 5) - Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to execute the project

(xx 6) - Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the interior design sector and debate the potential benefits.

(yy) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:

- INTENDED LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE COURSE (ILO):


317

(yy 1) - Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to design public area

(yy 2) - Plan, design, record, execute and communicate a piece of independent research using different media and techniques.

(yy 3) - Recognize moral, ethical and safety issues which are pertinent to design marketable spaces.

(yy 4) - Respond to change within the external and internal premeditated environments.

(zz) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:

(zz 1) - Develop appropriate effective written and oral communication skills relevant to design viable vendible spaces.

(zz 2) - Demonstrate the ability to work effectively as part of a group, involving leadership, group dynamics and interpersonal skills such as listening, negotiation and persuasion relevant to this level of designing.

(zz 3) - Use organization skills (including task and time management) relevant to submit a clear and detailed project.

(zz 4) - Solve problems related to each assignment of this course using ideas and techniques some of which are at the forefront of the discipline;

(zz 5) - Develop the ability to self-appraise and reflect on practice relevant to specific planned and studied commercial proposals

COMMERCIAL SPACES AND WORK SPACE ERGONOMICS TOPICS TO BE COVERED

Programing commercial spaces such as:

- Office Space: As a living office of renowned brand.

- Outdoor entertaining area: As living office entertainment area. (Could be semi outdoor).

- Showroom: As Company products showroom or exhibition area (The Façade only).

Executing architectural drawings.

Incorporating codes & standards.

Development of Design process, space planning, circulation & rendering techniques.

Selecting finishes and furniture.

Ground Floor First Floor Content: Content:


318

Zone 1: open offices space area zone 1: CEO office + secretary + salon + 2 senior managers Entrance + security + reception + waiting area + CEO Secretary + big conference room + bathroom for CEO + Small gallery + 5 different departments + bathroom for seniors + small kitchen + lounge. Each dep. (1 manager + min 2 or max 4 employee Student can add more zones if there is need & more room + 2 meeting tables + filling room + server room space. + men & women bathroom + kitchen + Copier room + creativity studios. Student can add more zones if there is a need & more room space. DESCRIPTION

This studio course incorporates the study and design of commercial spaces, with a focus on:

(Office spaces, entertainment and hospitality spaces). The components of this course include advanced

application of interior design concepts, code requirements, and client presentations.

INTRODUCTION

The office spaces differ to each other according to its purpose, type, identity, and area, to design the office

space we should follow the design criteria to provide the space by the necessary and important needs

therefore the designer must study all stages and affecting aspects for planning and designing the office

space, accommodate and inventory needs of each of these stages and its relation by other Stages, possible

connection, determine the priority, apply, choose the most effective solutions and act on accuracy of

creating a successful balance between each of planning system that leads to increase the efficiency of the

corporate office space, and to create a successful balance in design operation.

As well, the related treatments of construction services to see their effects on the design idea such as light &

its properties, types and the possibility of practical use and its various characteristics, the study of ventilation,

cooling, heating , sound and the possibility of energy distribution, good exploit, information technology use

and advanced work systems, and to study some influencing environmental factors on design operation and

the importance of psychological aspects of place occupants.

The competitive world of interior design demands the development of a visual portfolio that reflects

professional knowledge of the discipline and creative solutions to interior design problems. Students must

be able to demonstrate the ability to solve the design problem following accepted practices of the

profession, focusing on design projects that will provide students with an opportunity to present multi-

dimensional design solutions.

COURSE OBJECTIVES

Use programming data in the designing of functional commercial spaces

Research and collect data, such as appropriate codes and standards, applying this information as the

basis for design decisions in the programming phases


319

Execute the various types of mechanical drawings involved in a commercial interior project: (floor

plans, electrical and lighting layouts, interior elevations, cross-sections, mood boards,

axonometric/isometric, details and perspectives).

Demonstrate competency in space planning, furniture layout, and furniture selection through projects

with set spatial limitations, space requirements, and specific requirements.

Select materials, lighting, furniture, textiles, color, etc. to satisfy given project requirements, codes and

standards to produce a unified design solution for commercial interiors.

Demonstrate continued competency in presentation methods and skills both verbally and visually.

SUGGESTED BRANDS

A set of brands was chosen by the students to be the corporate office; goal is to encourage PBL (problem

based learning) and to start a discourse between them that would develop their critical thinking skills.

Such as (Autodesk co. – Chanel – Lacoste – Aishty – Massimo dutti – Zara – Adidas – Michael Cores – Mini

copper – Toshiba – Hugo Boss – Mercedes Benz – Rolls Roys – Infinity – Apple – Lazorde – Burberry – Puma –

Converse – Louis Vuitton – Microsoft – H & M – Cadbury - Patchi – Ferrari - Disney – Nike – Ikea – Calvin

Clein.. ) etc

REQUIRED TASKS TO BE DONE BY STUDENTS

Phase One (Research phase – Studying & development of zone 1)

1- Conduct a research on all theoretical requirements of the Corporate Identity of the selected Brand.

2- Writing a design brief including but not limited to the programmatic study of zone 1 (office spaces).

3- Reviewing a wide range of case studies of interior office spaces

4- Studying the interior design ergonomics, data, codes, dimensions, and color code or specific style or

theme (if exists).

5- Listing functional relationships - Take into account the different groups of employee and their working

relationships.

6- Adjacency priorities - Identify and prioritize which employee groups need to be located adjacent to

each other.

7- Studying the planning process starting by the zoning of the interior space needs & the details, demands

of each zone.

8- Developing the interior space planning process with furniture, equipment's, primary & secondary

circulation standards.

9- Execute the various types of mechanical: (flooring plans, ceiling with electrical and lighting layouts,

interior elevations from cross-sections, axonometric/isometric, details and perspectives, fine finishing

details & mood boards).

10- Development of all schematic designs in both tow and tree dimensions.

11- Listing all materials of the space including the material specs.


320

12- Presenting each step of the previous tasks in a formal presentation (both printed and oral) that will be

evaluated.

Phase Two (Research phase – Studying & development of zone 2

1- Writing a design brief including but not limited to the programmatic study of zone 2 (entertainment

area as a semi / outdoor coffee shop).

2- Reviewing a wide range of case studies of interior office spaces in addition to the outdoor landscaping

& the appropriate coverage ceiling.

3- Studying the interior design ergonomics, data, codes, dimensions, and color code or specific style or

theme (if exists).

4- Studying the planning process starting by the zoning of the interior space needs & the details, demands

of each zone.

5- Developing the interior space planning process with furniture (in/outdoor), equipment's, primary &

secondary circulation standards.

6- Execute the various types of mechanical drawings: (flooring plans, ceiling with electrical and lighting

layouts, interior elevations from cross-sections, axonometric/isometric, details and perspectives, fine

finishing details & mood boards).

7- Development of all schematic designs in both tow and tree dimensio



evaluated.

Phase Three (Research phase – Studying & development of zone 3

1- Writing a design brief including but not limited to the programmatic study of zone 3 (showroom

area Facade).

2- Reviewing a wide range of case studies of Showroom & Gallery spaces in addition to the outer façade.

3- Studying the Showroom facade, brand color code or specific style or theme (if exists).

4- Developing the Showroom facade design process.

5- Development of all schematic designs in both tow and tree dimensions.



evaluated.

REQUIRED TEXT BOOK

Harmon, S. and Kennon, K. (2005). The Codes Guidebook for Interiors, 4th Edition, Hoboken, NJ, John Wiley

and Sons.


321

Rayfield, J. (1994). The Office Interior Design Guide. Hoboken, NJ, John Wiley and Sons.

Recommended Textbooks:

Karlen, M. (2007, 2nd edition). Space Planning Basics, Hoboken, NJ, John Wiley and Sons.

Kopak, D. (2006). Environmental Psychology for Design. New York, Fairchild Publications.

PROJECT SCHEDULE

WEEK SUBJECT

Week 1 Initial research about brand.

Initial research - zone 1 data.

Preliminary sketches zone 1.

Week 2 Zoning & relationship studies zone 1 – ground level.

Week 3 Research review & mood board – zone 1.

Developing ground level interior planning with furniture.

Week 4 Pre Final handover of researches.

Pre-final schematic drawing of ground level interior planning.

Quiz on First level planning (preliminary).

Week 5 Handover of researches.

Final schematic drawing of ground & first level interior planning.

Initial research - zone 2 data (entertaining area as coffee shop).



Developing entertaining area interior planning with furniture.

Week 7 Preparation for week 7 exam.

Exam on zone 1 ground & first floor Selected Section.

Week 8 Handover of sections & elevation or 3D perspectives of the office project - zone 1.

Week 9

Pre Final handover of zone 2 researches.

Pre-final schematic drawing of the entertaining area interior planning – zone 2.

Week 10 Handover of zone 2 researches.

Final schematic drawing of entertaining area interior planning - zone 2.

Initial research - zone 3 data (showroom).



Developing showroom interior planning with furniture.

Week 12 Handover of sections & elevation or 3D perspectives of the entertaining area project - zone 2.

Evaluation Week 12

Week 13 Pre Final handover of zone 3 researches.


322

Pre-final schematic drawing of the Showroom facade – zone 3.

Week 14 Handover of zone 3 researches & mood board.

Handover of elevation or 3D perspectives of the Showroom facade - zone 3.

Final schematic drawing of the Showroom facade - zone 3.



Dean of Faculty: Prof - Dr. Ibtihal El-Bastawissi


323

INTD 303. Interior Materials And Specifications

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: Interior Materials and Specifications Code: INTD303 Hours: 5 Lecture:1 Tutorial: 4 Credit: 3 Prerequisites: INTD204.Building Systems Academic Year / Level: Second / Level 2 Year: 2017-2018 Term: Fall Specialization: Interior Design 1- COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The teaching approach of this course encourages critical thinking and cooperative learning, as well as independence and self-teaching, since these are necessary skills for working in an interior design professional.

1- Understand material’s visual and physical characteristics, properties, and functions through exploring, studying and designing with interior architecture building and finishing materials.

2- Augment student knowledge about a designer's ability to affect people and the environment. Through the study of interior finish materials, students will learn how material characteristics interact with human perception, psychology and need for comfort; aesthetics, iconography, image, symbolism.

3- Apply knowledge about the performance, maintenance and cost effectiveness of interior design material selection through assessing client and users' needs and through responding to those needs when selecting, and specifying interior finish materials.

4- Increase design skills through applying knowledge of color principles, theories + systems when learning to make finish material selection and through applying and exploring theories of design + design composition when selecting and arranging interior finish material.

5- Improve critical thinking skills and judgment in problem identification and problem solving, and in effective information gathering, product research, and in analysis skills.

6- Deepen students’ ability to communicate effectively through presentation of color, materials & furnishings selections.

7- Promote awareness and understanding about the use of appropriate materials and products taking into account factors including code compliance, standards, with respect to the concept of sustainable resources and design practices.

8- Understand the role of finish materials in the creation of the acoustic environment.

9- Further understanding and knowledge of sources and the installation methods and maintenance requirements for materials & products.

10- Develop consciousness of alternate points of view and appreciation of cultural diversity, when selecting interior finish materials.

11- Boost awareness of the relationship between interior design and the environment, economy and activities in other regions around the world.

2- LEARNING ACTIVITIES:

Phase one (Researches – case study)

- Indoor air quality & Sustainability – IBC & ASHRAE codes - ADA requirements researches.

- Introduction to interior materials and specification research.


324

- Analysis case study of 2 sample projects : (in 6 groups)

- A- Lightly regulated: as a small residential space about 40 to 50 m2 used by able-bodies adults. (3

groups)

- B- Heavily regulated: as a small public space (coffee shop or restaurant) shared by a variety of people.

(3 groups)

- Development of the analysis study:

- Architectural drawings of the project 2D & 3D - zoning - labelling of all the materials – detailed study

about all different type of the interior finishing materials applied in the project even materials used in

the furniture – mood board of materials – guidelines that pertain to materials (fire resistance, slip

resistance, availability to be cleaned or sanitized) – guidelines that pertain to items: (ease of use,

visibility, air quality) – sustainability assessment of each material (in a table).

- Presenting each step of the previous tasks in a formal presentation (both printed and oral) that will be

evaluated.

Phase two (Research development – Detailed project analysis & studies)

- Detailed interior materials and specification research:

- (Paints, coatings & wall covering – textiles & soft goods – carpeting & area rugs – Wood – resilient materials & flooring – plastic & acrylic materials – gypsum boards – glass – metal – tiles (marble – granite) & brick – stone – terrazzo, composites & RF concrete – acoustics).

- Each materials research should be presented with a samples board and all specific drawings related to the research.

- Project B.O.Q & cost analysis.

- Project detailed construction drawings of materials installation.

- Replacement of all the inconvenient materials used in the projects by the best choice of materials that meet the codes, standards & to achieve a good indoor air quality.

- Presenting each step of the previous tasks in a formal presentation (both printed and oral) that will be evaluated.

This Course introduces students to:

The properties and specifications of appropriate materials, other than those of a structural nature, which are appropriate for the interior environments, including materials for floors, walls, ceilings, windows, and other interior surfaces.

The health effects and environmental impact of material choices in interior design.

3- COURSE OUTLINE:


325

The designer's role and responsibility in the process of material selection in order to provide aesthetic, standard compliance, and sustainable finish specifications for a variety of spaces.

Week No. 1

Lecture Studio

Introduction about interior materials & specification.

Exploring the materials showroom & lab.

Week No. 2

Lecture Studio

Lecture about LEED v4-CI, IAQ, IBC, ADA, ASHRAE & its relationship with interior design.

Preliminary study of a lightly & a heavily regulated small - interior finishing materials used in the space. Small apt & Coffee shop (phase 1 project - in groups) (A)

Initial Study then advanced research about all types of interior materials & specifications. (B)

Week No. 3

Lecture Studio

Making material selection.

Developing study of a lightly & a heavily regulated small - interior finishing materials used in the space. (phase 1 project - in groups) (A)

Zoning & labelling of each material used. (A)

Plan & Elevations studies to identify materials areas, quantities & cost. (A)

Research & mood board of each project based on interior finishing & furniture materials. (A)

Research on LEED v4 – CI , Indoor air quality & materials environmental impact. (C)

Week No. 4

Lecture Studio

Interior finishing & furniture materials specs.

Preparation to wood.

Pre-final of phase 1 Projects & researches (A),(B),(C). + (Seminar on A&C)

Week No. 5

Lecture Studio

Wood as interior finishing & furnishing material.

Preparation to painting.

Handover of phase 1 – Projects & researches (B),(C).

Seminar on (B) –( C).

Week No. 6

Lecture Studio

Painting coatings & wall covering as interior finishing material.

Preparation to tiles (marble – granite) & brick stones.

Handover of group's projects full researches, drawings & presentations & catalogues. (phase 1 project) (A)

Seminar on (B).

Week No. 7

Projects seminar (Collaborative learning) - phase 1 project. (A) - (oral exam)

Week No. 8

Lecture Studio

(Marble – Granite) & brick stones as interior finishing material.

Preparation to gypsum boards ceiling &walls.

Project phase 2 (Replacement of all the inconvenient materials used in phase 1 by the best selected materials that has no environment impacts & meet the codes, standards & achieve a good indoor air quality. (A)

Week No. 9

Lecture Studio

Gypsum boards as interior finishing material.

Preparation to terrazzo, composites & RF concrete.

Project phase 2 (B.O.Q & cost analysis). (B)

Week No. 10

Lecture Studio

Terrazzo, composites & RF concrete as interior finishing material.

Preparation to Glass.

Project detailed construction drawings of materials installation. (C)

Week No. 11

Lecture Studio

Glass as interior finishing material.

Preparation to textiles & soft goods.

Pre-final of project. (phase 2) – (B) &(C)


326

Week No. 12

Projects seminar (Collaborative learning) - phase 2 project. (A) (oral exam)

Week No. 13

Lecture Studio

Textiles & soft goods as interior finishing & furnishing material.

Preparation to Preparation to resilient materials & flooring.

Samples board and all specific drawings related to project (phase 2).

Week No. 14

Lecture Studio

Resilient materials & flooring as interior finishing material.

Final Collaborative learning seminar for all groups. (6 groups)

Final Oral Exam


Classes will consist of:

Research and readings about given project.

Presentation of research and projects.

Application of all designs (in studio setting).

One to one feedback.

Group discussion & feedback.

Digital & physical presentations.



(nnnn) Essential books (textbooks):

Lisa Godsey, (2012, 2nd edition). Interior Design Materials and Specifications, New York, Fairchild Books.

(oooo) Recommended Textbooks:

Asses No.


No. Subm. Week

No. Subm. Date

1 Project A, B, C

Phase 1 - Lectures & Collaborative different

students base learning methods. 1 6

25% 15% 20%

2 Project A, B, C Phase 2

- Lectures & Collaborative different students base learning methods.

7 11

3 Project A, B, C Phase 3

- Lectures & Collaborative different students base learning methods. 12 14

4 Oral Exam

- Final Project showing knowledge base and intellectual qualities.

- TBA 40%

Total 100% 100%


327

Corky Binggeli, ASID, (2013, 2nd edition). Materials for Interior Environments, NJ, John Wiley & Sons.

Axel Ritter, (2007, 2nd edition). Smart Materials in Architecture: Interior Architecture And Design, Birkhauser.

Course Instructor: Assistant Prof - Dr. Nael AlSarrag

Design Program Coordinator: Associate Prof - Dr. Hisham El-Arnaouty

Date: 20-06-2017 Dean of Faculty: Prof - Dr. Ibtehal El-Bastawissi


328


FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE –DESIGN & BUILT ENVIRONMENT FALL SEMESTER 2017/2018, STAGE TWO

INTD 307. INTERIOR PERSPECTIVES

Course Code / Title: INTD 307. INTERIOR PERSPECTIVES Credits: 2

Instructors: Dr. Samer El Sayary Course Hours: 3 Hours/Week Course Duration: 15 Weeks Academic Semester: 3rd Semester: Fall 2017/2018


Location: Computer Lab. Ground Floor


10:00 to 13:50


The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge necessary for both mechanical and manual perspectives in interior design field. Applications for interior design rendering and the creation, modification, and manipulation of images. Furniture modeling for the conceptual phases of design. 2D & 3D rendering and photo-editing using different modeling technique. Emphasis on 3D geometry, texture mapping, lighting, camera placement, shading, photo-realistic rendering, manual techniques, and Photo retouching. The course aims to provide the students with state of the art knowledge regarding Computer Graphics software’s. Special focus is given to 2D and 3D rendering using the lasted versions of Autodesk 3D Studio Max and Adobe Photoshop. Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

Understand the use of the different techniques used in creating interior perspectives both manual and digitally.

Learn the basic functions of rendering and Adobe Photoshop software’s to create a photo realistic images (Both 3d and Orthographic projection)

Use the basic manual tools traditionally used in one point perspectives.



Create drawings of basic objects in both a three-dimensional (3D) environment and 2D surfaces. Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

Understand the nature and operation of Interior perspectives. Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the Interior perspectives.

Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to Interior perspectives.

Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to Interior perspectives.


329

Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the Interior perspectives sector and debate the potential benefits.

Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:

Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to interior perspectives.

Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:

Solve problems relevant to Interior perspectives using ideas and techniques some of which are at the forefront of the discipline.

Develop the ability to self-appraise and reflect on practice relevant to Interior perspectives.


STAGE



1 Basics of interior free hand sketching 05/09/2017

2 Converting Free hand drawing into 3d 12/09/2017

3 Curved furniture sketching 19/03/2017

4 Natural Scenes Rendering 26/04/2017

5 Interior Design Materials design 03/10/2017

6 Textiles and Fabrics Modeling 10/10/2017

7 7th Exam 17/10/2017

8 Light & Shadow painting using photoshop 24/10/2017

9 Plan rendering using photoshop 31/10/2017

10 Morphing technique to design adaptive interior facades 07/11/2017

11 Sectioning & Contouring to create surfaces (walls & ceilings) 14/11/2017

12 12th Exam (Final Project Submission) 21/11/2017

13 Voronoi & Voxelization techniques 05/12/2017

14 Digital Fabrication using pepakura & 123d make 19/12/2017



Course Policies



330










Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Basics of interior free hand sketching


professional skills

1 3 05/09/2017 05.0%

60%

2 Curved furniture sketching


professional skills

3 5 19/03/2017 05.0%

2 Interior Design Materials design


professional skills

5 7 03/10/2017 05.0%



7 7 17/10/2017 10.0%

4 Light & Shadow painting using photoshop


professional skills

7 9 17/10/2017 07.5%

5 Plan rendering using photoshop


qualities

9 11 31/10/2017 07.5%

6

Sectioning & Contouring to create surfaces (walls & ceilings)


professional skills

11 13 14/11/2017 07.5%

7 Voronoi & Voxelization techniques


professional skills

13 14 05/12/2017 12.5%

8 Final Exam -Oral

Examination-


skills

15 15 As Scheduled 40.0% 40%

Total 100%


331


Course Notes:

3D Studio Max Help / Adobe Photoshop Help. Essential Books (Textbooks):

Murdock K. 3Ds Max 2012 Bible, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2011.

Daylay L. & Daylay B., Adobe Photoshop cs5 Bible, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2010. Recommended Books:

Gerhard M. & Harpper J., Mastering Autodesk 3ds Max Design 2011, Focal Press, 2010.


332


FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE –DESIGN & BUILT ENVIRONMENT FALL SEMESTER 2017/2018, STAGE FOUR

INTD 401. INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO IV

Course Code / Title: INTD 401. Interior Design Studio IV Credits: 4

Instructors: Dr. Samer El Sayary Course Hours: 8 Hours/Week Course Duration: 15 Weeks Academic Semester: 5th Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory Course (8 hrs. Studio)

Location: Third Year Studio – B2

Time: Tuesday 12:00 to 15:50

Thursday 08:00 to 11:50


The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge necessary for engineering carrier in building systems field. Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and competencies that will be required for Interior Design Studio position in the international interior design industry.

Understand analytical, developmental, legal, managerial and technical principles that relate to Interior Design Studio.

Have an appropriate balance between the vocational skills necessary for immediate employment in Interior Design Studio and the more fundamental principles necessary for further study.

Develop the academic abilities and personal characteristics required to solve problems relevant to Interior Design Studio and critically assess relevant aspects of the industry.


Demonstrate a systematic understanding of the economic, environmental, political, social and technological influences which relate to the Interior Design Studio field

Demonstrate an ability to initiate and sustain in-depth research relevant to Interior Design Studio.

Have an opportunity to put theory into practice via work-based learning. Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

Understand the nature and operations of Interior Design Studio;

Demonstrate familiarity with theories and concepts used in the Interior Design Studio.

Understand the domestic and international nature and dimensions of Interior Design Studio .

Discuss the structure and organization of the public and private sectors of the Interior Design Studio.

Understand the factors which influence the development of organizations operating in the Interior Design Studio field and the most appropriate ways to manage this development;

Identify the steps required to carry out a piece of research on a topic within Interior Design Studio.


333

Demonstrate an understanding of the contribution and impacts of the Interior Design Studio in social, economic, environmental, political and cultural terms;

Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the Interior Design Studio.

Critically assess and evaluate the literature within Interior Design Studio .

Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to Interior Design Studio.

Exercise appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information using various methods relevant to Interior Design Studio.

Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to Interior Design Studio .

Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the Interior Design Studio sector and debate the potential benefits.


Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to Interior Design Studio.

Plan, design, record, execute and communicate a piece of independent research using Interior Design Studio media and techniques.

Recognize moral, ethical and safety issues which are pertinent to Interior Design Studio.

Respond to change within the external and internal Design Studio environments. Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:

Develop appropriate effective written and oral communication skills relevant to Interior Design Studio.

Demonstrate the ability to work effectively as part of a group, involving leadership, group dynamics and interpersonal skills such as listening, negotiation and persuasion relevant to Interior Design Studio.

Use organization skills (including task and time management) relevant to Interior Design Studio both individually and in a group situation;

Solve problems relevant to Interior Design Studio using ideas and techniques some of which are at the forefront of the discipline;

Develop the ability to self appraise and reflect on practice relevant to Interior Design Studio.


STAGE



1 Research & Preliminary sketches 06/09/2017

2 Final Submission of Research & Developing the room design 13/09/2017

3 Final submission of room design model & Evaluation and criticism 20/09/2017

4 Follow up 27/09/2017

5 Design development evaluation & 3d virtual model 04/10/2017

6 Correcting All orthographic drawings 11/10/2017

7 Correcting All orthographic drawings & Semifinal submission 18/10/2017

8 Finalization of Design. Lecture on presentation skills. 25/10/2017

9 Final submission 01/11/2017


334

10 Reception preliminary conceptual design 08/11/2017

11 Developing the reception area 15/11/2017

12 Submission of the reception area 22/11/2017

13 conceptual design- Preliminary Conceptual design of the Ballroom 29/11/2017




Course Policies











Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Research & Preliminary sketches


professional skills

1 3 06/09/2017 05.0%

60%

2 Final submission of room design model & Evaluation and


professional skills

3 5 20/09/2017 05.0%


335

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

criticism

2 Design development evaluation & 3d virtual model


professional skills

5 7 04/10/2017 05.0%

3

Correcting All orthographic drawings & Semifinal submission


professional skills

7 7 18/10/2017 10.0%

4

Correcting All orthographic drawings & Semifinal submission


professional skills

7 9 18/10/2017 07.5%

5 Finalization of Design. Lecture on presentation skills.


qualities

9 11 01/11/2017 07.5%

6 Developing the reception area


professional skills

11 13 15/11/2017 07.5%



professional skills

13 14 29/11/2017 12.5%

8 Final Exam -Oral

Examination-


skills

15 15 As Scheduled 40.0% 40%

Total 100%


Course notes:

Essential Books:

1 Ching, F.D.K, (2007). Architecture: Form, Space, and Order., John Wiley & Sons.

Ching, F.D.K, (2009). Architectural Graphics., John Wiley & Sons.

Recommended Books:

Ching F., A Visual Dictionary of Architecture, John Wiley and Sons INC., 1995.


336


FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE –DESIGN & BUILT ENVIRONMENT FALL SEMESTER 2017/2018, STAGE FOUR

INTD221. BIM

Course Code / Title: INTD 221. Building Information Modeling Credits: 2




Time: Wednesday 11:50 to 13:50 - 14:00 to 15:50












INTENDED LEARNING OUTCOMES (aaa) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:






337



(bbb) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:







(ccc) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:




Respond to change within the external and internal Building Information Modeling environments. (ddd) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:






STAGE




31/8/2016


7/9/2016


21/9/2016



5/10/2016




26/10/2016



338





14 Revision 7/12/2016

15 Final Exam 14/12/2016


339



Course Policies











Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.



1 1 31/8/2016

60%



professional skills

2 2 7/9/2016



3 3 21/9/2016



professional skills

4 4 28/9/2016



professional skills

5 5 5/10/2016


340

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

6



qualities

6 6 12/10/2016



professional skills

7 7 19/10/2016



professional skills

8 8 26/10/2016



professional skills

9 9 2/11/2016



10 10 9/11/2016



professional skills

11 11 16/11/2016



professional skills

12 12 23/11/2016



professional skills

13 13 30/11/2016



professional skills

14 14 7/12/2016

15 Final Exam -Oral

Examination-


skills


Total 100%


Course Notes:


Sheets

Projects Briefs



Recommended Books:



341

Beirut Arab University FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE –DESIGN & BUILT ENVIRONMENT , INTERIOR DESIGN PROGRAM FALL SEMESTER 2017/2018, STAGE ONE

INTD 202. INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO I

Course Code / Title: Credits: 4

Instructors: Dr. Samer El Sayary Mrs. Farah Al Zein Miss Roua Ghosh Course Hours: 5 Hours/Week Course Duration: 15 Weeks Academic Semester: 7th Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory Course (8 hrs. Studio)

Location: First Year Studio – B2


Tuesday 12:00 to 15:50


This course is an introduction to the field of interior design. Topics of functional and aesthetic elements for residential interiors are covered, including the identification of client needs, programming, standards, space planning, drawings, and presentations. Concept design, development, and articulation are emphasized and represented through the use of sketches, mechanical drawings, and perspectives tools, as well as models.

Intended Learning Outcomes This course is intended to develop the following set of skills:

Acquired Knowledge: Demonstrate theoretical knowledge about: 1. The furniture dimensions and their relationship with the space. 2. The required use-space for each furniture element. 3. The typology of each space and its functional and spatial requirements for each activity.

Intellectual Skills: The course develops the essential skills of thinking in the field of residential interior furnishing and use space, like: 1. The critical thinking , 2. Deductive reasoning, 3. Develop the analytical skills essential for the student to start evaluating the building system

hence working with and/or developing it.

Practice Skills: 1. Projection skills and Architectural drafting . 2. How to furnish spaces and the relationship between space and furniture. 3. Different Rendering techniques (both manual and computer). 4. Using computer in design process. 5. Mastering Physical Paper models as a of design development for both exploration and

representation of an environment

Collaboration techniques: Collaboration and team work is highly encouraged to develop their communication skills and effective presentation to mimic real life situations through peer to peer discussions and criticism.

Learning Activities


342

The learning outcomes will include but not limited to theoretical lectures that will provide them with foundation to understand and apply the practice of Interior design. In addition, the Lab. Activities will be integrated with the course activities to provide the students with the professional practice they need to work and produce Proper interior design documents. The lecturing Style include: 1.Direct lecturing. 2.Interaction through workshops and Site visits. 3.Using Digital learning media as youtube channel.

4.Practice through the Studio Hours.


STAGE



1 Research and drawing of the Unit. Submission of drawings 30/01/2017

2 Continuation of research and preliminary ideas on the stand-Consider working models as a way of exploring the space as well as sketches.

06/02/2017

3 Finalizing of ideas and drawings to build up the model to scale. 13/02/2017

4 Model production 03/11/2017

5 Photography workshop to explore the possibilities of your model and finalizing of your drawings for design report. 20/02/2017

6 Design report, model submission and in a public review. 27/02/2017


8 Return of design reports with comments to correct. 13/03/2017

9 Final report submission. 20/03/2017

10 Design development evaluation of the 3D virtual model. 27/03/2017

11 Exam evaluation of Design ideas sketches & model and criticism 03/04/2017

12 Finalization of Design. Lecture on presentation skills. 10/04/2017

13 Final Project Follow up – ASSESMENT AND OVERVIEW 24/04/2017




Course Policies

The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials, site visits, seminars, directed reading, videos, computer assisted learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, workshops. Exposure to the Execution Design environment and related projects are an important aspect of the teaching and learning methods.


343

General Policies:




The Studio starts from Monday 12:00 to 15:50 and ends on Tuesday 12:00 to 15:50. Course Policies:






Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1

Research and drawing of the Unit. Submission of drawings


professional skills

1 3 30/01/2017 05.0%

60%

2

Finalizing of ideas and drawings to build up the model to scale.


professional skills

3 5 13/02/2017 05.0%

2 Model production


professional skills

5 7 27/02/2017 05.0%

3

Design report, model submission and in a public review.


professional skills

7 7 13/03/2017 10.0%

4

Return of design reports with comments to correct.


professional skills

7 9 13/03/2017 07.5%

5

Design development evaluation of the 3D virtual model.


qualities

9 11 27/03/2017 07.5%

6 Finalization of Design. Lecture on presentation skills.


professional skills

11 13 10/04/2017 07.5%


344

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.



professional skills

13 14 10/04/2017 12.5%

8 Final Exam -Oral

Examination-


skills

15 15 As Scheduled 40.0% 40%

Total 100%


Course notes:

Lectures' handouts.

Essential Books: Ching, F.D.K, (2007). Architecture: Form, Space, and Order., John Wiley & Sons.

Ching, F.D.K, (2003). Architectural Graphics., John Wiley & Sons.

Recommended Books:

Ching, F.D.K, .,(2012). Interior Design Illustrated., John Wiley and Sons.


345

INTD204 BUILDING SYSTEMS

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: Building systems Code: INTD204 Hours: 5 Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 4 Credit: 3 Prerequisites: Academic Year / Level: 1st Year: 2016/2017 Term: Spring Specialization: Interior Design


This course develops an understanding of the basic structural theories systems for buildings. This is followed

by an overview of building components with a focus on structural impact for interior design practice. Students

are also introduced to the function of environmental support systems, including the basic technical

requirements for building systems (mechanical, electrical, and fire detection/control) and how they affect

interior design decisions and construction drawings.


- Identify and describe building components with an appropriate focus on the interior environment - Develop working drawings basics with an appropriate focus on the interior environment - Evaluate building systems by using a research based tuition approach - Develop presentations and work effectively in a team environment

(eee) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

(eee 1) - Understand the nature and operations of Building Systems;

(eee 2) - Demonstrate familiarity with theories and concepts used in Building Systems;

(eee 3) - Understanding the domestic and international nature and dimensions of Building Systems;

(eee 4) - Discuss the structure and organization of the public and private sectors of Building Systems;

(eee 5) - Understand the factors which influence the development of organizations operating in the Building Systems field and the most appropriate ways to manage this development;

(eee 6) - Identify the steps required to carry out a piece of research on a topic within Building Systems;

(eee 7) - Demonstrate an understanding of the contribution and impacts of the Building Systems in social, economic, environmental, political and cultural terms.

(fff) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

(fff 1) - Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the field of

Building Systems;

(fff 2) - Critically assess and evaluate the literature within Building Systems;

(fff 3) - Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to Building Systems;

(fff 4) - Exercise appropriate judgement in selecting and presenting information using various

methods relevant to Building Systems;



346

(fff 5) - Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to

Building Systems;

(fff 6) - Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the Building Systems sector and debate the potential benefits.

(ggg) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:

(ggg 1) - Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to

Building Systems;

(ggg 2) - Plan, design, record, execute and communicate a piece of independent research using

Building Systems media and techniques;

(ggg 3) - Recognize moral, ethical and safety issues which are pertinent to Building Systems;

(ggg 4) - Respond to change within the external and internal Building Systems environments.

(hhh) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:

(hhh 1) - Develop appropriate effective drawn written and oral communication skills relevant to

Building Systems;

(hhh 2) - Demonstrate the ability to work effectively as part of a group, involving leadership, group

dynamics and interpersonal skills such as listening;

(hhh 3) - Use organization skills (including task and time management) relevant to Building Systems

both individually and in group situation;

(hhh 4) - Solve problems relevant to Building Systems using ideas and techniques some of which are at

the forefront of the discipline;

(hhh 5) - Develop the ability to self appraise and reflect on practice relevant to Building Systems.

28- COURSE OUTLINE:

Weeks Date Stages & Description MARKS

1

Course presentation _ Lecture Introduction to the basic structural systems + introduction to building component

2

Lecture: Load bearing wall structural systems, frame structural systems.

Lab.: Define and draft the structural system of an interior space (floor plan drawing)

3

Lecture: Foundation, floor slabs, roof slabs, interior partitions, exterior partitions

Lab.: Define and draft the structural system of an interior space (floor plan drawing, interior space section cut)

4

Lecture: Unseen architecture: Foundation types, retaining walls

Lab.: Define and draft the structural system of an interior space (floor plan drawing, interior space section cut)

5

Lecture: Flooring systems and materials

Lab.: Define and draft the structural system of an interior space (flooring construction details)


347

6

Lecture: Flooring systems and materials

Lab.: Define and draft the structural system of an interior space (flooring construction details)

7 7th week exam. Presentation and grading

8

Lecture: Basic technical requirement for radiant cooling systems

Lab.: Define and draft the structural system of an interior space (reflected ceiling plan with radiant cooling)

9

Lecture: Basic technical requirement for HVAC systems

Lab.: Define and draft the structural system of an interior space (reflected ceiling plan with HVAC diffusers and ductwork)

10

Lecture: Basic technical requirement for electrical systems

Lab.: Define and draft the structural system of an interior space (reflected ceiling plan with light fixtures)

11

Drop ceiling reflected ceiling plan with a fire control/detection system

12 12th week exam. Presentation and grading

13 Final exam review

14

Final review of the execution drawings

Final exam. Final presentation and grading

The course is delivered through introductory lectures, research, presentation & discussion. It is also

introduced through direct instructions and communication. It depends on experience accumulation through phase assignment submissions and assessment.


ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1

2

3

4

5

Total 100% 100%


(pppp) Course Notes:



348

Lectures' handouts. (qqqq) Essential Books (Textbooks):

Ballast, D. K. (2010) Interior Detailing: Concept to Construction, Chichester, UK: John Wiley & Sons.

Plunkett, D. (2010) Construction and Detailing for Interior Design, London, Laurence King.

(rrrr) Recommended Books:

Ballast, D. K. (2013) Interior construction & Detailing for Designers and Architects, Sixth Edition,

Chichester, UK: John Wiley & Sons.

Harmon, S. K. (2003). The Codes Guidebook for Interiors New York: John Wiley and Sons, Inc

McLeod, V. (2012) Detail in Contemporary Residential Architecture, London, Laurence King.

Rob T. (1996) Graphic Guide to Interior Details for builders and designers, Taunton press.


349


FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE –DESIGN & BUILT ENVIRONMENT SPRING SEMESTER 2017/2018, STAGE ONE

INTD 208. COMP. AIDED DRAF. & DESIGN II

Course Code / Title: INTD 208. COMP. AIDED DRAF. & DESIGN II Credits: 3

Instructors: Dr. Samer El Sayary Mr. Mohamed Bou Chacra Mr. Ashraf Saada Course Hours: 4 Hours/Week Course Duration: 15 Weeks Academic Semester: 1st Semester: Fall 2017/2018


Location: Fourth Year Studio – Floor 1


14:00 to 15:50


The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge necessary for engineering carrier in Computer graphics field. Applications for interior design rendering and the creation, modification, and manipulation of images. Architectural modeling for the conceptual phases of design. 3D rendering and photo-editing using different modeling technique. Emphasis on 3D geometry, texture mapping, lighting, camera placement, shading, photo-realistic rendering, animation techniques, and Photo retouching. The course aims to provide the students with state of the art knowledge regarding Computer Graphics software’s. Special focus is given to 2D and 3D rendering using the lasted versions of Autodesk 3D Studio Max and Adobe Photoshop. Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

Understand the use of the different tools used in Computer Graphics software’s.

Learn the basic functions of Adobe Illustrator and Adobe Photoshop software’s.

Use the basic manual tools traditionally used in drawings representation.



Create drawings of basic objects in a three-dimensional (3D) environment. Intended Learning Outcomes of the Course (ILO):

Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

Understand the nature and operation of Computer Graphics. Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:


350

Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the Computer Graphics.

Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to Computer Graphics.

Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to Computer Graphics.

Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the Computer Graphics sector and debate the potential benefits.


Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to Computer Graphics.


Solve problems relevant to Computer Graphics using ideas and techniques some of which are at the forefront of the discipline.

Develop the ability to self-appraise and reflect on practice relevant to Computer Graphics.


STAGE



1 User Interface Basics (Transformation & Control Navigation Buttons) 02/02/2017

2 Furniture Modeling Using Geometric Modeling 16/02/2017

3 Advanced Geometric Modeling 23/02/2017

4 Spline based Modeling 1 02/03/2017

5 Spline based Modeling 2 09/03/2017

6 Classical Facades Modeling & Daylight (Spline Based Modeling) 16/03/2017

7 Exam 23/03/2017

8 Landscape Modeling and rendering Using Daylight (Interior & Exterior) 30/03/2017

9 Interior Rendering 2 (Living Room) Artificial Lighting Using Mentalray 06/04/2017

10 Spring Easter Vacation 13/04/2017

11 Interior Rendering 1 (Living Room) Materials Using Mentalray 20/04/2017

12 Exam (Final Project Submission) 27/04/2017

13 Final Layout Panel Design 04/05/2017

14 Photoshop (Rendering Plans and Elevations) 11/05/2017



Course Policies



351





The lecture starts from Thursday 12:00 to 13:50 and the studio work starts from 14:00 to 15:50. Course Policies:






Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1

User Interface Basics (Transformation & Control Navigation Buttons)


professional skills

1 3 02/02/2017 05.0%

60%

2 Advanced Geometric Modeling


professional skills

3 5 23/02/2017 05.0%

2 Spline based Modeling


professional skills

5 7 09/03/2017 05.0%



7 7 23/03/2017 10.0%

4

Classical Facades Modeling & Daylight (Spline Based Modeling)


professional skills

7 9 23/03/2017 07.5%

5

Interior Rendering 2 (Living Room) Artificial Lighting Using Mentalray


qualities

9 11 06/04/2017 07.5%

6

Photoshop (Rendering Plans and Elevations)


professional skills

11 13 20/04/2017 07.5%


352

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.



professional skills

13 14 04/05/2017 12.5%

8 Final Exam -Oral

Examination-


skills

15 15 As Scheduled 40.0% 40%

Total 100%


Course Notes: 3D Studio Max Help / Adobe Photoshop Help. Essential Books (Textbooks): Murdock K. 3Ds Max 2012 Bible, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2011. Daylay L. & Daylay B., Adobe Photoshop cs5 Bible, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2010. Recommended Books: Gerhard M. & Harpper J., Mastering Autodesk 3ds Max Design 2011, Focal Press, 2010.


353

INTD 304 – Inter. Exec. Design & Detail I

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: Interior Execution Design and Detail I Code: INTD304 Hours Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 4 Credit: 3 Prerequisites: INTD303 Academic Year 2017 -2018 / Level: 2nd Year: 2017/2018 Term :Spring Specialization: Interior Design.


Principles of preparing a complete portfolio of working drawings. Application of a project initially designed by the student. Principles of producing integrated and detailed working drawings. Analysis and applications of standards, material review and selection, execution detailing and documentation. Being familiar with typical symbols, and expression methods & tools in execution design drawings going through the experience of presenting a legible drawing set containing appropriate information for construction. Managing such drawing set to make drawing and sheets referencing system and ensures details compatibility The course is mainly concerned with inducing and vitalizing intellectual, mental, logic assembling thinking capabilities of students concerning the construction industry.

- Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to:

Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and have practical skills and personal attributes and competencies that will be required for Execution and details.

Understand analytical, developmental, legal, managerial, technical and mechanical principles that relate to Execution and details.

Have an appropriate balance between the vocational skills necessary for immediate employment in Execution and details and the more fundamental principles necessary for further study.

Develop the academic abilities and personal characteristics required to solve problems relevant to Execution and details also develop drawing skills to be able to express it.


Demonstrate an ability to initiate and sustain in-depth research relevant to Execution and details.


(iii) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

(iii 1) - Understand the nature and operations of Execution and details;

(iii 2) - Demonstrate familiarity with theories and concepts used in the Execution and details.

(iii 3) - Understand the domestic and international nature and dimensions of Execution and details.

(iii 4) - Discuss the structure and organization of the public and private sectors of the Execution and details;

(iii 5) - Understand the factors which influence the development of organizations operating in the Execution and details and the most appropriate ways to manage this development.



354

(iii 6) - Identify the steps required to carry out a piece of research on a topic within Execution and details.

(iii 7) - Demonstrate an understanding of the contribution and impacts of the Execution and details in social, economic, environmental and cultural terms.

(jjj) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

(jjj 1) - Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the Execution and details;

(jjj 2) - Critically assess and evaluate the literature within Execution and detail.

(jjj 3) - Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to Execution and details.

(jjj 4) - Exercise appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information using various methods relevant to Execution and details.

(jjj 5) - Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to Execution and details.

(jjj 6) - Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the Execution and details sector and debate the potential benefits.

(kkk) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to:

(kkk 1) - Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to Execution and details.

(kkk 2) - Plan, design, record, execute and communicate a piece of independent research using Execution and details media and techniques;

(kkk 3) - Recognize moral, ethical and safety issues which are pertinent to Execution and details.

(kkk 4) - Respond to change within the external and internal Execution and details environments.

(lll) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to:

(lll 1) - Develop appropriate effective written and oral communication skills relevant to Execution and details.

(lll 2) - Demonstrate the ability to work effectively as part of a group, involving leadership, group dynamics and interpersonal skills such as listening, negotiation and persuasion relevant to Execution and details.

(lll 3) - Use organization skills (including task and time management) relevant to Execution and details both individually and in a group situation;

(lll 4) - Solve problems relevant to Execution and details using ideas and techniques some of which are at the forefront of the discipline;

(lll 5) - Develop the ability to self-appraise and reflect on practice relevant to Execution and details.

31- COURSE OUTLINE:


1 REVISION ON PREREQUISITES : (BUILDING SYSTEM & INTERIOR MATERIALS & SPECIFICATIONS).

2 PROJECT 1 (P1) – SHEET 1 (P1-01). CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLISHING PLAN WITH ALL ANNOTATIONS AND DIMENSIONS.

3 PROJECT 1 (P1) – SHEET 2 (P1-02). CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLISHING PLAN WITH ALL ANNOTATIONS AND DIMENSIONS & INTERIOR

EXECUTION DETAILS.


355

4

PROJECT 1 (P1) – SHEET 3 (P1-03). CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLISHING PLAN WITH ALL ANNOTATIONS, DIMENSIONS & INTERIOR

EXECUTION DETAILS. - TILING PLAN WITH ALL ANNOTATIONS, DIMENSIONS & INTERIOR EXECUTION DETAILS. &

INSTALLATION.

- WALL CLADDING WITH EXECUTION DETAILS & INSTALLATION.

5 PROJECT 1 (P1) – SHEET 4 (P1-04). HARD WOOD DOOR WITH ALL DIMENSIONS, EXECUTION DETAILS & INSTALLATION.

6 PROJECT 1 (P1) – SHEET 5 (P1-05). ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING PLAN WITH ALL ANNOTATIONS, DIMENSIONS & EXECUTION DETAILS &

INSTALLATION.

7 WEEK 7 EXAM – EXECUTION INTERIOR DETAIL DRAWING PROJECT.

8 PROJECT 1 (P1) – SHEET 6 (P1-06). SANITARY AND H.V.A.C. PLAN WITH ALL ANNOTATIONS, DIMENSIONS & INTERIOR EXECUTION DETAILS.

9 PROJECT 2 (P2) – SHEET 1 (P2-01). STAIR DETAIL WITH ALL ANNOTATIONS, DIMENSIONS & INTERIOR EXECUTION DETAILS.. 10

11 PROJECT 2 (P2) – SHEET 2 (P2-02). REVISION ON ALL PREVIOUS INSTALLATIONS & INTERIOR EXECUTION DETAILS TO BE APPLIED ON THE NEW

PROJECT.

12 WEEK 12 EXAM – EXECUTION INTERIOR DETAIL DRAWING PROJECT.

13 ORGANIZE ALL THE DETAILS AND DRAWINGS WITH ALL DIMENSIONS AND ANNOTATIONS & INTERIOR

EXECUTION DETAILS. COURSE REVISION AND DISCUSSION.

14 CONTINUING COURSE REVISION AND DISCUSSION. SUBMITTING THE FINAL PORTFOLIO.


The course is delivered through lectures, tutorials with rubrics, seminars, directed reading, videos, computer assisted learning, laboratories, case studies and experimental learning, research-based teaching materials and methods, problem-based learning scenarios including coursework assignments, projects, research paper, workshops. Exposure to the EXECUTION AND DETAILS environment and related projects are an important aspect of the teaching and learning methods.

Asses No.


Subm. Week No.

Weighting of Asses.

1

7 main plans with all dimensions and

annotations With different

structural materials


1 6

10%

30%

2 Working on all the

details that are existing in the main plan


6 6 10%

3 7th Week Exam Total Assessment 7 7 10%

4 Sections, stair details and bathroom details


8 11 10% 30%


356

with all annotations and dimensions

5 12th Week Exam Total Assessment 12 12 10%

6 Final revision Project &

portfolio Qualities and

Professional Skills 13 14 10%

8 Oral Exam - Jury 40%

Total 100%

(ssss) Course Notes:

Lectures' handouts - (tttt) List of references & Recommended Books:

- Kilmer, W. Otie. (2009). Construction Drawings and Details for Interiors: Basic Skills. Second edition. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (BAU Library: 729 K. C.)

- Francis D.K. Ching, Corky Bingggeli. (2012). Interior Design Illustrated. Third Edition. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (BAU Library: 729 C. I.)

- Plunkett D. (2010). Construction and Detailing for Interior Design. London: Laurence King Publishing. (BAU Library 729 P.C.)

- Winkel S.R., Collins, D.S., Juroszek, S.P. (2010). Residential Building Codes Illustrated: A Guide to Understanding the 2009 International Residential Code. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (BAU Library: 690.0218 W.R.)

- Ching, F.D.K., Winkel, S.R. (2003). Building Codes Illustrated: A Guide to Understanding the International Building Code. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (BAU Library: 690.218 C.F.)

- Chudley, R. & Greeno, R. (2010). Building Construction Handbook. 8th edition. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann. (BAU Library 690 C.B.)

- Ching, Francis. (2008). Building Construction Illustrated. Fourth Edition. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (BAU Library: 624.1771 C.B.)

- Francis D. K. Ching; Barry Onouye; Douglas Zuberbuhler. (2014). Building Structures Illustrated : Patterns, Systems, And Design. Second Edition. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (BAU Library: 624.1771 C.B.)





357

BEIRUT ARAB UNIVERSITY FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE-DESIGN & BUILT ENVIRONMENT DESIGN PROGRAMS FALL SEMESTER 2016/2017

INTD306 – TEXTILE & FURNISHING MATERIALS

Course Code / Title: INTD306 Textile & Furnishing Materials

Credits: 3

Instructor:


Academic Semester: 4th Semester:

Module Info: Mandatory course (3hr lectures)

Location:

Time:

Course Objectives

This course gives students a broad understanding of textiles and their usage in interior environment. Topics include textile design, fibers, methods of weaving, dyeing, finishes and trims, flammability, consumer protection, specification of textiles for residential and non-residential end-users, and designer responsibility as related to consumer health, safety and welfare.

1. To develop and stimulate the creative abilities of candidates and to give them the opportunity to

respond to design through exploration of materials and processes

2. To promote an awareness of design and to develop aesthetic appreciation and originality

3. To foster an appreciation of the physical, social, emotional, intellectual and aesthetic needs of people

and to study ways by which various aspects of Textiles and Design can contribute to achieve these

needs

4. To develop taste and appreciation of quality and suitability of fabric

5. To increase awareness and effective response to the impact of technological changes and the growth

of scientific knowledge

6. To encourage candidates to become discerning consumers able to find and evaluate information as a

basis for making informed choices

7. To develop the knowledge and skills required for the effective and safe organization and management

of relevant resources related to textile industry in Lebanon

8. To develop an awareness of the impact of textiles on the environment

9. To develop knowledge and competence in practical skills

10. To foster a critical and analytical approach to decision making and problem solving

Learning Activities


358

Develop a working knowledge of vocabulary related to textiles, and identify their appropriate

applications and performance

Understand sustainable fabrics and LEED rating

Identify the role of interior designer in selecting textiles

Understand the environmental impact of textiles

Gain knowledge of fiber sources, creation of yarns and various methods of fabric construction

Develop an understanding of dyeing, printing, finishing processes

Identify and classify textiles according to their yarns and weaves

Understand the applications of textiles in residential and contract contexts

(upholstery, window treatment, wall covering and floor carpetry)

Select textiles provided with technical, aesthetical and practical knowledge

Understand manufacturing processes of textiles, and the transformation of raw fibers before reaching

end-user

Understand textiles maintenance and treatments

Understand, define and grasp key terms as well as principles, concepts and theories involved in the

textile industry.

Course Outline



1 Introduction to course content, structure, rule and regulations

2 The fundamentals of Textiles for Interiors: The Interior Textile Industry Selecting and evaluating textiles for interiors

3 The fundamentals of Textiles for Interiors: Fiber classification and properties

4 The fundamentals of Textiles for Interiors: Textile Fibers

5 The fundamentals of Textiles for Interiors: Textile yarns and yarn-like Structures

6 The fundamentals of Textiles for Interiors: Fabricating textiles for interiors: weaving and other techniques


359


7 1st Exam: Quizz + project 1 presentation (Overview on Textile Design nowadays, designers and innovations)

8 The fundamentals of Textiles for Interiors: Textile colorants, color perception and color application Converting interior textile greige goods (general overview)

9

The fundamentals of Textiles for Interiors: Interior textile product labeling and fire Upholstered Furniture Coverings and Fillings: Construction Features of Upholstered Furniture

10 Upholstered Furniture Coverings and Fillings: Upholstery coverings, evaluation and maintenance

11

Window and Wall Coverings: Window treatments selection criteria Window and Wall Coverings: Window treatments styles

12

Project 2 presentation Window and Wall Coverings: Window treatments Coverings and Linings, Evaluation and maintenance

13 Coverings for walls and panels Soft floor covering selection criteria Textile Innovations Today (quick overview)

14 Final Exam


360

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Individual exercise

Applicaton of Knowledge 2 7

2 Individual

Written exam Knowledge to date 7 7

3 Group Professional Application 8 9

4 Individual Knowledge to date 10 12

5 Group Professional Application in

class 13 13

6 Individual

Written Exam General course knowledge 14 14 FINAL

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course Notes:

One Field Trip to a local Textile supplier and/or a professional intervention in-house may apply, in coordination with the Administration Essential Books (Textbooks):

Willbanks, Oxford, Miller (2015). Textiles for Residential and Commercial Interiors. Bloomsbury.

Recommended Books:

Course Instructor:

Art & Design Programs Coordinator: Dr. Hisham El-Arnaouty

Date:



361

BEIRUT ARAB UNIVERSITY FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE DESIGN PROGRAMS FALL SEMESTER 2016/2017

INTD308 LIGHTING DESIGN

Course Code / Title: INTD308-Lighting Design Credits: 3

Instructor:


Academic Semester: Semester:

Module Info: Mandatory Course (3hr Lectures)

Location:

Time:

Course Objectives

This Course focuses on the fundamentals of light: its sources, variations, quality, design implications, product variations, technologies and cost/benefits. Students learn how to integrate appropriate lighting choices, from both technical and aesthetic perspectives, covering the four function of light: task, accent, decorative and ambient. Lighting for the specific sectors of built environments (residential, retail, corporate, etc.) is discussed and evaluated as an imperative creative design feature and form-maker.

1- To analyze the visual requirements of any specified visual task, identify the aspects of

lighting important for its performance, and make appropriate lighting recommendations.

2- To promote Lighting as an aid to perception of detail, form, color, texture, and surface finish;

lighting as part of the physical environment; expectations; mood; positive and negative

affect; impacts on behavior.

3- To explore the role of light in architecture and its application by design.

4- To conceive, evaluate, and synthesize solutions that contribute to successful lighting and

architectural design.

5- To develop the skills required to interact with the client and to design, present,

communicate, and implement lighting systems.

6- To establish appropriate lighting criteria for efficient space utilization, task performance, and

energy utilization.

7- To develop designed illumination and lighting control systems, including fixture selection

and design, and light source selection.


362

8- To conduct lighting evaluations and calculations.

9- To express the desired design in concrete architectural drawings.

10- To develop a sense of professionalism and leadership.

Learning Activities

Understand the principles of lighting design. Concepts, symbols, units, nomenclature and

equipment.

Apply Lighting theory and principles to various interior environments.

Determine the function of the space and the visual tasks to be performed.

Determine required light levels for interior design subjects.

Select appropriate lamps and luminaries for interior design subjects.

Determine the appropriate number and location of luminaries

Document lighting designs utilizing a reflected ceiling plan.

Determine how the lights in a space will be switched.

Design custom light fixtures.

Work cooperatively with others, in team and group exercises.

Locate and critically analyze information pertaining to particular lighting questions and

issues

Review, synthesize, and communicate the essentials of such information to an interested

audience

Understand and design lighting appropriate to specific locations, cultures, and objectives

Develop visual and oral communications skills including presentations, computer

visualizations, and other graphic presentations

Understand and practice integrating research, evaluation, and design in design decision-

making

Broaden their understanding of cultural and economic implications of design decisions

Develop teamwork skills


363

Course Outline



1 Introduction to course content, structure, rule and regulations

2 Light as Energy – Natural and Artificial

3 Measurement of Light

4 Natural Light

5 Artificial Light

6 Impact of finishing materials on Lighting use

7 1st Exam

8 Lamp Types (LED, Incadescent, …)

9 Lighting Design Industry and Lighting Designers

10 Architectural Drawings: Reflected Ceiling and EL plans

11 Effects of Lighting Design in Interiors

12 2nd Exam

13 Computer Software Simulation (Dialux and similar)

14 Final Exam


364

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Individual exercise

Applicaton of Knowledge 2 7 March 17th

2 Individual Written

exam Knowledge to date 7 7

March 17th

3 Group Professional Application 8 9 March

31st

4 Individual Knowledge to date 10 12 April 21st

5 Group Professional Application

in class 13 13 May 5th

6 Individual Written

Exam

General course knowledge

14 14 FINAL

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course Notes:

One Field Trip to a local Lighting supplier and/or a professional intervention in-house may apply, in coordination with the Administration Essential Books (Textbooks):

Randall McMullan (2002). Environmental Science in Building. Palgrave. Egan,Olgyay (2002). Architectural Lighting, Mc Graw Hill. Kilmer (2016). Construction Drawings and Details for Interiors. Wiley.

Recommended Books:

Course Instructor:


Date:



365

INTD404. Interior Design Professional Practice and Ethics

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: Interior Design Professional Practice and Ethics Code: INTD404 Hours: 3 Lecture: 3 Studio: 0 Credit: 3 Prerequisites: No prerequisites Academic Year / Level: Third / Level 6 Year: 2016-2017 Term: Spring Specialization: Interior Design 1- COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The teaching approach of this course encourages critical thinking and cooperative learning, as well as independence and self-teaching, since these are necessary skills for working in an interior design professional.

Students learn professional communication through writing resumes and letters of application for job. They gain technological competence through internet search of interior design firms, and through the use of e-mail and word processing. The course builds critical thinking and problem solving abilities through project management exercices. Students gain professional competence as they learn the language, procedures, and traditions of practice.

12- Understand the profession & the role of the professional interior designer.

13- Understand the Careers options for interior designer& exposure to challenges in the domain.

14- Understand how to promote his/her services; develop clientele and how to handle the first meeting and client interview.

15- Augment student knowledge about interior designer's professional ethics.

16- Understand the importance of ethics in business practice.

17- Apply knowledge about the performance about business formations.

18- Identify the major ways to form a business and the essential counsel necessary in setting a business.

19- Apply knowledge about the performance & business organization & management of interior design projects.

20- Understand the importance of keeping job/project folders for reference.

21- Increase design skills through applying knowledge about preparing full & detailed schematic design & contracts.

22- Augment student knowledge about interior designer's legal responsibilities.

23- Understand determining design offers & supervision fees.

24- Understand and apply the range of discounts and methods of establishing a fee basis.

25- Improve critical thinking skills and judgment in problem identification and problem solving, and in effective information gathering, client, project research, and in analysis skills.

26- Understand the importance of goal and decision-making process, time management and time keeping skills.

27- Promote awareness and understanding about product pricing considerations & offers presented to the clients.

28- Deepen students’ ability to communicate effectively through contract documents & specifications.

29- Understand marketing & promoting interior design practice.

30- Understand the different ways of working with different trade sources.


366

31- Further understanding and knowledge of project management techniques.

32- Boost awareness of the relationship between interior design and the environment, the community, the local & international business demands & skills, and to the economy and activities in Lebanon & other targeted regions around the world.

33- Understand what sustainable design practices are and the impact of sustainable design.


First phase: (Researches)

- Launching a career in the interior design profession as a professional.

- The fundamentals of interior design profession.

- Resume & professional portfolio.

- Career opportunities in interior design.

- Attaining an entry-level position in interior design career and working requirements in an interior design

firm and personal management strategies and professional ethics.

- Professional administrative practices and legal responsibilities.

- Long-term client relationship, project responsibilities, and management skills in the total design projects

process.

- Client relations: Contracts & presentations.

Second phase: (Research development – Virtual project analysis, contracts, drawings, BOQ, offers, approvals, and studies) – group work.

- Detailed interior design professional practice and ethics virtual project & researches:

- Client & project management strategies.

- Schematic design & design development. (Based on the group project).

- Project B.O.Q & cost analysis.

- Contract brief, Avant project/ schematic design Details & drawings.

- Relationships and the project management plan.

- Design development & decisions, programing, and items/ activities coding.

- Owning and operating and interior design business based on group project experience.

- Green business management plan for a sustainable residential place. (Based on group the project

demands)

- Professional documents & forms for schematic & detailed drawings submissions, and client required

amendments.

- Contract approval, project details/ schematic design Details & drawings, BOQ and offers, and project

management planning final schedule.

- Relationships and the project management plan update.

- Design development based on client final approval.

- Presenting each step of the previous tasks in a formal presentation (both printed and oral) that will be

evaluated.


367

Week No. 1 Lecture

Introduction about interior Design Professional Practice and Ethics and the course objectives.

Exploring the fundamentals & values of interior design profession.

Defining the interior design profession.

Week No. 2 Lecture

Career opportunities in interior design.

Types of interior design firms.

Design practice specializations & nontraditional opportunities.

Career portfolios & networking strategies.

Resumes and traditional digital design portfolios

Job search plan & strategizing opportunities.

Interviews & negotiations a position.

Week No. 3 Lecture

Professional business responsibilities.

Personal management strategies & professional ethics.

Multidisciplinary collaboration and virtual teamwork rules & ethics.

Week No. 4 Lecture

International & local business practices.

Collaboration, ventures, and logistics.

Business cultural dimensions: (Attitudes, values, and beliefs).

Intercultural business communication styles.

Intercultural business protocols: (Meetings, negotiations, and socializing).

Week No. 5 Lecture

Professional compensation & fees.

Determining compensation & fees.

General accounting & administrative practice.

Week No. 6 Lecture

Enhancing the log-term client relationships & project responsibilities.

Client relations: Interpersonal communication & appointments.

Client relations: Contracts & presentations.

Project management skills: (Elements, strategies, resources, and process).

Integrated design process.

Client & project management strategies: (Predesign & programing).

Week No. 7 Lecture

(Written exam).

3- COURSE OUTLINE:


368

Week No. 8 Lecture

Client & project management strategies: (Schematic design & design development.

Client & project management strategies: (Contract documents, offers & BOQ's, and contract administration).

Week No. 9 Lecture

Owning & operating an interior design business.

Interior design business requirements.

Business plan & outline of key elements in a business plan.

Market analysis and competition.

Group virtual professional project for a residential place (3 groups).

Week No. 10 Lecture

Group project work update & professional discussions.

Client & project management strategies: (Schematic design & design development. (Based on the group project).

Week No. 11 Lecture

Projects seminar (Collaborative learning) – Contract brief, Avant projet/ schematic design Details & drawings. – Relationships and the project management plan. – Design development & decisions, programing, and items/ activities coding. (Every group should talk about his part).

Week No. 12 Lecture

Owning, operating, and interior design business based on group project experience.

Green business management plan for a sustainable residential place. (Based on group the project demands)

Professional documents & forms for schematic & detailed drawings submissions, and client required amendments.

Week No. 13 Lecture

Projects seminar (Collaborative learning) – Contract approval, project details/ schematic design Details & drawings, BOQ and offers, and project management planning final schedule. – Relationships and the project management plan update. – Design development based on client final approval. (Every group should talk about his part).

Week No. 14 Lecture

Revision Final projects submission. Seminar for all groups. (3 group's presentation). Portfolio submission. (individual work)

Final Written Exam.


The course is delivered through lectures, research-based teaching materials and methods, and problem-based learning scenarios through lectures. In addition to lectures, the information reinforced through including coursework (in class exercises) &assignments related to project management and fee calculations, Group discussions compare and contrast international & local business procedures & practices, and exposure to the interior design professional practice and ethics and to related important aspects of the teaching and learning methods.


369

The students learning responsibilities is to explore through:

Essential handbook.

Online research information.

Internship experience.

Contacting manufacturer's representatives and suppliers.

Reading catalog and pricelist information.

How to stay up-to-dated by magazines and periodicals.

Interpretation and discussions skills.

Observation, listening & enhancing professional experience.

Self-continuous development.

Act as professional interior designer with a lot of self-confidence based on great care of client, public, colleagues, and work professional ethics.

Technology component:

Students enhance their internet skills through online research of major design firms. Students use word processing, Photoshop, Autocad, 3Dmax, sketchup, and Indesign or similar to create personal marketing and job search materials.

Special projects/activities:

Students create an application letter, resume, and a professional portfolio.



(uuuu) Essential books (textbooks):

Susan M.Winchip, (2013, 1nd edition). Professional Practice For Interior Designers In The Global Marketplace, New York, Fairchild Books, Bloomsbury Publishing Inc.

(vvvv) Recommended Textbooks: Christine M. Piotrowski, FASID, IIDA. (2014, 5nd edition). Professional Practice For Interior Designers, NJ, John Wiley & Sons.

Asses No.


No. Subm. Week

No. Subm. Date

1 -Researches -Oral discussions.

-Written exam.

- Knowledge and understanding, intellectual skills.

2 8 From

20%

10%

30%

2 Project discussion &

seminar. - Knowledge and understanding,

professional and practical skills, 9 11

From

3 -Final virtual group

Project demo. -Student professional

Portfolio.

- Knowledge and understanding, general and transferable skills.

Collaborative different students base learning methods.

12 14 From

4

-Written Exam. - Final written Exam. - - TBA 40%

Total 100% 100%


370

Gordon T. Kendall, Heidi Painchaud. (2016, 2nd edition). Designing Your Business: Professional Practice For Interior Designers, Bloomsbury Publishing Inc.

(wwww) Supplemental materials:

Instructor provides handouts for business practices specific to local customs & traditions. (xxxx) Supplemental online materials:

Instructor provides a list of suitable, contemporary web sites appropriate for the topics they teach, including local & regional design & architectural firms, and professional organizations.





371

INTD405 – Furniture Design

BASIC INFORMATION

Course Title: INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO II Code: INTD 301 Hours: 5 Lecture: 1 Tutorial: 4 Credit: 3 Prerequisites: INTD202 Academic Year / Level: Third Year Year: 2017/2018 Term: Fall Specialization: Interior Design 1-COURSE OBJECTIVES:

This course intends to equip students with basic knowledge and skills to work with the complex mix of technical, functional and aesthetical characteristics that is furniture design.

It familiarizes the students with theoretical aspects of furniture design, various materials for furniture making and respective crafting skills.

This knowledge shall then be applied to develop one piece of furniture from its very first idea-stage to a finished object, that complies to a given class assignment as well as to a contemporary design approach.

This course incorporates the study of the history and design of residential and commercial furniture.

The components of this course focus on advanced application of design theories and principles in the creation of furniture, as well as the specification of furniture in interior design projects.

Establish and demonstrate the specific function and social use of furniture & ergonomics and anthropometrics.

Develop the form, spatial organization and typological orders of furniture.

Demonstrate a working knowledge of famous furniture designers, their designs, and their concepts.

Applying a variety of furniture design theories.

Develop a specific process for the design development of furniture.

Be able to justify the appropriate materials and their application to furniture.

Be familiar with various fabrication processes used in the furniture industry.

Be familiar to apply furniture design theories and concepts into their own unique designs.

Be able to justify the appropriate furniture for various interior spaces.

Create and review shop drawings.

Develop creative ways to solve the problems of a given design-brief using a variety of strategies of the field.

Conceptualize a design-solution through a variety of stages and develop the craftsmanship to produce the furniture designed.

Understand and apply principles of mechanics and ergonomics and functionality in the own design-work.

Extend practice of applying design principles of different types of furniture to concept development and design analysis through standards of professional practice.


372


1- The researches, projects and exercises in this course will begin with explicit descriptions of the

ergonomics, anthropometrics, standards, requirements and priorities.

2- Research furniture styles, famous designers and important different movements.

3- Conduct ongoing professional research in furniture design based on technology knowledge.

4- Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices.

5- Research and select furniture materials and technology.

6- Produce ideation drawings.

7- The student-designer is responsible to study the problem statement and ask questions of the professor in order to glean the essential goals, boundaries and requirements of the problem.

8- Accept and respond to feedback, and use feedback as an opportunity to improve .professional knowledge and skills.

9- Active listening and critical thinking are necessary. In most cases, problem conditions leave ample latitude for creative solutions.

10- Some exercises emphasize technical skills of furniture design solutions..

11- Other projects emphasize creative/expressive concerns. With identifying and understanding the varied goals and demands, to create the appropriate furniture for various interior spaces.

12- Evaluate furniture design proposals and concepts and Collaborate on design concepts and ideas with other colleagues.

13- Identify shortfalls in knowledge and undertake research or training to fill gaps.

14- Assess competencies in meeting job requirements.

3- COURSE OUTLINE:

1st Week: Introduction to the course and studio.

2nd Week:

Exemplary Furniture Design:

- History of furniture. - Typology of furniture. - Important furniture designers.

3rd Week: Introduction to Principles and Concepts of Furniture Design:

- Anthropometrics. - Ergonomics. - Joinery & other integrated materials.

Group researches about 8 famous furniture designers, (each group will select 2 designers).

Researches about anthropometrics & ergonomics.

Case study of selected different type of chairs.

4rd Week: Furniture Design Practice:

- Professional sketching. - Concept & ergonomics analysis.


373

- (Technical) drafting. - Analogue and virtual model-building. - Production in the workshop.

Developing group researches about famous furniture designers.

Developing researches about anthropometrics & ergonomics.

Handover of the selected different type of chairs case study.

5th Week: Analysis and study of furniture working details – (wood joints – joints & assembly).

Study of furniture working details – (Upholstery).

Handover of anthropometrics & ergonomics researches.

Handover of famous furniture designers group researches.

6th Week: Function and Social Use of Furniture in commercial spaces (coffee shop).

Form, Spatial Organizations, and Typological Orders of Furniture in commercial spaces (coffee shop).

Furniture case studies (Table, Chair & Service table).

7th Week: Exam – (oral & written)

- Written exam on researches – (LEED v4 CI , IAQ) or (Famous Furniture designers).

- Oral exam on data & standards of commercial Furniture design – (Coffee shop).

8th Week: Developing Furniture case studies (Table, Chair & Service table).

9th Week: Handover of Furniture case studies (Table, Chair & Service table).

Function and Social Use of a selected bespoke ergonomic piece of furniture.

10th Week: Furniture case studies: Group research of a residential space – (Small house).

- Design process of the living room Furniture - 4 pieces of furniture (sofa, center table + chair, side table).

- Design process of the dining room Furniture - 4 pieces of furniture (table, chair + buffet, niche).

- Design process of the bedroom Furniture - 4 pieces of furniture (bed, night stand + wardrobe, coiffeuse).

- Design process of the office room Furniture - 4 pieces of furniture (stationary, partition + desk, drawer).

Developing sketches & drawings of the bespoke ergonomic piece of furniture for making real prototypes for some of the Furniture.

11th Week: Developing of Furniture case studies: Group research of a residential space – (Small house).

Handover of the bespoke ergonomic piece of furniture.

Research about different types 4 style of furniture in market.

Making real prototypes for some of the Furniture.

12th Week: Developing of Furniture case studies: Group research of a residential space – (Small house).

Developing research about the different types of furniture in market.


374

13th Week: Handover of Furniture case studies: Group research of a residential space – (Small house).

Seminar presentation - week 12 assessments.

14th Week: Handover of a research about the different types of furniture in market.

Final portfolios. Display of best items & general revision.

Delivering real prototypes for some of the Furniture.

/01/2018 Final written exam.



(yyyy) Essential books (textbooks):

Natale, Christopher. (2009). Furniture Design and Construction for the Interior Designer. New York:

Fairchild Books.

(zzzz) Recommended Textbooks:

Ballast, David Kent. (2010). Interior Design Reference Manual. Belmont, CA: Professional Publications

Inc.

Design Museum. (2010). How to design a Chair. London: Octopus Books.

Fiell, Charlotte and Peter. (2005). 1000 Chairs (Taschen 25). Italy: Benedict Taschen Verlag GmbH.

Glasgow, Andrew and Hemachandra, Ray. (2009). 500 Tables: Inspiring Interpretations of Function and

Style. New York, NY: Lark Books.

Kim, Young-Yun and Thompson, Rob. (2011). Product and Furniture Design. London: Thames and

Hudson.

McGowan, Maryrose. (2006). Specifying Interiors. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley and Sons.

Asses No.


No. Subm. Week

No. Subm. Date

1 Oral & Written & researches presentations

- Student work according to the different student base learning

methods. 1 5 Week 7

20% 20% 20%

2 Project 1 - Portfolio: project submission. 6 9 Week 9

3 Project 2 - Assignment. 9 11 Week 11

4 Project 3

- Portfolio: project submission - Furniture Prototype. 10 13 Week 13 10%

5

Written Exam

- Showing knowledge based on different student base learning methods & different furniture

design projects taught in course.

- - /01/2017 30%

Total 100% 100%


375

Saville, Laurel and Stoddard, Brooke. (2008). Design Secrets: Furniture: 50 Real-Life Projects Uncovered.

Minneapolis, MN: Rockport Publishers.





376

Graphic Design Program Course Summary







Miss Roua Ghosh





10:00 to 13:50







6. Projection skills and Architectural drafting. 7. How to draw and understand orthographic projections.


377

8. Express intellectual meanings through artwork. 9. Learning how to express art through poster design and portfolio making 10. Mastering Physical Paper models as a of design development for both exploration and





STAGE



















Course Policies



378






Course Policies:






Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.



professional skills

1 3 22/09/2017 05.0%

60%



3 5 06/10/2017 05.0%



5 7 20/10/2017 05.0%



7 7 20/10/2017 10.0%



professional skills

7 9 03/11/2017 07.5%

5 Model making


qualities

9 11 17/12/2017 07.5%

6



professional skills

11 13 08/12/2017 07.5%



professional skills

13 14 15/12/2017 12.5%

8 Final Exam


15 15 As Scheduled 40.0% 40%


379

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.


Total 100%


(d) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts.

(e) Essential Books: 1. Ching, F.D.K, (2007). Architecture: Form, Space, and Order., John Wiley & Sons.



(f) Recommended Books:



380

BEIRUT ARAB UNIVERSITY FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE DESIGN AND BUILT ENVIRONMENT DESIGN PROGRAMS SPRING SEMESTER 2016/2017

ARTD203. PHOTOGRAPHY

Course Code / Title: ARTD 203 Credits: 3



Academic Semester: Faculty Elective Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: preliminary Level Course (4hr. Lecture – workshop- assign.)

Location: Debbieh

Time: Thursday 08:00-12:00

Course Objectives

The objective of this course is to first provide a fundamental understanding of visual and technical skills necessary to pursue and value photography as a Graphic Design and Interior Design component It is also assumed that they can picturing their actions work personally. Cultural development and how to create and document the work of art through the photo.

Learning Activities


Course Outline

The course discusses the fundamental principles of photography starting with a brief historical context, camera’s components and elements, camera controls (shutter, speed, ISO, light meter) and processes, lights and exposure, variety of lens and equipments, aperture and depth of field and focus, framing ( rule of thirds , golden points). As a result, assignments and project and practices are going to take place in order to maintain, develop and widen Graphic Design and Interior Design photography.


1 - Kinds of Camera - Camera elements and Controls

2 - Types and uses of lenses - Aperture and depth of field - The filters


4 - Practical photo shooting (about aperture and depth of field) - Workshop in BAU campus


381


5 - Corrections of practical photo shoots - 1st project



8 - The landscape photography - Studio lighting & research

9 - The Interior Design Photography - Fashion and Mode Photography

10 - Portraits & models workshop (at campus) - 2nd Project

11 - Correction 2nd project - Correction workshop of portraits


13 - Editing photos - Selecting photos for enlarging - Photography copyrights laws

14 - Digital Photography - Introduction to photography – Brief historical context - Review the sessions

Evaluation

SSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 7th week

Assessment Project 5 7

30

70% 2 12th week

Assignments Project 10 12

30

3 Absence & Evaluation

Total of 14 weeks 1 14

10

4 14th Week

Exam/ Mastering photography 1 14

30 30

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course Notes:

(a) Students are responsible their own camera

(b) Recommended Books:


382

Course Instructor:

Saleh Rifai

Design Programs Coordinator:

Dr. Hisham El-Arnaouty

Date: July 9, 2017

Dean of Faculty:

Prof. Dr. Ibtihal El-Bastawissi


383









Time: --

Course Objectives













modern culture.






Learning Activities






384

Course Outline








6 1st Exam




10 2nd Exam






385

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1




3 6 10

30%

2 7th Week



3




8 11 10

30% 4 12th Week



5




13 16 10

6 Final exam 40%

Total 100% 100%

List of References









Date: 20 / 6 / 2017



386


BASIC INFORMATION














387

(mmm) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

(mmm 1) - Understand the nature and operations of CAD Drawing. (nnn) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

(nnn 1) - Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the CAD

Drawing;

(nnn 2) - Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to CAD Drawing;

(nnn 3) - Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to

CAD Drawing;

(nnn 4) - Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the CAD Drawing sector and debate


(ooo) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to: (ooo 1) - Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to

CAD Drawing.

(ppp) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to: (ppp 1) - Solve problems relevant to CAD Drawing using ideas and techniques some of which are at the


(ppp 2) - Develop the ability to self appraise and reflect on practice relevant to CAD Drawing.

34- COURSE OUTLINE:

















388





ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK


1 2D



35%

2




8 8 15%

35 % 3 2D & 3D






15 15 30%

Total Total 100%


(aaaaa) Course notes:

a. AutoCAD Help.

(bbbbb) Essential books (textbooks): i. Alan J., Lang K., Autocad 2011 Tutor For Engineering Graphics, Autodesk Pess, NY,2011.

(ccccc) Recommended books:

Finkelstein E., AutoCAD 2010 & AutoCAD LT 2010 : Bible, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009. (ddddd) General References:



389


BASIC INFORMATION




















390










4- COURSE CONTENT:










Oral Communication






Critical Thinking







391

Mathematics


between objects.




drawings.


Other



submitted drawings.

6- COURSE SCHEDULE:

1st





















392
























393

BEIRUT ARAB UNIVERSITY FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE DESIGN PROGRAMS SPRING SEMESTER 2014/2015, STAGE 1ST OR MAJOR ELECTIVE

GRAD 210. Theory of color in visual communication

Course Code / Title: GRAD210. Theory of color in visual communication Credits: 3

Instructor: Therese YARED


Academic Semester: 1st or Faculty Elective Semester: spring 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory/Major Elective Course (1 hr. Lecture, 2 hrs. Studio)


Time: --

Course Objectives

1. Develop a working understanding of the essential traits of color. 2. Establish and demonstrate practicable strategies for selecting color palettes and concept-driven color

harmonies using principles, theories and systems of color design and experience.. 3. Establish and demonstrate skill in color mixing and color-discernment. 4. Be familiar with contemporary color specification systems such as Pantone (PMS), RGB, CMYK. 5. Become familiar with the history of human exploration of and use of color. 6. Know in principle the physics of color (light), the chemistry of color (pigment), and the impact of color

(psychology). 7. Be familiar with basic issues and techniques involved in color management. 8. Be familiar with basic digital image editing techniques. (scanning & basic color correction/editing) 9. Refine ability to identify the design problem; discern pertinent project needs and goals by reading

project description and by questioning the instructor and active listening during project presentation and discussions.

10. Extend practice of applying visual design principles to concept development and design analysis. 11. Communicate clearly your design concepts/goals via concise, written concept statements. 12. Select successful concept-driven color solutions and apply design principles in projects. 13. Be able to justify design choices/solutions relative to client/project’s posed problem and your concept

statement. 14. Practice and extend creative problem-solving skills by exploring, presenting and evaluating a

multiplicity of ideas for each concept. 15. Practice and develop illustrative sketching and rapid visualization techniques in development sketches,

concept presentations and in-process project discussions/critics. 16. Practice and extend ability to think visually, to develop visual concepts and to communicate visual

solutions. 17. Practice and develop rendering and presentation techniques in design presentations. 18. Express understanding of color design issues in oral presentations, class discussions and critiques. 19. Recognize the relationship between human behavior and designed environment, graphics and objects. 20. Recognize the relationship between lighting, surface and perception.


394

Learning Activities

The projects and exercises in this course will begin with explicit descriptions of the goals, limitations, requirements and priorities.

The student-designer is responsible to study the problem statement and ask questions of the professor in order to glean the essential goals, boundaries and requirements of the problem.

Active listening and critical thinking are necessary. In most cases, problem conditions leave ample latitude for creative solutions.

Some exercises emphasize technical control of color and refined visual discrimination between varied aspects of color.

Other projects emphasize creative/expressive concerns. Your job will be to identify and understand the varied goals and limits, to create a formal solution (a color design) that best solves that problem in an aesthetically pleasing manner.

aCourse Outline



1 Reading and explaining syllabus

2 Additive and subtractive color

3 Color wheel (color palette)

4 Tint (gradient in colors)

5 Black and white (color distribution with black and white)

6 1st Exam grades

7 Cold, warm, cool colors (3 compositions with different types and moods)

8 Value and contrast (relief with colors)

9 Lightness and darkness (light source composition)

10 2nd Exam

11 Rhythm with color (movement, unity and repetition with colors)

12 Color in 3D (effects of 3 dimensions with colors)

13 Composition based on a topic using the required skills)

14 Final Exam

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1




--%

2 7th Week Total Assessment


395


3




--% 4 12th Week


Total Assessment

5




Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course Notes:


Color, Paul Zelanski and Mary Pat fisher, 6th edition

Acrylic book – a comprehensive resource for artists

Color structure and design, Richard Killinger

Recommended Books:

Color Harmony - rockport

Color Harmony layout – rockport

Color Harmony Packaging - rockport



Date: 20 / 6 / 2017



396

BEIRUT ARAB UNIVERSITY FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE DESIGN PROGRAMS FALL SEMESTER 2015/2016, STAGE 3 OR MAJOR ELECTIVE

GRAD301. GRAPHIC DESIGN STUDIO II

Course Code / Title: GRAD301. Graphic Design Studio 2 Credits: 4

Instructor: Therese YARED


Academic Semester: 3rd or Faculty Elective Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory/Major Elective Course (1 hr. Lecture, 7 hrs. Studio)


Time: --

Course Objectives

This course requires students to apply the principles and visual elements of design and problem-solving

methods to generate concepts through a sequence of several corporate and visual identities projects.

To be introduced to the principle elements in Graphic Design such as logo, business card, letterhead,

etc.

Produce 2D marks for different practice.

To understand the language of Design and Composition.

Understand the relationship between idea/thoughts and visuals.

Use typeface and visual elements on all requested applications.

To study all aspects of a corporate identity.

To work on the concept development of a brand.

To be able to execute all ideas by hand.

To learn how to work on presentation layout.

Understand all aspects of brand building.

To give form to any idea.

Work on research methods and concept development for a brand.

Learning Activities

Students will grow as decision makers, creative problem solvers, and persuasive communicators; to:

open their minds to see and think in new ways.

practice asking the right questions.

improve self-confidence and assertiveness.


397

practice clear communication of message content.

refine layout, composition, and typography skills.

meet deadlines.

develop valid and persuasive rationale.

make effective oral and written presentations.

work with other students in a team environment.

build a body of impressive design work.

Course Outline



1 Reading syllabus. Homework: Brand Identity Research

2 lunching the first project Project 1: Logo Word Expression, stationery design 3

4 Project 2: Uplifting Logo

5

6 Exam 1: Presentation and grading

7 Project 3: Brand Identity Guideline

8

9

10 Exam 2: Presentation and grading

11

Project 4: Country Logo 12

13

14 Final Exam: Final presentation and Jury

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Individual and

group assignments


--%


398

to be assessed

2 7th Week


Total Assessment

3




--% 4 12th Week


Total Assessment

5




Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course Notes:

Lecture Notes and Handouts given with every project.

Logo Workbook.

The Art of Looking Side Ways, alan Fletcher, Phaidon.

Marks of Excellence: The history and taxonomy of tradmarks, Per Mollerup

Witty Thinking in graphic design, a smile in the mind, Beryl Mc. Alhone & David Stuart, Phaidon.

Decoding design, understanding and using symbols in visual communication, Maggie Macnab

All other references will be specified throughout the term.


Fundamentals of Branding, by Melissa Davis, AVA academia

Fundamentals of Graphic design, by Gavin Ambrose & Paul Harris, AVA academia

Recommended Books:

Logo Design Workbook, by Adams Morioka, Rockport



Date: 20 / 6 / 2017



399


400

BEIRUT ARAB UNIVERSITY FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE DESIGN AND BUILT ENVIRONMENT GRAPHIC DESIGN PROGRAM FALL SEMESTER 2017 / 2018

GRAD303. TYPOGRAPHY I

Course Code / Title: GRAD303 Typography I

Credits: 3

Instructor: Lara BALAA

Course Hours: 3 Hours / Week Course Duration: 14 Weeks

Academic Semester: 2nd year Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory / Major (2 lecture, 2 studio)

Location: Studio A304

Time: T 12:00 to 4:00 pm

Course Objectives

Typography I is an introductory course to the basic terminology, anatomy and structure of type.

Students start to develop their sensitivity to and understanding of the letterform. The course includes

a survey of the historical development of typographic forms and classifications. Students will apply

their knowledge through practical exercises and designs that focus on typography as a vehicle for

meaning in visual communication.

By the end of this course, students will be able to:

Acquire basic knowledge about the evolution of writing systems and type printing techniques.

Identify different Latin type classifications and situate typefaces historically and

geographically based on their acquired knowledge.

Recognize different Arabic calligraphic traditions and their influence on contemporary

typefaces in terms of function and esthetics.

Build a typographic vocabulary that they can use to describe typographic anatomy, styles, and

arrangement.

Understand type as a vehicle for meaning, and recognize the central role of typographic

choices and arrangements in visual communication.

Learning Activities

This is a practical course; students will acquire knowledge through applied research and project


401

assignments, with the help of learning aid such as class lectures, assigned readings, and short videos,

as well as instructor feedback delivered in the form of pin-ups and individual critiques.

Course Outline


Week No. 01 Project 01: Letter anatomy and type classifications

Week No. 02 Working session + Feedback


Week No. 04 Exercise 01: Kerning

Week No. 05 Exercise 02: Comping and Typesetting


Week No. 07 Exercise: 03 Type Styles

Week No. 08 Project 02: Experimental Typography


Week No. 10 Project 03: Trash Poetry


Week No. 12 Project 04: Calligraphic Classifications



Test

TBD Portfolio evaluation, including photographic alphabet poster

(W1–14)

Evaluation


WEEK NO.

SUBM.

WEEK NO. SUBM. DATE WEIGHTING OF ASSES.

1 Project 01 Letter anatomy and type

classifications (Latin) 1 4

W6

20

30

2 Exercise 01 Kerning 4 5 10


402

3 Exercise 02 Comping and typesetting 5 7

W11

5

20 4 Exercise 03 Type styles 7 8 5

5 Project 02 Experimental Typography 8 10 10

6 Project 03 Trash Poetry 10 12

W14

5

10

7 Project 04 Calligraphic Classifications

(Arabic) 12 14 5

8 Jury

Portfolio evaluation, including

photographic alphabet poster

(W1–14)

1 14

TBD

30

40

9 Test 14 14 10

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Thinking with Type, 2nd revised and expanded edition: A Critical Guide for Designers, Writers,

Editors, & Students / Ellen Lupton / Princeton Architectural Press

Stop Stealing Sheep & Find Out How Type Works / Erik Spiekermann / Adobe Press

Arabic Typography: A Comprehensive Sourcebook / Huda Smitshuijzen-AbiFarès / Saqi Books

www.blog.29lt.com

Course Instructor:

Ms. Lara BALAA

Dean of Faculty:

Dr. Ibtihal YOUSSEF

Date: 21 / 06 / 2017


403


GRAD305. HISTORY OF VISUAL COMMUNICATION

Course Code / Title: GRAD305. History of Visual Communication

Credits: 3



Academic Semester: 2nd year Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory / Major (3 lecture)


Time: M 09:00 to 11:00 am

Course Objectives

This course reviews the historical context for the graphic arts of typography, print design, diagramming, and

illustration. Emphasis is placed on the relationship of these applied arts to technology, and social and political

history. Through lectures, seminars and directed class discussions, students will be exposed to the history of

visual communications starting with a general introduction on writing and the alphabets, passing through

printing and the industrial revolution, all the way to contemporary design practices.


Understand the evolution of visual communication, and recognize the different periods and

movements that have shaped this evolution.

Understand how design and technology are interrelated.

Recognize the impact of design on society, and the impact of society on design.

Understand design as an international practice that emerged simultaneously in different corners of

the world, in relation to local contexts and cultural specificities.

Become familiar with the work of key historical and contemporary design practitioners and figures.

Learning Activities

This course is delivered through lectures, assigned readings, student presentations, class discussions, film

screenings, and coursework assignments (projects, essays, and class presentations).

Course Outline



404

Week No. 01 Course introduction

Before Graphic Design / Part 1

+ Film Screening: Ancient Mysteries 'The Rosetta Stone' Documentary

Week No. 02 Before Graphic Design / Part 2

+ Film Screening: BBC Science and Islam 1 - The Language of Science

Week No. 03 The Nineteenth Century

Week No. 04 Art Nouveau

Week No. 05 Sachplakat, WWI and Dada

Week No. 06 Exam (Assessment W06)

+ Film Screening: Europe after the Rain – Dadaism and Surrealism

Week No. 07 Modern Art and Modern Graphic Design

Week No. 08 Revolutions in Design

Week No. 09 Bauhaus and the New Typography

Week No. 10 American Modern and WWII

Week No. 11 Exam (Assessment W11)

+ Film Screening ‘Helvetica’

Week No. 12 The International Style / Student Presentations

Week No. 13 Postmodernism / Student Presentations

Week No. 14 Contemporary Graphic Design / Student Presentations

TBD Final Exam

Evaluation


WEEK NO.

SUBM.


1 Essay 01 1 2

W6

10

30 2 Essay 02 2 3 10

3 Exam 01 6 10

4 Essay 03 6 7

W11

Bonus

20

4 Exam 02 11 20

5 Presentations 12 14 W14 10 10

6 Timelines 1 14

TBD

20

40

7 Final Exam 20


405

List of References

Graphic Design: A New History / Stephen J. Eskilson / Laurence King Publishing

Meggs' History of Graphic Design / Philip B. Meggs, Alston W. Purvis / John Wiley & Sons

Dictionary of Graphic Design and Designers / Alan and Isabella Livingston / Thames and Hudson

Course Instructor:

Ms. Lara BALAA

Dean of Faculty:

Dr. Ibtihal YOUSSEF

Date: 21 / 06 / 2016

Total 100% 100%


406


GRAD401. GRAPHIC DESIGN STUDIO IV

Course Code / Title: GRAD401. Graphic Design Studio IV

Credits: 4



Academic Semester: 3rd year Semester: Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: Mandatory / Major (8 studio)


Time: T 8:00 to 12:00 pm. Th 12:00 to 4:00

Course Objectives

This course focuses on the design and construction of three-dimensional forms such as packaging, exhibits, and

displays. Students conceptualize and develop preliminary plans, and build three-dimensional models of their

design projects using a variety of materials and techniques. Additional emphasis is placed on developing the

student’s ability to conduct significant research and analysis. Students may address projects involving the

renewal of an existing brand and subsequent packaging applications within a coherent marketing program.

This is the last design course that students enroll in before their senior practice. Students should therefore

approach it as a chance to consolidate their overall acquired experience from typography, color theory, visual

identity, communication, editorial and digital skills, while focusing on the practice of design as a clear iterative

work process starting with audience research, ideation and prototyping, and ending with high quality craft and

production.


Understand packaging and environmental design as interdisciplinary design processes that borrow

from different knowledge areas such as human factors and ergonomics, spatial and structural design,

system thinking, material and technology.

Become familiar with various design research techniques and ideation strategies.

Understand how form and space carry meaning, particularly within commercial interactions and

environments, forming an integral part of contemporary branding practices.

Value the relationship between design and user experience, and how design can positively or

negatively affect the user’s interaction with a product/brand/space, and alter their perception of it.

Recognize the responsibility of the designer towards their environment, and the importance of

sustainable thinking when it comes to choice of material and size/type of waste generated.

Represent 3-dimensional design ideas through digital and manual simulations and models.


407

Learning Activities

This is a studio course. It is focused on guided practice, where the instructor makes use of various learning aid

such as class lectures, video screenings, case study analyses, topical readings, and computer (software)

demonstrations, to expand student knowledge, and stimulate critical thinking. As part of their practice, students

are encouraged to explore research as the main driver of ideation in any design process.

Course Outline



Briefing – Project 1: Package your favorite sin

Studio work + Feedback

Week No. 02 Submission – Project 1

Briefing – Project 2: Product packaging redesign


Week No. 03 Studio work + Feedback



Briefing – Project 3: Jewelry package and display





Briefing – Project 4: Seasonal window display (group)




Briefing – Project 5: Signage for the national museum




TBD Portfolio evaluation (including project 05)

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK NO.

SUBM.


1 Project 01 Package your favorite sin 1 2 W6 5 25


408

2 Project 02 Product packaging redesign 2 5 20

3 Project 03 Jewelry package and display 5 9

W11

20

35

4 Project 04 Seasonal window display

(group) 9 11 15

5 Jury

Portfolio evaluation, includes

Project 5: Signage for the

national museum (W11–14)

1 14 W14 40 40

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Packaging the Brand: The Relationship Between Packaging Design and Brand Identity / Gavin Ambrose,

Paul Harris / AVA Publishing

Information Design Research and Practice / Alison Black, Paul Luna, Ole Lund, Sue Walker / Routledge

Information Design Workbook: Graphic approaches, solutions, and inspiration + 30 case studies / Kim

Baer / Rockport Publishers

Exhibition Design: An Introduction / Philip Hughes / Laurence King Publishing

Course Instructor:

Ms. Lara BALAA

Dean of Faculty:

Dr. Ibtihal YOUSSEF

Date: 21 / 06 / 2017


409


Course Name

Course Code / Title: GRAD403/Interactive Design Credits: 3

Instructor: Mr. Salah Al-Shami

Course Hours: 2 Lec, 2 Lab Course Duration: 14 weeks

Academic Semester: Fall 16/17 Semester: Spring

Module Info:

Location: Debbieh Campus

Time: Wed 11-1 Lec/Wed 1-3 Lab

Course Objectives

21. Understand the importance of the interactive designing as a medium of entertainment. 22. Understand the principles of creating an effective animation and mobile applications. 23. Understand and develop the 3 different types of symbols in flash animations. 24. Understand and develop the 2 different types of tweening in flash animations. 25. Understand and develop the 3 different types of layers in flash animations. 26. Be able to embed media content into flash animations, such as music, video, and images. 27. Understand and develop all essential mobile applications using Eclipse Andriod software. 28. Become familiar with graphic design principles that relate to mobile design and learn how to

implement these theories into practice. 29. Develop skills using the App Inventor 2 development software. 30. Develop mobile pages that are designed using the xml page, which defines the layout of the mobile

application. 31. Understand and analyze the usability of a mobile application.

Learning Activities

1. An ability to analyze the local and global impact of designing on individuals, organizations, and society.

2. Recognition of the need for continuing in professional designing.

3. An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools necessary for computing practice. 4. Student will gain a strong knowledge about the techniques for designing flash animations and mobile

applications. 5. Student will be able to develop a working knowledge of Flash, and Android applications as basic

languages for designing interactive programs.

6. Student will be able to work effectively independently in lab exercises and assignments using some

tools such as Flash, Eclipse Android, and App Inventor 2.

7. Student will gain presentation skills by proposing and analyzing their web sites.

Course Outline



410


1 Define flash animations, creating gradients, break apart a text

2 Understanding the flash timeline, creating a frame-by-frame animation, shape tweening

3 Defining symbols in flash, motion tweening, the graphic and button symbols

4 Applying examples using button symbol and movie clip symbols

5 Developing examples using motion guide path and mask layers

6 Understanding the different types for syncing sounds in flash animations, learn how to embed flash animations to web pages

7 Midterm Exam

9 Styling Android applications with several layout methods

10 Midterm 2 (Assignment and Lab assessments)

11 Introduction to a new generation mobile application called AppInventor 2

12 Building interactive mobile applications

13 Building interactive mobile applications (Assignment Submision)

14 Final Exam

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 Midterm Exam Assessment 7 7 30% 30%

2 Individual


Assignment 1 6 8 10%

30% 3

Individual assignments to

assess Assignment 2 10 12 10%

4 Lab Individual work

to assess Assessment 1 12 10%

5 Attendance and

Evaluation in Lecture and Lab

Assessment 12 13 10% 10%

6 Final Exam Assessment 14 14 30% 30%

Total 100% 100%


411

List of References

Course Notes:

1. Powerpoint Lecture Notes 2. Laboratory Sheets


1. HTML5 Digital Classroom, John Wiley & Sons, 2011

2. Adobe Dreamweaver CS6 Digital Classroom, John Wiley & Sons, 2012

Recommended Books:

Course Instructor: Mr. Salah Al-Shami


Date:

Dean of Faculty: Prof. Dr. Ibtehal El-Bastawissi


412

BEIRUT ARAB UNIVERSITY FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE DESIGN PROGRAMS SPRING SEMESTER 2017/2018

GRAPHIC DESIGN PROFESIONAL PRACTICE & ETHICS

Course Code / Title: GRAD404

Instructor: Lamia El-Sayed

Course Outline


Credits: 3

Course Hours: 3


Class lecture: the various disciplines of design + Hand-out

Discussing students portfolios

Week No. 2 Introduction to Offset printing ( CMYK/PANTONE – Coated/Uncoated )

Week No. 3 Field trip to a print house

Week No. 4

Studio work: Working with Pantone

Preparing files for printing: Corporate Stationary

Discussing Specs ( Paper / Finishing..)

Week No. 5 Studio work: Finishing options/Die Cut

Preparing files for printing: Packaging


Week No. 7 Project 01: Presenting Artwork files - ready to print

Class Lecture – Promoting one’s self as a professional

Introducing business forms ( offers, time sheet…) + Reading

Week No. 8 Discussing forms functions ( rights/ethics/duties) + Studio work

Week No. 9 Class Lecture + Reading: Handling a client / project + Reading

Week No. 10 Test + Launching Project 02: Professional Forms



Week No. 12 Project 02 Presented

Launching Project 03: applying for a pitch (design + printing)

Week No. 13 Studio work + feedback



413


GRAD405 PRINT AND PRODUCTION MEDIA

Course Code / Title: GRAD405 Credits:3

Instructor: Ibtissam Rifai


Academic Semester: Major Fall 2016/2017

Module Info: preliminary Level Course (1h Lecture – 2h workshop- assign.)

Location: Debbie


Course Objectives

To provide students with continued study of advanced screen printing techniques and to extend their general knowledge of printmaking processes. Student will be encouraged to explore their artistic vision, personal imagery and content through the use screen printing as a visually expressive medium. This class complements other courses in the printmaking curriculum while integrating it with other forms of artistic practice. Screen printing offers a bridge to other art media including photography, digital imaging and painting. Students are encouraged to incorporate cross disciplinary processes into their creative works. Successful completion of the course includes the presentation of a comprehensive portfolio that represents evidence of breadth in the technical aptitude of process as well as depth in conceptual motivation.

Learning Activities

THIS COURSE WILL BE BASED ON LECTURES, INSTRUCTIVE DEMONSTRATIONS, CLASS DISCUSSIONS, CRITIQUES, FIELDTRIPS AND

INDIVIDUAL CONSULTATIONS. FURTHERMORE, THIS COURSE WILL DEMAND THAT YOU WORK IN THE STUDIO AS WELL AS DO RESEARCH

OUTSIDE THE CLASS.

Course Outline

1- Producing three dimensional photographical images-(Linocut). 2- Creating two dimensional contemporary composition using Arabic letters (Woodcut). 3- Choosing a famous persona and applying it according to pop art techniques. 4- Creating a design utilizing the Bauhaus technique. 5- Creating a book using selected artworks.


Week No. 1 - Reading syllabus, review supply list.

Week No. 2 - lecture - Project 1: Relief prints (Linocuts).

Week No. 3 - Studio workday - Printing processes – black and white.

Week No. 4 - Lecture - Project 2: Relief prints (wood cuts).


414

Week No. 5 - Studio workday - printing with 3 or 4 colors.

Week No. 6 - lecture - Framing projects- discussion.

Week No. 7 - Presentation and grading. - lecture - project 3 :( Silk Screen)

Week No. 8 - Outing 1- (Beirut- Sin el Fil). - Process for printing silk screen.

Week No. 9 - Lecture - Studio workday. - printing with black and white.

Week No. 10 - Outing 2- (Beirut Sin el Fil). - Process for printing silk screen.

Week No. 11 - Studio workday - Printing with many colors. - Research.

Week No. 12 - Presentation and grading. - lecture

Week No. 13

Week No. 14

- Project 4: Mixed media printing. - (digital photo, lino, woodcut, silk screen). - Selecting photos for digital printing. - Studio workday. - Portfolio and presentation.

Evaluation

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 7th week

Assessment Evaluation 6 8

30

60% 2

12th week Assignments

Evaluation 10 12

20

3 Absence &

General evaluation


10

4 15th Week

Exam/ Final Exam 15 15

40 40%

Total 100% 100%


415

List of References

Course Notes:

(a) Students are responsible of their own art material.


Course Instructor:

Ibtissam Rifai




416

Date: Sept. 2017 Dean of Faculty:



417


GRAD222.DIGITAL MIXED MEDIA

Course Code / Title: Grad 222 Credits:3

Instructor: Ibtissam Rifai


Academic Semester: Elective Spring 2016/2017

Module Info: preliminary Level Course (2h lab – 2h workshop- assign.)

Location: Debbie

Time: Monday 11:00-03:00

Course Objectives

After successful completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate/perform the following competencies;

- Communicate ideas through artworks by selecting and applying media techniques and processes, subject matter and themes.

- Demonstrate a verbal-working use of the art vocabulary relating to the arts.

- Communicate ideas through artworks by selecting and applying the elements of art and principles of design.

- Respond aesthetically to artworks based upon their personal experience and cultural values.

- Analyze, interpret, and evaluate the quality of artwork through art criticism.

- Understand the role and functions of art in history and culture.

- Students will produce a portfolio of art using a variety of techniques, styles and media.

Learning Activities

THIS COURSE WILL BE BASED ON LAB, INSTRUCTIVE DEMONSTRATIONS, CLASS DISCUSSIONS, CRITIQUES, FIELDTRIPS AND INDIVIDUAL

CONSULTATIONS. FURTHERMORE, THIS COURSE WILL DEMAND THAT YOU WORK IN THE STUDIO AS WELL AS DO RESEARCH OUTSIDE THE

CLASS.

Course Outline

1- Producing a two dimensional image from the orientalist period, and using it as a digital print. 2- Reproducing three images by using the character in the painting to produce several digital pictures. 3- Choosing a picture from the pharaonic civilization, and reproduce it to a new version. 4- Creating a play card design by using character to produce a digital picture.


Week No. 1 Reading syllabus, review supply list.

Week No. 2 - Lab workday. - Project 1: Orientalism (digital prints).


418

- Project 2: Reproduce characters from orientalist.

Week No. 3 - Lab work: choosing three images to produce several digital pictures. - Studio work: Transfer – Mixing many kinds of colors.

Week No. 4 - Lab work: Supplement to the project2. - Studio work: Follow up on the first project.

Week No. 5 - Studio workday - Printing the three reproduced images.

Week No. 6 - Studio workday.

Week No. 7 - Presentation and grading. - Project 3: Pharaohs.

Week No. 8 - Lab work day. - Gilding and aging.


Week No. 10 - Studio workday. - Making the special dough for paintings.


Week No. 12 - Presentation and grading. - Project 4: Reproducing character on Playing Card.

Week No. 13 - Lab work: Selecting photos for digital printing.

Week No. 14 - Studio workday. - Portfolio and presentation.

Evaluation

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 7th week

Assessment Evaluation 6 8

30

70% 2

12th week Assignments

Evaluation 9 12

30

3 Absence &

General evaluation


10

4 15th Week

/Jury Final Exams 15 15

30 30%

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course Notes:

(a) Students are responsible of their own art material.



419

Course Instructor:

Ibtissam Rifai



Date: Feb. 2017 Dean of Faculty:



420


ARABIC TYPOGRAPHY

Course Code / Title: GRAD224

Instructor: Lamia El-Sayed

Course Outline


Credits: 3

Course Hours: 3


Class lecture + Reading: The development of Islamic Arts

Week No. 2 Launching Project 01: Dissecting Type

Studio work + feedback


Test 01


Week No. 5 Studio work +feedback

Week No. 6 Studio work +feedback

Week No. 7 Project 01: Presentation

Studio work + feedback

Week No. 8 Launching Project 02: Words/Letters: a meaningful combination




Week No. 12 Project 02: Presentation

Launching Project 03: City Type




421

Fashion Design Program Course Summary







Miss Roua Ghosh





10:00 to 13:50







11. Projection skills and Architectural drafting. 12. How to draw and understand orthographic projections.


422

13. Express intellectual meanings through artwork. 14. Learning how to express art through poster design and portfolio making 15. Mastering Physical Paper models as a of design development for both exploration and





STAGE



















Course Policies



423






Course Policies:






Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.



professional skills

1 3 22/09/2017 05.0%

60%



3 5 06/10/2017 05.0%



5 7 20/10/2017 05.0%



7 7 20/10/2017 10.0%



professional skills

7 9 03/11/2017 07.5%

5 Model making


qualities

9 11 17/12/2017 07.5%

6



professional skills

11 13 08/12/2017 07.5%



professional skills

13 14 15/12/2017 12.5%

8 Final Exam


15 15 As Scheduled 40.0% 40%


424

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.


Total 100%


(g) Course notes:

Lectures' handouts.

(h) Essential Books: 1. Ching, F.D.K, (2007). Architecture: Form, Space, and Order., John Wiley & Sons.



(i) Recommended Books:



425

BEIRUT ARAB UNIVERSITY FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE DESIGN AND BUILT ENVIRONMENT DESIGN PROGRAMS SPRING SEMESTER 2016/2017

ARTD203. PHOTOGRAPHY

Course Code / Title: ARTD 203 Credits: 3



Academic Semester: Faculty Elective Fall 2017/2018

Module Info: preliminary Level Course (4hr. Lecture – workshop- assign.)

Location: Debbieh


Course Objectives

The objective of this course is to first provide a fundamental understanding of visual and technical skills necessary to pursue and value photography as a Graphic Design and Interior Design component It is also assumed that they can picturing their actions work personally. Cultural development and how to create and document the work of art through the photo.

Learning Activities


Course Outline

The course discusses the fundamental principles of photography starting with a brief historical context, camera’s components and elements, camera controls (shutter, speed, ISO, light meter) and processes, lights and exposure, variety of lens and equipments, aperture and depth of field and focus, framing ( rule of thirds , golden points). As a result, assignments and project and practices are going to take place in order to maintain, develop and widen Graphic Design and Interior Design photography.


1 - Kinds of Camera - Camera elements and Controls

2 - Types and uses of lenses - Aperture and depth of field - The filters


4 - Practical photo shooting (about aperture and depth of field) - Workshop in BAU campus

5 - Corrections of practical photo shoots


426


- 1st project



8 - The landscape photography - Studio lighting & research

9 - The Interior Design Photography - Fashion and Mode Photography

10 - Portraits & models workshop (at campus) - 2nd Project

11 - Correction 2nd project - Correction workshop of portraits


13 - Editing photos - Selecting photos for enlarging - Photography copyrights laws

14 - Digital Photography - Introduction to photography – Brief historical context - Review the sessions

Evaluation

SSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 7th week

Assessment Project 5 7

30

70% 2 12th week

Assignments Project 10 12

30

3 Absence & Evaluation


10

4 14th Week

Exam/ Mastering photography 1 14

30 30

Total 100% 100%

List of References

Course Notes:

(a) Students are responsible their own camera



427

Course Instructor:

Saleh Rifai



Date: July 9, 2017

Dean of Faculty:

Prof. Dr. Ibtihal El-Bastawissi


428









Time: --

Course Objectives













modern culture.






Learning Activities






429

Course Outline








6 1st Exam




10 2nd Exam






430

Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO.

SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1




3 6 10

30%

2 7th Week



3




8 11 10

30% 4 12th Week



5




13 16 10

6 Final exam 40%

Total 100% 100%

List of References









Date: 20 / 6 / 2017



431


BASIC INFORMATION














432

(qqq) Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

(qqq 1) - Understand the nature and operations of CAD Drawing. (rrr) Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

(rrr 1) - Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the CAD

Drawing;

(rrr 2) - Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to CAD Drawing;

(rrr 3) - Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to

CAD Drawing;

(rrr 4) - Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the CAD Drawing sector and debate


(sss) Through professional and practical skills, students will be able to: (sss 1) - Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to

CAD Drawing.

(ttt) Through general and transferable skills, students will be able to: (ttt 1) - Solve problems relevant to CAD Drawing using ideas and techniques some of which are at the


(ttt 2) - Develop the ability to self appraise and reflect on practice relevant to CAD Drawing.

37- COURSE OUTLINE:

















433





ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK


1 2D



35%

2




8 8 15%

35 % 3 2D & 3D






15 15 30%

Total Total 100%


(eeeee) Course notes:

a. AutoCAD Help.

(fffff) Essential books (textbooks): i. Alan J., Lang K., Autocad 2011 Tutor For Engineering Graphics, Autodesk Pess, NY,2011.

(ggggg) Recommended books:

Finkelstein E., AutoCAD 2010 & AutoCAD LT 2010 : Bible, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009. (hhhhh) General References:



434


BASIC INFORMATION




















435










4- COURSE CONTENT:










Oral Communication






Critical Thinking







436

Mathematics


between objects.




drawings.


Other



submitted drawings.

6- COURSE SCHEDULE:

1st





















437
























438


Course Policies











Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.



1 1 31/8/2016

60%



professional skills

2 2 7/9/2016



3 3 21/9/2016



professional skills

4 4 28/9/2016



professional skills

5 5 5/10/2016

6 Curtain Walls (curtain grids,


6 6 12/10/2016


439

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

mullions, and panels)

qualities



professional skills

7 7 19/10/2016



professional skills

8 8 26/10/2016



professional skills

9 9 2/11/2016



10 10 9/11/2016



professional skills

11 11 16/11/2016



professional skills

12 12 23/11/2016



professional skills

13 13 30/11/2016



professional skills

14 14 7/12/2016

15 Final Exam -Oral

Examination-


skills


Total 100%


Course Notes:


Sheets

Projects Briefs



Recommended Books:



440


FASD 202

Course Code / Title: FASD202 Fashion Design Studio I Credits: 4

Instructors: Ms. Jana Halwani

Dr. Sana Abbasi

Course Hours: 8 Course Duration: M, W 4 hours each

Academic Semester: Spring 2017 Semester: Second

Module Info:

Location: Architecture Bld, Debbieh campus

Time: M, W 8:00 A.M-12:00 P.M


1

Reading and explaining syllabus, rules of the university Introduction to the Fashion Design Sources of Inspirations Understanding Design Process The differences between Haute Couture and Ready-to-Wear Markets Themes of Designers for Spring/Summer 2017 Collections Assignment#2 Skirt Deconstruction

2

Project#1 Mood Board and Collection Board Explanation of different kinds of pockets Explanation of technical drawings Drawing of axes and plumb lines on normal bodies (pictures)

3 Fashion Cycle Talk about Warp and weft, selvage and bias of fabric Skirt draping, explain seams, darts,hem and rectification values

4

Fashion theories Collection board explanation Assignment#1 bring samples of the 3 theories in fashion Explanation of technical file (technical drawing, sewing plan, signs, finishing study, pattern naming)

5 Explanation of different collars and sleeves Explanation of different textiles and weaves(twill, plain and satin weave) Different fibres(natural, animal and synthetic) and how to tell the difference by burning

6 Project#3 deconstruction and reconstruction

7 Mid-term Exam written Project#2 Label

8 Discuss target markets Introducing cost sheets Talk about proffessions

9 Brief history through the ages Various sleeves explanation Assignment#4 Different shirt cuts: strap seam cut, princess, gathering, flares on models with


441


technical drawings.

10

Re-explanation technical file(finishing study, naming table, mounting table, signs, technical description) Color code explanation Difference between fashion and trend

11 Assignment#5 overall and placed print Overall view on plackets Assignment#6 favorite designer

12 12th week exam oral

13 Work on final exam



442


FASD-204

Course Code / Title: FASD-204 Credits: 3


Course Hours: 4 Course Duration: Thursday 4 hours

Academic Semester: Spring 2017 Semester: Second

Module Info:


Time: Thursday 8:00 A.M-12:00 P.M


1

Reading and explaining syllabus, rules of the university Introduction to the pattern making process The differences between Haute Couture and Ready-to-Wear garments Assignment#3 pleats

2 Assignment#1Explanation of patch pocket study piece.

3 Assignmet#2 flared skirts on mini pattern. Sewing on straight lines, curves and stairs. Base skirt flat pattern

4 Assignmet#3 open seams, closed seams, overlock, topstitch, hem, zipper and their signs. Project#1 imposed skirt + technical file.

5 Bodice base flat pattern

6 Assignment#5 circle skirts and paneled skirts on mini pattern Assignment#4 Strap seam cut, princess cut, gathering, flares and dart manipulation on mini pattern.

7 Mid-term Exam written

8 Project#2 Imposed shirt

9 Work on Project#2 Imposed shirt

10 Project#3 imposed dress

11 Project#3 imposed dress

12 12th week exam written




443


FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE –DESIGN & BUILT ENVIRONMENT – FASHION DESIGN PROGRAM SPRING SEMESTER 2017/2018, STAGE ONE

FASD 208. comp. aided draf. for fashion design

Course Code / Title: Fasd 208. Comp. Aided Draf. For fashion Design Credits: 3

Instructors: Dr. Samer El Sayary

Course Hours: 5 Hours/Week Course Duration: 15 Weeks Academic Semester: 1st Semester: Fall 2017/2018


Location: Computer Lab. – Floor 1

Time: Wednesday 12:00 to 15:50


The course aims to provide students with the specialist knowledge necessary for fashion design carrier in Computer graphics field. Applications for Fashion design rendering and the creation, modification, and manipulation of images. Fashion Illustration for the conceptual phases of design. flat rendering and photo-editing using different modeling technique. Emphasis on Illustration, texture mapping, lighting, shading, photo-realistic rendering, and Photo retouching. The course aims to provide the students with state of the art knowledge regarding Computer Graphics software’s. Special focus is given to 2D and 3D rendering using the lasted versions of Adobe Illustrator and Adobe Photoshop. Within this overall aim, the course strives to enable students to: Understand the use of the different tools used in Computer Graphics software’s. Learn the basic functions of Adobe Illustrator and Adobe Photoshop software’s. Use the basic manual tools traditionally used in drawings representation. Maintain a high standard of quality for drawings representation. Understand the representation of three-dimensional objects presented on a two-dimensional plan. Create drawings of basic objects in a flat packing on 2D rendering. Intended Learning Outcomes Through knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:

Understand the nature and operation of Computer Graphics. Through intellectual skills, students will be able to:

Recognize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant to the Fashion Computer Graphics.

Analyze and interpret information from a variety of sources relevant to Fashion Computer Graphics.

Develop a reasoned argument to the solution of familiar and unfamiliar problems relevant to Fashion Computer Graphics.

Appraise some of the current and emerging issues within the Fashion Computer Graphics sector and debate the potential benefits.



444

Plan, design and execute practical activities using techniques and procedures appropriate to Fashion Computer Graphics.


Solve problems relevant to Fashion Computer Graphics using ideas and techniques some of which are at the forefront of the discipline.

Develop the ability to self-appraise and reflect on practice relevant to Fashion Computer Graphics.


STAGE



1 User Interface Basics (Photoshop & Adobe Illustrator) 1/02/2017

2 Fashion design using Photoshop Rendering 8/02/2017

3 Advanced Fashion Rendering 15/02/2017

4 Pen tool 1 (Adobe Illustrator) 22/02/2017

5 Pen tool 2 (Adobe Illustrator) 01/03/2017

6 Exporting from Adobe Illustrator to Adobe Photoshop. 08/03/2017

7 Midterm Exam 15/03/2017

8 3D modelling of Garments 22/03/2017

9 Spring Easter Vacation 29/03/2017

10 Adobe Illustrator Rendering 05/04/2017

11 Project Review 12/04/2017

12 Exam (Final Project Submission) 26/04/2017

13 Final Layout Portfolio Design 03/05/2017

14 Photoshop (Retouching 3d Images) 10/05/2017



Course Policies





The lecture starts Wednesday from 12:00 to 12:50 and the studio work starts from 12:50 to 15:50 Course Policies:


445






Evaluation

ASSES

NO. TYPE TO ASSESS

START

WEEK

NO.

SUBM. WEEK

NO. SUBM. DATE

WEIGHTING OF

ASSES.

1 User Interface Basics (Photoshop & Adobe Illustrator)


professional skills

1 3 22/09/2017 05.0%

60%

2 Fashion design using Photoshop Rendering


professional skills

3 5 06/10/2017 05.0%

2 Pen tool (Adobe Illustrator)


professional skills

5 7 20/10/2017 05.0%



7 7 20/10/2017 10.0%

4 3D modelling of Garments


professional skills

7 9 03/11/2017 07.5%

5 Adobe Illustrator Rendering


qualities

9 11 17/12/2017 07.5%

6 Photoshop (Retouching 3d Images)


professional skills

11 13 08/12/2017 07.5%



professional skills

13 14 15/12/2017 12.5%

8 Final Exam


skills

15 15 As Scheduled 40.0% 40%

Total 100%


Course notes:

Lectures' handouts.



446

(iiiii) Essential Books (Textbooks):

Fashion and Textile Design with Photoshop and Illustrator : Professional Creative Practice / Robert Hume. — New York : Bloomsbury, 2016. — 256 pages: color illustrations ; ; 27 cm. — (Required Reading Range). Includes index. — ISBN 9781472578754

CAD for fashion design and merchandising; Stacy Stewart Smith. – Fashion Institute of Technology, Newyork, 2013. Includes index. — ISBN 978-60901-063-8


447


FASD 301

Course Code / Title: Fashion Design Studio II Credits: 4


Course Hours: 8 Course Duration:


Module Info:


Time:


1

Reminder source of inspiration mood board/ target group/ muse/textile/warp and weft/ selvage/ bias Start 1st project jacket close to the body with sleeves (3 total looks)/ choose muse and source of inspiration/ target group/ get fabric samples for jacket

2 Pants base acetate/ start personal universe

3 Work on 1st project designs/ choose jacket and get fabric Technical drawings on illustrator

4 Correction of jacket pattern+ cut jacket

5 Sew jacket

6 Delivery 1st project/ Start 2nd project geometric volumes/ research geometric Volumes (6 total looks)/ choose muse and source of inspiration/ target group

7 Work on 2nd project designs/ choose item and get rigid fabric samples Technical drawings on illustrator

8 Star exploring the design on bust

9 Design patterns+ cut design

10 Technical file + finish sewing

11 Delivery 2nd project/ Star final Personal theme (10 total looks) )/ choose muse and source of inspiration/ target group

12 Work on final project designs/ choose item and get fabric samples Technical drawings on illustrator

13 Choose design and start exploring the design on bust/ patterns

14 Sew design Delivery final project


448


FASD 307

Course Code / Title: Draping I Credits: 3


Course Hours: 4 Course Duration:


Module Info:


Time:


1 Draping the body shape and more understanding the darts/ research on different details and choose strong ideas

2 Draping jacket + sleeves and collar

3 Draping jacket + sleeves and collar/ Research big collars sand sleeves

4 Draping big collar and sleeves

5 Draping big collar and sleeves

6 Delivery 1st project/ get muslin

7 Circular and geometrical cuts, to start big volumes

8 Design draping

9 Design draping

10 Sew design

11 Delivery 2nd project Start pants imposed pattern with detail ( drape, cuts...)

12 Sew pants

13 Draping design

14 Sew design Delivery final project